HD6435348RCP [HITACHI]
Single-Chip Microcomputer; 单片机
| 型号： | HD6435348RCP |
| 厂家： | 
HITACHI SEMICONDUCTOR |
| 描述： | Single-Chip Microcomputer |
| 文件： | 总487页 (文件大小：1351K) |
| 中文： | 中文翻译 | 下载： | 下载PDF数据表文档文件 |
OMC 932723248
Hitachi Single-Chip Microcomputer
H8/534, H8/536
HD6475348R, HD6435348R
HD6475368R, HD6435368R
HD6475348S, HD6435348S
HD6475368S, HD6435368S
Hardware Manual
ADE-602-038B
Preface
The H8/534 and H8/536 are high-performance single-chip Hitachi-original microcomputers,
featuring a high-speed CPU with 16-bit internal data paths and a full complement of on-chip
supporting modules. They are ideal microcontrollers for a wide variety of medium-scale devices,
including both office and industrial equipment and consumer products.
The CPU has a general-register architecture. Its instruction set is highly orthogonal and is
optimized for fast execution of programs coded in the high-level C language. For further speed,
the existing 10-MHz lineup has been extended to include high-speed versions that operate at
16 MHz. Low-voltage versions that operate at 3 V and 2.7 V have also been developed.
On-chip facilities include large RAM and ROM memories, numerous timers, serial I/O, an A/D
converter, I/O ports, and other functions for compact implementation of high-performance
application systems.
H8/534 and H8/536 are available in both a ZTAT version* with on-chip PROM, ideal for the
early stages of production or for products with frequently-changing specifications, and a masked-
ROM version suitable for volume production.
This manual gives a hardware description of the H8/534 and H8/536. For details of the instruction
set, refer to the H8/500 Series Programming Manual, which applies to all chips in the H8/500
Series.
* ZTAT (Zero Turn-Around Time) is a trademark of Hitachi, Ltd.
2
Contents
Section 1 Overview
1.1 Features ··································································································································1
1.2 Block Diagram ·······················································································································5
1.3 Pin Arrangements and Functions ···························································································6
1.3.1 Pin Arrangement ·········································································································6
1.3.2 Pin Functions ··············································································································9
Section 2 MCU Operating Modes and Address Space
2.1 Overview ······························································································································23
2.2 Mode Descriptions ···············································································································24
2.3 Address Space Map ··············································································································25
2.3.1 Page Segmentation ····································································································25
2.3.2 Page 0 Address Allocations ······················································································26
2.4 Mode Control Register (MDCR) ·························································································27
Section 3 CPU
3.1 Overview ······························································································································31
3.1.1 Features ·····················································································································31
3.1.2 Address Space ···········································································································32
3.1.3 Register Configuration ······························································································33
3.2 CPU Register Descriptions ··································································································34
3.2.1 General Registers ······································································································34
3.2.2 Control Registers ······································································································35
3.2.3 Initial Register Values ·······························································································40
3.3 Data Formats ························································································································41
3.3.1 Data Formats in General Registers ···········································································41
3.3.2 Data Formats in Memory ··························································································42
3.4 Instructions ···························································································································44
3.4.1 Basic Instruction Formats ·························································································44
3.4.2 Addressing Modes ····································································································45
3.4.3 Effective Address Calculation ··················································································47
3.5 Instruction Set ······················································································································50
3.5.1 Overview ···················································································································50
3.5.2 Data Transfer Instructions ·························································································52
3.5.3 Arithmetic Instructions ·····························································································53
3.5.4 Logic Operations ·······································································································54
3.5.5 Shift Operations ········································································································55
3.5.6 Bit Manipulations ······································································································56
3.5.7 Branching Instructions ······························································································57
3.5.8 System Control Instructions ······················································································59
3.5.9 Short-Format Instructions ·························································································62
3.6 Operating Modes ··················································································································62
3.6.1 Minimum Mode ········································································································62
3.6.2 Maximum Mode ········································································································63
3.7 Basic Operational Timing ····································································································63
3.7.1 Overview ···················································································································63
3.7.2 On-Chip Memory Access Cycle ···············································································64
3.7.3 Pin States during On-Chip Memory Access ·····························································65
3.7.4 Register Field Access Cycle (Addresses H'FE80 to H'FFFF) ··································66
3.7.5 Pin States during Register Field Access (Addresses H'FE80 to H'FFFF) ················67
3.7.6 External Access Cycle ······························································································ 68
3.8 CPU States ···························································································································69
3.8.1 Overview ···················································································································69
3.8.2 Program Execution State ···························································································71
3.8.3 Exception-Handling State ·························································································71
3.8.4 Bus-Released State ····································································································72
3.8.5 Reset State ·················································································································77
3.8.6 Power-Down State ····································································································77
3.9 Programming Notes ·············································································································78
3.9.1 Restriction on Address Location ···············································································78
Section 4 Exception Handling
4.1 Overview ······························································································································79
4.1.1 Types of Exception Handling and Their Priority ······················································79
4.1.2 Hardware Exception-Handling Sequence ·································································80
4.1.3 Exception Factors and Vector Table ·········································································80
4.2 Reset ····································································································································83
4.2.1 Overview ···················································································································83
4.2.2 Reset Sequence ·········································································································83
4.2.3 Stack Pointer Initialization ························································································84
4.3 Address Error ·······················································································································87
4.3.1 Illegal Instruction Prefetch ························································································87
4.3.2 Word Data Access at Odd Address ···········································································87
4.3.3 Off-Chip Address Access in Single-Chip Mode ·······················································87
4.4 Trace ····································································································································88
4.5 Interrupts ······························································································································88
4.6 Invalid Instruction ················································································································91
4.7 Trap Instructions and Zero Divide ·······················································································91
4.8 Cases in Which Exception Handling is Deferred ·································································91
4.8.1 Instructions that Disable Interrupts ···········································································91
4.8.2 Disabling of Exceptions Immediately after a Reset ··················································92
4.8.3 Disabling of Interrupts after a Data Transfer Cycle ··················································92
4.9 Stack Status after Completion of Exception Handling ························································93
4.9.1 PC Value Pushed on Stack for Trace,
Interrupts, Trap Instructions, and Zero Divide Exceptions ·······································95
4.9.2 PC Value Pushed on Stack for Address Error and Invalid
Instruction Exceptions ······························································································95
4.10 Notes on Use of the Stack ····································································································95
Section 5 Interrupt Controller
5.1 Overview ······························································································································97
5.1.1 Features ·····················································································································97
5.1.2 Block Diagram ··········································································································98
5.1.3 Register Configuration ······························································································99
5.2 Interrupt Types ·····················································································································99
5.2.1 External Interrupts ····································································································99
5.2.2 Internal Interrupts ····································································································101
5.2.3 Interrupt Vector Table ·····························································································102
5.3 Register Descriptions ·········································································································104
5.3.1 Interrupt Priority Registers A to F (IPRA to IPRF) ················································104
5.3.2 Timing of Priority Setting ·······················································································105
5.4 Interrupt Handling Sequence ·····························································································105
5.4.1 Interrupt Handling Flow ·························································································105
5.4.2 Stack Status after Interrupt Handling Sequence ·····················································108
5.4.3 Timing of Interrupt Exception-Handling Sequence ················································109
5.5 Interrupts During Operation of the Data Transfer Controller ············································109
5.6 Interrupt Response Time ····································································································112
Section 6 Data Transfer Controller
6.1 Overview ····························································································································113
6.1.1 Features ···················································································································113
6.1.2 Block Diagram ········································································································113
6.1.3 Register Configuration ····························································································114
6.2 Register Descriptions ·········································································································115
6.2.1 Data Transfer Mode Register (DTMR) ···································································115
6.2.2 Data Transfer Source Address Register (DTSR) ····················································116
6.2.3 Data Transfer Destination Register (DTDR) ·························································116
6.2.4 Data Transfer Count Register (DTCR) ···································································116
6.2.5 Data Transfer Enable Registers A to F (DTEA to DTEF) ······································117
6.3 Data Transfer Operation ·····································································································118
6.3.1 Data Transfer Cycle ································································································118
6.3.2 DTC Vector Table ···································································································120
6.3.3 Location of Register Information in Memory ·························································122
6.3.4 Length of Data Transfer Cycle ················································································122
6.4 Procedure for Using the DTC ····························································································124
6.5 Example ·····························································································································125
Section 7 Wait-State Controller
7.1 Overview ····························································································································127
7.1.1 Features ···················································································································127
7.1.2 Block Diagram ········································································································128
7.1.3 Register Configuration ····························································································128
7.2 Wait-State Control Register ·······························································································129
7.3 Operation in Each Wait Mode ····························································································130
7.3.1 Programmable Wait Mode ······················································································130
7.3.2 Pin Wait Mode ········································································································131
7.3.3 Pin Auto-Wait Mode ·······························································································133
Section 8 Clock Pulse Generator
8.1 Overview ····························································································································135
8.1.1 Block Diagram ········································································································135
8.2 Oscillator Circuit ················································································································135
8.3 System Clock Divider ········································································································139
Section 9 I/O Ports
9.1 Overview ····························································································································141
9.2 Port 1 ··································································································································144
9.2.1 Overview ·················································································································144
9.2.2 Port 1 Registers ·······································································································144
9.2.3 Pin Functions in Each Mode ···················································································147
9.3 Port 2 ··································································································································150
9.3.1 Overview ·················································································································150
9.3.2 Port 2 Registers ·······································································································151
9.3.3 Pin Functions in Each Mode ···················································································152
9.4 Port 3 ··································································································································153
9.4.1 Overview ·················································································································153
9.4.2 Port 3 Registers ·······································································································154
9.4.3 Pin Functions in Each Mode ···················································································155
9.5 Port 4 ··································································································································156
9.5.1 Overview ·················································································································156
9.5.2 Port 4 Registers ·······································································································157
9.5.3 Pin Functions in Each Mode ···················································································158
9.6 Port 5 ··································································································································159
9.6.1 Overview ·················································································································159
9.6.2 Port 5 Registers ·······································································································160
9.6.3 Pin Functions in Each Mode ···················································································161
9.6.4 Built-In MOS Pull-Up ·····························································································163
9.7 Port 6 ··································································································································165
9.7.1 Overview ·················································································································165
9.7.2 Port 6 Registers ·······································································································166
9.7.3 Pin Functions in Each Mode ···················································································170
9.7.4 Built-In MOS Pull-Up ·····························································································172
9.8 Port 7 ··································································································································173
9.8.1 Overview ·················································································································173
9.8.2 Port 7 Registers ·······································································································173
9.8.3 Pin Functions ··········································································································174
9.9 Port 8 ··································································································································177
9.9.1 Overview ·················································································································177
9.9.2 Port 8 Registers ·······································································································177
9.10 Port 9 ··································································································································178
9.10.1 Overview ·················································································································178
9.10.2 Port 9 Registers ·······································································································178
9.10.3 Pin Functions ··········································································································179
Section 10 16-Bit Free-Running Timers
10.1 Overview ····························································································································183
10.1.1 Features ···················································································································183
10.1.2 Block Diagram ········································································································184
10.1.3 Input and Output Pins ·····························································································185
10.1.4 Register Configuration ····························································································186
10.2 Register Descriptions ·········································································································187
10.2.1 Free-Running Counter (FRC)—H'FE92, H'FEA2, H'FEB2 ···································187
10.2.2 Output Compare Registers A and B (OCRA and OCRB)—H'FE94
and H'FE96, H'FEA4 and H'FEA6, H'FEB4 and H'FEB6 ······································188
10.2.3 Input Capture Register (ICR)—H'FE98, H'FEA8, H'FEB8 ···································188
10.2.4 Timer Control Register (TCR) ················································································189
10.2.5 Timer Control/Status Register (TCSR) ···································································191
10.3 CPU Interface ·····················································································································194
10.4 Operation ····························································································································196
10.4.1 FRC Incrementation Timing ···················································································196
10.4.2 Output Compare Timing ·························································································197
10.4.3 Input Capture Timing ······························································································199
10.4.4 Setting of FRC Overflow Flag (OVF) ····································································201
10.5 CPU Interrupts and DTC Interrupts ···················································································201
10.6 Synchronization of Free-Running Timers 1 to 3 ································································202
10.6.1 Synchronization after a Reset ·················································································202
10.6.2 Synchronization by Writing to FRCs ······································································202
10.7 Sample Application ············································································································206
10.8 Application Notes ··············································································································206
Section 11 8-Bit Timer
11.1 Overview ····························································································································213
11.1.1 Features ···················································································································213
11.1.2 Block Diagram ········································································································214
11.1.3 Input and Output Pins ·····························································································215
11.1.4 Register Configuration ····························································································215
11.2 Register Descriptions ·········································································································215
11.2.1 Timer Counter (TCNT)—H'FED4 ··········································································215
11.2.2 Time Constant Registers A and B
(TCORA and TCORB)—H'FED2 and H'FED3 ·····················································216
11.2.3 Timer Control Register (TCR)—H'FED0 ·······························································216
11.2.4 Timer Control/Status Register (TCSR)—H'FED1 ··················································218
11.3 Operation ····························································································································220
11.3.1 TCNT Incrementation Timing ················································································220
11.3.2 Compare Match Timing ··························································································221
11.3.3 External Reset of TCNT ·························································································223
11.3.4 Setting of TCNT Overflow Flag ·············································································224
11.4 CPU Interrupts and DTC Interrupts ···················································································224
11.5 Sample Application ············································································································225
11.6 Application Notes ··············································································································226
Section 12 PWM Timer
12.1 Overview ····························································································································233
12.1.1 Features ···················································································································233
12.1.2 Block Diagram ········································································································233
12.1.3 Input and Output Pins ·····························································································234
12.1.4 Register Configuration ····························································································235
12.2 Register Descriptions ·········································································································235
12.2.1 Timer Counter (TCNT)—H'FEC2, H'FEC4, H'FECA ···········································235
12.2.2 Duty Register (DTR)—H'FEC1, H'FEC5, H'FEC9 ················································236
12.2.3 Timer Control Register (TCR)—H'FEC0, H'FEC4, H'FEC8 ·································236
12.3 Operation ····························································································································238
12.4 Application Notes ··············································································································240
Section 13 Watchdog Timer
13.1 Overview ····························································································································241
13.1.1 Features ···················································································································241
13.1.2 Block Diagram ········································································································242
13.1.3 Register Configuration ····························································································242
13.2 Register Descriptions ·········································································································243
13.2.1 Timer Counter TCNT—H'FEEC (Write), H'FEED (Read) ····································243
13.2.2 Timer Control/Status Register (TCSR)—H'FEEC ·················································243
13.2.3 Reset Control/Status Register (RSTCSR)—H'FF14 (Write), H'FF15 (Read) ········245
13.2.4 Notes on Register Access ························································································246
13.3 Operation ····························································································································248
13.3.1 Watchdog Timer Mode ···························································································248
13.3.2 Interval Timer Mode ·······························································································249
13.3.3 Operation in Software Standby Mode ·····································································250
13.3.4 Setting of Overflow Flag ························································································250
13.3.5 Setting of Watchdog Timer Reset (WRST) Bit ·······················································251
13.4 Application Notes ··············································································································252
Section 14 Serial Communication Interface
14.1 Overview ····························································································································255
14.1.1 Features ···················································································································255
14.1.2 Block Diagram ········································································································256
14.1.3 Input and Output Pins ·····························································································257
14.1.4 Register Configuration ····························································································257
14.2 Register Descriptions ·········································································································258
14.2.1 Receive Shift Register (RSR) ·················································································258
14.2.2 Receive Data Register (RDR)—H'FEDD, H'FEF5 ················································258
14.2.3 Transmit Shift Register (TSR) ················································································258
14.2.4 Transmit Data Register (TDR)—H'FEDB, H'FEF3 ···············································259
14.2.5 Serial Mode Register (SMR)—H'FED8, H'FEF0 ···················································259
14.2.6 Serial Control Register (SCR)—H'FEDA, H'FEF2 ················································261
14.2.7 Serial Status Register (SSR)—H'FEDC, H'FEF4 ···················································263
14.2.8 Bit Rate Register (BRR)—H'FED9, H'FEF1 ··························································265
14.3 Operation ····························································································································270
14.3.1 Overview ·················································································································270
14.3.2 Asynchronous Mode ·······························································································271
14.3.3 Synchronous Mode ·································································································275
14.4 CPU Interrupts and DTC Interrupts ···················································································279
14.5 Application Notes ··············································································································280
Section 15 A/D Converter
15.1 Overview ····························································································································283
15.1.1 Features ···················································································································283
15.1.2 Block Diagram ········································································································284
15.1.3 Input Pins ················································································································285
15.1.4 Register Configuration ····························································································285
15.2 Register Descriptions ·········································································································286
15.2.1 A/D Data Registers (ADDR)—H'FEE0 to H'FEE7 ················································286
15.2.2 A/D Control/Status Register (ADCSR)—H'FEE8 ·················································287
15.2.3 A/D Control Register (ADCR)—H'FEE9 ·······························································289
15.3 CPU Interface ·····················································································································290
15.4 Operation ····························································································································291
15.4.1 Single Mode (SCAN = 0) ·······················································································291
15.4.2 Scan Mode (SCAN = 1) ··························································································294
15.4.3 Input Sampling Time and A/D Conversion Time ···················································296
15.4.4 External Triggering of A/D Conversion ·································································297
15.5 Interrupts and the Data Transfer Controller ·······································································298
Section 16 RAM
16.1 Overview ····························································································································299
16.1.1 Block Diagram ········································································································299
16.1.2 Register Configuration ····························································································300
16.2 RAM Control Register (RAMCR) ·····················································································300
16.3 Operation ····························································································································300
16.3.1 Expanded Modes (Modes 1, 2, 3, and 4) ································································300
16.3.2 Single-Chip Mode (Mode 7) ···················································································301
Section 17 ROM
17.1 Overview ····························································································································303
17.1.1 Block Diagram ········································································································303
17.2 PROM Mode ······················································································································304
17.2.1 PROM Mode Setup ·································································································304
17.2.2 Socket Adapter Pin Arrangements and Memory Map ············································305
17.3 H8/534 Programming ·········································································································308
17.3.1 Writing and Verifying ·····························································································308
17.3.2 Notes on Writing ·····································································································311
17.4 H8/536 Programming ·········································································································312
17.4.1 Writing and Verifying ·····························································································312
17.4.2 Notes on Programming ···························································································315
17.5 Reliability of Written Data ·································································································317
17.6 Erasing of Data ···················································································································318
17.7 Handling of Windowed Packages ······················································································319
Section 18 Power-Down State
18.1 Overview ····························································································································321
18.2 Sleep Mode ························································································································322
18.2.1 Transition to Sleep Mode ························································································322
18.2.2 Exit from Sleep Mode ·····························································································322
18.3 Software Standby Mode ·····································································································322
18.3.1 Transition to Software Standby Mode ····································································322
18.3.2 Software Standby Control Register (SBYCR) ························································323
18.3.3 Exit from Software Standby Mode ·········································································324
18.3.4 Sample Application of Software Standby Mode ····················································324
18.3.5 Application Notes ···································································································325
18.4 Hardware Standby Mode ···································································································325
18.4.1 Transition to Hardware Standby Mode ···································································325
18.4.2 Recovery from Hardware Standby Mode ·······························································326
18.4.3 Timing Sequence of Hardware Standby Mode ·······················································326
Section 19 E Clock Interface
19.1 Overview ····························································································································327
Section 20 Electrical Specifications
20.1 Absolute Maximum Ratings ······························································································331
20.2 Electrical Characteristics ····································································································331
20.2.1 DC Characteristics ··································································································331
20.2.2 AC Characteristics ··································································································340
20.2.3 A/D Converter Characteristics ················································································349
20.3 MCU Operational Timing ··································································································350
20.3.1 Bus Timing ··············································································································351
20.3.2 Control Signal Timing ····························································································354
20.3.3 Clock Timing ··········································································································355
20.3.4 I/O Port Timing ·······································································································357
20.3.5 16-Bit Free-Running Timer Timing ········································································358
20.3.6 8-Bit Timer Timing ·································································································359
20.3.7 Pulse Width Modulation Timer Timing ··································································360
20.3.8 Serial Communication Interface Timing ·································································360
20.3.9 A/D Trigger Signal Input Timing ···········································································361
Appendix A Instructions
A.1 Instruction Set ····················································································································363
A.2 Instruction Codes ···············································································································368
A.3 Operation Code Map ··········································································································379
A.4 Instruction Execution Cycles ·····························································································384
A.4.1 Calculation of Instruction Execution States ····························································384
A.4.2 Tables of Instruction Execution Cycles ··································································385
Appendix B Register Field
B.1 Register Addresses and Bit Names ····················································································393
B.2 Register Descriptions ·········································································································398
Appendix C I/O Port Schematic Diagrams
C.1 Schematic Diagram of Port 1 ·····························································································437
C.2 Schematic Diagram of Port 2 ·····························································································444
C.3 Schematic Diagram of Port 3 ·····························································································445
C.4 Schematic Diagram of Port 4 ·····························································································446
C.5 Schematic Diagram of Port 5 ·····························································································447
C.6 Schematic Diagram of Port 6 ·····························································································448
C.7 Schematic Diagram of Port 7 ·····························································································450
C.8 Schematic Diagram of Port 8 ·····························································································455
C.9 Schematic Diagram of Port 9 ·····························································································456
Appendix D Memory Maps ·······························································································463
Appendix E Pin States
E.1 Port State of Each Pin State ·······························································································465
E.2 Pin States in Reset State ·····································································································468
Appendix F Timing of Transition to and Recovery from
Hardware Standby Mode················································································475
Appendix G Package Dimensions ····················································································476
Figures
1-1
1-2
1-3
1-4
2-1
2-2
3-1
3-2
3-3
3-4
3-5
3-6
3-7
3-8
3-9
Block Diagram ···················································································································5
Pin Arrangement (CP-84, Top View) ················································································6
Pin Arrangement (CG-84, Top View) ················································································7
Pin Arrangement (FP-80A, TFP-80C, Top View) ·····························································8
H8/534 Memory Map in Each Operating Mode ······························································28
H8/536 Memory Map in Each Operating Mode ······························································29
CPU Operating Modes ·····································································································32
Registers in the CPU ········································································································33
Stack Pointer ····················································································································34
Combinations of Page Registers with Other Registers ····················································38
Short Absolute Addressing Mode and Base Register ······················································39
On-Chip Memory Access Timing ····················································································64
Pin States during Access to On-Chip Memory ································································65
Register Field Access Timing ··························································································66
Pin States during Register Field Access ··········································································67
3-10 (a) External Access Cycle (Read Access) ·············································································68
3-10 (b) External Access Cycle (Write Access) ············································································69
3-11
3-12
3-13
3-14
3-15
4-1
4-2
4-3
4-4
4-5
Operating States ···············································································································70
State Transitions ··············································································································71
Bus-Right Release Cycle (During On-chip Memory Access Cycle) ·······························73
Bus-Right Release Cycle (During External Access Cycle) ·············································74
Bus-Right Release Cycle (During Internal CPU Operation) ···········································75
Types of Factors Causing Exception Handling ·······························································81
Reset Vector ·····················································································································84
Reset Sequence (Minimum Mode, On-Chip Memory) ···················································85
Reset Sequence (Maximum Mode, External Memory) ···················································86
Interrupt Sources (and Number of Interrupt Types) ························································90
Interrupt Controller Block Diagram ················································································98
Interrupt Handling Flowchart ························································································107
5-1
5-2
5-3 (a) Stack before and after Interrupt Exception-Handling (Minimum Mode) ······················108
5-3 (b) Stack before and after Interrupt Exception-Handling (Maximum Mode) ·····················109
5-4
5-5
6-1
6-2
6-3
6-4
6-5
6-6
7-1
Interrupt Sequence (Minimum Mode, On-Chip Memory) ············································110
Interrupt Sequence (Maximum Mode, External Memory) ············································111
Block Diagram of Data Transfer Controller ··································································114
Flowchart of Data Transfer Cycle ··················································································119
DTC Vector Table ··········································································································120
DTC Vector Table Entry ································································································121
Order of Register Information ·······················································································122
Use of DTC to Receive Data via Serial Communication Interface 1 ····························126
Block Diagram of Wait-State Controller ·······································································128
7-2
7-3
7-4
8-1
8-2
8-3
8-4
8-5
8-6
8-7
9-1
9-2
9-3
9-4
9-5
9-6
Programmable Wait Mode ·····························································································131
Pin Wait Mode ···············································································································132
Pin Auto-Wait Mode ······································································································133
Block Diagram of Clock Pulse Generator ·····································································135
Connection of Crystal Oscillator (Example) ·································································136
Crystal Oscillator Equivalent Circuit ·············································································136
Notes on Board Design around External Crystal ···························································137
External Clock Input (Example) ····················································································137
External Clock Input (Examples) ··················································································138
Phase Relationship of ø Clock and E clock ···································································139
Pin Functions of Port 1 ··································································································144
Pin Functions of Port 2 ··································································································150
Port 2 Pin Functions in Expanded Modes ······································································152
Port 2 Pin Functions in Single-Chip Mode ····································································153
Pin Functions of Port 3 ··································································································153
Port 3 Pin Functions in Expanded Modes ······································································155
Port 3 Pin Functions in Single-Chip Mode ····································································156
Pin Functions of Port 4 ··································································································156
Port 4 Pin Functions in Expanded Modes ······································································158
Port 4 Pin Functions in Single-Chip Mode ····································································159
Pin Functions of Port 5 ··································································································159
Port 5 Pin Functions in Modes 1 and 3 ··········································································161
Port 5 Pin Functions in Modes 2 and 4 ··········································································162
Port 5 Pin Functions in Single-Chip Mode ····································································162
Pin Functions of Port 6 ··································································································166
Port 6 Pin Functions in Mode 3 ·····················································································170
Port 6 Pin Functions in Mode 4 ·····················································································170
Port 6 Pin Functions in Modes 7, 2, and 1 ·····································································171
Pin Functions of Port 7 ··································································································173
Pin Functions of Port 8 ··································································································177
Pin Functions of Port 9 ··································································································178
Block Diagram of 16-Bit Free-Running Timer ·····························································184
9-7
9-8
9-9
9-10
9-11
9-12
9-13
9-14
9-15
9-16
9-17
9-18
9-19
9-20
9-21
10-1
10-2 (a) Write Access to FRC (When CPU Writes H'AA55) ·····················································195
10-2 (b) Read Access to FRC (When FRC Contains H'AA55) ···················································196
10-3
10-4
10-5
10-6
10-7
10-8
10-9
Increment Timing for External Clock Input ··································································197
Setting of Output Compare Flags ··················································································198
Timing of Output Compare A ························································································198
Clearing of FRC by Compare-Match A ·········································································199
Input Capture Timing (Usual Case) ···············································································199
Input Capture Timing (1-State Delay) ···········································································200
Setting of Input Capture Flag ························································································200
10-10 Setting of Overflow Flag (OVF) ····················································································201
10-11 Square-Wave Output (Example) ····················································································206
10-12 FRC Write-Clear Contention ·························································································207
10-13 FRC Write-Increment Contention ·················································································208
10-14 Contention between OCR Write and Compare-Match ··················································209
11-1
11-2
11-3
11-4
11-5
11-6
11-7
11-8
11-9
Block Diagram of 8-Bit Timer ·······················································································214
Count Timing for External Clock Input ·········································································221
Setting of Compare-Match Flags ···················································································222
Timing of Timer Output ·································································································222
Timing of Compare-Match Clear ··················································································223
Timing of External Reset ·······························································································223
Setting of Overflow Flag (OVF) ····················································································224
Example of Pulse Output ·······························································································225
TCNT Write-Clear Contention ······················································································226
11-10 TCNT Write-Increment Contention ···············································································227
11-11 Contention between TCOR Write and Compare-Match ················································228
12-1
12-2
13-1
13-2
13-3
13-4
13-5
13-6
13-7
13-8
13-9
14-1
14-2
14-3
14-4
14-5
15-1
15-2
15-3
15-4
15-5
15-6
16-1
17-1
Block Diagram of PWM Timer ·····················································································234
PWM Timing ·················································································································239
Block Diagram of Timer Counter ··················································································242
Writing to TCNT and TCSR ··························································································247
Writing to RSTCSR ·······································································································247
Operation in Watchdog Timer Mode ·············································································249
Operation in Interval Timer Mode ·················································································249
Setting of OVF Bit ·········································································································250
Setting of WRST Bit and Internal Reset Signal ····························································251
TCNT Write-Increment Contention ···············································································252
Reset Circuit (Example) ································································································253
Block Diagram of Serial Communication Interface ······················································256
Data Format in Asynchronous Mode ·············································································271
Phase Relationship between Clock Output and Transmit Data ·····································272
Data Format in Synchronous Mode ···············································································276
Sampling Timing (Asynchronous Mode) ······································································282
Block Diagram of A/D Converter ··················································································284
Read Access to A/D Data Register (When Register Contains H'AA40) ·······················290
A/D Operation in Single Mode (When Channel 1 is Selected) ·····································293
A/D Operation in Scan Mode (When Channels 0 to 2 are Selected) ·····························295
A/D Conversion Timing ································································································296
Timing of Setting of ADST Bit ·····················································································297
Block Diagram of On-Chip RAM ·················································································299
Block Diagram of On-Chip ROM ·················································································304
17-2 (a) Socket Adapter Pin Arrangements (H8/534) ·································································306
17-2 (b) Socket Adapter Pin Arrangements (H8/536) ·································································307
17-3
17-4
17-5
17-6
17-7
17-8
18-1
18-2
19-1
Memory Map in PROM Mode ······················································································308
High-Speed Programming Flowchart (H8/534) ····························································309
PROM Write/Verify Timing (H8/534) ···········································································311
High-Speed Programming Flowchart (H8/536) ····························································313
PROM Write/Verify Timing (H8/536) ···········································································315
Recommended Screening Procedure ·············································································317
NMI Timing of Software Standby Mode (Application Example) ·································325
Hardware Standby Sequence ·························································································326
Execution Cycle of Instruction Synchronized with E Clock in Expanded Modes
(Maximum Synchronization Delay) ··············································································328
Execution Cycle of Instruction Synchronized with E Clock in Expanded Modes
19-2
(Minimum Synchronization Delay) ···············································································329
Example of Circuit for Driving a Darlington Transistor Pair ········································339
Example of Circuit for Driving an LED ········································································339
Output Load Circuit ·······································································································347
Basic Bus Cycle (without Wait States) in Expanded Modes ·········································351
Basic Bus Cycle (with 1 Wait State) in Expanded Modes ·············································352
Bus Cycle Synchronized with E Clock ··········································································353
Reset Input Timing ········································································································ 354
Reset Output Timing ······································································································354
Interrupt Input Timing ···································································································354
20-1
20-2
20-3
20-4
20-5
20-6
20-7
20-8
20-9
20-10 Bus Release State Timing ······························································································355
20-11 E Clock Timing ··············································································································355
20-12 Clock Oscillator Stabilization Timing ···········································································356
20-13 I/O Port Input/Output Timing ························································································357
20-14 Free-Running Timer Input/Output Timing ····································································358
20-15 External Clock Input Timing for Free-Running Timers ················································358
20-16 8-Bit Timer Output Timing ····························································································359
20-17 8-Bit Timer Clock Input Timing ····················································································359
20-18 8-Bit Timer Reset Input Timing ····················································································359
20-19 PWM Timer Output Timing ··························································································360
20-20 SCI Input Clock Timing ································································································360
20-21 SCI Input/Output Timing (Synchronous Mode) ····························································360
20-22 A/D Trigger Signal Input Timing ··················································································361
C-1 (a) Schematic Diagram of Port 1, Pin P10 ··········································································437
C-1 (b) Schematic Diagram of Port 1, Pin P11 ··········································································437
C-1 (c) Schematic Diagram of Port 1, Pin P12 ···········································································438
C-1 (d) Schematic Diagram of Port 1, Pin P13 ··········································································439
C-1 (e) Schematic Diagram of Port 1, Pin P14 ···········································································440
C-1 (f) Schematic Diagram of Port 1, Pin P15 ··········································································441
C-1 (g) Schematic Diagram of Port 1, Pin P16 ··········································································442
C-1 (h) Schematic Diagram of Port 1, Pin P17 ··········································································443
C-2
C-3
C-4
C-5
Schematic Diagram of Port 2 ·························································································444
Schematic Diagram of Port 3 ·························································································445
Schematic Diagram of Port 4 ·························································································446
Schematic Diagram of Port 5 ·························································································447
C-6 (a) Schematic Diagram of Port 6, Pin P60 ··········································································448
C-6 (b) Schematic Diagram of Port 6, Pin P61 to P63 ································································449
C-7 (a) Schematic Diagram of Port 7, Pin P70 ··········································································450
C-7 (b) Schematic Diagram of Port 7, Pins P71 and P72 ···························································451
C-7 (c) Schematic Diagram of Port 7, Pin P73 ··········································································452
C-7 (d) Schematic Diagram of Port 7, Pins P74, P75 and P76 ····················································453
C-7 (e) Schematic Diagram of Port 7, Pin P77 ··········································································454
C-8
Schematic Diagram of Port 8 ·························································································455
C-9 (a) Schematic Diagram of Port 9, Pins P90 and P91 ···························································456
C-9 (b) Schematic Diagram of Port 9, Pin P92 ··········································································457
C-9 (c) Schematic Diagram of Port 9, Pin P93 ··········································································458
C-9 (d) Schematic Diagram of Port 9, Pin P94 ··········································································459
C-9 (e) Schematic Diagram of Port 9, Pin P95 ··········································································460
C-9 (f) Schematic Diagram of Port 9, Pin P96 ··········································································461
C-9 (g) Schematic Diagram of Port 9, Pin P97 ··········································································462
E-1
E-2
E-3
E-4
E-5
G-1
G-2
G-3
G-4
Reset during Memory Access (Mode 1) ········································································469
Reset during Memory Access (Mode 2) ········································································470
Reset during Memory Access (Mode 3) ········································································472
Reset during Memory Access (Mode 4) ········································································473
Reset during Memory Access (Mode 7) ········································································474
Package Dimensions (CP-84) ························································································476
Package Dimensions (CG-84) ·······················································································476
Package Dimensions (FP-80A) ······················································································477
Package Dimensions (TFP-80C) ···················································································477
Tables
1-1
1-2
1-3
1-4
2-1
2-2
3-1
3-2
Features ······························································································································2
Pin Arrangements in Each Operating Mode (CP-84, CG-84) ···········································9
Pin Arrangements in Each Operating Mode (FP-80A, TFP-80C) ···································13
Pin Functions ···················································································································17
Operating Modes ·············································································································23
Mode Control Register ····································································································27
Interrupt Mask Levels ······································································································36
Interrupt Mask Bits after an Interrupt is Accepted ··························································36
Initial Values of Registers ································································································41
3-3
3-4
3-5
3-6
3-7
3-8
3-9
3-10
3-11
3-12
3-13
3-14
3-15
3-16
3-17
General Register Data Formats ························································································42
Data Formats in Memory ·································································································43
Data Formats on the Stack ·······························································································44
Addressing Modes ···········································································································46
Effective Address Calculation ·························································································47
Instruction Classification ·································································································50
Data Transfer Instructions ·······························································································52
Arithmetic Instructions ····································································································53
Logic Operation Instructions ···························································································54
Shift Instructions ··············································································································55
Bit-Manipulation Instructions ··························································································56
Branching Instructions ·····································································································57
System Control Instructions ····························································································59
Short-Format Instructions and Equivalent General Formats ···········································62
4-1 (a) Exceptions and Their Priority ··························································································79
4-1 (b) Instruction Exceptions ·····································································································79
4-2
4-3
5-1
5-2
5-3
5-4
6-1
6-2
6-3
6-4
6-5
6-6
6-7
7-1
7-2
Exception Vector Table ····································································································82
Stack after Exception Handling Sequence ·······································································93
Interrupt Controller Registers ··························································································99
Interrupts, Vectors, and Priorities ··················································································103
Assignment of Interrupt Priority Registers ····································································104
Number of States before Interrupt Service ····································································112
Internal Control Registers of the DTC ···········································································114
Data Transfer Enable Registers ······················································································115
Assignment of Data Transfer Enable Registers ·····························································117
Addresses of DTC Vectors ·····························································································121
Number of States per Data Transfer ··············································································123
Number of States before Interrupt Service ····································································124
DTC Control Register Information Set in RAM ···························································125
Register Configuration ···································································································128
Wait Modes ····················································································································130
8-1 (1) External Crystal Parameters
(HD6475368R, HD6475348R, HD6435368R, HD6435348R) ·····································136
8-1 (2) External Crystal Parameters
(HD6475368S, HD6475348S, HD6435368S, HD6435348S) ·······································136
9-1
9-2
9-3
9-4
9-5
9-6
Input/Output Port Summary ··························································································142
Port 1 Registers ··············································································································144
Port 1 Pin Functions in Expanded Modes ······································································147
Port 1 Pin Functions in Single-Chip Modes ··································································149
Port 2 Registers ··············································································································151
Port 3 Registers ··············································································································154
9-7
9-8
9-9
Port 4 Registers ··············································································································157
Port 5 Registers ··············································································································160
Status of MOS Pull-Ups for Port 5 ················································································163
Port 6 Registers ··············································································································166
Port 6 Pin Functions in Modes 7, 2, and 1 ·····································································171
Status of MOS Pull-Ups for Port 5 ················································································172
Port 7 Registers ··············································································································173
Port 7 Pin Functions ·······································································································175
Port 8 Registers ··············································································································177
Port 9 Registers ··············································································································178
Port 9 Pin Functions ·······································································································180
Input and Output Pins of Free-Running Timer Module ················································185
Register Configuration ···································································································186
Free-Running Timer Interrupts ······················································································201
Synchronization by Writing to FRCs ·············································································202
Effect of Changing Internal Clock Sources ···································································210
Input and Output Pins of 8-Bit Timer ············································································215
8-Bit Timer Registers ·····································································································215
8-Bit Timer Interrupts ····································································································224
Priority Order of Timer Output ······················································································229
Effect of Changing Internal Clock Sources ···································································229
Output Pins of PWM Timer Module ·············································································234
PWM Timer Registers ···································································································235
PWM Timer Parameters for 10 MHz System Clock ·····················································238
Register Configuration ···································································································242
Read Addresses of TCNT and TCSR ············································································248
SCI Input/Output Pins ····································································································257
SCI Registers ·················································································································257
Examples of BRR Settings in Asynchronous Mode·······················································265
Examples of BRR Settings in Synchronous Mode ························································269
Communication Formats Used by SCI ··········································································270
SCI Clock Source Selection ···························································································270
Data Formats in Asynchronous Mode ···········································································272
Receive Errors ···············································································································275
SCI Interrupts ·················································································································280
9-10
9-11
9-12
9-13
9-14
9-15
9-16
9-17
10-1
10-2
10-3
10-4
10-5
11-1
11-2
11-3
11-4
11-5
12-1
12-2
12-3
13-1
13-2
14-1
14-2
14-3
14-4
14-5
14-6
14-7
14-8
14-9
14-10 SSR Bit States and Data Transfer When Multiple Receive Errors Occur ·····················281
15-1
15-2
15-3
15-4
16-1
A/D Input Pins ···············································································································285
A/D Registers ·················································································································285
Assignment of Data Registers to Analog Input Channels ·············································286
A/D Conversion Time (Single Mode) ···········································································297
RAM Control Register ···································································································300
17-1
17-2
17-3
17-4
17-5
ROM Usage in Each MCU Mode ··················································································303
Selection of PROM Mode ·····························································································304
Socket Adapter ···············································································································305
Selection of Sub-Modes in PROM Mode (H8/534) ······················································308
DC Characteristics (H8/534)
(When VCC = 6.0 V ±0.25 V, VPP = 12.5 V ±0.3 V, VSS = 0 V, Ta = 25˚C ±5˚C) ········310
AC Characteristics (H8/534)
17-6
(When VCC = 6.0 V ±0.25 V, VPP = 12.5 V ±0.3 V, Ta = 25˚C ±5˚C) ··························310
Selection of Sub-Modes in PROM Mode (H8/536) ······················································312
DC Characteristics (H8/536)
17-7
17-8
(When VCC = 6.0 V ±0.25 V, VPP = 12.5 V ±0.3 V, VSS = 0 V, Ta = 25˚C ±5˚C) ········314
AC Characteristics (H8/536)
17-9
(When VCC = 6.0 V ±0.25 V, VPP = 12.5 V ±0.3 V, Ta = 25˚C ±5˚C) ··························314
17-10 PROM Writers ···············································································································316
17-11 Erasing Conditions ·········································································································318
17-12 Socket for 84-Pin LCC Package ····················································································319
18-1
18-2
20-1
20-2
20-3
20-4
20-5
20-6
20-7
Power-Down State ·········································································································321
Software Standby Control Register ···············································································323
Absolute Maximum Ratings ··························································································331
DC Characteristics (5-V Versions) ·················································································332
DC Characteristics (3-V S-Mask Versions)····································································334
DC Characteristics (2.7-V S-Mask Versions)·································································336
Allowable Output Current Values (5-V Versions)··························································338
Allowable Output Current Values (3-V S-Mask Versions)·············································338
Allowable Output Current Values (2.7-V S-Mask Versions)··········································339
20-8 (1) Bus Timing (R-Mask Versions) ······················································································340
20-8 (2) Bus Timing (S-Mask Versions)·······················································································342
20-9 (1) Control Signal Timing (R-Mask Versions)·····································································344
20-9 (2) Control Signal Timing (S-Mask Versions) ·····································································345
20-10 Timing Conditions of On-Chip Supporting Modules·····················································346
20-11 A/D Converter Characteristics (5-V Versions)·······························································349
20-12 A/D Converter Characteristics························································································350
A-1 (a) Machine Language Coding [General Format] ·······························································372
A-1 (b) Machine Language Coding [Special Format: Short Format] ········································376
A-1 (c) Machine Language Coding [Special Format: Branch Instruction] ································377
A-1 (d) Machine Language Coding [Special Format: System Control Instructions] ·················378
A-2
A-3
A-4
Operation Codes in Byte 1 ·····························································································379
Operation Codes in Byte 2 (Axxx) ················································································380
Operation Codes in Byte 2 (05xx, 15xx, 0Dxx, 1Dxx, Bxxx, Cxxx, Dxxx,
Exxx, Fxxx) ···················································································································381
Operation Codes in Byte 2 (04xx, 0Cxx) ······································································382
A-5
A-6
A-7
A-7
A-7
A-7
A-7
A-7
Operation Codes in Bytes 2 and 3 (11xx, 01xx, 06xx, 07xx, xx00xx) ··························383
Instruction Execution Cycles (1) ···················································································387
Instruction Execution Cycles (2) ····················································································388
Instruction Execution Cycles (3) ····················································································389
Instruction Execution Cycles (4) ····················································································390
Instruction Execution Cycles (5) ····················································································391
Instruction Execution Cycles (6) ····················································································392
A-8 (a) Adjusted Value (Branch Instruction) ·············································································392
A-8 (b) Adjusted Value (Other Instructions by Addressing Modes) ··········································392
C-1 (a) Port 1 Port Read (Pin P10) ·····························································································437
C-1 (b) Port 1 Port Read (Pin P11) ·····························································································438
C-1 (c) Port 1 Port Read (Pin P12) ·····························································································438
C-1 (d) Port 1 Port Read (Pin P13) ·····························································································439
C-1 (e) Port 1 Port Read (Pin P14) ·····························································································440
C-1 (f) Port 1 Port Read (Pin P15) ·····························································································441
C-1 (g) Port 1 Port Read (Pin P16) ·····························································································442
C-1 (h) Port 1 Port Read (Pin P17) ·····························································································443
C-2
C-3
C-4
C-5
Port 2 Port Read ·············································································································444
Port 3 Port Read ·············································································································445
Port 4 Port Read ·············································································································446
Port 5 Port Read ·············································································································447
C-6 (a) Port 6 Port Read (Pin P60) ·····························································································448
C-6 (b) Port 6 Port Read (Pin P61 to P63) ··················································································449
C-7 (a) Port 7 Port Read (Pin P70) ·····························································································450
C-7 (b) Port 7 Port Read (Pins P71, P72) ····················································································451
C-7 (c) Port 7 Port Read (Pin P73) ·····························································································452
C-7 (d) Port 7 Port Read (Pins P74 to P76) ················································································453
C-7 (e) Port 7 Port Read (Pin P77) ·····························································································454
C-9 (a) Port 9 Port Read (Pins P90, P91) ····················································································456
C-9 (b) Port 9 Port Read (Pin P92) ·····························································································457
C-9 (c) Port 9 Port Read (Pin P93) ·····························································································458
C-9 (d) Port 9 Port Read (Pin P94) ·····························································································459
C-9 (e) Port 9 Port Read (Pin P95) ·····························································································460
C-9 (f) Port 9 Port Read (Pin P96) ·····························································································461
C-9 (g) Port 9 Port Read (Pin P97) ·····························································································462
D-1
D-2
E-1
E-2
H8/534 Memory Map ····································································································463
H8/536 Memory Map ····································································································464
Port State ························································································································465
MOS Pull-Up State ········································································································467
Section 1 Overview
1.1 Features
The H8/534 and H8/536 are CMOS microcomputer units (MCUs) comprising a CPU core plus a
full range of supporting functions—an entire system integrated onto a single chip.
The CPU features a highly orthogonal instruction set that permits addressing modes and data sizes
to be specified independently in each instruction. An internal 16-bit architecture and 16-bit access
to on-chip memory enhance the CPU’s data-processing capability and provide the speed needed
for realtime control applications.
The on-chip supporting functions include RAM, ROM, timers, a serial communication interface
(SCI), A/D conversion, and I/O ports. An on-chip data transfer controller (DTC) can transfer data
in either direction between memory and I/O independently of the CPU.
For the on-chip ROM, a choice is offered between masked ROM and programmable ROM
(PROM). The PROM version can be programmed by the user with a general-purpose PROM
writer.
Table 1-1 lists the main features of the H8/534 and H8/536.
1
Table 1-1 Features
Feature
Description
CPU
General-register machine
• Eight 16-bit general registers
• Five 8-bit and two 16-bit control registers
High speed
• Maximum clock rate: 10 MHz (oscillator frequency: 20 MHz, R-mask versions)
16 MHz (oscillator frequency: 32 MHz, S-mask versions)
Expanded operating modes supporting external memory
• Minimum mode: up to 64-kbyte address space
• Maximum mode: up to 1 M-byte address space
Highly orthogonal instruction set
• Addressing modes and data size can be specified independently for
each instruction
1.5 Addressing modes
• Register-register operations
• Register-memory operations
Instruction set optimized for C language
• Special short formats for frequently-used instructions and addressing modes
• 2-kbyte high-speed RAM on-chip
Memory
(H8/534)
• 32-kbyte programmable or masked ROM on-chip
• 2-kbyte high-speed RAM on-chip
Memory
(H8/536)
• 62-kbyte programmable or masked ROM on-chip
Each channel provides:
16-Bit free-
running
• 1 free-running counter (which can count external events)
• 2 output-compare registers
timer (FRT)
(3 channels)
8-Bit timer
(1 channel)
PWM timer
(3 channels)
Watchdog
timer (WDT)
(1 channel)
• 1 input capture register
• One 8-bit up-counter (which can count external events)
• 2 time constant registers
• Generates pulses with any duty ratio from 0 to 100%
• Resolution: 1/250
• An overflow generates a nonmaskable interrupt
• Can also be used as an interval timer
2
Table 1-1 Features (cont)
Feature
Description
Serial com-
munication
• Asynchronous or synchronous mode (selectable)
• Full duplex: can send and receive simultaneously
interface (SCI) • Built-in baud rate generator
(2 channels)
A/D converter
• 10-Bit resolution
• 8 channels, controllable in single mode or scan mode (selectable)
• Sample-and-hold function
• Start of A/D conversion can be externally triggered
I/O ports
• 57 Input/output pins (six 8-bit ports, one 5-bit port, one 4-bit port)
• 8 Input-only pins (one 8-bit port)
Interrupt
controller
(INTC)
• 7 external interrupt pins (NMI, IRQ0, IRQ1 to IRQ5)
• 23 internal interrupts
• 8 priority levels
Data transfer
Performs bidirectional data transfer between memory and I/O independently
controller (DTC) of the CPU
Wait-state
controller (WSC)
Can insert wait states in access to external memory or I/O
Operating
modes
5 MCU operating modes
• Expanded minimum modes, supporting up to 64 kbytes external memory
with or without using on-chip ROM (Modes 1 and 2)
• Expanded maximum modes, supporting up to 1 Mbyte external memory
with or without using on-chip ROM (Modes 3 and 4)
• Single-chip mode (Mode 7)
3 power-down modes
• Sleep mode
• Software standby mode
• Hardware standby mode
Other features • E clock output available
• Clock generator on-chip
Product
line-up
(H8/534
R-mask
versions)
Model Name
Package Options
ROM
HD6475348RCG 84-Pin windowed LCC (CG-84) PROM
HD6475348RCP 84-Pin PLCC (CP-84)
HD6475348RF
80-Pin QFP (FP-80A)
HD6435348RCP 84-Pin PLCC (CP-84)
Mask
ROM
HD6435348RF
80-Pin QFP (FP-80A)
Product
line-up
(H8/534
S-mask
versions)
Model Name
Package Options
ROM
HD6475348SCG 84-Pin windowed LCC (CG-84) PROM
HD6475348SCP 84-Pin PLCC (CP-84)
HD6475348SF
HD6475348STF
80-Pin QFP (FP-80A)
80-Pin TQFP (TFP-80C)
HD6435348SCP 84-Pin PLCC (CP-84)
Mask
ROM
HD6435348SF
HD6435348STF
80-Pin QFP (FP-80A)
80-Pin TQFP (TFP-80C)
3
Table 1-1 Features (cont)
Feature Description
Product
line-up
(H8/536
R-mask
versions)
Model Name
Package Options
ROM
HD6475368RCG
HD6475368RCP
HD6475368RF
HD6435368RCP
HD6435368RF
84-Pin windowed LCC (CG-84)
84-Pin PLCC (CP-84)
80-Pin QFP (FP-80A)
84-Pin PLCC (CP-84)
80-Pin QFP (FP-80A)
PROM
Mask
ROM
Product
line-up
(H8/536
S-mask
versions)
Model Name
Package Options
ROM
HD6475368SCG
HD6475368SCP
HD6475368SF
HD6475368STF
HD6435368SCP
HD6435368SF
HD6435368STF
84-Pin windowed LCC (CG-84)
84-Pin PLCC (CP-84)
80-Pin QFP (FP-80A)
80-Pin TQFP (TFP-80C)
84-Pin PLCC (CP-84)
80-Pin QFP (FP-80A)
80-Pin TQFP (TFP-80C)
PROM
Mask
ROM
Product
line-up
16-MHz High- 3-V
2.7-V
Low-Voltage
Versions*
Regular
Versions
Speed
Low-Voltage
Versions*
Versions
Model
name
PROM
HD6475368R HD6475368S
HD6475348R HD6475348S
HD6475368SV HD6475368SV
HD6475348SV HD6475348SV
Mask
ROM
HD6435368R HD6435368S
HD6435348R HD6435348S
HD6435368SV HD6435368SV
HD6435348SV HD6435348SV
Clock speed
Supply voltage
0.5 MHz to
10 MHz
2 MHz to
16 MHz
2 MHz to
10 MHz
2 MHz to
8 MHz
5 V ± 10%
5 V ± 10%
3 V to 5.5 V
2.7 V to 5.5 V
Notes: The product codes of the 3-V and 2.7-V low-voltage versions include a suffix that identifies
the clock speed. Examples are shown below for the H8/536 PROM version in an 80-pin
QFP package.
Examples: 3-V versions: HD6475368SVF10
2.7-V versions: HD6475368SVF8
* Under development
4
1.2 Block Diagram
Figure 1-1 shows a block diagram of the H8/534 and H8/536.
Port 1
Port 2
Port 3
Clock
Gener-
ator
EXTAL
XTAL
P47/A7
P46/A6
P45/A5
P44/A4
P43/A3
P42/A2
P41/A1
P40/A0
RES
STBY
MD0
MD1
MD2
Wait-
PROM/Mask ROM
32 kbytes (H8/534)
62 kbytes (H8/536)
RAM
State
Controller
2 kbyte
Interrupt
Controller
CPU
Data
P57/A15
P56/A14
P55/A13
P54/A12
P53/A11
P52/A10
P51/A9
P50/A8
Transfer
Controller
NMI
Serial
Communication
Interface
8-bit Timer
Vcc
Vcc
Vss
Vss
Vss
Vss
Vss
Vss
16-bit Free
Running Timer
(x 3 channels)
PWM Timer
(x 3 channels)
*
P63/PW3/IRQ5/A19
P62/PW2/IRQ4/A18
P61/PW1/IRQ3/A17
P60/IRQ2/A16
10-bit
A/D Converter
Watchdog
Timer
AVcc
AVss
Port 9
Port 8
Port 7
* CP-84 and CG-84 only
Figure 1-1 Block Diagram
5
1.3 Pin Arrangements and Functions
1.3.1 Pin Arrangement
Figure 1-2 shows the pin arrangement of the CP-84 package. Figure 1-3 shows the pin
arrangement of the CG-84 package. Figure 1-4 shows the pin arrangement of the FP-80A package.
These pin arrangements apply to both the H8/534 and H8/536.
11 10
9
8
7
6
5
4
3
2
1 84 83 82 81 80 79 78 77 76 75
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
22
23
24
25
26
27
28
29
30
31
32
74
73
72
71
70
69
68
67
66
65
64
63
62
61
60
59
58
57
56
55
54
AVcc
P87 /AN7
P86 /AN6
P85 /AN5
P84 /AN4
P83 /AN3
P82 /AN2
P81 /AN1
P21 /R/W
P22/DS
P23 /RD
P24/WR
Vcc
MD0
MD1
MD2
STBY
RES
NMI
NC
Vss
P30/D0
P31/D1
P32/D2
P33/D3
P34/D4
P35/D5
P36/D6
P37/D7
P80 /AN0
AVss
Vss
PLCC-84
P77 /FTOA1
P76 /FTOB3/FTCI 3
P75 /FTOB2/FTCI 2
P74 /FTOB1/FTCI 1
P73 /FTI3/TMRI
P72 /FTI2
P71 /FTI1
P70 /TMCI
Vcc
P63 /PW3/IRQ5/A19
33 34 35 36 37 38 39 40 41 42 43 44 45 46 47 48 49 50 51 52 53
1 pin
1 pin
H8/534
H8/536
HD6475348CP
HD6475368CP
JAPAN
JAPAN
Figure 1-2 Pin Arrangement (CP-84, Top View)
6
11 10
9
8
7
6
5
4
3
2
1 84 83 82 81 80 79 78 77 76 75
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
22
23
24
25
26
27
28
29
30
31
32
74
73
72
71
70
69
68
67
66
65
64
63
62
61
60
59
58
57
56
55
54
AVcc
P87 /AN7
P86 /AN6
P85 /AN5
P84 /AN4
P83 /AN3
P82 /AN2
P81 /AN1
P21 /R/W
P22/DS
P23 /RD
P24/WR
Vcc
MD0
MD1
MD2
STBY
RES
NMI
NC
Vss
P30/D0
P31/D1
P32/D2
P33/D3
P34/D4
P35/D5
P36/D6
P37/D7
P80 /AN0
AVss
Vss
LCC-84
P77 /FTOA1
P76 /FTOB3/FTCI 3
P75 /FTOB2/FTCI 2
P74 /FTOB1/FTCI 1
P73 /FTI3/TMRI
P72 /FTI2
P71 /FTI1
P70 /TMCI
Vcc
P63 /PW3 /IRQ5/A19
33 34 35 36 37 38 39 40 41 42 43 44 45 46 47 48 49 50 51 52 53
Index
Index
H8/534
H8/536
HD6475368CG
HD6475348CG
JAPAN
JAPAN
Figure 1-3 Pin Arrangement (CG-84, Top View)
7
80 79 78 77 76 75 74 73 72 71 70 69 68 67 66 65 64 63 62 61
60
1
2
AVcc
P87 /AN7
P86 /AN6
P85 /AN5
P84 /AN4
P83 /AN3
P82 /AN2
P81 /AN1
P21 /R/W
P22/DS
P23 /RD
P24/WR
Vcc
59
58
57
56
55
54
53
52
51
50
49
48
47
46
45
44
43
42
41
3
4
5
6
MD0
MD1
MD2
STBY
RES
7
8
9
P80 /AN0
AVss
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
QFP-80A
TQFP-80C
P77 /FTOA1
P76 /FTOB3/FTCI 3
P75 /FTOB2/FTCI 2
P74 /FTOB1/FTCI 1
P73 /FTI3/TMRI
P72 /FTI2
P71 /FTI1
P70 /TMCI
Vcc
NMI
Vss
P30/D0
P31/D1
P32/D2
P33/D3
P34/D4
P35/D5
P36/D6
P37/D7
P63 /PW3 /IRQ5/A19
21 22 23 24 25 26 27 28 29 30 31 32 33 34 35 36 37 38 39 40
TQFP-80C
QFP-80A
H8/534
HD6475348TF
H8/536
H8/534
HD6475348F
H8/536
HD6475368F
HD6475368TF
JAPAN
JAPAN
JAPAN
JAPAN
Pin 1
Pin 1
Pin 1
Pin 1
Figure 1-4 Pin Arrangement (FP-80A, TFP-80C, Top View)
8
1.3.2 Pin Functions
Pin Arrangements in Each Operating Mode: Table 1-2 lists the arrangements of the pins of
the CP-84 and CG-84 packages in each operating mode. Table 1-3 lists the arrangements for
the FP-80A package.
Table 1-2 Pin Arrangements in Each Operating Mode (CP-84, CG-84)
Pin Name
Expanded Minimum
Modes
Expanded Maximum
Modes
Single-Chip PROM
Pin
No.
1
Mode
Mode 7
XTAL
VSS
Mode
Mode 1
XTAL
Mode 2
Mode 3
XTAL
Mode 4
XTAL
VSS
H8/534 H8/536
NC NC
VSS VSS
NC NC
NC NC
NC NC
NC NC
NC A15
NC A16
NC PGM
XTAL
2
VSS
VSS
VSS
3
P10/ø
P10/ø
P10/ø
P10/ø
P11/E
P10/ø
P11/E
4
P11/E
P11/E
P11/E
5
P12 / BACK
P13 / BREQ
P14 / WAIT
P15 / IRQ0
P16 / IRQ1 /
ADTRG
P17 / TMO
AS
P12 / BACK
P13 / BREQ
P14 / WAIT
P15 / IRQ0
P16 / IRQ1 /
ADTRG
P17 / TMO
AS
P12 / BACK
P13 / BREQ
P14 / WAIT
P15 / IRQ0
P16 / IRQ1 /
ADTRG
P17 / TMO
AS
P12 / BACK P12
P13 / BREQ P13
6
7
P14 / WAIT
P15 / IRQ0
P14
8
P15 / IRQ0
9
P16 / IRQ1 / P16 / IRQ1 /
ADTRG
P17 / TMO
AS
ADTRG
P17 / TMO
P20
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
NC NC
NC NC
NC NC
NC NC
NC NC
NC NC
VCC VCC
VSS VSS
VSS VSS
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
P21
DS
DS
DS
DS
P22
RD
RD
RD
RD
P23
WR
WR
WR
WR
P24
VCC
VCC
VCC
VCC
VCC
MD0
MD0
MD0
MD0
MD1
MD0
MD1
MD1
MD1
MD1
Notes: 1. For the PROM mode, see section 17, “ROM.”
2. Pins marked NC should be left unconnected.
9
Table 1-2 Pin Arrangements in Each Operating Mode (CP-84, CG-84) (cont)
Pin Name
Expanded Minimum
Modes
Expanded Maximum
Modes
Single-Chip PROM
Pin
No.
19
20
21
22
23
24
25
26
27
28
29
30
31
32
33
34
35
36
37
38
39
40
41
Mode
Mode 7
MD2
STBY
RES
NMI
NC
Mode
Mode 1
MD2
STBY
RES
NMI
NC
VSS
D0
Mode 2
Mode 3
MD2
STBY
RES
NMI
NC
VSS
D0
Mode 4
MD2
STBY
RES
NMI
NC
VSS
D0
H8/534 H8/536
VSS VSS
VSS VSS
VPP VPP
MD2
STBY
RES
NMI
NC
VSS
D0
A9
A9
NC NC
VSS VSS
O0 O0
O1 O1
O2 O2
O3 O3
O4 O4
O5 O5
O6 O6
O7 O7
VSS
P30
D1
D1
D1
D1
P31
D2
D2
D2
D2
P32
D3
D3
D3
D3
P33
D4
D4
D4
D4
P34
D5
D5
D5
D5
P35
D6
D6
D6
D6
P36
D7
D7
D7
D7
P37
A0
A0
A0
A0
P40
A0
A1
A2
A3
A4
A5
A6
A7
A0
A1
A2
A3
A4
A5
A6
A7
A1
A1
A1
A1
P41
A2
A2
A2
A2
P42
A3
A3
A3
A3
P43
A4
A4
A4
A4
P44
A5
A5
A5
A5
P45
A6
A6
A6
A6
P46
A7
A7
A7
A7
P47
VSS
VSS
VSS
VSS
VSS
VSS VSS
Notes: 1. For the PROM mode, see section 17, “ROM.”
2. Pins marked NC should be left unconnected.
10
Table 1-2 Pin Arrangements in Each Operating Mode (CP-84, CG-84) (cont)
Pin Name
Expanded Minimum
Modes
Expanded Maximum
Modes
Single-Chip PROM
Pin
No.
42
43
44
45
46
47
48
49
50
51
Mode
Mode 7
VSS
Mode
Mode 1
VSS
Mode 2
Mode 3
VSS
A8
Mode 4
VSS
H8/534 H8/536
VSS
VSS VSS
A8
P50 / A8
P51 / A9
P52 / A10
P53 / A11
P54 / A12
P55 / A13
P56 / A14
P57 / A15
P60 / IRQ2
P50 / A8
P51 / A9
P52 / A10
P53 / A11
P54 / A12
P55 / A13
P56 / A14
P57 / A15
P50
A8
A8
A9
A9
P51
OE OE
A10 A10
A11 A11
A12 A12
A13 A13
A14 A14
CE CE
VCC VCC
A10
A10
A11
P52
A11
P53
A12
A12
A13
A14
A15
A16
P54
A13
P55
A14
P56
A15
P57
P60 / IRQ2
P60 / IRQ2 / P60 / IRQ2
A16
52
53
54
P61 / PW1 /
IRQ3
P61 / PW1 /
IRQ3
A17
A18
A19
P61 / IRQ3 / P61 / PW1 /
VCC VCC
NC NC
NC NC
A17
P62 / IRQ4 / P62 / PW2 /
A18 IRQ4
P63 / IRQ5 / P63 / PW3 /
IRQ3
P62 / PW2 /
IRQ4
P62 / PW2 /
IRQ4
P63 / PW3 /
IRQ5
P63 / PW3 /
IRQ5
A19
IRQ5
55
56
57
58
59
VCC
VCC
VCC
VCC
VCC
VCC VCC
NC NC
NC NC
NC NC
NC NC
P70 / TMCI
P71 / FTI1
P72 / FTI2
P73 / FTI3 /
TMRI
P70 / TMCI
P71 / FTI1
P72 / FTI2
P73 / FTI3 /
TMRI
P70 / TMCI
P71 / FTI1
P72 / FTI2
P73 / FTI3 /
TMRI
P70 / TMCI
P71 / FTI1
P72 / FTI2
P73 / FTI3 /
TMRI
P70 / TMCI
P71 / FTI1
P72 / FTI2
P73 / FTI3 /
TMRI
60
61
P74 / FTOB1 / P74 / FTOB1 / P74 / FTOB1 / P74 / FTOB1 / P74 / FTOB1 / NC NC
FTCI1 FTCI1 FTCI1 FTCI1 FTCI1
P75 / FTOB2 / P75 / FTOB2 / P75 / FTOB2 / P75 / FTOB2 / P75 / FTOB2 / NC NC
FTCI2 FTCI2 FTCI2 FTCI2 FTCI2
Notes: 1. For the PROM mode, see section 17, “ROM.”
2. Pins marked NC should be left unconnected.
11
Table 1-2 Pin Arrangements in Each Operating Mode (CP-84, CG-84) (cont)
Pin Name
Expanded Minimum
Modes
Expanded Maximum
Modes
Single-Chip PROM
Pin
No.
62
Mode
Mode
Mode 1
Mode 2
Mode 3
Mode 4
Mode 7
H8/534 H8/536
P76 / FTOB3 / P76 / FTOB3 / P76 / FTOB3 / P76 / FTOB3 / P76/ FTOB3 / NC NC
FTCI3
FTCI3
FTCI3
FTCI3
FTCI3
63
64
65
66
67
68
69
70
71
72
73
74
75
76
77
P77 / FTOA1
VSS
P77 / FTOA1 P77 / FTOA1 P77 / FTOA1 P77 / FTOA1 NC NC
VSS
VSS
VSS
VSS
VSS VSS
VSS VSS
NC NC
NC NC
NC NC
NC NC
NC NC
NC NC
NC NC
NC NC
VCC VCC
AVSS
AVSS
AVSS
AVSS
AVSS
P80 / AN0
P81 / AN1
P82 / AN2
P83 / AN3
P84 / AN4
P85 / AN5
P86 / AN6
P87 / AN7
AVCC
P80 / AN0
P81 / AN1
P82 / AN2
P83 / AN3
P84 / AN4
P85 / AN5
P86 / AN6
P87 / AN7
AVCC
P80 / AN0
P81 / AN1
P82 / AN2
P83 / AN3
P84 / AN4
P85 / AN5
P86 / AN6
P87 / AN7
AVCC
P80 / AN0
P81 / AN1
P82 / AN2
P83 / AN3
P84 / AN4
P85 / AN5
P86 / AN6
P87 / AN7
AVCC
P80 / AN0
P81 / AN1
P82 / AN2
P83 / AN3
P84 / AN4
P85 / AN5
P86 / AN6
P87 / AN7
AVCC
P90 / FTOA2
P91 / FTOA3
P92 / TXD2 /
PW1
P90 / FTOA2 P90 / FTOA2 P90 / FTOA2 P90 / FTOA2 NC NC
P91 / FTOA3 P91 / FTOA3 P91 / FTOA3 P91 / FTOA3 NC NC
P92 / TXD2 /
PW1
P92 / TXD2 /
PW1
P92 / TXD2 / P92 / TXD2 / NC NC
PW1 PW1
78
79
P93 / RXD2 /
PW2
P93 / RXD2 / P93 / RXD2 / P93 / RXD2 / P93 / RXD2 / NC NC
PW2 PW2 PW2 PW2
P94 / SCK2 / P94 / SCK2 / P94 / SCK2 / P94 / SCK2 / NC NC
P94 / SCK2 /
PW3
PW3
PW3
PW3
PW3
80
81
82
83
84
P95 / TXD1
P96 / RXD1
P97 / SCK1
VSS
P95 / TXD1
P96 / RXD1
P97 / SCK1
VSS
P95 / TXD1
P96 / RXD1
P97 / SCK1
VSS
P95 / TXD1
P96 / RXD1
P97 / SCK1
VSS
P95 / TXD1
P96 / RXD1
P97 / SCK1
VSS
NC NC
NC NC
NC NC
VSS VSS
NC NC
EXTAL
EXTAL
EXTAL
EXTAL
EXTAL
Notes: 1. For the PROM mode, see section 17, “ROM.”
2. Pins marked NC should be left unconnected.
12
Table 1-3 Pin Arrangements in Each Operating Mode (FP-80A, TFP-80C)
Pin Name
Expanded Minimum
Modes
Expanded Maximum
Modes
Single-Chip PROM
Pin
No.
1
Mode
Mode 7
P21
Mode
Mode 1
R/W
DS
Mode 2
Mode 3
R/W
DS
Mode 4
R/W
DS
H8/534 H8/536
NC NC
NC NC
NC NC
NC NC
VCC VCC
VSS VSS
VSS VSS
VSS VSS
VSS VSS
VPP VPP
R/W
DS
2
P22
3
RD
RD
WR
VCC
MD0
MD1
MD2
STBY
RES
NMI
VSS
D0
RD
RD
P23
4
WR
VCC
MD0
MD1
MD2
STBY
RES
NMI
VSS
D0
WR
VCC
MD0
MD1
MD2
STBY
RES
NMI
VSS
D0
WR
VCC
MD0
MD1
MD2
STBY
RES
NMI
VSS
D0
P24
5
VCC
MD0
MD1
MD2
STBY
RES
NMI
VSS
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
A9
A9
VSS VSS
O0 O0
O1 O1
O2 O2
O3 O3
O4 O4
O5 O5
O6 O6
O7 O7
P30
D1
D1
D1
D1
P31
D2
D2
D2
D2
P32
D3
D3
D3
D3
P33
D4
D4
D4
D4
P34
D5
D5
D5
D5
P35
D6
D6
D6
D6
P36
D7
D7
D7
D7
P37
A0
A0
A0
A0
P40
A0
A0
Notes: 1. For the PROM mode, see section 17, “ROM.”
2. Pins marked NC should be left unconnected.
13
Table 1-3 Pin Arrangements in Each Operating Mode (FP-80A, TFP-80C) (cont)
Pin Name
Expanded Minimum
Modes
Expanded Maximum
Modes
Single-Chip PROM
Pin
No.
22
23
24
25
26
27
28
29
30
31
32
33
34
35
36
37
38
Mode
Mode 7
P41
P42
P43
P44
P45
P46
P47
VSS
P50
P51
P52
P53
P54
P55
P56
P57
Mode
Mode 1
A1
Mode 2
Mode 3
A1
Mode 4
A1
H8/534 H8/536
A1
A1
A2
A3
A4
A5
A6
A7
A1
A2
A3
A4
A5
A6
A7
A2
A2
A2
A2
A3
A3
A3
A3
A4
A4
A4
A4
A5
A5
A5
A5
A6
A6
A6
A6
A7
A7
A7
A7
VSS
A8
VSS
VSS
A8
VSS
VSS VSS
A8 A8
P50 / A8
P51 / A9
P52 / A10
P53 / A11
P54 / A12
P55 / A13
P56 / A14
P57 / A15
P60 / IRQ2
P50/ A8
P51/ A9
P52/ A10
P53 / A11
P54 / A12
P55 / A13
P56 / A14
P57 / A15
A9
A9
OE OE
A10 A10
A11 A11
A12 A12
A13 A13
A14 A14
CE CE
VCC VCC
A10
A11
A12
A13
A14
A15
P60 / IRQ2
A10
A11
A12
A13
A14
A15
A16
P60 / IRQ2 / P60 / IRQ2
A16
39
40
41
42
P61 / PW1 /
IRQ3
P61 / PW1 /
IRQ3
A17
A18
A19
VCC
P61 / IRQ3 / P61 / PW1 /
VCC VCC
NC NC
NC NC
VCC VCC
A17
P62 / IRQ4 / P62 / PW2 /
A18 IRQ4
P63 / IRQ5 / P63 / PW3 /
IRQ3
P62 / PW2 /
IRQ4
P62 / PW2 /
IRQ4
P63 / PW3 /
IRQ5
P63 / PW3 /
IRQ5
A19
IRQ5
VCC
VCC
VCC
VCC
Notes: 1. For the PROM mode, see section 17, “ROM.”
2. Pins marked NC should be left unconnected.
14
Table 1-3 Pin Arrangements in Each Operating Mode (FP-80A, TFP-80C) (cont)
Pin Name
Expanded Minimum
Modes
Expanded Maximum
Modes
Single-Chip PROM
Pin
No.
43
Mode
Mode
Mode 1
Mode 2
Mode 3
Mode 4
Mode 7
H8/534 H8/536
NC NC
NC NC
NC NC
NC NC
P70 / TMCI
P71 / FTI1
P72 / FTI2
P73 / FTI3 /
TMRI
P70/ TMCI
P71/ FTI1
P72 / FTI2
P73 / FTI3 /
TMRI
P70/ TMCI
P71/ FTI1
P72 / FTI2
P73 / FTI3 /
TMRI
P70/ TMCI
P71/ FTI1
P72 / FTI2
P73 / FTI3 /
TMRI
P70/ TMCI
P71/ FTI1
P72 / FTI2
P73 / FTI3 /
TMRI
44
45
46
47
48
49
P74 / FTOB1 / P74 / FTOB1 / P74 / FTOB1 / P74/ FTOB1 / P74 / FTOB1 / NC NC
FTCI1 FTCI1 FTCI1 FTCI1 FTCI1
P75 / FTOB2 / P75 / FTOB2 / P75 / FTOB2 / P75 / FTOB2 / P75 / FTOB2 / NC NC
FTCI2 FTCI2 FTCI2 FTCI2 FTCI2
P76 / FTOB3 / P76 / FTOB3 / P76 / FTOB3 / P76 / FTOB3 / P76 / FTOB3 / NC NC
FTCI3
FTCI3
FTCI3
FTCI3
FTCI3
50
51
52
53
54
55
56
57
58
59
P77 / FTOA1
AVSS
P77 / FTOA1 P77 / FTOA1 P77 / FTOA1 P77 / FTOA1 NC NC
AVSS
AVSS
AVSS
AVSS
VSS VSS
NC NC
NC NC
NC NC
NC NC
NC NC
NC NC
NC NC
NC NC
P80 / AN0
P81 / AN1
P82 / AN2
P83 / AN3
P84 / AN4
P85 / AN5
P86 / AN6
P87 / AN7
P80 / AN0
P81 / AN1
P82 / AN2
P83 / AN3
P84 / AN4
P85 / AN5
P86 / AN6
P87 / AN7
P80 / AN0
P81 / AN1
P82 / AN2
P83 / AN3
P84 / AN4
P85 / AN5
P86 / AN6
P87 / AN7
P80 / AN0
P81 / AN1
P82 / AN2
P83 / AN3
P84 / AN4
P85 / AN5
P86 / AN6
P87 / AN7
P80 / AN0
P81 / AN1
P82 / AN2
P83 / AN3
P84 / AN4
P85 / AN5
P86 / AN6
P87 / AN7
Notes: 1. For the PROM mode, see section 17, “ROM.”
2. Pins marked NC should be left unconnected.
15
Table 1-3 Pin Arrangements in Each Operating Mode (FP-80A, TFP-80C) (cont)
Pin Name
Expanded Minimum
Modes
Expanded Maximum
Modes
Single-Chip PROM
Pin
No.
60
61
62
63
64
65
66
67
68
69
70
71
72
73
74
75
76
77
78
Mode
Mode 7
AVCC
Mode
Mode 1
Mode 2
Mode 3
Mode 4
H8/534 H8/536
AVCC
AVCC
AVCC
AVCC
VCC VCC
P90 / FTOA2
P91 / FTOA3
P92 / PW1
P93 / PW2
P94 / PW3
P95 / TXD
P96 / RXD
P97 / SCK
EXTAL
P90 / FTOA2 P90 / FTOA2 P90 / FTOA2 P90 / FTOA2 NC NC
P91 / FTOA3 P91 / FTOA3 P91 / FTOA3 P91 / FTOA3 NC NC
P92 / PW1
P93 / PW2
P94 / PW3
P95 / TXD
P96 / RXD
P97 / SCK
EXTAL
P92 / PW1
P93 / PW2
P94 / PW3
P95 / TXD
P96 / RXD
P97 / SCK
EXTAL
P92 / PW1
P93 / PW2
P94 / PW3
P95 / TXD
P96 / RXD
P97 / SCK
EXTAL
P92 / PW1
P93 / PW2
P94 / PW3
P95 / TXD
P96 / RXD
P97 / SCK
EXTAL
NC NC
NC NC
NC NC
NC NC
NC NC
NC NC
NC NC
NC NC
VSS VSS
NC NC
NC NC
NC NC
NC NC
NC A15
NC A16
NC PGM
XTAL
XTAL
XTAL
XTAL
XTAL
VSS
VSS
VSS
VSS
VSS
P10 / ø
P10 / ø
P10 / ø
P10 / ø
P10 / ø
P11 / E
P11 / E
P11 / E
P11 / E
P11 / E
P12 / BACK
P13 / BREQ
P14 / WAIT
P15 / IRQ0
P16 / IRQ1 /
ADTRG
P12 / BACK
P13 / BREQ
P14 / WAIT
P15 / IRQ0
P16 / IRQ1 /
ADTRG
P12 / BACK
P13 / BREQ
P14 / WAIT
P15 / IRQ0
P16 / IRQ1 /
ADTRG
P12 / BACK P12
P13 / BREQ P13
P14 / WAIT
P15 / IRQ0
P14
P15 / IRQ0
P16 / IRQ1 / P16 / IRQ1 /
ADTRG
P17 / TMO
AS
ADTRG
P17 / TMO
P20
79
80
P17 / TMO
AS
P17 / TMO
AS
P17 / TMO
AS
NC NC
NC NC
Notes: 1. For the PROM mode, see section 17, “ROM.”
2. Pins marked NC should be left unconnected.
16
Pin Functions: Table 1-4 gives a concise description of the function of each pin.
Table 1-4 Pin Functions
Pin No.
CP-84, FP-80A,
Type
Symbol CG-84 TFP-80C I/O Name and Function
Power
VCC
16, 55 5, 42
I
I
I
Power: Connected to the power supply (+5 V).
Connect both VCC pins to the system power
supply (+5 V). The chip will not operate if either
pin is left unconnected.
VSS
2, 24
12, 29
Ground: Connected to ground (0 V).
Connect all VSS pins to the system power
supply (0 V). The chip will not operate if any VSS
pin is left unconnected.
41, 42 71
64, 83
Clock
XTAL
1
70
69
Crystal: Connected to a crystal oscillator.
The crystal frequency should be double the desired
ø clock frequency.
If an external clock is input at the EXTAL pin, leave
the XTAL pin unconnected.
EXTAL
84
I
External Crystal: Connected to a crystal
oscillator or external clock. The frequency of the
external clock should be double the desired ø clock
frequency. See section 8.2, “Oscillator Circuit” for
examples of connections to a crystal and external
clock.
ø
E
3
4
5
72
73
74
O
O
O
System Clock: Supplies the ø clock to peripheral
devices.
Enable Clock: Supplies an E clock to E clock
based peripheral devices.
System BACK
control
Bus Request Acknowledge: Indicates
that the bus right has been granted to an external
device. Notifies an external device that issued a
BREQ signal that it now has control of the bus.
17
Table 1-4 Pin Functions (cont)
Pin No.
CP-84, FP-80A,
Type
Symbol CG-84 TFP-80C I/O Name and Function
System BREQ
control
6
75
I
Bus Request: Sent by an external device to the
H8/534 or H4/536 to request the bus right.
Standby: A transition to the hardware standby
mode (a power-down state) occurs when a Low
input is received at the STBY pin.
STBY
20
9
I
RES
21
10
I/O Reset: Low input or low output due to watchdog timer
overflow causes the H8/534 or H8/536 chip to reset.
Address A19 – A8 54 – 43 41 – 30
bus A7 – A0 40 – 33 28 – 21
Data bus D7 – D0 32 – 25 20 – 13
O
Address Bus: Address output pins.
I/O Data Bus: 8-Bit bidirectional data bus.
Bus
WAIT
7
76
80
1
I
Wait: Requests the CPU to insert one or more Tw
states when accessing an off-chip address.
Address Strobe: Goes Low to indicate that there
is a valid address on the address bus.
Read/Write: Indicates whether the CPU is reading
or writing data on the bus.
control
AS
11
12
O
O
R/W
• High—Read
• Low—Write
DS
RD
WR
13
14
15
2
3
4
O
O
O
Data Strobe: Goes Low to indicate the presence
of valid data on the data bus.
Read: Goes Low to indicate that the CPU is
reading an external address.
Write: Goes Low to indicate that the CPU is
writing to an external address.
18
Table 1-4 Pin Functions (cont)
Pin No.
CP-84, FP-80A,
Symbol CG-84 TFP-80C I/O Name and Function
Type
Interrupt NMI
22
11
I
NonMaskable Interrupt: Highest-priority interrupt
request. The port 1 control register (P1CR)
determines whether the interrupt is requested on
the rising or falling edge of the NMI input.
Interrupt Request 0 and 1: Maskable interrupt
request pins.
IRQ0
IRQ1
8
77
78
38
39
40
41
8
I
9
IRQ2
51
52
53
54
19
18
17
IRQ3
IRQ4
IRQ5
OperatingMD2
I
Mode: Input pins for setting the MCU operating
mode
MD1
7
mode according to the table below.
control MD0
6
MD2 MD1 MD0 Mode
Description
0
0
0
0
0
1
Mode 0
—
Mode 1 Expanded minimum
mode (ROM disabled)
0
0
1
1
1
0
0
1
0
Mode 2 Expanded minimum
mode (ROM enabled)
Mode 3 Expanded maximum
mode (ROM disabled)
Mode 4 Expanded maximum
mode (ROM enabled)
1
1
1
0
1
1
1
0
1
Mode 5
Mode 6
—
—
Mode 7 Single-chip mode
The inputs at these pins must not be changed
while the chip is operating.
19
Table 1-4 Pin Functions (cont)
Pin No.
CP-84, FP-80A,
Type
Symbol CG-84 TFP-80C I/O Name and Function
16-Bit free- FTOA1
running FTOA2
63
75
76
60
61
62
60
61
62
50
61
62
47
48
49
47
48
49
O
O
I
FRT Output Compare A (channels 1, 2, and 3):
Output pins for the output compare A function
of free-running timer channels 1, 2, and 3.
FRT Output Compare B (channels 1, 2, and 3):
Output pins for the output compare B function
of free-running timer channels 1, 2, and 3.
FRT Counter Clock Input (channels 1, 2, and 3):
External clock input pins for the free-running
counters (FRCs) of free-running timer channels 1,
2, and 3.
timer (FRT) FTOA3
FTOB1
FTOB2
FTOB3
FTCI1
FTCI2
FTCI3
FTI1
FTI2
FTI3
57
58
59
10
44
45
46
79
I
FRT Input Capture (channels 1, 2, and 3):
Input capture pins for free-running timer
channels 1, 2, and 3.
8-Bit
timer
TMO
TMCI
TMRI
O
I
8-bit Timer Output: Compare-match output pin
for the 8-bit timer.
56
59
43
46
8-bit Timer Clock Input: External
clock input pin for the 8-bit timer counter.
8-bit Timer Counter Reset Input: A high input
at this pin resets the 8-bit timer counter.
PWM Timer Output (channels 1, 2, and 3):
Pulse-width modulation timer output pulses.
I
PWM
timer
PW1
PW2
PW3
77
78
79
63
64
65
O
20
Table 1-4 Pin Functions (cont)
Pin No.
CP-84, FP-80A,
Type
Symbol
CG-84 TFP-80C I/O Name and Function
Serial com- TXD1
munication TXD2
80
77
81
78
82
79
66
63
67
64
68
65
O
Transmit Data: Data output pins for serial
communication interfaces 1 and 2.
interface
signals
RXD1
RXD2
SCK1
SCK2
I
Receive Data: Data input pins for serial
communication interfaces 1 and 2.
I/O Serial Clock: Input/output pins for the serial
clock of serial interface 1 and 2.
A/D
AN7 – AN0 73 – 66 59 – 52
I
I
I
I
Analog Input: Analog signal input pins.
converter
AVCC
74
65
9
60
Analog Reference Voltage: Reference voltage
and power supply pin for the A/D converter.
Analog Ground: Ground pin for the A/D
converter.
AVSS
51
ADTRG
78
External Trigger: External trigger input pin
for the A/D converter.
Parallel
I/O
P17 – P10 10 – 3
79 – 72
I/O Port 1: An 8-bit input/output port. The
direction of each bit is determined by the port 1
data direction register (P1DDR).
P24 – P20 15 – 11 4 – 1,
80
I/O Port 2: A 5-bit input/output port. The
direction of each bit is determined by the port 2
data direction register (P2DDR).
P37 – P30 32 – 25 20 – 13
P47 – P40 40 – 33 28 – 21
I/O Port 3: An 8-bit input/output port. The
direction of each bit is determined by the port 3
data direction register (P3DDR).
I/O Port 4: An 8-bit input/output port. The
direction of each bit is determined by the port 4
data direction register (P4DDR). These pins
can drive LED indicators.
21
Table 1-4 Pin Functions (cont)
Pin No.
CP-84, FP-80A,
Type
Parallel
I/O
Symbol
CG-84 TFP-80C I/O Name and Function
P57 – P50 50 – 43 37 – 30
P63 – P60 54 – 51 41 – 38
P77 – P70 63 – 56 50 – 43
I/O Port 5: An 8-bit input/output port.
The direction of each bit is determined by the
port 5 data direction register (P5DDR).
These pins have built-in MOS input pull-ups.
I/O Port 6: A 4-bit input/output port. The direction
of each bit is determined by the port 6 data
direction register (P6DDR). These pins have
built-in MOS input pull-ups.
I/O Port 7: An 8-bit input/output port.
The direction of each bit is determined by the
port 7 data direction register (P7DDR).
These pins have Schmitt inputs.
P87 – P80 73 – 66 59 – 52
P97 – P90 82 – 75 68 – 61
I
Port 8: An 8-bit input port
I/O Port 9: An 8-bit input/output port.
The direction of each bit is determined by the
port 9 data direction register (P9DDR).
22
Section 2 MCU Operating Modes and Address Space
2.1 Overview
The H8/534 or H8/536 microcomputer unit (MCU) operates in five modes numbered 1, 2, 3, 4,
and 7. The mode is selected by the inputs at the mode pins (MD2 to MD0) at the instant when the
chip comes out of a reset. As indicated in table 2-1, the MCU mode determines the size of the
address space, the usage of on-chip ROM, and the operating mode of the CPU. The MCU mode
also affects the functions of I/O pins.
Table 2-1 Operating Modes
MD2 MD1 MD0 MCU Mode Address Space
On-Chip ROM CPU Mode
0
0
0
0
1
1
1
1
0
0
1
1
0
0
1
1
0
1
0
1
0
1
0
1
—
—
—
—
Mode 1
Mode 2
Mode 3
Mode 4
—
Expanded minimum
Expanded minimum
Expanded maximum
Expanded maximum
—
Disabled
Enabled
Disabled
Enabled
—
Minimum mode
Minimum mode
Maximum mode
Maximum mode
—
—
—
—
—
Mode 7
Single-chip only
Enabled
Minimum mode
Notation: 0: Low level
1: High level
—: Cannot be used
Modes 1 to 4 are referred to as “expanded” because they permit access to off-chip memory and
peripheral addresses. The expanded minimum modes (modes 1 and 2) support a maximum
address space of 64 kbytes. The expanded maximum modes (modes 3 and 4) support a maximum
address space of 1 Mbyte.
Interrupt service is slightly slower in the expanded maximum modes than in the other modes
because the CPU has to save its code page register.
In single-chip mode all ports are available for general-purpose input and output, but off-chip
addresses cannot be accessed.
The H8/534 and H8/536 cannot be set to modes 0, 5, and 6. The mode pins should never be set to
these values.
The inputs at the mode pins must not be changed while the chip is operating.
23
2.2 Mode Descriptions
The five MCU modes are described below. For further information on the I/O pin functions in
each mode, see section 9, “I/O Ports.”
Mode 1 (Expanded Minimum Mode): Mode 1 supports a maximum 64-kbyte address space
which does not include any on-chip ROM. Ports 1 to 5 are used for bus lines and bus control
signals as follows:
Control signals: Ports 1* and 2
Data bus:
Port 3
Address bus:
Ports 4 and 5
* The functions of individual pins of port 1 are software-selectable.
Mode 2 (Expanded Minimum Mode): Mode 2 supports a maximum 64-kbyte address space of
which the first part is in on-chip ROM. Ports 1 to 5 are used for bus lines and bus control signals
as follows:
Control signals: Ports 1* and 2
Data bus:
Port 3
Address bus:
Ports 4 and 5*
* The functions of individual pins in ports 1 and 5 are software-selectable.
Note: In mode 2, port 5 is initially a general-purpose input port. Software must change it to
output before using it for the address bus. See section 9.6, “Port 5” for details. The following
instruction makes all pins of port 5 into output pins:
MOV.B #H'FF, @H'FE88*
* H'xx or H'xxxx express the hexadecimal number.
Mode 3 (Expanded Maximum Mode): Mode 3 supports a maximum 1-Mbyte address space
which does not include any on-chip ROM. Ports 1 to 6 are used for bus lines and bus control
signals as follows:
Control signals: Ports 1* and 2
Data bus:
Port 3
Address bus:
Ports 4, 5, and 6
* The functions of individual pins of port 1 are software-selectable.
24
Mode 4 (Expanded Maximum Mode): Mode 4 supports a maximum 1-Mbyte address space of
which the first part is in on-chip ROM. Ports 1 to 6 are used for bus lines and bus control signals
as follows:
Control signals: Ports 1* and 2
Data bus:
Port 3
Address bus:
Ports 4, 5*, and 6*
* The functions of individual pins in ports 1, 5, and 6 are software-selectable.
Note: In mode 4, ports 5 and 6 are initially general-purpose input ports. Software must change
them to output before using them for the address bus. See section 9.6, “Port 5” and 10.7, “Port 6”
for details. The following instruction sets all pins of ports 5 and 6 to output:
MOV.W #H'FFFF, @H'FE88
Mode 7 (Single-Chip Mode): In this mode all memory is on-chip. It is not possible to access
off-chip addresses.
The single-chip mode provides the maximum number of ports. All the pins associated with the
address and data buses in the expanded modes are available as general-purpose input/output ports
in the single-chip mode.
2.3 Address Space Map
2.3.1 Page Segmentation
The address space is segmented into 64-kbyte pages. In the single-chip mode and expanded
minimum modes there is just one page: page 0. In the expanded maximum modes there can be
up to 16 pages. Figure 2-1 shows the address space of the H8/534 in each mode and indicates
which parts are on- and off-chip. Figure 2-2 shows the address space of the H8/536.
25
2.3.2 Page 0 Address Allocations
The high and low address areas in page 0 are reserved for registers and vector tables.
Vector Tables: The low address area contains the exception vector table and DTC vector table.
The CPU accesses the exception vector table to obtain the addresses of user-coded exception-
handling routines. The DTC vector table contains pointers to tables of register information used
by the on-chip chip data transfer controller. The size of these tables depends on the CPU
operating mode. Details are given in section 4.1.3, “Exception Factors and Vector Table,” section
5.2.3, “Interrupt Vector Table,” and section 6.3.2, “DTC Vector Table.”
In modes 2 and 4 the vector tables are located in on-chip ROM. In modes 1, 3, and 7 the vector
tables are in external memory.
Register Field: The highest 384 addresses in page 0 (addresses H'FE80 to H'FFFF) belong to
control, status, and data registers used by the I/O ports and on-chip supporting modules. Program
code cannot be located at these addresses.
The CPU accesses addresses in this register field like other addresses in the address space. By
reading and writing at these addresses the CPU controls the on-chip supporting modules and
communicates via the I/O ports. A complete map of the register field is given in appendix B.
On-Chip RAM: One of the control registers in the register field is a RAM control register
(RAMCR) containing a RAM enable bit (RAME) that enables or disables the 2-kbyte on-chip
RAM. When this bit is set to 1 (its default value), addresses H'F680 to H'FE7F are located on-
chip. When this bit is cleared to 0, these addresses are located in external memory and the on-chip
RAM is not used. See section 16, “RAM” for further information.
The RAME bit is bit 7 at address H'FF11.
Coding Example:
To enable on-chip RAM: BSET.B #7, @H'FF11
To disable on-chip RAM: BCLR.B #7, @H'FF11
Note: If on-chip RAM is disabled in the single-chip mode, access to addresses H'F680 to H'FE7F
causes an address error.
26
2.4 Mode Control Register (MDCR)
Another control register in the register field in page 0 is the mode control register (MDCR). The
mode control register can be read by the CPU, but not written. Table 3-2 lists the attributes of this
register.
Table 2-2 Mode Control Register
Name
Abbreviation
Read/Write
Address
Mode control register
MDCR
Read only
H'FF12
The bit configuration of this register is shown below.
Bit
7
—
1
6
—
1
5
—
0
4
—
0
3
—
0
2
1
0
MDS0
*
MDS2
MDS1
Initial value
Read/Write
*
*
—
—
—
—
—
R
R
R
* Initialized according to MD2 to MD0.
Bits 7 and 6—Reserved: These bits cannot be modified and are always read as 1.
Bits 5 to 3—Reserved: These bits cannot be modified and are always read as 0.
Bits 2 to 0—Mode Select 2 to 0 (MDS2 to MDS0): These bits indicate the values of the mode
pins (MD2 to MD0) latched on the rising edge of the signal. MDS2 corresponds to MD2, MDS1
to MD1, and MDS0 to MD0. These bits can be read but not written.
Coding Example: To test whether the MCU is operating in mode 1:
CMP:G.B #H'C1, @H'FF12
The comparison is with H'C1 instead of H'01 because bits 7 and 6 are always read as 1.
27
Section 3 CPU
3.1 Overview
The H8/534 and H8/536 have the H8/500 Family CPU: a high-speed central processing unit
designed for realtime control of a wide range of medium-scale office and industrial equipment. Its
Hitachi-original architecture features eight 16-bit general registers, internal 16-bit data paths, and
an optimized instruction set.
Section 3 summarizes the CPU architecture and instruction set.
3.1.1 Features
The main features of the H8/500 CPU are listed below.
• General-register machine
— Eight 16-bit general registers
— Seven control registers (two 16-bit registers, five 8-bit registers)
• High speed: maximum 16 MHz (S-mask versions)
At 16 MHz a register-register add operation takes only 125 ns.
• Address space managed in 64-kbyte pages, expandable to 1 Mbyte*
Page registers make four pages available simultaneously: a code page, stack page, data page,
and extended page.
• Two CPU operating modes:
— Minimum mode: Maximum 64-kbyte address space
— Maximum mode: Maximum 1 Mbyte address space*
• Highly orthogonal instruction set
Addressing modes and data sizes can be specified independently within each instruction.
• 1.5 Addressing modes
Register-register and register-memory operations are supported.
• Optimized for efficient programming in C language
In addition to the general registers and orthogonal instruction set, the CPU has special short
formats for frequently-used instructions and addressing modes.
* The CPU architecture supports up to 16 Mbytes of external memory, but the H8/534 and
H8/536 have only enough address pins to address 1 Mbyte.
31
3.1.2 Address Space
The address space size depends on the operating mode.
The H8/534 or H8/536 MCU has five operating modes, which are selected by the input to the
mode pins (MD2 to MD0) when the chip comes out of a reset. The CPU, however, has only two
operating modes. The MCU operating mode determines the CPU operating mode, which in turn
determines the maximum address space size as indicated in figure 3-1.
Maximum address space: 64 kbytes
Minimum mode
Hightest address: H'FFFF
CPU operating mode
Maximum address space: 1 Mbyte
Maximum mode
Hightest address: H'FFFFF
Figure 3-1 CPU Operating Modes
32
3.1.3 Register Configuration
Figure 3-2 shows the register structure of the CPU. There are two groups of registers: the general
registers (Rn) and control registers (CR).
General registers (Rn)
15
0
R 0
R 1
R 2
R 3
R 4
R 5
R 6
(FP)
FP: Frame Pointer
SP: Stack Pointer
R 7 (SP)
Control registers (CR)
15
0
P C
S R
PC: Program Counter
C C R
15
8 7
0
N Z V C
SR: Status Register
T
I2 I1 I0
CCR: Condition Code Register
CP: Code Page register
C P
D P
E P
T P
DP: Data Page register
EP: Extended Page register
TP: sTack Page register
B R
BR: Base Register
Figure 3-2 Registers in the CPU
33
3.2 CPU Register Descriptions
3.2.1 General Registers
All eight of the 16-bit general registers are functionally alike; there is no distinction between data
registers and address registers. When these registers are accessed as data registers, either byte or
word size can be selected.
R6 and R7, in addition to functioning as general registers, have special assignments.
R7 is the stack pointer, used implicitly in exception handling and subroutine calls. It can be
designated by the name SP, which is synonymous with R7. As indicated in figure 3-3, it points to
the top of the stack. It is also used implicitly by the LDM and STM instructions, which load and
store multiple registers from and to the stack and pre-decrement or post-increment R7 accordingly.
R6 functions as a frame pointer (FP). The LINK and UNLK instructions use R6 implicitly to
reserve or release a stack frame.
Unused area
SP
Stack area
Figure 3-3 Stack Pointer
34
3.2.2 Control Registers
The CPU control registers (CR) include a 16-bit program counter (PC), a 16-bit status register
(SR), four 8-bit page registers, and one 8-bit base register (BR).
Program Counter (PC): This 16-bit register indicates the address of the next instruction the
CPU will execute.
Status Register (SR): This 16-bit register contains internal status information. The lower half of
the status register is referred to as the condition code register (CCR): it can be accessed as a
separate condition code byte.
CCR
Bit
15 14 13 12 11 10
9
8
7
6
5
4
3
2
Z
1
0
T
—
—
—
—
I2 I1 I0
—
—
—
—
N
V
C
Bit 15—Trace (T): When this bit is set to 1, the CPU operates in trace mode and generates a
trace exception after every instruction. See section 4.4, “Trace” for a description of the trace
exception-handling sequence.
When the value of this bit is 0, instructions are executed in normal continuous sequence. This bit
is cleared to 0 at a reset.
Bits 14 to 11—Reserved: These bits cannot be modified and are always read as 0.
Bits 10 to 8—Interrupt Mask (I2, I1, I0): These bits indicate the interrupt request mask level
(0 to 7). As shown in table 3-1, an interrupt request is not accepted unless it has a higher level
than the value of the mask. A nonmaskable interrupt (NMI), which has level 8, is accepted at any
mask level. After an interrupt is accepted, I2, I1, and I0 are changed to the level of the interrupt.
Table 3-2 indicates the values of the I bits after an interrupt is accepted.
A reset sets all three bits (I2, I1, and I0) to 1, masking all interrupts except NMI.
35
Table 3-1 Interrupt Mask Levels
Mask
Mask Bits
I2 I1 I0
Priority
Level
Interrupts Accepted
NMI
High
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
0
1
1
1
1
0
0
0
0
1
1
0
0
1
1
0
0
1
0
1
0
1
0
1
0
Level 7 and NMI
Levels 6 to 7 and NMI
Levels 5 to 7 and NMI
Levels 4 to 7 and NMI
Levels 3 to 7 and NMI
Levels 2 to 7 and NMI
Levels 1 to 7 and NMI
Low
Table 3-2 Interrupt Mask Bits after an Interrupt is Accepted
Level of Interrupt Accepted
I2
1
1
1
1
1
0
0
0
I1
1
1
1
0
0
1
1
0
I0
1
1
0
1
0
1
0
1
NMI (8)
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
36
Bits 7 to 4—Reserved: These bits cannot be modified and are always read as 0.
Bit 3—Negative (N): This bit indicates the most significant bit (sign bit) of the result of an
instruction.
Bit 2—Zero (Z): This bit is set to 1 to indicate a zero result and cleared to 0 to indicate a nonzero
result.
Bit 1—Overflow (V): This bit is set to 1 when an arithmetic overflow occurs, and cleared to 0 at
other times.
Bit 0—Carry (C): This bit is set to 1 when a carry or borrow occurs at the most significant bit,
and is cleared to 0 (or left unchanged) at other times.
The specific changes that occur in the condition code bits when each instruction is executed are
listed in appendix A.1 “Instruction Tables.” See the H8/500 Series Programming Manual for
further details.
Page Registers: The code page register (CP), data page register (DP), extended page register
(EP), and stack page register (TP) are 8-bit registers that are used only in the maximum mode. No
use of their contents is made in the minimum mode.
In the maximum mode, the page registers combine with the program counter and general registers
to generate 24-bit effective addresses as shown in figure 3-4, thereby expanding the program area,
data area, and stack area.
37
Page register
8 Bits
PC or general register
16 Bits
PC
CP
R0
R1
R2
DP
R3
@ aa : 16
R4
R5
EP
TP
R6
R7
24 Bits (effective address)
Figure 3-4 Combinations of Page Registers with Other Registers
Code Page Register (CP): The code page register and the program counter combine to generate
a 24-bit program code address. In the maximum mode, the code page register is initialized at a
reset to a value loaded from the vector table, and both the code page register and program counter
38
are saved and restored in exception handling.
Data Page Register (DP): The data page register combines with general registers R0 to R3 to
generate a 24-bit effective address. The data page register contains the upper 8 bits of the address.
It is used to calculate effective addresses in the register indirect addressing mode using R0 to R3,
and in the 16-bit absolute addressing mode (@aa:16).
The data page register is rewritten by the LDC instruction.
Extended Page Register (EP): The extended page register combines with general register R4 or
R5 to generate a 24-bit operand address. The extended page register contains the upper 8 bits of
the address. It is used to calculate effective addresses in the register indirect addressing mode
using R4 or R5.
The extended page can be used as an additional data page.
Stack Page Register (TP): The stack page register combines with R6 (FP) or R7 (SP) to
generate a 24-bit stack address. The stack page register contains the upper 8 bits of the address. It
is used to calculate effective addresses in the register indirect addressing mode using R6 or R7, in
exception handling, and subroutine calls.
Base Register (BR): This 8-bit register stores the base address used in the short absolute
addressing mode (@aa:8). In this addressing mode a 16-bit effective address in page 0 is
generated by using the contents of the base register as the upper 8 bits and an address given in the
instruction code as the lower 8 bits. See figure 3-5.
In the short absolute addressing mode the address is always located in page 0.
8 Bits
BR
8 Bits
@ aa : 8
16 Bits (effective address)
Figure 3-5 Short Absolute Addressing Mode and Base Register
39
3.2.3 Initial Register Values
When the CPU is reset, its internal registers are initialized as shown in table 3-3. Note that the
stack pointer (R7) and base register (BR) are not initialized to fixed values. Also, of the page
registers used in maximum mode, only the code page register (CP) is initialized; the other three
page registers come out of the reset state with undetermined values.
Accordingly, in the minimum mode the first instruction executed after a reset should initialize the
stack pointer. The base register must also be initialized before the short absolute addressing mode
(@aa:8) is used.
In the maximum mode, the first instruction executed after a reset should initialize the stack page
register (TP) and the next instruction should initialize the stack pointer. Later instructions should
initialize the base register and the other page registers as necessary.
40
Table 3-3 Initial Values of Registers
Initial Value
Maximum Mode
Register
Minimum Mode
General registers
15
0
0
Undetermined
Undetermined
R7 – R0
Control registers
15
Loaded from vector table
Loaded from vector table
PC
SR
CCR
15
8 7
0
H'070x
H'070x
T– – – – I2I1I0 – – – – NZVC
(x: undetermined)
(x: undetermined)
7
7
7
7
7
0
CP
DP
EP
TP
BR
Undetermined
Undetermined
Undetermined
Undetermined
Undetermined
Loaded from vector table
Undetermined
0
0
0
0
Undetermined
Undetermined
Undetermined
3.3 Data Formats
The H8/500 CPU can process 1-bit data, 4-bit BCD data, 8-bit (byte) data, 16-bit (word) data, and
32-bit (longword) data.
• Bit manipulation instructions operate on 1-bit data.
• Decimal arithmetic instructions operate on 4-bit BCD data.
• Almost all instructions operate on byte and word data.
• Multiply and divide instructions operate on longword data.
3.3.1 Data Formats in General Registers
Data of all the sizes above can be stored in general registers as shown in table 3-4.
41
Bit data locations are specified by bit number. Bit 15 is the most significant bit. Bit 0 is the least
significant bit. BCD and byte data are stored in the lower 8 bits of a general register. Word data
use all 16 bits of a general register. Longword data use two general registers: the upper 16 bits
are stored in Rn (n must be an even number); the lower 16 bits are stored in Rn+1.
Operations performed on BCD data or byte data do not affect the upper 8 bits of the register.
Table 3-4 General Register Data Formats
Data Type
Register No.
Data Structure
1-Bit
15
15 14 13 12 11 10
0
0
0
9
8
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
0
Rn
BCD
15
8
7
4
3
Don’t-care
Don’t-care
Upper digit
Lower digit
Rn
Rn
Rn
Byte
15
15
8
7
MSB
LSB
LSB
LSB
Word
0
MSB
Longword
31
MSB
16
0
Rn*
Rn+1*
Upper 16 bits
Lower 16 bits
15
* For longword data n must be even (0, 2, 4, or 6).
3.3.2 Data Formats in Memory
Table 3-5 indicates the data formats in memory.
Instructions that access bit data in memory have byte or word operands. The instruction specifies
a bit number to indicate a specific bit in the operand.
Access to word data in memory must always begin at an even address. Access to word data
starting at an odd address causes an address error. The upper 8 bits of word data are stored in
address n (where n is an even number); the lower 8 bits are stored in address n+1.
42
Table 3-5 Data Formats in Memory
Data Type
Data Format
1-Bit (in byte
operand data)
7
0
Address n
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
0
1-Bit (in word
operand data)
Even address
Odd address
15 14 13 12 11 10
9
1
8
0
7
6
5
4
3
2
Byte
MSB
LSB
LSB
Address n
Word
Even address MSB
Odd address
Upper 8 bits
Lower 8 bits
When the stack is accessed in exception processing (to save or restore the program counter, code
page register, or status register), word access is always performed, regardless of the actual data
size. Similarly, when the stack is accessed by an instruction using the pre-decrement or post-
increment register indirect addressing mode specifying R7 (@–R7 or @R7+), which is the stack
pointer, word access is performed regardless of the operand size specified in the instruction. An
address error will therefore occur if the stack pointer indicates an odd address. Programs should
be coded so that the stack pointer always indicates an even address.
Table 3-6 shows the data formats on the stack.
43
Table 3-6 Data Formats on the Stack
Data Type
Byte data
on stack
Data Format
Even address
Odd address
Don’t-care
MSB
MSB
LSB
LSB
Word data
on stack
Even address
Odd address
Upper 8 bits
Lower 8 bits
3.4 Instructions
3.4.1 Basic Instruction Formats
There are two basic CPU instruction formats: the general format and the special format.
General Format: This format consists of an effective address (EA) field, an effective address
extension field, and an operation code (OP) field. The effective address is placed before the
operation code because this results in faster execution of the instruction.
Effective address field
Effective address extension
Operation code
• Effective address field:
One byte containing information used to calculate the effective
address of an operand.
• Effective address extension: Zero to two bytes containing a displacement value, immediate
data, or an absolute address. The size of the effective address
extension is specified in the effective address field.
• Operation code:
Defines the operation to be carried out on the operand located at
the address calculated from the effective address information.
Some instructions (DADD, DSUB, MOVFPE, MOVTPE) have
an extended format in which the operand code is preceded by a
one-byte prefix code.
44
• (Example of prefix code in DADD instruction)
Effective address
Prefix code
Operation code
10100rrr
10100rrr
00000000
Special Format: In this format the operation code comes first, followed by the effective address
field and effective address extension. This format is used in branching instructions, system
control instructions, and other instructions that can be executed faster if the operation is specified
before the operand.
Operation code
Effective address field
Effective address extension
• Operation code: One or two bytes defining the operation to be performed by the instruction.
• Effective address field and effective address extension: Zero to three bytes containing
information used to calculate an effective address.
3.4.2 Addressing Modes
The CPU supports 7 addressing modes: (1) register direct; (2) register indirect; (3) register
indirect with displacement; (4) register indirect with pre-decrement or post-increment; (5)
immediate; (6) absolute; and (7) PC-relative.
Due to the highly orthogonal nature of the instruction set, most instructions having operands can
use any applicable addressing mode from (1) through (6). The PC-relative mode (7) is used by
branching instructions.
In most instructions, the addressing mode is specified in the effective address field. The effective-
address extension, if present, contains a displacement, immediate data, or an absolute address.
Table 3-7 indicates how the addressing mode is specified in the effective address field.
45
Table 3-7 Addressing Modes
No.
Addressing Mode
Mnemonic
EA Field
EA Extension
1
Register direct
Rn
1 0 1 0 Sz r r r
None
*1
*2
2
3
Register indirect
@Rn
1 1 0 1 Sz r r r
1 1 1 0 Sz r r r
1 1 1 1 Sz r r r
1 0 1 1 Sz r r r
1 1 0 0 Sz r r r
None
Register indirect
@(d:8,Rn)
@(d:16,Rn)
@–Rn
Displacement (1 byte)
Displacement (2 bytes)
with displacement
4
Register indirect
with pre-decrement
Register indirect
with post-increment
None
@Rn+
5
6
7
Immediate
Absolute *3
PC-relative
#xx:8
0 0 0 0 0 1 0 0
0 0 0 0 1 1 0 0
0 0 0 0 Sz 1 0 1
0 0 0 1 Sz 1 0 1
Immediate data (1 byte)
Immediate data (2 bytes)
#xx:16
@aa:8
@aa:16
disp
1-Byte absolute address
(offset from BR)
2-Byte absolute address
No EA field.
1- or 2-byte displacement
Addressing mode
is specified in the
operation code.
Notes: * 1 Sz: Specifies the operand size.
When Sz = 0: byte operand
When Sz = 1: word operand
* 2 rrr: Register number field, specifying a general register number.
0 0 0 — R0
1 0 0 — R4
0 0 1 — R1
1 0 1 — R5
0 1 0 — R2
1 1 0 — R6
0 1 1 — R3
1 1 1 — R7
* 3 The @aa:8 addressing mode is also referred to as the short absolute addressing mode.
46
3.4.3 Effective Address Calculation
Table 3-8 explains how the effective address is calculated in each addressing mode.
Table 3-8 Effective Address Calculation
No.
Addressing Mode Effective Address Calculation Effective Address
1
Register direct
Rn
—
Operand is contents of
Rn
1010Sz
rrr
2
3
Register indirect
@Rn
—
23
15
0
0
DP *1
Rn
1101Sz
rrr
Or TP or EP *2
Register indirect
8 Bits
with displacement 15
@(d:8,Rn)
0
0
23
15
Rn
DP *1
Result
15
Or TP or EP *2
+
1110Sz
rrr
Displacement with
sign extension
@(d:16,Rn)
16 Bits
1111Sz
rrr
15
15
15
0
23
15
0
0
Rn
DP *1
Result
Result
0
0
Or TP or EP *2
+
–
Displacement
4
Register indirect
23
15
with pre-decrement
Rn
DP *1
@–Rn
Or TP or EP *2
1 or 2
Rn is decremented by –1 or –2
before instruction execution.*3*4*5
1011Sz
rrr
Register indirect
with post-increment
@Rn+
—
23
15
0
DP *1
Rn
Rn is incremented by +1 or +2
after instruction execution.*3*4*5
1100Sz
rrr
Or TP or EP *2
47
Table 3-8 Effective Address Calculation (cont)
No.
Addressing Mode Effective Address Calculation
Effective Address
5
Absolute address
@aa:8
—
23
15
0
0
H'00
BR
0000Sz101
EA extension data
@aa:16
—
—
23
15
0001Sz101
DP
EA extension data
6
7
Immediate
#xx:8
Operand is 1-byte EA
extension data.
00000100
#xx:16
—
Operand is 2-byte EA
extension data.
00001100
PC-relative
disp:8
8 Bits
15
0
0
23
15
0
No EA code
PC
CP *1
Result
Specified in OP code
15
Displacement with
sign extension
disp:16
16 Bits
23
15
0
No EA code
15
0
CP *1
Result
Specified in OP code
PC
15
0
Displacement
48
Notes: * 1 The page register is ignored in minimum mode.
* 2 The page register used in addressing modes 2, 3, and 4 depends on the general register :
DP for R0, R1, R2, or R3; EP for R4 or R5; TP for R6 or R7.
* 3 Decrement by –1 for a byte operand, and by –2 for a word operand.
* 4 The pre-decrement or post-increment is always ±2 when R7 is specified, even if the
operand is byte size.
* 5 The drawing below shows what happens when the @-SP and @ SP+ addressing
modes are used to save and restore the stack pointer.
SP
Old SP–2 (upper byte) SP
Old SP–2 (lower byte)
SP
MOV.W SP, @–SP
MOV.W @SP+, SP
49
3.5 Instruction Set
3.5.1 Overview
The main features of the CPU instruction set are:
• A general-register architecture.
• Orthogonality. Addressing modes and data sizes can be specified independently in each instruction.
• 1.5 addressing modes (supporting register-register and register-memory operations)
• Affinity for high-level languages, particularly C, with short formats for frequently-used
instructions and addressing modes.
The CPU instruction set includes 63 types of instructions, listed by function in table 3-9.
Table 3-9 Instruction Classification
Function
Instructions
Types
7
Data transfer
MOV, LDM, STM, XCH, SWAP, MOVTPE, MOVFPE
ADD, SUB, ADDS, SUBS, ADDX, SUBX, DADD, DSUB,
MULXU, DIVXU, CMP, EXTS, EXTU, TST, NEG, CLR,
TAS
Arithmetic operations
17
Logic operations
Shift
AND, OR, XOR, NOT
4
8
SHAL, SHAR, SHLL, SHLR, ROTL, ROTR, ROTXL,
ROTXR
Bit manipulation
Branch
BSET, BCLR, BTST, BNOT
4
Bcc*, JMP, PJMP, BSR, JSR, PJSR, RTS, PRTD,
PRTS, RTD, SCB (/F, /NE, /EQ)
TRAPA, TRAP/VS, RTE, SLEEP, LDC, STC, ANDC,
ORC, XORC, NOP, LINK, UNLK
Total
11
System control
12
63
* Bcc is a conditional branch instruction in which cc represents a condition code.
Tables 3-10 to 3-16 give a concise summary of the instructions in each functional category. The
MOV, ADD, and CMP instructions have special short formats, which are listed in table 3-17. For
detailed descriptions of the instructions, refer to the H8/500 Series Programming Manual.
The notation used in tables 3-10 to 3-17 is defined below.
50
Operation Notation
Rd
Rs
General register (destination)
General register (source)
General register
Destination operand
Source operand
Condition code register
N (negative) bit of CCR
Z (zero) bit of CCR
V (overflow) bit of CCR
C (carry) bit of CCR
Control register
Program counter
Code page register
Stack pointer
Rn
(EAd)
(EAs)
CCR
N
Z
V
C
CR
PC
CP
SP
FP
#IMM
disp
+
Frame pointer
Immediate data
Displacement
Addition
–
Subtraction
×
÷
Multiplication
Division
AND logical
OR logical
Exclusive OR logical
Move
Exchange
→
↔
¬
Not
51
3.5.2 Data Transfer Instructions
Table 3-10 describes the seven data transfer instructions.
Table 3-10 Data Transfer Instructions
Instruction
Data
Size*
Function
MOV
MOV:G
(EAs) → (EAd), #IMM → (EAd)
transfer
B/W
B
Moves data between two general registers, or between
a general register and memory, or moves immediate data
to a general register or memory.
MOV:E
MOV:I
MOV:F
MOV:L
MOV:S
W
B/W
B/W
B/W
W
LDM
Stack → Rn (register list)
Pops data from the stack to one or more registers.
Rn (register list) → stack
STM
W
W
B
B
Pushes data from one or more registers onto the stack.
Rs ↔ Rd
XCH
Exchanges data between two general registers.
Rd (upper byte) ↔ Rd (lower byte)
Exchanges the upper and lower bytes in a general register.
Rn → (EAd)
SWAP
MOVTPE
Transfers data from a general register to memory in
synchronization with the E clock.
(EAs) → Rd
MOVFPE
B
Transfers data from memory to a general register in
synchronization with the E clock.
Note: B—byte; W—word
52
3.5.3 Arithmetic Instructions
Table 3-11 describes the 17 arithmetic instructions.
Table 3-11 Arithmetic Instructions
Instruction
Size
Function
Arithmetic ADD
Rd ± (EAs) → Rd, (EAd) ± #IMM → (EAd)
Performs addition or subtraction on data in a general
register and data in another general register or memory, or
on immediate data and data in a general register or memory.
operations
ADD:G
ADD:Q
SUB
B/W
B/W
B/W
B/W
B/W
B/W
B/W
ADDS
SUBS
ADDX
SUBX
Rd ± (EAs) ± C → Rd
Performs addition or subtraction with carry or borrow on
data in a general register and data in another general
register or memory, or on immediate data and data in a
general register or memory.
DADD
DSUB
B
B
(Rd)10 ± (Rs)10 ± C → (Rd)10
Performs decimal addition or subtraction on data in two
general registers.
MULXU
DIVXU
CMP
B/W
Rd × (EAs) → Rd
Performs 8-bit × 8-bit or 16-bit × 16-bit unsigned
multiplication on data in a general register and data in
another general register or memory, or on data in a
general register and immediate data.
B/W
Rd ÷ (EAs) → Rd
Performs 16-bit ÷ 8-bit or 32-bit ÷ 16-bit unsigned division
on data in a general register and data in another general
register or memory, or on data in a general register and
immediate data.
Rn – (EAs), (EAd) – #IMM
CMP:G
B/W
B
Compares data in a general register with data in another
general register or memory, or with immediate data, or
compares immediate data with data in memory.
CMP:E
CMP:I
W
Note: B—byte; W—word
53
Table 3-11 Arithmetic Instructions (cont)
Instruction
Arithmetic
operations
Size
Function
EXTS
EXTU
B
(<bit 7> of <Rd>) → (<bits 15 to 8> of <Rd>)
Converts byte data in a general register to word data by
extending the sign bit.
B
0 → (<bits 15 to 8> of <Rd>)
Converts byte data in a general register to word data by
padding with zero bits.
TST
NEG
B/W
B/W
(EAd) – 0
Compares general register or memory contents with 0.
0 – (EAd) → (EAd)
Obtains the two’s complement of general register or
memory contents.
CLR
TAS
B/W
B
0 → (EAd)
Clears general register or memory contents to 0.
(EAd) — 0, (1)2 → (<bit 7> of <EAd>)
Tests general register or memory contents, then sets the
most significant bit (bit 7) to 1.
Note: B—byte; W—word
3.5.4 Logic Operations
Table 3-12 lists the four instructions that perform logic operations.
Table 3-12 Logic Operation Instructions
Instruction
Logical
Size
Function
AND
OR
B/W
Rd (EAs) → Rd
operations
Performs a logical AND operation on a general register
and another general register, memory, or immediate data.
Rd (EAs) → Rd
B/W
B/W
B/W
Performs a logical OR operation on a general register and
another general register, memory, or immediate data.
Rd (EAs) → Rd
XOR
NOT
Performs a logical exclusive OR operation on a general register
and another general register, memory, or immediate data.
¬ (EAd) → (EAd)
Obtains the one’s complement of general register or memory
contents.
Note: B—byte; W—word
54
3.5.5 Shift Operations
Table 3-13 lists the eight shift instructions.
Table 3-13 Shift Instructions
Instruction
Size
B/W
B/W
Function
Shift
SHAL
(EAd) shift → (EAd)
operations SHAR
Performs an arithmetic shift operation on general register
or memory contents.
SHLL
SHLR
B/W
B/W
(EAd) shift → (EAd)
Performs a logical shift operation on general register or
memory contents.
ROTL
B/W
B/W
B/W
B/W
(EAd) shift → (EAd)
ROTR
Rotates general register or memory contents.
(EAd) rotate through carry → (EAd)
Rotates general register or memory contents through the
C (carry) bit.
ROTXL
ROTXR
Note: B—byte; W—word
55
3.5.6 Bit Manipulations
Table 3-14 describes the four bit-manipulation instructions.
Table 3-14 Bit-Manipulation Instructions
Instruction
Bit
Size
Function
BSET
BCLR
BNOT
BTST
B/W
¬ (<bit-No.> of <EAd>) → Z,
manipu-
lations
1 → (<bit-No.> of <EAd>)
Tests a specified bit in a general register or memory, then
sets the bit to 1. The bit is specified by a bit number
given in immediate data or a general register.
¬ (<bit-No.> of <EAd>) → Z,
B/W
B/W
B/W
0 → (<bit-No.> of <EAd>)
Tests a specified bit in a general register or memory, then
clears the bit to 0. The bit is specified by a bit number
given in immediate data or a general register.
¬ (<bit-No.> of <EAd>) → Z,
→ (<bit-No.> of <EAd>)
Tests a specified bit in a general register or memory, then
inverts the bit. The bit is specified by a bit number given
in immediate data or a general register.
¬ (<bit-No.> of <EAd>) → Z
Tests a specified bit in a general register or memory. The
bit is specified by a bit number given in immediate data or
a general register.
Note: B—byte; W—word
56
3.5.7 Branching Instructions
Table 3-15 describes the 11 branching instructions.
Table 3-15 Branching Instructions
Instruction
Size
Function
Branch
Bcc
—
Branches if condition cc is true.
Mnemonic
BRA (BT)
BRN (BF)
BHI
Description
Always (true)
Never (false)
HIgh
Condition
True
False
C
C
Z = 0
Z = 1
BLS
Low or Same
Carry Clear
(High or Same)
Carry Set (Low)
Not Equal
BCC (BHS)
C = 0
BCS (BLO)
BNE
C = 1
Z = 0
Z = 1
V = 0
V = 1
N = 0
N = 1
BEQ
Equal
BVC
Overflow Clear
Overflow Set
Plus
BVS
BPL
BMI
Minus
BGE
Greater or Equal
Less Than
Greater Than
Less or Equal
N
N
Z
Z
V = 0
BLT
V = 1
BGT
(N V) = 0
(N V) = 1
BLE
JMP
—
—
—
—
—
—
Branches unconditionally to a specified address in the same page.
Branches unconditionally to a specified address in a specified page.
Branches to a subroutine at a specified address in the same page.
Branches to a subroutine at a specified address in the same page.
Branches to a subroutine at a specified address in a specified page.
Returns from a subroutine in the same page.
PJMP
BSR
JSR
PJSR
RTS
57
Table 3-15 Branching Instructions (cont)
Instruction
Size
—
Function
Branch
PRTS
RTD
Returns from a subroutine in a different page.
Returns from a subroutine in the same page and adjusts
the stack pointer.
—
PRTD
—
Returns from a subroutine in a different page and adjusts
the stack pointer.
SCB/F
—
—
—
Controls a loop using a loop counter and/or a specified
termination condition.
SCB/NE
SCB/EQ
58
3.5.8 System Control Instructions
Table 3-16 describes the 12 system control instructions.
Table 3-16 System Control Instructions
Instruction
System
Size
—
Function
TRAPA
Generates a trap exception with a specified vector number.
Generates a trap exception if the V bit is set to 1 when
the instruction is executed.
control
TRAP/VS
—
RTE
—
—
Returns from an exception-handling routine.
FP → @–SP; SP → FP; SP + #IMM → SP
Creates a stack frame.
LINK
UNLK
—
FP → SP; @SP+ → FP
Deallocates a stack frame created by the LINK instruction.
Causes a transition to the power-down state.
(EAs) → CR
SLEEP
LDC
—
B/W*
Moves immediate data or general register or memory
contents to a specified control register.
CR → (EAd)
STC
B/W*
Moves control register data to a specified general register
or memory location.
ANDC
ORC
B/W*
B/W*
B/W*
CR #IMM → CR
Logically ANDs a control register with immediate data.
CR #IMM → CR
Logically ORs a control register with immediate data.
CR #IMM → CR
XORC
Logically exclusive-ORs a control register with immediate
data.
NOP
—
PC + 1 → PC
No operation. Only increments the program counter.
* The size depends on the control register.
Note on Stack Operation by LDC and STC Instructions of H8/500 CPU
When using the LDC and STC instructions to stack and unstack the BR, CCR, TP, DP, and EP
control registers in the H8/500 family, note the following point.
H8/500 hardware does not permit byte access to the stack. If the LDC.B or STC.B assembler
mnemonic is coded with the @R7 + (@SP+) or @–R7 (@–SP) addressing mode, the stack-
pointer addressing mode takes precedence and hardware automatically performs word access.
59
Specifically, the LDC.B and STC.B instructions are executed as follows.
The following applies only to the stack-pointer addressing modes. In addressing modes that do not
use the stack pointer, byte data access is performed as specified by the assembler mnemonic.
(1) STC.B EP, @–SP
When word data access is applied to EP, both EP and DP are accessed. This instruction
stores EP at address SP (old) –2, and DP at address SP (old) –1.
EP
a
a
b
Old SP – 2
Old SP – 1
Old SP
New SP
New SP + 1
New SP + 2
DP
b
Before execution
After execution
(2) LDC.B @SP+, EP
When word data access is applied to EP, both EP and DP are accessed. This instruction
loads EP from address SP (old), and DP from address SP (old) +1, updating the DP value as
well as the EP value.
EP
a
EP
a
a
b
Old SP
New SP – 2
New SP – 1
New SP
Old SP + 1
Old SP + 2
DP
b
DP
b
Before execution
After execution
(3) STC.B CCR, @–SP
When word data access is applied to CCR, only CCR is accessed. This instruction stores
identical CCR contents at both address SP (old) –2 and address SP (old) –1.
CCR
a
a
b
Old SP – 2
Old SP – 1
Old SP
New SP
New SP + 1
New SP + 2
Before execution
After execution
60
(4) LDC.B @SP+, CCR
When word data access is applied to CCR, only CCR is accessed. This instruction loads
CCR from address SP (old) +1. Note that the value in address SP (old) is not loaded.
CCR
CCR
b
a
b
Old SP
New SP – 2
New SP – 1
New SP
Old SP + 1
Old SP + 2
Before execution
After execution
BR, DP, and TP are accessed in the same way as CCR. When DP is specified, both EP and
DP are accessed, but when CCR, BR, DP, or TP is specified, only the specified register is
accessed.
61
3.5.9 Short-Format Instructions
The ADD, CMP, and MOV instructions have special short formats. Table 3-17 lists these short
formats together with the equivalent general formats.
The short formats are a byte shorter than the corresponding general formats, and most of them
execute one state faster.
Table 3-17 Short-Format Instructions and Equivalent General Formats
Short-Format
Instruction
Execution Equivalent General-
Length States *2 Format Instruction
Execution
Length States *2
*1
ADD:Q #xx,Rd
2
2
3
2
3
2
2
2
2
2
2
3
2
3
5
5
5
5
ADD:G
#xx:8,Rd
3
3
4
3
4
3
3
3
3
3
3
4
3
4
5
5
5
5
CMP:E #xx:8,Rd
CMP:I #xx:16,Rd
MOV:E #xx:8,Rd
MOV:I #xx:16,Rd
MOV:L @aa:8,Rd
MOV:S Rs,@aa:8
MOV:F @(d:8,R6),Rd
MOV:F Rs,@(d:8,R6)
CMP:G.B #xx:8,Rd
CMP:G.W #xx:16,Rd
MOV:G.B #xx:8,Rd
MOV:G.W #xx:16,Rd
MOV:G
MOV:G
MOV:G
MOV:G
@aa:8,Rd
Rs,@aa:8
@(d:8,R6),Rd
Rs,@(d:8,R6)
Notes: * 1 The ADD:Q instruction accepts other destination operands in addition to a general
register, but the immediate data value (#xx) is limited to ±1 or ±2.
* 2 Number of execution states for access to on-chip memory.
3.6 Operating Modes
The CPU operates in one of two modes: the minimum mode or the maximum mode.
These modes are selected by the mode pins (MD2 to MD0 ).
3.6.1 Minimum Mode
The minimum mode supports a maximum address space of 64 kbytes. The page registers are
ignored. Instructions that branch across page boundaries (PJMP, PJSR, PRTS, PRTD) are invalid.
62
3.6.2 Maximum Mode
In the maximum mode the page registers are valid, expanding the maximum address space to
1 Mbyte.
The address space is divided into 64-kbyte pages. The pages are separate; it is not possible to
move continuously across a page boundary.
It is possible to move from one page to another with branching instructions (PJMP, PJSR, PRTS,
PRTD). The TRAPA instruction and branches to interrupt-handling routines can also jump across
page boundaries. It is not necessary for a program to be contained in a single 64-kbyte page.
When data access crosses a page boundary, the program must rewrite the page register before it
can access the data in the next page.
For further information on the operating modes, see section 2, “MCU Operating Modes and
Address Space.”
3.7 Basic Operational Timing
3.7.1 Overview
The CPU operates on a system clock (ø) which is created by dividing an oscillator frequency
(fosc) by two. One period of the system clock is referred to as a “state.” The CPU accesses
memory in a cycle consisting of 2 or 3 states. The CPU uses different methods to access on-chip
memory, the on-chip register field, and external devices.
Access to On-Chip Memory (RAM, ROM): For maximum speed, access to on-chip memory
(RAM, ROM) is performed in two states, using a 16-bit-wide data bus.
Figure 3-6 shows the on-chip memory access cycle. Figure 3-7 indicates the pin states. The bus
control output signals go to the nonactive state during the access.
Access to On-Chip Register Field (Addresses H'FE80 to H'FFFF): The access cycle consists
of three states. The data bus is 8 bits wide.
Figure 3-8 shows the on-chip supporting module access cycle. Figure 3-9 indicates the pin states.
63
Access to External Devices: The access cycle consists of three states. The data bus is 8 bits
wide. Figure 3-10 (a) and (b) shows the external access cycle. Additional wait states (Tw) can be
inserted by the wait-state controller (WSC).
3.7.2 On-Chip Memory Access Cycle
Memory cycle
T1 state
T2 state
ø
Internal address bus
Address
Internal Read signal
Read data
Internal data bus
(Read access)
Internal Write signal
Internal data bus
(Write access)
Write data
Figure 3-6 On-Chip Memory Access Timing
64
3.7.3 Pin States during On-Chip Memory Access
T1 state
T2 state
ø
A19 to A0
R/W (read access)
R/W (write access)
“High”
AS, DS, RD, WR
D7 to D0
High-impedance
Figure 3-7 Pin States during Access to On-Chip Memory
65
3.7.4 Register Field Access Cycle (Addresses H'FE80 to H'FFFF)
Memory cycle
T1 state
T2 state
T3 state
ø
Internal address bus
Address
Internal Read signal
Internal data bus
(read access)
Read data
Write data
Internal Write signal
Internal data bus
(write access)
Figure 3-8 Register Field Access Timing
66
3.7.5 Pin States during Register Field Access (Addresses H'FE80 to H'FFFF)
T1 state
T2 state
T3 state
ø
A19 to A0
R/W (read access)
R/W (write access)
AS, DS, RD, WR
“High”
High-impedance
D7 to D0
Figure 3-9 Pin States during Register Field Access
67
3.7.6 External Access Cycle
Read cycle
T2state
T1state
T3state
ø
A19 –A0
Address
AS
R/W
DS
RD
“High”
WR
D7 –D0
Read data
Figure 3-10 (a) External Access Cycle (Read Access)
68
Write cycle
T2state
T1state
T3state
ø
A19 –A0
Address
AS
R/W
DS
“High”
RD
WR
D7 –D0
Write data
Figure 3-10 (b) External Access Cycle (Write Access)
3.8 CPU States
3.8.1 Overview
The CPU has five states: the program execution state, exception-handling state, bus-released
state, reset state, and power-down state. The power-down state is further divided into the sleep
mode, software standby mode, and hardware standby mode. Figure 3-11 summarizes these states,
and figure 3-12 shows a map of the state transitions.
69
State
Program execution state
The CPU executes program instructions in sequence.
Exception-handling state
A transient state in which the CPU executes a hardware
sequence (saving the program counter and status register,
fetching a vector from the vector table, etc.) triggered by a reset,
interrupt, or other exception.
Bus-released state
The state in which the CPU has released the external bus in
response to a bus request signal from an external device, and
is waiting for the bus to be returned.
Reset state
The state in which the CPU and all on-chip supporting
modules have been initialized and are stopped.
Power-down state
Sleep mode
A state in which some
or all of the clock
Software standby mode
Hardware standby mode
signals are stopped to
conserve power.
Figure 3-11 Operating States
70
BREQ = 1
BREQ = 0
Program execution state
SLEEP
BREQ = 0
End of
exception
handling
SLEEP
instruction
instruction
BREQ = 1
with standby
flag set
Sleep mode
Bus-released state
Request
for exception
handling
Interrupt request
NMI
Exception-handling
state
Software standby mode
STBY = 1, RES = 0
Reset state *1
Hardware standby mode*2
*1 From any state except the hardware standby mode, a transition to the reset state occurs
whenever RES goes Low.
*2 A transition to the hardware standby mode from any state occurs when STBY goes Low.
Figure 3-12 State Transitions
3.8.2 Program Execution State
In this state the CPU executes program instructions in normal sequence.
3.8.3 Exception-Handling State
The exception-handling state is a transient state that occurs when the CPU alters the normal
program flow due to an interrupt, trap instruction, address error, or other exception. In this state
the CPU carries out a hardware-controlled sequence that prepares it to execute a user-coded
exception-handling routine.
71
In the hardware exception-handling sequence the CPU does the following:
1. Saves the program counter and status register (in minimum mode) or program counter, code
page register, and status register (in maximum mode) to the stack.
2. Clears the T bit in the status register to 0.
3. Fetches the start address of the exception-handling routine from the exception vector table.
4. Branches to that address, returning to the program execution state.
See section 4, “Exception Handling,” for further information on the exception-handling state.
3.8.4 Bus-Released State
When so requested, the CPU can grant control of the external bus to an external device. While an
external device has the bus right, the CPU is said to be in the bus-released state. The bus right is
controlled by two pins:
• BREQ: Input pin for the Bus Request signal from an external device
• BACK: Output pin for the Bus Request Acknowledge signal from the CPU, indicating that
the CPU has released the bus
The procedure by which the CPU enters and leaves the bus-released state is:
1. The CPU receives a Low BREQ signal from an external device.
2. The CPU places the address bus pins (A19 – A0), data bus pins (D7 – D0) and bus control pins
(RD, WR, R/W, DS, and AS) in the high-impedance state, sets the BACK pin to the Low level
to indicate that it has released the bus, then halts.
3. The external device that requested the bus (with the BREQ signal) becomes the bus master. It
can use the data bus and address bus. The external device is responsible for manipulating the
bus control signals (RD, WR, R/W, DS, and AS).
4. When the external device finishes using the bus, it clears the BREQ signal to the High level.
The CPU then reassumes control of the bus and returns to the program execution state.
Bus Release Timing: The CPU can release the bus right at the following times:
1. The BREQ signal is sampled during every memory access cycle (instruction prefetch or data
read/write). If BREQ is Low, the CPU releases the bus right at the end of the cycle. (In
word data access to external memory or an address from H'FE80 to H'FFFF, the CPU does
not release the bus right until it has accessed both the upper and lower data bytes.)
2. During execution of the MULXU and DIVXU instructions, since considerable time may
pass without an instruction prefetch or data read/write, BREQ is also sampled at internal
machine cycles, and the bus right is released if BREQ is Low.
3. The bus right can also be released in the sleep mode.
The CPU does not recognize interrupts while the bus is released.
72
Timing Charts: Timing charts of the operation by which the bus is released are shown in
figure 3-13 for the case of bus release during an on-chip memory read cycle, in figure 3-14 for
bus release during an external memory read cycle, and in figure 3-15 for bus release while the
CPU is performing an internal operation.
On-chip memory
Bus-right release cycle
CPU cycle
Access cycle
T2
T1*
T2*
TX*
TX
TX
TX
T1
ø
A19 –A0
D7 –D0
RD, WR, R/W
DS, AS
BREQ
BACK
(1)
(2)
(3)
(4)
(5)
(1) The BREQ pin is sampled at the start of the T1 state and the Low level is detected.
(2) At the end of the memory access cycle, the BACK pin goes Low and the CPU releases the bus.
(3) While the bus is released, the BREQ pin is sampled at each Tx state.
(4) A High level is detected at the BREQ pin.
(5) The BACK pin is returned to the High level, ending the bus-right release cycle.
* T1 and T2: On-chip memory access states.
Tx : Bus-right released state.
Figure 3-13 Bus-Right Release Cycle (During On-Chip Memory Access Cycle)
73
External access cycle
Bus-right release cycle
CPU cycle
T1
T2
TW*
T3
TX*
TX
TX
T1
ø
A19 –A0
D7 –D0
RD, WR
R/W, DS
BREQ
BACK
(1)
(2)
(3)
(4)
(1) The BREQ pin is sampled at the start of the TW state and the Low level is detected.
(2) At the end of the external access cycle, the BACK pin goes Low and the CPU releases the bus.
(3) The BREQ pin is sampled at the TX state and a High level is detected.
(4) The BACK pin is returned to the High level, ending the bus-right release cycle.
* TW : Wait state.
TX : Bus-right released state.
Figure 3-14 Bus-Right Release Cycle (During External Access Cycle)
74
CPU internal operation
Bus-right release cycle
CPU cycle
Ti *
Ti
Ti
Ti
TX*
TX
TX
T1
ø
A19 –A0
D7 –D0
RD, WR
R/W, DS
BREQ
BACK
(1)
(2)
(3)
(4)
(1) The BREQ pin is sampled at the start of a TI state and the Low level is detected.
(2) At the end of the internal operation cycle, the BACK pin goes Low and the CPU releases the bus.
(3) The BREQ pin is sampled at the TX state and a High level is detected.
(4) The BACK pin is returned to the High level, ending the bus-right release cycle.
* TI : Internal CPU operation state.
TX : Bus-right released state.
Figure 3-15 Bus-Right Release Cycle (During Internal CPU Operation)
75
Notes: The BREQ signal must be held Low until BACK goes Low. If BREQ returns to the High
level before BACK goes Low, the bus release operation may be executed incorrectly.
To leave the bus-released state, the High level at the BREQ pin must be sampled two times. If
BREQ returns to Low before it is sampled two times, the bus released cycle will not end.
The bus release operation is enabled only when the BRLE bit in the port 1 control register (P1CR)
is set to 1. When this bit is cleared to 0 (its initial value), the BREQ and BACK pins are used for
general-purpose input and output, as P13 and P12.
An instruction that sets the BRLE bit is: BSET.B #3, @H'FEFC
Note the following point when using the bus release function.
If the BREQ signal is asserted and an interrupt is requested simultaneously during execution of
the SLEEP instruction, the BACK signal may fail to be output even though the CPU has released
the bus. This may cause the system to stop for the interval during which BREQ is asserted, with
no device in control of the bus. The interrupts that can cause this state include NMI, IRQ, and all
the interrupts from on-chip supporting modules. When the BREQ signal is deasserted, ending this
state, the CPU takes control of the bus again and resumes normal instruction execution.
The following methods can be used to avoid entering this state.
Method 1: If the BREQ signal is used, do not use the SLEEP instruction.
Method 2: Disable the BREQ signal during execution of the SLEEP instruction. This can be
done by clearing the bus release enable bit (BRLE) in the port 1 control register (P1CR) to 0
immediately before executing the SLEEP instruction. (When the BRLE bit is cleared, low inputs
on the BREQ line are not latched on-chip.) Place instructions to set the BRLE bit to 1 at the
beginning of interrupt-handling routines. If the data transfer controller (DTC) is used, place an
instruction to set the BRLE bit immediately after the SLEEP instruction.
If method 2 is used, BREQ inputs will be ignored while the chip is in sleep mode.
(Coding example)
Main Program
Interrupt-Handling Routine
BSET.B #3, @SYSCR1
BCLR.B #3, @SYSCR1
SLEEP
BSET.B #3, @SYSCR1
RTE
76
3.8.5 Reset State
In the reset state, the CPU and all on-chip supporting modules are initialized and placed in the
stopped state. The CPU enters the reset state whenever the RES pin goes Low, unless the CPU is
currently in the hardware standby mode. It remains in the reset state until the RES pin goes High.
See section 4.2, “Reset,” for further information on the reset state.
3.8.6 Power-Down State
The power-down state comprises three modes: the sleep mode, the software standby mode, and
the hardware standby mode.
See section 18, “Power-Down State,” for further information.
77
3.9 Programming Notes
3.9.1 Restriction on Address Location
The following restriction applies when instructions are located in on-chip RAM.
• Restriction
Instruction execution cannot proceed continuously from an external address to on-chip RAM.
• Solution
To execute instructions located in on-chip RAM, use a branch instruction (examples: Bcc, JMP,
etc.) to branch to the first instruction located in on-chip RAM. Do not place instruction code in
the last three bytes of external memory (H'F67D to H'F67F).
H'F67A
H'F67B
H'F67C
H'F67D
H'F67E
H'F67F
H'F680
H'F681
NOP
NOP
NOP
NOP
NOP
NOP
NOP
NOP
H'F67A
H'F67B
H'F67C
H'F67D
H'F67E
H'F67F
NOP
BRA
disp
Do not
place
instruction
code here
Branch
Not
executable H'F680
NOP
NOP
H'F681
Execution Disabled
Execution Enabled
78
Section 4 Exception Handling
4.1 Overview
4.1.1 Types of Exception Handling and Their Priority
As indicated in table 4-1 (a) and (b), exception handling can be initiated by a reset, address error,
trace, interrupt, or instruction. An instruction initiates exception handling if the instruction is an
invalid instruction, a trap instruction, or a DIVXU instruction with zero divisor. Exception
handling begins with a hardware exception-handling sequence which prepares for the execution of
a user-coded software exception-handling routine.
There is a priority order among the different types of exceptions, as shown in table 4-1 (a). If two
or more exceptions occur simultaneously, they are handled in their order of priority. An
instruction exception cannot occur simultaneously with other types of exceptions.
Table 4-1 (a) Exceptions and Their Priority
Exception
Priority Type
Start of Exception-
Handling Sequence
Source
Detection Timing
High Reset
External, RES Low-to-High transition
internal
Immediately
Address error Internal
Instruction fetch or data
read/write bus cycle
End of instruction execution
End of instruction execution
Trace
Internal
End of instruction execution,
if T = 1 in status register
Interrupt
External, End of instruction execution or End of instruction execution
internal
end of exception-handling
sequence
Low
Table 4-1 (b) Instruction Exceptions
Exception Type
Invalid instruction
Trap instruction
Zero divide
Start of Exception-Handling Sequence
Attempted execution of instruction with undefined code
Started by execution of trap instruction
Attempted execution of DIVXU instruction with zero divisor
79
4.1.2 Hardware Exception-Handling Sequence
The hardware exception-handling sequence varies depending on the type of exception. When
exception handling is initiated by a factor other than a reset, the CPU:
1. Saves the program counter and status register (in minimum mode) or program counter, code
page register, and status register (in maximum mode) to the stack.
2. Clears the T bit in the status register to 0.
3. Fetches the start address of the exception-handling routine from the exception vector table.
4. Branches to that address.
For an interrupt, the CPU also alters the interrupt mask level in bits I2 to I0 of the status register.
For a reset, step 1 is omitted. See section 4.2, “Reset”, for the full reset sequence.
4.1.3 Exception Factors and Vector Table
The factors that initiate exception handling can be classified as shown in figure 4-1.
The starting addresses of the exception-handling routines for each factor are contained in an
exception vector table located in the low addresses of page 0. The vector addresses are listed in
table 4-2. Note that there are different addresses for the minimum and maximum modes.
80
• Reset
NMI
External
interrupt
IRQ0
IRQ1 to IRQ5
• Interrupt
Internal
interrupt
Internal interrupt requested by on-
chip module
Exception
• Address error
• Trace
Invalid instruction
Zero divide
• Instruction
TRAPA instruction
TRAP/VS instruction
Figure 4-1 Types of Factors Causing Exception Handling
81
Table 4-2 Exception Vector Table
Vector Address
Maximum Mode *1
Type of Exception
Minimum Mode
H'0000 to H'0001
H'0002 to H'0003
H'0004 to H'0005
H'0006 to H'0007
H'0008 to H'0009
H'000A to H'000B
to
Reset (initialize PC)
H'0000 to H'0003
H'0004 to H'0007
H'0008 to H'000B
H'000C to H'000F
H'0010 to H'0013
H'0014 to H'0017
to
— (Reserved for system)
Invalid instruction
DIVXU instruction (zero divide)
TRAP/VS instruction
— (Reserved for system)
H'000E to H'000F
H'0010 to H'0011
H'0012 to H'0013
H'0014 to H'0015
H'0016 to H'0017
H'0018 to H'0019
to
H'001C to H'001F
H'0020 to H'0023
H'0024 to H'0027
H'0028 to H'002B
H'002C to H'002F
H'0030 to H'0033
to
Address error
Trace
— (Reserved for system)
Nonmaskable external interrupt (NMI)
— (Reserved for system)
H'001E to H'001F
H'0020 to H'0021
to
H'003C to H'003F
H'0040 to H'0043
to
TRAPA instruction (16 vectors)
H'003E to H'003F
H'0040 to H'0041
H'0048 to H'0049
H'0050 to H'0051
H'0052 to H'0053
H'0058 to H'0059
H'005A to H'005B
H'0060 to H'0061
to
H'007C to H'007F
H'0080 to H'0083
H'0090 to H'0093
H'00A0 to H'00A3
H'00A4 to H'00A7
H'00B0 to H'00B3
H'00B4 to H'00B7
H'00C0 to H'00C3
to
External interrupts
IRQ0
IRQ1
IRQ2
IRQ3
IRQ4
IRQ5
Internal interrupts *2
H'0098 to H'0099
H'0130 to H'0133
Notes: * 1. The exception vector table is located at the beginning of page 0.
* 2. For details of the internal interrupt vectors, see table 5-2.
82
4.2 Reset
4.2.1 Overview
A reset has the highest exception-handling priority.
When the RES pin goes Low, all current processing is halted and the H8/534 or H8/536 chip
enters the reset state.
A reset initializes the internal status of the CPU and the registers of the on-chip supporting
modules and I/O ports. It does not initialize the on-chip RAM.
When the RES pin returns from Low to High, the chip comes out of the reset state and begins
executing the hardware reset sequence.
4.2.2 Reset Sequence
The Reset signal is detected when the RES pin goes Low.
To ensure that the H8/534 or H8/536 is reset, the RES pin should be held Low for at least 20 ms at
power-up. To reset the H8/534 or H8/536 during operation, the RES pin should be held Low for
at least 6 system clock cycles. See table D-1, “Status of Ports” in appendix D for the status of
other pins in the reset state.
When the RES pin returns to the High state after being held Low for the necessary time, the
hardware reset exception-handling sequence begins, during which:
1. In the status register (SR), the T bit is cleared to disable the trace mode, and the interrupt mask
level (bits I2 to I0) is set to 7. A reset disables all interrupts, including NMI.
2. The CPU loads the reset start address from the vector table into the program counter and begins
executing the program at that address.
The contents of the vector table differs between minimum mode and maximum mode as indicated
in figure 4-2. This affects step 3 as follows:
Minimum Mode: One word is copied from addresses H'0000 and H'0001 in the vector table to
the program counter. Program execution then begins from the address in the program counter
(PC).
83
Maximum Mode: Two words are read from addresses H'0000 to H'0003 in the vector table. The
byte in address H'0000 is ignored. The byte in address H'0001 is copied to the code page register
(CP). The contents of addresses H'0002 and H'0003 are copied to the program counter. Program
execution starts from the address indicated by the code page register and program counter.
H’0000
H’0001
PC (Upper)
PC (Lower)
H’0000
H’0001
H’0002
H’0003
Don’t care
CP
PC (Upper)
PC (Lower)
(1) Minimum mode
(2) Maximum mode
Figure 4-2 Reset Vector
Figure 4-3 shows the timing of the reset sequence in minimum mode. Figure 4-4 shows the
timing of the reset sequence in maximum mode.
4.2.3 Stack Pointer Initialization
The hardware reset sequence does not initialize the stack pointer, so this must be done by
software. If an interrupt were to be accepted after a reset and before the stack pointer (SP) is
initialized, the program counter and status register would not be saved correctly, causing a
program crash. This danger can be avoided by coding the reset routine as explained next.
When the chip comes out of the reset state all interrupts, including NMI, are disabled, so the
instruction at the reset start address is always executed. In the minimum mode, this instruction
should initialize the stack pointer (SP). In the maximum mode, this instruction should be an LDC
instruction initializing the stack page register (TP), and the next instruction should initialize the
stack pointer. Execution of the LDC instruction disables interrupts again, ensuring that the stack
pointer initializing instruction is executed.
84
Figure 4-3 Reset Sequence (Minimum Mode, On-Chip Memory)
85
Figure 4-4 Reset Sequence (Maximum Mode, External Memory)
86
4.3 Address Error
There are three causes of address errors:
• Illegal instruction prefetch
• Word data access at odd address
• Off-chip access in single-chip mode
An address error initiates the address error exception-handling sequence. This sequence clears the
T bit of the status register to 0 to disable the trace mode, but does not affect the interrupt mask
level in bits I2 to I0.
4.3.1 Illegal Instruction Prefetch
An attempt to prefetch an instruction from the register field in memory addresses H'FE80 to
H'FFFF causes an address error regardless of the MCU operating mode.
Handling of this address error begins when the prefetch cycle that caused the error has been
completed and execution of the current instruction has also been completed. The program counter
value pushed on the stack is the address of the instruction immediately following the last
instruction executed.
Program code should not be located in addresses H'FE7D to H'FE7F. If the CPU executes an
instruction in these addresses, it will attempt to prefetch the next instruction from the register
field, causing an address error.
4.3.2 Word Data Access at Odd Address
If an attempt is made to access word data starting at an odd address, an address error occurs
regardless of the MCU operating mode. The program counter value pushed on the stack in the
handling of this error is the address of the next instruction (or next but one) after the instruction
that attempted the illegal word access.
4.3.3 Off-Chip Address Access in Single-Chip Mode
In the single-chip mode there is no external memory, so in addition to the address errors described
above, the following two types of address errors can occur.
Access to Addresses H'8000 to H'F67F(H8/534): These addresses exist neither in on-chip ROM
or RAM nor in the on-chip register field, so an address error occurs if they are accessed for any
purpose: for instruction prefetch, byte data access, or word data access.
Program code should not be located in the last three bytes of on-chip ROM (addresses H'7FFD to
87
H'7FFF). If the CPU excutes an instruction in these addresses, it will attempt to prefetch the next
instruction from addresses H'8000 to H'8002, causing an address error.
Access to Disabled RAM Area: The on-chip RAM area (H'F680 to H'FE7F) can be disabled by
clearing the RAME bit in the RAM control register (RAMCR). If any form of RAM access is
attempted in this state in the single-chip mode, an address error occurs.
4.4 Trace
When the T bit of the status register is set to 1, the CPU operates in trace mode. A trace exception
occurs at the completion of each instruction. The trace mode can be used to execute a program for
debugging by a debugger.
In the trace exception sequence the T bit of the status register is cleared to 0 to disable the trace
mode while the trace routine is executing. The interrupt mask level in bits I2 to I0 is not changed.
Interrupts are accepted as usual during the trace routine.
In the status-register data saved on the stack, the T bit is set to 1. When the trace routine returns
with the RTE instruction, the status register is popped from the stack and the trace mode resumes.
If an address error occurs during execution of the first instruction after the return from the trace
routine, since the address error has higher priority, the address error exception-handling sequence
is initiated, clearing the T bit in the status register to 0 and making it impossible to trace this
instruction.
4.5 Interrupts
Interrupts can be requested from seven external sources (NMI, IRQ0, and IRQ1 to IRQ5) and eight
on-chip supporting modules: the 16-bit free-running timers (FRT1 to FRT3), the 8-bit timer, the
serial communication interfaces (SCI1 and SCI2), the A/D converter, and the watchdog timer
(WDT). The on-chip interrupt sources can request a total of nineteen different types of interrupts,
each having its own interrupt vector. Figure 4-5 lists the interrupt sources and the number of
different interrupts from each source.
Each interrupt source has a priority. NMI interrupts have the highest priority, and are normally
accepted unconditionally. The priorities of the other interrupt sources are set in control registers
(IPR A to D) in the register field at the high end of page 0 and can be changed by software.
Priority levels range from 0 (low) to 7 (high), with NMI considered to be on level 8. IRQ0 and
IRQ1 can be prioritized individually. IRQ2 and IRQ3 are prioritized as a pair. IRQ4 and IRQ5 are
also prioritized as a pair. The on-chip supporting modules are prioritized as modules.
88
The on-chip interrupt controller decides whether an interrupt can be accepted by comparing its
priority with the interrupt mask level, and determines the order in which to accept competing
interrupt requests. Interrupts that are not accepted immediately remain pending until they can be
accepted later.
When it accepts an interrupt, the interrupt controller also decides whether to interrupt the CPU or
start the on-chip data transfer controller (DTC). This decision is controlled by bits set in four data
transfer enable registers (DTEA to DTEF) in the register field. The DTC is started if the
corresponding bit in DTEA to DTEF is set to 1; otherwise a CPU interrupt is generated. DTC
interrupts provide an efficient way to send and receive blocks of data via the serial communication
interface, or to transfer data between memory and I/O without detailed CPU programming. The
CPU stops while the DTC is operating. DTC interrupts are described in section 6, “Data Transfer
Controller.”
The hardware exception-handling sequence for a CPU interrupt clears the T bit in the status register to
0 and sets the interrupt mask level in bits I2 to I0 to the level of the interrupt it has accepted. This
prevents the interrupt-handling routine from being interrupted except by a higher-level interrupt. The
previous interrupt mask level is restored on the return from the interrupt-handling routine.
For further information on interrupts, see section 5, “Interrupt Controller.”
89
NMI (1)
External
IRQ0 (1)
interrupts
IRQ1 to IRQ5 (5)
Interrupt
sources
16-Bit FRT1 (4)
16-Bit FRT2 (4)
16-Bit FRT3 (4)
8-Bit timer (3)
SCI (3)
Internal
interrupts
A/D converter (1)
*
WDT (1)
NMI:
IRQ:
FRT:
SCI:
WDT:
NonMaskable Interrupt
Interrupt Request
Free-Running Timer
Serial Communication Interface
WatchDog Timer
* When the watchdog timer is used in interval timer mode, and interrupt is requested at
each counter overflow.
Figure 4-5 Interrupt Sources (and Number of Interrupt Types)
90
4.6 Invalid Instruction
An invalid instruction exception occurs if an attempt is made to execute an instruction with an
undefined operation code or illegal addressing mode specification. The program counter value
pushed on the stack is the value of the program counter when the invalid instruction code was
detected.
In the invalid instruction exception-handling sequence the T bit of the status register is cleared to
0, but the interrupt mask level (I2 to I0) is not affected.
4.7 Trap Instructions and Zero Divide
A trap exception occurs when the TRAPA or TRAP/VS instruction is executed. A zero divide
exception occurs if an attempt is made to execute a DIVXU instruction with a zero divisor.
In the exception-handling sequences for these exceptions the T bit of the status register is cleared
to 0, but the interrupt mask level (I2 to I0) is not affected. If a normal interrupt is requested while
a trap or zero-divide instruction is being executed, after the trap or zero-divide exception-handling
sequence, the normal interrupt exception-handling sequence is carried out.
TRAPA Instruction: The TRAPA instruction always causes a trap exception. The TRAPA
instruction includes a vector number from 0 to 15, allowing the user to provide up to sixteen
different trap-handling routines.
TRAP/VS Instruction: When the TRAP/VS instruction is executed, a trap exception occurs if
the overflow (V) bit in the condition code register is set to 1. If the V bit is cleared to 0, no
exception occurs and the next instruction is executed.
DIVXU Instruction with Zero Divisor: An exception occurs if an attempt is made to divide
by zero in a DIVXU instruction.
4.8 Cases in Which Exception Handling is Deferred
In the cases described next, the address error exception, trace exception, external interrupt (NMI,
IRQ0, and IRQ1 to IRQ5) requests, and internal interrupt requests (23 types) are not accepted
immediately but are deferred until after the next instruction has been executed.
4.8.1 Instructions that Disable Interrupts
Interrupts are disabled immediately after the execution of five instructions: XORC, ORC, ANDC,
LDC, and RTE.
Suppose that an internal interrupt is requested and the interrupt controller, after checking the
interrupt priority and interrupt mask level, notifies the CPU of the interrupt, but the CPU is
91
currently executing one of the five instructions listed above. After executing this instruction the
CPU always proceeds to the next instruction. (And if the next instruction is one of these five, the
CPU also proceeds to the next instruction after that.) The exception-handling sequence starts after
the next instruction that is not one of these five has been executed. The following is an example:
(Example)
Program flow
.
.
.
.
.
.
←
Interrupt controller notifies CPU of interrupt
LDC.B #H'00,TP
CPU executes the instruction next to LDC before
starting exception handling
MOV.W #H'FE80,SP
MOV.B #H'00,@WCR
To exception-handling sequence
.
.
.
4.8.2 Disabling of Exceptions Immediately after a Reset
If an interrupt is accepted after a reset and before the stack pointer (SP) is initialized, the program
counter and status register will not be saved correctly, leading to a program crash. To prevent this,
when the chip comes out of the reset state all interrupts, including the NMI, are disabled, so the
first instruction of the reset routine is always executed. As noted earlier, in the minimum mode,
this instruction should initialize the stack pointer (SP). In the maximum mode, the first instruction
should be an LDC instruction that initializes the stack page register (TP); the next instruction
should initialize the stack pointer.
4.8.3 Disabling of Interrupts after a Data Transfer Cycle
If an interrupt starts the data transfer controller and another interrupt is requested during the data
transfer cycle, when the data transfer cycle ends, the CPU always executes the next instruction
before handling the second interrupt.
Even if a nonmaskable interrupt (NMI) occurs during a data transfer cycle, it is not accepted until
the next instruction has been executed. An example of this is shown below.
92
(Example)
.
.
.
.
.
Program flow
← DTC interrupt request
ADD.W R2,R0
Data transfer cycle
NMI interrupt
MOV.W R0,@H'FE00
After data transfer cycle, CPU
executes next instruction before
branching to exception handling
MOV.W #H'FE02,R0
.
.
.
To NMI exception-handling sequence
4.9 Stack Status after Completion of Exception Handling
The status of the stack after an exception-handling sequence is described below.
Table 4-3 shows the stack after completion of the exception-handling sequence for various types
of exceptions in the minimum and maximum modes.
Table 4-3 Stack after Exception Handling Sequence
Exception Factor
Minimum Mode
Maximum Mode
Trace
SP
SR (upper byte)
TP:SP
SR (upper byte)
SR (lower byte)
SR (lower byte)
Don’t-care
Interrupt
Trap
Next instruction address (upper byte)
Next instruction address (lower byte)
Next instruction page (8 bits)
Next instruction address (upper byte)
Next instruction address (lower byte)
Zero divide
(DIVXU)
Note: The RTE instruction returns to the next instruction after the instruction being executed when
the exception occurred.
93
Table 4-3 Stack after Exception Handling Sequence (cont)
Exception Factor
Minimum Mode
Maximum Mode
Invalid
SP
SR (upper byte)
TP:SP
SR (upper byte)
instruction
SR (lower byte)
SR (lower byte)
Don’t-care
PC when error occurred (upper byte)
PC when error occurred (lower byte)
CP when error occurred (8 bits)
PC when error occurred (upper byte)
PC when error occurred (lower byte)
Note: The program counter value pushed on the stack is not necessarily the address of the first
byte of the invalid instruction.
Address
SP
SR (upper byte)
TP:SP
SR (upper byte)
error
SR (lower byte)
SR (lower byte)
Don’t-care
PC when error occurred (upper byte)
PC when error occurred (lower byte)
CP when error occurred (8 bits)
PC when error occurred (upper byte)
PC when error occurred (lower byte)
Note: The program counter value pushed on the stack is the address of the next instruction after
the last instruction successfully executed.
94
4.9.1 PC Value Pushed on Stack for Trace, Interrupts, Trap Instructions, and Zero Divide
Exceptions
The program counter value pushed on the stack for a trace, interrupt, trap, or zero divide exception
is the address of the next instruction at the time when the interrupt was accepted. The RTE
instruction accordingly returns to the next instruction after the instruction executed before the
exception-handling sequence.
4.9.2 PC Value Pushed on Stack for Address Error and Invalid Instruction Exceptions
The program counter value pushed on the stack for an address error or invalid instruction
exception differs depending on the conditions when the exception occurred.
4.10 Notes on Use of the Stack
If the stack pointer is set to an odd address, an address error will occur when the stack is accessed
during interrupt handling or for a subroutine call. The stack pointer should always point to an
even address. To keep the stack pointer pointing to an even address, a program should use word
data size when saving or restoring registers to and from the stack.
In the @–SP or @SP+ addressing mode, the CPU performs word access even if the instruction
specifies byte size. (This is not true in the @–Rn and @Rn+ addressing modes when Rn is a
register from R0 to R6.)
95
Section 5 Interrupt Controller
5.1 Overview
The interrupt controller decides which interrupts to accept, and how to deal with multiple
interrupts. It also decides whether an interrupt should be served by the CPU or by the data
transfer controller (DTC). This section explains the features of the interrupt controller, describes
its internal structure and control registers, and details the handling of interrupts.
For detailed information on the data transfer controller, see section 6, “Data Transfer Controller.”
5.1.1 Features
Three main features of the interrupt controller are:
• Interrupt priorities are user-programmable.
User programs can set priority levels from 7 (high) to 0 (low) in six interrupt priority (IPR)
registers for IRQ0, IRQ1 to IRQ5, and each of the on-chip supporting modules—for every
interrupt, that is, except the nonmaskable interrupt (NMI). NMI has the highest priority level
(8) and is normally always accepted. An interrupt with priority level 0 is always masked.
• Multiple interrupts on the same level are served in a default priority order.
Lower-priority interrupts remain pending until higher-priority interrupts have been handled.
• For most interrupts, software can select whether to have the interrupt served by the CPU or the
on-chip data transfer controller (DTC).
User programs can make this selection by setting and clearing bits in four data transfer enable
(DTE) registers. The data transfer controller can be started by any interrupts except NMI, the
error interrupt (ERI) from the on-chip serial communication interface, and the overflow
interrupts (FOVI and OVI) from the on-chip timers.
97
5.1.2 Block Diagram
Figure 5-1 shows the block configuration of the interrupt controller.
Interrupt controller
NMI
request
NMI
IRQ0/interval timer
IRQ1
IRQ2/IRQ3
IRQ4/IRQ5
FRT1
Interrupt
request
signals
from
FRT2
Interrupt
request
FRT3
8 bit timer
SCI
modules
A/D converter
DTC
request
SR (CPU)
I 2
I 1
I 0
FRT: 16 Bits Free Running Timer
SCI: Serial Communication Interface
SR: Status Register
IPRA to IPRF: Interrupt Priority Register
DTEA to DTEF: Data Transfer Enable Register
Figure 5-1 Interrupt Controller Block Diagram
98
5.1.3 Register Configuration
The six interrupt priority registers (IPRA to IPRF) and six data transfer enable registers (DTEA to
DTEF) are 8-bit registers located at addresses H'FF00 to H'FF0D in the register field in page 0 of
the address space. Table 5-1 lists their attributes.
Table 5-1 Interrupt Controller Registers
Name
Abbreviation
IPRA
Read/Write
R/W
Address
H'FF00
H'FF01
H'FF02
H'FF03
H'FF04
H'FF05
H'FF08
H'FF09
H'FF0A
H'FF0B
H'FF0C
H'FF0D
Initial Value
H'00
Interrupt
priority
register
A
B
C
D
E
F
IPRB
R/W
H'00
IPRC
R/W
H'00
IPRD
R/W
H'00
IPRE
R/W
H'00
IPRF
R/W
H'00
Data transfer
enable
A
B
C
D
E
F
DTEA
DTEB
DTEC
DTED
DTEE
DTEF
R/W
H'00
R/W
H'00
register
R/W
H'00
R/W
H'00
R/W
H'00
R/W
H'00
See section 6.2.5, “Data Transfer Enable Registers A to F” for further information about DTEA to
DTEF.
5.2 Interrupt Types
There are 30 distinct types of interrupts: 7 external interrupts originating off-chip and 23 internal
interrupts originating in the on-chip supporting modules.
5.2.1 External Interrupts
The seven external interrupts are NMI, IRQ0, and IRQ1 to IRQ5.
NMI (NonMaskable Interrupt): This interrupt has the highest priority level (8) and cannot be
masked. An NMI is generated by input to the NMI pin, and can also be generated by a watchdog
timer (WDT) overflow. The input at the NMI pin is edge-sensed. A user program can select
whether to have the interrupt occur on the rising edge or falling edge of the NMI input by setting
or clearing the nonmaskable interrupt edge bit (NMIEG) in system control register 1 (SYSCR1).
In the NMI exception-handling sequence, the T (Trace) bit in the CPU status register (SR) is
cleared to "0," and the interrupt mask level in I2 to I0 is set to 7, masking all other interrupts. The
interrupt controller holds the NMI request until the NMI exception-handling sequence begins,
99
then clears the NMI request, so if another interrupt is requested at the NMI pin during the NMI
exception-handling sequence, the NMI exception-handling sequence will be carried out again.
Coding Examples:
To select the rising edge of the NMI input:
To select the falling edge of the NMI input:
BSET.B #4, @H'FEFC
BCLR.B #4, @H'FEFC
IRQ0 (Interrupt Request 0): An IRQ0 interrupt can be requested by a Low input to the IRQ0
pin. A Low IRQ0 input requests an IRQ0 interrupt if the interrupt request enable 0 bit (IRQ0E) in
SYSCR1 is set to 1. IRQ0 must be held Low until the CPU accepts the interrupt. Otherwise the
request will be ignored.
The IRQ0 interrupt can be assigned any priority level from 7 to 0 by setting the corresponding
value in the upper four bits of IPRA. If bit 4 of data transfer enable register A (DTEA) is set to 1,
an IRQ0 interrupt starts the data transfer controller. Otherwise the interrupt is served by the CPU.
In the CPU interrupt-handling sequence for IRQ0, the T bit of the status register is cleared to 0,
and the interrupt mask level is set to the value in the upper four bits of IPRA.
Coding Examples:
To enable IRQ0 to be requested by IRQ0 input:
To assign priority level 7 to IRQ0:
To have IRQ0 start the DTC:
BSET.B #5, @H'FEFC
OR.B #70, @H'FF00
BSET.B #4, @H'FF08
IRQ1 to IRQ5 (Interrupt Request 1 to 5): An IRQ1 to IRQ5 interrupt is requested by a High-to-
Low transition at the IRQ1 to IRQ5 pin. The IRQ1 interrupt is enabled only when the interrupt
request enable 1 bit (IRQ1E) in SYSCR1 is set to 1. IRQ2 to IRQ5 are controlled by bits IRQ2E to
IRQ5E in SYSCR2. (see section 9.7, “Port 6.”)
Interrupts IRQ1 to IRQ5 can be assigned any priority level from 7 (high) to 0 (low) by setting the
corresponding value in IPRA and IPRB. The lower four bits of IPRA determine the priority of
IRQ1. The upper four bits of IPRB determine the priority of IRQ2 and IRQ3. The lower four bits
of IPRB determine the priority of IRQ4 and IRQ5. Interrupt requests IRQ1 to IRQ5 are held in the
interrupt controller and cleared during the corresponding interrupt exception-handling sequence.
Contention among IRQ1 to IRQ5 is resolved when the CPU accepts the interrupt by taking the
interrupt with the highest priority first and holding lower-priority interrupts pending. (Contention
between IRQ2 and IRQ3, or between IRQ4 and IRQ5, is resolved by the priority order shown in
table 5-2.)
100
During the interrupt-handling routine, if the same external interrupt is requested again the request
is held, but the exception-handling sequence is not carried out immediately because the interrupt
is masked by bits I2 to I0 in the status register. On return from the interrupt-handling routine one
more instruction is executed, then the pending exception-handling sequence is carried out.
Interrupts IRQ1 to IRQ5 are served by the CPU or DTC depending on DTEA bit 0 and DTEB bits
0, 1, 4, and 5.
In the CPU interrupt exception-handling sequence for IRQ1 to IRQ5, the T bit of the CPU status
register is cleared to 0, and the interrupt mask level is set to the value in IPRA or IPRB.
Coding Examples:
To enable IRQ1 to be requested by IRQ1 input:
To assign priority level 7 to IRQ0 and level 5 to IRQ1:
To have IRQ1 start the DTC:
BSET.B #6, @H'FEFC
MOV.B #75, @H'FF00
BSET.B #0, @H'FF08
5.2.2 Internal Interrupts
Twenty-three types of internal interrupts can be requested by the on-chip supporting modules.
Each interrupt is separately vectored in the exception vector table, so it is not necessary for the
user-coded interrupt handler routine to determine which type of interrupt has occurred.
Each of the internal interrupts can be enabled or disabled by setting or clearing an enable bit in the
control register of the on-chip supporting module.
An interrupt priority level from 7 to 0 can be assigned to each on-chip supporting module by
setting interrupt priority registers C to F. Within each module, different interrupts have a fixed
priority order. For most of these interrupts, values set in data transfer enable registers C to F can
select whether to have the interrupt served by the CPU or the data transfer controller.
In the CPU interrupt-handling sequence, the T bit of the CPU status register is cleared to 0, and
the interrupt mask level in bits I2 to I0 is set to the value in the IPR. Unlike external interrupt
requests, internal interrupt requests are not held in the interrupt controller, so the bits that generate
internal interrupts must be cleared by software.
101
5.2.3 Interrupt Vector Table
Table 5-2 lists the addresses of the exception vector table entries for each interrupt, and explains
how their priority is determined. For the on-chip supporting modules, the priority level set in the
interrupt priority register applies to the module as a whole: all interrupts from that module have
the same priority level. A separate priority order is established among interrupts from the same
module. If the same priority level is assigned to two or more modules and two interrupts are
requested simultaneously from these modules, they are served in the priority order indicated in the
rightmost column in table 5-2.
A reset clears the interrupt priority registers so that all interrupts except NMI start with priority
level 0, meaning that they are unconditionally masked.
102
Table 5-2 Interrupts, Vectors, and Priorities
Assignable
Priority
Priority
among
Vector Table
Levels
(Initial
Level)
8(8)
7 to 0
(0)
7 to 0
(0)
7 to 0
(0)
Priority
within
Module
—
1
Entry Address
Interrupts
on Same
Level*
IPR
Bits
—
IPRA
bits 6 to 4
IPRA
bits 2 to 0
IPRB
bits 6 to 4
IPRB
bits 2 to 0
IPRC
Minimum
Maximum
Mode
Interrupt
NMI
IRQ0
Interval timer
IRQ1
Mode
H'16 - H'17
H'40 - H'41
H'42 - H'43
H'48 - H'49
H'2C - H'2F High
H'80 - H'83
H'84 - H'87
0
—
H'90 - H'93
IRQ2
IRQ3
IRQ4
IRQ5
FRT1
FRT2
FRT3
1
0
1
0
3
2
1
0
3
2
1
0
3
2
1
0
2
1
0
2
1
0
2
1
0
—
H'50 - H'51
H'52 - H'53
H'58 - H'59
H'5A - H'5B
H'60 - H'61
H'62 - H'63
H'64 - H'65
H'66 - H'67
H'68 - H'69
H'6A - H'6B
H'6C - H'6D
H'6E - H'6F
H'70 - H'71
H'72 - H'73
H'74 - H'75
H'76 - H'77
H'78 - H'79
H'7A - H'7B
H'7C - H'7D
H'80 - H'81
H'82 - H'83
H'84 - H'85
H'88 - H'89
H'8A - H'8B
H'8C - H'8D
H'90 - H'91
H'A0 - H'A3
H'A4 - H'A7
H'B0 - H'B3
H'B4 - H'B7
H'C0 - H'C3
H'C4 - H'C7
H'C8 - H'CB
H'CC - H'CF
H'D0 - H'D3
H'D4 - H'D7
H'D8 - H'DB
H'DC - H'DF
H'E0 - H'E3
H'E4 - H'E7
H'E8 - H'EB
H'EC - H'EF
H'F0 - H'F3
H'F4 - H'F7
H'F8 - H'FB
H'100 - H'103
H'104 - H'107
H'108 - H'10B
H'110 - H'113
H'114 - H'117
H'118 - H'11B
H'120 - H'123
Low
7 to 0
(0)
7 to 0
ICI
OCIA (0)
OCIB
bits 6 to 4
FOVI
ICI
7 to 0
OCIA (0)
OCIB
IPRC
bits 2 to 0
FOVI
ICI
7 to 0
OCIA (0)
OCIB
IPRD
bits 6 to 4
FOVI
8-bit
timer
CMIA 7 to 0
CMIB (0)
OVI
IPRD
bits 2 to 0
SCI1
SCI2
ERI
RXI
TXI
ERI
RXI
TXI
ADI
7 to 0
(0)
IPRE
bits 6 to 4
7 to 0
(0)
IPRE
bits 2 to 0
A/D
7 to 0
(0)
IPRF
bits 6 to 4
converter
* If two or more interrupts are requested simultaneously, they are handled in order of priority level,
as set in registers IPRA to IPRF. If they have the same priority level because they are requested
from the same on-chip supporting module, they are handled in a fixed priority order within the
module. If they are requested from different modules to which the same priority level is
assigned, they are handled in the order indicated in the right-hand column.
103
5.3 Register Descriptions
5.3.1 Interrupt Priority Registers A to F (IPRA to IPRF)
IRQ0, IRQ1 to IRQ5, and the on-chip supporting modules are each assigned three bits in one of
the six interrupt priority registers (IPRA to IPRF). These bits specify a priority level from 7
(high) to 0 (low) for interrupts from the corresponding source. The drawing below shows the
configuration of the interrupt priority registers. Table 5-3 lists their assignments to interrupt
sources.
Bit
7
—
0
6
5
4
3
—
0
2
1
0
Initial value
Read/Write
0
0
0
0
0
0
R
R/W
R/W
R/W
R
R/W
R/W
R/W
Note: Bits 7 and 3 are reserved. They cannot be modified and are always read as 0.
Table 5-3 Assignment of Interrupt Priority Registers
Interrupt Request Source
Register Bits 6 to 4
Bits 2 to 0
IRQ1
IPRA
IPRB
IPRC
IPRD
IPRE
IPRF
IRQ0
IRQ2, IRQ3
FRT1
IRQ4, IRQ5
FRT2
FRT3
8-bit timer
SCI2
SCI1
A/D converter
—
As table 5-3 indicates, each interrupt priority register specifies priority levels for two interrupt
sources. A user program can assign desired levels to these interrupt sources by writing “000” in
bits 6 to 4 or bits 2 to 0 to set priority level 0, for example, or “111” to set priority level 7.
A reset clears registers IPRA to IPRF to H'00, so all interrupts except NMI are initially masked.
104
When the interrupt controller receives one or more interrupt requests, it selects the request with
the highest priority and compares its priority level with the interrupt mask level set in bits I2 to I0
in the CPU status register. If the priority level is higher than the mask level, the interrupt
controller passes the interrupt request to the CPU (or starts the data transfer controller). If the
priority level is lower than the mask level, the interrupt controller leaves the interrupt request
pending until the interrupt mask is altered to a lower level or the interrupt priority is raised.
Similarly, if it receives two interrupt requests with the same priority level, the interrupt controller
determines their priority as explained in table 5-2 and leaves the interrupt request with the lower
priority pending.
5.3.2 Timing of Priority Setting
The interrupt controller requires two system clock (ø) periods to determine the priority level of an
interrupt. Accordingly, when an instruction modifies an instruction priority register, the new
priority does not take effect until after the next instruction has been executed.
5.4 Interrupt Handling Sequence
5.4.1 Interrupt Handling Flow
The interrupt-handling sequence follows the flowchart in figure 5-2. Note that address error, trace
exception, and NMI requests bypass the interrupt controller’s priority decision logic and are
routed directly to the CPU.
1. Interrupt requests are generated by one or more on-chip supporting modules or external
interrupt sources.
2. The interrupt controller checks the interrupt priorities set in IPRA to IPRF and selects the
interrupt with the highest priority. Interrupts with lower priorities remain pending. Among
interrupts with the same priority level, the interrupt controller determines priority as explained
in table 5-2.
3. The interrupt controller compares the priority level of the selected interrupt request with the
mask level in the CPU status register (bits I2 to I0). If the priority level is equal to or less than
the mask level, the interrupt request remains pending. If the priority level is higher than the
mask level, the interrupt controller accepts the interrupt request and proceeds to the next step.
4. The interrupt controller checks the corresponding bit (if any) in the data transfer enable
registers (DTEA to DTEF). If this bit is set to 1, the data transfer controller is started.
Otherwise, the CPU interrupt exception-handling sequence is started.
When the data transfer controller is started, the interrupt request is cleared (except for interrupt
requests from the serial communication interface, which are cleared by writing to the TDR or
reading the RDR).
105
If the data transfer enable bit is cleared to 0 (or is nonexistent), the sequence proceeds as follows.
For the case in which the data transfer controller is started, see section 6, “Data Transfer
Controller.”
5. After the CPU has finished executing the current instruction, the program counter and status
register (in minimum mode) or program counter, code page register, and status register (in
maximum mode) are saved to the stack, leaving the stack in the condition shown in figure 5-3
(a) or (b). The program counter value saved on the stack is the address of the next instruction
to be executed.
6. The T (Trace) bit of the status register is cleared to 0, and the priority level of the interrupt is
copied to bits I2 to I0, thus masking further interrupts unless they have a higher priority level.
When an NMI is accepted, the interrupt mask level in bits I2 to I0 is set to 7.
7. The interrupt controller generates the vector address of the interrupt, and the entry at this
address in the exception vector table is read to obtain the starting address of the user-coded
interrupt handling routine.
In step 7, the same difference between the minimum and maximum modes exists as in the reset
handling sequence. In the minimum mode, one word is copied from the vector table to the
program counter, then the interrupt-handling routine starts executing from the address indicated in
the program counter. In the maximum mode, two words are read. The lower byte of the first
word is copied to the code page register. The second word is copied to the program counter. The
interrupt-handling routine starts executing from the address indicated in the code page register and
program counter.
106
Program execution state
N
Interrupt requested?
Y
N
Address
error?
N
Trace?
Y
N
NMI?
Y
N
Y
Level-7 interrupt?
Y
N
Level-6 interrupt?
Y
N
Level-1 interrupt?
Y
Mask level
in SR ≤ 5?
Mask level
in SR = 0?
Mask level
in SR 6?
≤
N
N
N
Y
Y
Y
Interrupt remains pending
Start DTC
Y
Data transfer
enabled?
Read DTC vector
N
Exception-handling
sequence
Read transfer mode
Save PC
Read source address
Read data
Y
Maximum
mode?
Source
address increment
mode?
Y
Save PC
N
Increment source
address (+1 or +2)
N
Save SR
Write source address
Read destination address
Write data
Clear T bit
N
Trace
Y
Destination
address increment
mode?
N
Increment source
address (+1 or +2)
Address
error?
N
Update mask level
Vectoring
Y
Write destination
address
Read DTCR
→
DTCR-1 DTCR
Write DTCR
DTCR = 0?
To user-coded
exception-handling
routine
N
Y
Figure 5-2 Interrupt Handling Flowchart
107
5.4.2 Stack Status after Interrupt Handling Sequence
Figure 5-3 (a) and (b) show the stack before and after the interrupt exception-handling sequence.
Address
2m – 4
Address
2m – 4
Upper 8 bits of SR
Lower 8 bits of SR
Upper 8 bits of PC
Lower 8 bits of PC
SP
2m – 3
2m – 2
2m – 1
2m
2m – 3
2m – 2
2m – 1
2m
SP
Stack area
(Before)
(After)
Save to stack
Notes:
1. PC: The address of the next instruction to be executed is saved.
2. Register saving and restoring must start at an even address (e.g 2m).
Figure 5-3 (a) Stack before and after Interrupt Exception-Handling
(Minimum Mode)
108
Address
Address
2m – 6
2m – 5
2m – 4
2m – 6
2m – 5
2m – 4
SP
Upper 8 bits of SR
Lower 8 bits of SR
Don’t care
2m – 3
2m – 2
2m – 1
2m
2m – 3
2m – 2
2m – 1
2m
CP
Upper 8 bits of PC
Lower 8 bits of PC
SP
Stack area
(Before)
(After)
Save to stack
Notes:
1. PC: The address of the next instruction to be executed is saved.
2. Register saving and restoring must start at an even address (e.g 2m).
Figure 5-3 (b) Stack before and after Interrupt Exception-Handling (Maximum Mode)
5.4.3 Timing of Interrupt Exception-Handling Sequence
Figure 5-4 shows the timing of the exception-handling sequence for an interrupt in minimum
mode when the program area and stack area are both in on-chip memory and the user-coded
interrupt handling routine starts at an even address.
Figure 5-5 shows the timing of the exception-handling sequence for an interrupt in maximum
mode when the program area and stack area are both in external memory.
5.5 Interrupts During Operation of the Data Transfer Controller
If an interrupt is requested during a DTC data transfer cycle, the interrupt is not accepted until the
data transfer cycle has been completed and the next instruction has been executed. This is true
even if the interrupt is an NMI. An example is shown below.
Program flow
(Example)
DTC interrupt request
ADD.W R2, R0
Data transfer cycle
NMI interrupt
MOV.W R0, @H'FE00
ADD.W @H' FE02,R0
After data transfer cycle, CPU executes next
instruction before starting exception handling
To NMI exception handling sequence
109
Figure 5-4 Interrupt Sequence (Minimum Mode, On-Chip Memory)
110
Figure 5-5 Interrupt Sequence (Maximum Mode, External Memory)
111
5.6 Interrupt Response Time
Table 5-4 indicates the number of states that may elapse between the generation of an interrupt
request and the execution of the first instruction of the interrupt-handling routine, assuming that
the interrupt is not masked and not preempted by a higher-priority interrupt. Since word access is
performed to on-chip memory areas, fastest interrupt service can be obtained by placing the
program in on-chip ROM and the stack in on-chip RAM.
Table 5-4 Number of States before Interrupt Service
Number of States
No. Reason for Wait
Minimum Mode
Maximum Mode
1
Interrupt priority decision and comparison with
mask level in CPU status register
2 states
2
Maximum number of
states to completion
of current instruction
Instruction is in on-chip
x
memory
(x = 38 for LDM instruction specifying
all registers)
Instruction is in external
memory
y
(y = 74 + 16m for LDM instruction
specifying all registers)
3
Saving of PC and SR Stack is in on-chip RAM
16
21
or PC, CP, and SR
and instruction prefetch
Stack is in
Stack is in external memory 28 + 6m
41 + 10m
Instruction is in on-chip
memory
18 + x
23 + x
on-chip RAM
(56)
(61)
Instruction is in external
memory
18 + y
23 + y
Total
(92 + 16m)
30 + 6m + x
(68 + 6m)
30 + 6m + y
(104 + 22m)
(97 + 16m)
43 + 10m + x
(81 + 10m)
43 + 10m + y
(117 + 26m)
Stack is in
Instruction is in on-chip
memory
external RAM
Instruction is in external
memory
Note: m: Number of wait states inserted in external memory access.
Values in parentheses are for the LDM instruction.
112
Section 6 Data Transfer Controller
6.1 Overview
The H8/534 and H8/536 include a data transfer controller (DTC) that can be started by designated
interrupts to transfer data from a source address to a destination address located in page 0. These
addresses include in particular the registers of the on-chip supporting modules and I/O ports.
Typical uses of the DTC are to change the setting of a control register of an on-chip supporting
module in response to an interrupt from that module, or to transfer data from memory to an I/O
port or the serial communication interface. Once set up, the transfer is interrupt-driven, so it
proceeds independently of program execution, although program execution temporarily stops
while each byte or word is being transferred.
6.1.1 Features
The main features of the DTC are listed below.
• The source address and destination address can be set anywhere in the 64-kbyte address space
of page 0.
• The DTC can be programmed to transfer one byte or one word of data per interrupt.
• The DTC can be programmed to increment the source address and/or destination address after
each byte or word is transferred.
• After transferring a designated number of bytes or words, the DTC generates a CPU interrupt
with the vector of the interrupt source that started the DTC.
• This designated data transfer count can be set from 1 to 65,536 bytes or words.
6.1.2 Block Diagram
Figure 6-1 shows a block diagram of the DTC.
The four DTC control registers (DTMR, DTSR, DTDR, and DTCR) are invisible to the CPU, but
corresponding information is kept in a register information table in memory. A separate table is
maintained for each DTC interrupt type. When an interrupt requests DTC service, the DTC loads
its control registers from the table in memory, transfers the byte or word of data, and writes any
altered register information back to memory.
113
Internal data bus
DTC request
RAM
Register
information table
0
Interrupt controller
DTC
DTEA
DTEB
DTEC
IRQ0
IRQ1
Register
information table
1
DTMR
DTED
DTEE
DTEF
DTSR
DTDR
DTCR
DTMR: DT Mode Register
DTSR: DT Source Address Register
DTDR: DT Destination Address Register
DTCR: DT Count Register
DTEA to DTEF: DT Enable Register A to D
Figure 6-1 Block Diagram of Data Transfer Controller
6.1.3 Register Configuration
The four DTC control registers are listed in table 6-1. These registers are not located in the
address space and cannot be written or read by the CPU. To set information in these registers, a
program must write the information in a table in memory from which it will be loaded by the
DTC.
Table 6-1 Internal Control Registers of the DTC
Name
Abbreviation
DTMR
Read/Write
Disabled
Disabled
Disabled
Disabled
Data transfer mode register
Data transfer source address register
Data transfer destination address register
Data transfer count register
DTSR
DTDR
DTCR
114
Starting of the DTC is controlled by the six data transfer enable registers, which are located in
high addresses in page 0. Table 6-2 lists these registers.
Table 6-2 Data Transfer Enable Registers
Name
Abbreviation
DTEA
Read/Write Address
Initial Value
H'00
Data transfer enable register A
Data transfer enable register B
Data transfer enable register C
Data transfer enable register D
Data transfer enable register E
Data transfer enable register F
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
H'FF08
H'FF09
H'FF0A
H'FF0B
H'FF0C
H'FF0D
DTEB
H'00
DTEC
H'00
DTED
H'00
DTEE
H'00
DTEF
H'00
6.2 Register Descriptions
6.2.1 Data Transfer Mode Register (DTMR)
Bit
15 14 13 12 11 10
9
8
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
0
Sz SI DI
Read/Write —
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
The data transfer mode register is a 16-bit register, the first three bits of which designate the data
size and specify whether to increment the source and destination addresses.
Bit 15—Sz (Size): This bit designates the size of the data transferred.
Bit 15
Sz
0
Description
Byte transfer
1
Word transfer* (two bytes at a time)
* For word transfer, the source and destination addresses must be even addresses.
Bit 14—SI (Source Increment): This bit specifies whether to increment the source address.
Bit 14
SI
0
Description
Source address is not incremented.
1
1) If Sz = 0: Source address is incremented by +1 after each data transfer.
2) If Sz = 1: Source address is incremented by +2 after each data transfer.
115
Bit 13—DI (Destination Increment): This bit specifies whether to increment the destination
address.
Bit 13
DI
0
Description
Destination address is not incremented.
1
1) If Sz = 0: Destination address is incremented by +1 after each data transfer.
2) If Sz = 1: Destination address is incremented by +2 after each data transfer.
Bits 12 to 0—Reserved Bits: These bits are reserved.
6.2.2 Data Transfer Source Address Register (DTSR)
Bit
15 14 13 12 11 10
9
8
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
0
Read/Write —
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
The data transfer source register is a 16-bit register that designates the data transfer source
address. For word transfer this must be an even address. In the maximum mode, this address is
implicitly located in page 0.
6.2.3 Data Transfer Destination Register (DTDR)
Bit
15 14 13 12 11 10
9
8
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
0
Read/Write —
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
The data transfer destination register is a 16-bit register that designates the data transfer
destination address. For word transfer this must be an even address. In the maximum mode, this
address is implicitly located in page 0.
6.2.4 Data Transfer Count Register (DTCR)
Bit
15 14 13 12 11 10
9
8
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
0
Read/Write —
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
116
The data transfer count register is a 16-bit register that counts the number of bytes or words of
data remaining to be transferred. The initial count can be set from 1 to 65,536. A register value
of 0 designates an initial count of 65,536.
The data transfer count register is decremented automatically after each byte or word is transferred.
When its value reaches 0, indicating that the designated number of bytes or words have been
transferred, a CPU interrupt is generated with the vector of the interrupt that requested the data transfer.
6.2.5 Data Transfer Enable Registers A to F (DTEA to DTEF)
These six registers designate whether an interrupt starts the DTC. The bits in these registers are
assigned to interrupts as indicated in table 6-3. No bits are assigned to the NMI, FOVI, OVI, and
ERI interrupts, which cannot request data transfers.
Bit
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
0
Initial value
Read/Write
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
Table 6-3 Assignment of Data Transfer Enable Registers
Interrupt
Interrupt
Source or
Source or
Register Module
Bits 7 to 4
Module Bits 3 to 0
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
0
DTEA
DTEB
DTEC
DTED
DTEE
DTEF
IRQ0
—
—
—
IRQ0 IRQ1
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
IRQ1
IRQ2, IRQ3
16-Bit FRT1
16-Bit FRT3
SCI1
—
—
IRQ3 IRQ2 IRQ4, IRQ5
—
IRQ5 IRQ4
—
—
—
—
OCIB1 OCIA1 ICI1 16-Bit FRT2
OCIB3 OCIA3 ICI3 8-Bit Timer
OCIB2 OCIA2 ICI2
CMIB CMIA
—
TXI1 RXI1
—
SCI2
TXI2 RXI2
—
—
A/D converter
—
—
ADI
—
—
Note: Bits marked “—” should always be cleared to 0.
If the bit for a certain interrupt is set to 1, that interrupt is regarded as a request for DTC service.
If the bit is cleared to 0, the interrupt is regarded as a CPU interrupt request.
117
Only the interrupts indicated in table 6-3 can request DTC service. DTE bits not assigned to any
interrupt (indicated by “—” in table 6-3) should be left cleared to 0.
• Note on Timing of DTE Modifications: The interrupt controller requires two system clock (ø)
periods to determine the priority level of an interrupt. Accordingly, when an instruction modifies
a data transfer enable register, the new setting does not take effect until the third state after taht
instruction has been executed.
6.3 Data Transfer Operation
6.3.1 Data Transfer Cycle
When started by an interrupt, the DTC executes the following data transfer cycle:
1. From the DTC vector table, the DTC reads the address at which the register information table
for that interrupt is located in memory.
2. The DTC loads the data transfer mode register and source address register from this table and
reads the data (one byte or word) from the source address.
3. If so specified in the mode register, the DTC increments the source address register and writes
the new source address back to the table in memory.
4. The DTC loads the data transfer destination address register and writes the byte or word of data
to the destination address.
5. If so specified in the mode register, the DTC increments the destination address register and
writes the new destination address back to the table in memory.
6. The DTC loads the data transfer count register from the table in memory, decrements the data
count, and writes the new count back to memory.
7. If the data transfer count is now 0, the DTC generates a CPU interrupt. The interrupt vector is
the vector of the interrupt type that started the DTC.
At an appropriate point during this procedure the DTC also clears the interrupt request by clearing
the corresponding flag bit in the status register of the on-chip supporting module to 0.
But the DTC does not clear the data transfer enable bit in the data transfer enable register. This
action, if necessary, must be taken by the user-coded interrupt-handling routine invoked at the end
of the transfer.
The data transfer cycle is shown in a flowchart in figure 6-2.
For the steps from the occurrence of the interrupt up to the start of the data transfer cycle, see
section 5.4.1, “Interrupt Handling Flow.”
118
INT
Interrupt
CPU
N
DTC interrupt?
Y
DTC
Save PC and SR
Read vector
Read DTC vector
Read transfer mode
Read source address
Read data
Read address from
vector table
Start executing
interrupt-handling
routine at that
address.
Y
Source address
increment mode?
N
Increment source address (+1 or +2)
Write source address
Read destination address
Write data
Y
Destination address
increment mode?
N
Increment destination address
(+1 or +2)
Write destination address
Read DTCR
→
DTCR – 1
DTCR
Write DTCR
Y
DTCR = 0?
N
DTC END
Figure 6-2 Flowchart of Data Transfer Cycle
119
6.3.2 DTC Vector Table
The DTC vector table is located immediately following the exception vector table at the beginning
of page 0 in memory. For each interrupt that can request DTC service, the DTC vector table
provides a pointer to an address in memory where the table of DTC control register information
for that interrupt is stored. The register information tables can be placed in any available locations
in page 0.
Vector table
RAM
DTMR0
DTSR0
DTDR0
DTCR0
Register
information table
0
Exception
vector table
TA0
DTMR1
DTSR1
DTDR1
DTCR1
TA0
TA1
Register
information table
1
TA1
DTC vector
table
Note: TA0, TA1, ...: Addresses of DTC register information tables in memory.
N
Normally the register information tables are placed on RAM. If software does not
need to modify the register information (addresses are fixed and transfer count is 1),
it can be placed on ROM.
Figure 6-3 DTC Vector Table
In minimum mode, each entry in the DTC vector table consists of two bytes, pointing to an
address in page 0. In maximum mode, for compatibility reasons, each DTC vector table entry
consists of four bytes but the first two bytes are ignored; the last two bytes point to an address
which is implicitly assumed to be in page 0, regardless of the current page specifications.
Figure 6-4 shows one DTC vector table entry in minimum and maximum mode.
120
DTC vector table
RAM
DTC vector table
Address
m
Address
*
2m
Register
information
Address (H)
Address (L)
Don’t care
Don’t care
*
2 m + 1
m + 1
Address (H)
Address (L)
2 m + 2
2 m + 3
(1) Minimum mode
(2) Maximum mode
* Address 2m and 2m + 1 are not accessed at vector read.
Figure 6-4 DTC Vector Table Entry
Table 6-4 lists the addresses of the entries in the DTC vector table for each interrupt.
Table 6-4 Addresses of DTC Vectors
Address of DTC Vector
Interrupt
IRQ0
Minimum Mode
H'00C0 - H'00C1
H'00C2 - H'00C3
H'00C8 - H'00C9
H'00D0 - H'00D1
H'00D2 - H'00D3
H'00D8 - H'00D9
H'00DA - H'00DB
H'00E0 - H'00E1
H'00E2 - H'00E3
H'00E4 - H'00E5
H'00E8 - H'00E9
H'00EA - H'00EB
H'00EC - H'00ED
H'00F0 - H'00F1
H'00F2 - H'00F3
H'00F4 - H'00F5
Maximum Mode
H'0180 - H'0183
H'0184 - H'0187
H'0190 - H'0193
H'01A0 - H'01A3
H'01A4 - H'01A7
H'01B0 - H'01B3
H'01B4 - H'01B7
H'01C0 - H'01C3
H'01C4 - H'01C7
H'01C8 - H'01CB
H'01D0 - H'01D3
H'01D4 - H'01D7
H'01D8 - H'01DB
H'01E0 - H'01E3
H'01E4 - H'01E7
H'01E8 - H'01EB
Interval timer
IRQ1
IRQ2
IRQ3
IRQ4
IRQ5
FRT1
ICI
OCIA
OCIB
ICI
FRT2
FRT3
OCIA
OCIB
ICI
OCIA
OCIB
121
Table 6-4 Addresses of DTC Vectors (cont)
Address of DTC Vector
Interrupt
8-Bit
Minimum Mode
Maximum Mode
H'01F0 - H'01F3
H'01F4 - H'01F7
H'0144 - H'0147
H'0148 - H'014B
H'0154 - H'0157
H'0158 - H'015B
H'0160 - H'0163
CMIA
CMIB
RXI
H'00F8 - H'00F9
H'00FA - H'00FB
H'00A2 - H'00A3
H'00A4 - H'00A5
H'00AA - H'00AB
H'00AC - H'00AD
H'00B0 - H'00B1
timer
SCI1
TXI
SCI2
RXI
TXI
A/D converter
ADI
6.3.3 Location of Register Information in Memory
For each interrupt, the DTC control register information is stored in four consecutive words in
memory in the order shown in figure 6-5.
DTC vector table
RAM
DTMR
DTSR
DTDR
DTCR
Mode register
TA + 2
TA + 4
TA + 6
Source address register
Destination address register
TA
8 Bits
8 Bits
Count register
Figure 6-5 Order of Register Information
6.3.4 Length of Data Transfer Cycle
Table 6-5 lists the number of states required per data transfer, assuming that the DTC control
register information is stored in on-chip RAM. This is the number of states required for loading
and saving the DTC control registers and transferring one byte or word of data. Two cases are
considered: a transfer between on-chip RAM and a register belonging to an I/O port or on-chip
supporting module (i.e., a register in the register field from addresses H'FE80 to H'FFFF); and a
transfer between such a register and external RAM.
122
Table 6-5 Number of States per Data Transfer
Increment Mode
Source Destina-
On-Chip RAM ↔Module or I/O
External RAM ↔ Module or I/O
Register
Register
(SI)
0
tion (DI)
Byte Transfer Word Transfer
Byte Transfer
Word Transfer
0
1
0
1
31
33
33
35
34
36
36
38
32
34
34
36
38
40
40
42
0
1
1
Note: Numbers in the table are the number of states.
The values in table 6-5 are calculated from the formula:
N = 26 + 2 × SI + 2 × DI + MS + MD
Where MS and MD have the following meanings:
MS: Number of states for reading source data
MD: Number of states for writing destination data
The values of MS and MD depend on the data location as follows:
➀ Byte or word data in on-chip RAM:
➁Byte data in external RAM or register field:
➂Word data in external RAM or register field:
➩
➩
➩
2 states
3 states
6 states
If the DTC control register information is stored in external RAM, 20 + 4 × SI + 4 × DI must be
added to the values in table 6-5.
The values given above do not include the time between the occurrence of the interrupt request
and the starting of the DTC. This time includes two states for the interrupt controller to check
priority and a variable wait until the end of the current CPU instruction. At maximum, this time
equals the sum of the values indicated for items No. 1 and 2 in table 6-6.
If the data transfer count is 0 at the end of a data transfer cycle, the number of states from the end
of the data transfer cycle until the first instruction of the user-coded interrupt-handling routine is
executed is the value given for item No. 3 in table 6-6.
123
Table 6-6 Number of States before Interrupt Service
Number of States
Minimum Mode Maximum Mode
No. Reason for Wait
1
Interrupt priority decision and comparison with
mask level in CPU status register
2 states
2
Maximum number of
states to completion
of current instruction
Instruction is in on-chip
memory
38
(LDM instruction specifying all registers)
74 + 16m
Instruction is in external
memory
(LDM instruction specifying all registers)
3
Saving of PC and SR Stack is in on-chip RAM
or PC, CP, and SR
16
21
and instruction prefetch Stack is in external memory 28 + 6m
41 + 10m
m: Number of wait states inserted in external memory access
6.4 Procedure for Using the DTC
A program that uses the DTC to transfer data must do the following:
1. Set the appropriate DTMR, DTSR, DTDR, and DTCR register information in the memory
location indicated in the DTC vector table.
2. Set the data transfer enable bit of the pertinent interrupt to 1, and set the priority of the interrupt
source (in the interrupt priority register) and the interrupt mask level (in the CPU status
register) so that the interrupt can be accepted.
3. Set the interrupt enable bit in the control register for the interrupt source (or set the IRQ enable
bit).
Following these preparations, the DTC will be started each time the interrupt occurs. When the
number of bytes or words designated by the DTCR value have been transferred, after transferring
the last byte or word, the DTC generates a CPU interrupt.
The user-coded interrupt-handling routine must take action to prepare for or disable further DTC
data transfer: by readjusting the data transfer count, for example, or clearing the interrupt enable
bit. If no action is taken, the next interrupt of the same type will start the DTC with an initial data
transfer count of 65,536.
124
6.5 Example
Purpose: To receive 128 bytes of serial data the serial communication interface 1.
Conditions:
• Operating mode: Minimum mode
• Received data are to be stored in consecutive addresses starting at H'FC00.
• DTC control register information for the RXI interrupt is stored at addresses H'FB80 to H'FB87.
• Accordingly, the DTC vector table contains H'FB at address H'00A2 and H'80 at address
H'00A3.
• The desired interrupt mask level in the CPU status register is 4, and the desired SCI1 interrupt
priority level is 5.
Procedure
1. The user program sets DTC control register information in addresses H'FB80 to H'FB87 as
shown in table 6-7.
Table 6-7 DTC Control Register Information Set in RAM
Address
Register
Description
Value Set
Byte transfer
H'FB80
DTMR
Source address fixed
H'2000
Increment destination address
Address of SCI1 receive data register
Address H'FC00
H'FB82
H'FB84
H'FB86
DTSR
DTDR
DTCR
H'FEDD
H'FC00
H'0080
Number of bytes to be received: 128
2. The program sets the RI (SCI1 Receive Interrupt) bit in the data transfer enable register (bit 5
of register DTEE) to 1.
3. The program sets the interrupt mask in the CPU status register to 4, and the SCI1 interrupt
priority in bits 6 to 4 of interrupt priority register IPRE to 5.
4. The program sets SCI1 to the appropriate receive mode, and sets the receive interrupt enable
(RIE) bit in the serial control register (SCR) to 1 to enable receive interrupts.
5. Thereafter, each time SCI1 receives one byte of data, it requests an RXI interrupt, which the
interrupt controller directs toward the DTC. The DTC transfers the byte from the SCI’s receive
data register (RDR) into RAM, and clears the interrupt request before ending.
125
6. When 128 bytes have been transferred (DTCR = 0), the DTC generates a CPU interrupt. The
interrupt type is RXI from SCI1.
7. The user-coded RXI interrupt-handling routine processes the received data and disables further
data transfer (by clearing the RIE bit, for example).
Figure 6-6 shows the DTC vector table and data in RAM for this example.
DTC vector table
RAM
Address
H'FB80
H'20
H'00
H'FE
H'DD
H'FC
Address
H'00A2
H'00A3
Mode
H'FB81
H'FB
H'80
Source address
Destination address
Counter
H'00
H'00
H'80
H'FB87
H'FC00
Receive data 1
Receive data 2
Transferred
by DTC
Receive data 128
H'FC7F
RDR
SCI
Figure 6-6 Use of DTC to Receive Data via Serial Communication Interface 1
126
Section 7 Wait-State Controller
7.1 Overview
To simplify interfacing to low-speed external devices, the H8/534 and H8/536 have an on-chip
wait-state controller (WSC) that can insert wait states (TW) to prolong bus cycles.
The wait-state function can be used in CPU and DTC access cycles to external addresses. It is not
used in access to on-chip supporting modules. The TW states are inserted between the T2 state
and T3 state in the bus cycle. The number of wait states can be selected by a value set in the wait-
state control register (WCR), or by holding the WAIT pin Low for the required interval.
7.1.1 Features
The main features of the wait-state controller are:
• Selection of three operating modes
Programmable wait mode, pin wait mode, or pin auto-wait mode
• 0, 1, 2, or 3 wait states can be inserted.
And in the pin wait mode, 4 or more states can be inserted by holding the WAIT pin Low.
127
7.1.2 Block Diagram
Figure 7-1 shows a block diagram of the wait-state controller.
Internal data bus
WCR
—
—
—
—
WMS1 WMS0 WC1 WC0
Wait counter
WAIT request
Control logic
WAIT input
WCR:
Wait-state Control Register
WMS1, 0: Wait Mode Select 1, 0
WC1, 0: Wait Count 1, 0
Figure 7-1 Block Diagram of Wait-State Controller
7.1.3 Register Configuration
The wait-state controller has one control register: the wait-state control register described in
table 7-1.
Table 7-1 Register Configuration
Name
Abbreviation
Read/Write
Initial Value
Address
Wait-state control register
WCR
R/W
H'F3
H'FF10
128
7.2 Wait-State Control Register
The wait-state control register (WCR) is an 8-bit register that specifies the wait mode and the
number of wait states to be inserted. A reset initializes the WCR to specify the programmable
wait mode with three wait states. The WCR is not initialized in the software standby mode.
Bit
7
—
1
6
—
1
5
—
1
4
—
1
3
2
1
0
WMS1 WMS0
WC1
1
WC0
1
Initial value
Read/Write
0
0
—
—
—
—
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
Bits 7 to 4—Reserved: These bits cannot be modified and are always read as 1.
Bits 3 and 2—Wait Mode Select 1 and 0 (WMS1 and WMS0): These bits select the wait mode
as shown below.
Bit 3
Bit 2
WMS1
WMS0
Description
0
0
1
1
0
1
0
1
Programmable wait mode (Initial value)
No wait states are inserted, regardless of the wait count.
Pin wait mode
Pin auto-wait mode
Bits 1 and 0—Wait Count (WC1 and WC0): These bits specify the number of wait states to be
inserted.
Wait states are inserted only in bus cycles in which the CPU or DTC accesses an external address.
Bit 1
Bit 0
WC1
WC0
Description
0
0
1
1
0
1
0
1
No wait states are inserted, except in pin wait mode.
1 Wait state is inserted.
2 Wait states are inserted.
3 Wait states are inserted. (Initial value)
129
7.3 Operation in Each Wait Mode
Table 7-2 summarizes the operation of the three wait modes.
Table 7-2 Wait Modes
WAIT
Insertion
Number of Wait
States Inserted
Mode
Pin Function Conditions
Programmable Disabled
wait mode
Inserted on access to 1 to 3 wait states are inserted, as
an off-chip address specified by bits WC0 and WC1.
WMS1 = 0
WMS0 = 0
Pin wait mode Enabled
WMS1 = 1
Inserted on access to 0 to 3 wait states are inserted, as
an off-chip address
specified by bits WC0 and WC1,
plus additional wait states while the
WAIT pin is held Low.
WMS0 = 0
Pin auto-wait
mode
Enabled
Inserted on access to 1 to 3 wait states are inserted, as
an off-chip address if specified by bits WC0 and WC1.
the WAIT pin is Low
WMS1 = 1
WMS0 = 1
7.3.1 Programmable Wait Mode
The programmable wait mode is selected when WMS1 = 0 and WMS0 = 0.
Whenever the CPU or DTC accesses an off-chip address, the number of wait states set in bits
WC1 and WC0 are inserted. The WAIT pin is not used for wait control; it is available as an I/O
pin.
130
Figure 7-2 shows the timing of the operation in this mode when the wait count is 1 (WC1 = 0,
WC0 = 1).
T2 state or T3
T1
T2
TW
T3
ø
A19 –A0
Off-chip address
RD, AS,
DS (Read)
Read data
Read data
D7 –D0
WR, DS
(Write)
Write data
D7 –D0
Figure 7-2 Programmable Wait Mode
7.3.2 Pin Wait Mode
The pin wait mode is selected when WMS1 = 1 and WMS0 = 0.
In this mode the WAIT function of the P14 /WAIT pin is used automatically.
The number of wait states indicated by bits WC1 and WC0 are inserted into any bus cycle in
which the CPU or DTC accesses an off-chip address. In addition, wait states continue to be
inserted as long as the WAIT pin is held low. In particular, if the wait count is 0 but the WAIT pin
is Low at the rising edge of the ø clock in the T2 state, wait states are inserted until the WAIT pin
goes High.
This mode is useful for inserting four or more wait states, or when different external devices
require different numbers of wait states.
131
Figure 7-3 shows the timing of the operation in this mode when the wait count is 1 (WC1 = 0,
WC0 = 1) and the WAIT pin is held Low to insert one additional wait state.
Wait
count
TW
WAIT
pin
TW
T1
T2
T3
*
*
ø
WAIT pin
A19 –A0
Off-chip address
RD, AS,
DS (Read)
Read data
D7 –D0
WR, DS
(Write)
D7 –D0
Write data
* The arrowheads indicate the times at which the WAIT pin is sampled.
Figure 7-3 Pin Wait Mode
132
7.3.3 Pin Auto-Wait Mode
The pin auto-wait mode is selected when WMS1 = 1 and WMS0 = 1.
In this mode the WAIT function of the P14 /WAIT pin is used automatically.
In this mode, the number of wait states indicated by bits WC1 and WC0 are inserted, but only if
there is a Low input at the WAIT pin.
Figure 7-4 shows the timing of this operation when the wait count is 1.
In the pin auto-wait mode, the WAIT pin is sampled only once, on the falling edge of the ø clock
in the T2 state. If the WAIT pin is Low at this time, the wait-state controller inserts the number of
wait states indicated by bits WC1 and WC0. The WAIT pin is not sampled during the Tw and T3
states, so no additional wait states are inserted even if the WAIT pin continues to be held Low.
This mode offers a simple way to interface a low-speed device: the wait states can be inserted by
routing a decoded address signal to the WAIT pin.
T1
T2
T3
T1
T2
TW
T3
ø
*
*
WAIT
A19 –A0
External address
External address
RD, AS,
DS (Read)
Read data
Read data
D7 –D0
WR, DS
(Write)
D7 –D0
Write data
Write data
* The arrowheads indicate the times at which the WAIT pin is sampled.
Figure 7-4 Pin Auto-Wait Mode
133
Section 8 Clock Pulse Generator
8.1 Overview
The H8/534 and H8/536 have a built-in clock pulse generator (CPG) consisting of an oscillator
circuit, a system (ø) clock divider, an E clock divider, and a group of prescalers. The prescalers
generate clock signals for the on-chip supporting modules.
8.1.1 Block Diagram
CPG
Prescalers
Divider
÷ 2
Divider
÷ 8
XTAL
Oscillator
circuit
EXTAL
ø
E
ø/2 to ø/4096
Figure 8-1 Block Diagram of Clock Pulse Generator
8.2 Oscillator Circuit
If an external crystal is connected across the EXTAL and XTAL pins, the on-chip oscillator circuit
generates a clock signal for the system clock divider. Alternatively, an external clock signal can
be applied to the EXTAL pin.
Connecting an External Crystal
(1) Circuit Configuration: An external crystal can be connected as in the example in figure 8-2.
An AT-cut parallel resonating crystal should be used.
135
CL1
CL2
EXTAL
XTAL
CL1 =CL2 =10 to 22pF
Figure 8-2 Connection of Crystal Oscillator (Example)
(2) Crystal Oscillator: The external crystal should have the characteristics listed in table 8-1.
CL
L
RS
XTAL
EXTAL
C0
AT-cut parallel resonating crystal
Figure 8-3 Crystal Oscillator Equivalent Circuit
Table 8-1 (1) External Crystal Parameters
(HD6475368R, HD6475348R, HD6435368R, HD6435348R)
Frequency (MHz)
Rs max (Ω)
C0 (pF)
2
4
8
12
40
16
30
20
20
500
120
60
7pF max
Table 8-1 (2) External Crystal Parameters
(HD6475368S, HD6475348S, HD6435368S, HD6435348S)
Frequency (MHz)
Rs max (Ω)
C0 (pF)
4
8
12
60
16
50
20
40
24
40
120
80
7pF max
Note: Use a fundamental-mode crystal (not an overtone crystal).
(3) Note on Board Design: When an external crystal is connected, other signal lines should be
kept away from the crystal circuit to prevent induction from interfering with correct
oscillation. See figure 8-4.
When the board is designed, the crystal and its load capacitors should be placed as close as
possible to the XTAL and EXTAL pins.
136
Not allowed
Signal A
Signal B
H8/534
H8/536
CL2
XTAL
EXTAL
CL1
Figure 8-4 Notes on Board Design around External Crystal
Input of External Clock Signal
(1) Circuit Configuration (HD6475368R, HD6475348R, HD6435368R, HD6435348R): When
using an external clock, input complementary clock signals to the EXTAL and XTAL pins as
shown in figure 8-5. Make sure the external clock does not go high during standby mode.
EXTAL
External clock input
74HC04
XTAL
Figure 8-5 External Clock Input (Example)
(2) External Clock Input
Frequency
Duty cycle
Double the system clock (ø) frequency
45% to 55%
Note: Mask-ROM versions can operate on external clock input
to the EXTAL pin alone, with the XTAL pin left open.
ZTAT versions can also operate with the XTAL pin left
open if the external clock frequency is 16 MHz or less.
137
(3) Circuit Configuration (HD6475368S, HD6475348S, HD6435368S, HD6435348S): Figure
8-6 shows examples of external clock input. When using figure 8-6 (b), make sure the external
clock does not go high during standby mode. When the XTAL pin is open, make sure the
parasitic capacifance is less than 10 pF.
EXTAL
XTAL
External clock input
Open
(a) XTAL pin left open
EXTAL
XTAL
External clock input
74HC04
(b) Complementary clock input at XTAL pin
Figure 8-6 External Clock Input (Examples)
(4) External Clock Input
Frequency
Duty cycle
Double the system clock (ø) frequency
40% to 60%
138
8.3 System Clock Divider
The system clock divider divides the crystal oscillator or external clock frequency (fosc) by 2 to
create the ø clock.
An E clock signal is created by dividing the ø clock by 8. The E clock is used for interfacing to E
clock based devices.
Figure 8-7 shows the phase relationship of the E clock to the ø clock.
ø
E
Figure 8-7 Phase Relationship of ø Clock and E Clock
139
Section 9 I/O Ports
9.1 Overview
The H8/534 and H8/536 have nine ports. Ports 1, 3, 4, 5, 7, and 9 are eight-bit input/output ports.
Port 2 is a five-bit input/output port. Port 6 is a four-bit input/output port. Port 8 is an eight-bit
input-only port. Table 9-1 summarizes the functions of each port.
Input and output are memory-mapped. The CPU views each port as a data register (DR) located
in the register field at the high end of page 0 of the address space. Each port (except port 8) also
has a data direction register (DDR) which determines which pins are used for input and which for
output. Additional system control registers (SYSCR1 and SYSCR2) control the functions of pins
in ports 1, 6, and 9.
To read data from an I/O port, the CPU selects input in the data direction register and reads the
data register. This causes the input logic level at the pin to be placed directly on the internal data
bus. There is no intervening input latch.
To send data to an output port, the CPU selects output in the data direction register and writes the
desired data in the data register, causing the data to be held in a latch. The latch output drives the
pin through a buffer amplifier. If the CPU reads the data register of an output port, it obtains the
data held in the latch rather than the actual level of the pin.
As table 9-1 indicates, all of the I/O port pins have dual functions. For example, pin 7 of port 1
can be used either as a general-purpose I/O pin (P17), or for output of the TMO signal from the
on-chip 8-bit timer. The function is determined by the MCU operating mode, or by a value set in
a control register.
Outputs from ports 1 to 6 can drive one TTL load and a 90 pF capacitive load. Outputs from ports
7 and 9 can drive one TTL load and a 30 pF capacitive load.
Outputs from ports 1 to 7 and 9 can also drive a Darlington transistor pair. Outputs from port 4
can drive a light-emitting diode (with 10mA current sink). Ports 5 and 6 have built-in MOS pull-
ups for each input. Port 7 has Schmitt inputs.
Schematic diagrams of the I/O port circuits are shown in appendix C.
141
Table 9-1 Input/Output Port Summary
Expanded Modes
Mode 1 Mode 2 Mode 3 Mode 4
Single-Chip Mode
(Mode 7)
Port Description
Pins
Port 1 8-Bit input/output P17 / TMO These input/output pins double as IRQ1,
P16 / IRQ1 / IRQ0, and ADTRG inputs, and as an
ADTRG
output pin (TMO) for the 8-bit timer.
P15 / IRQ0
P14 / WAIT These pins function as WAIT, BREQ, Input/output
P13 / BREQ and BACK when necessary control-
P12 / BACK register bits are set to 1.
port
P11 / E
P10 / ø
These pins function as input pins or as
clock (E, ø) output pins, depending on
the data direction register setting.
Bus control signal outputs
Port 2 5-Bit input/output P24 / WR
Input/output
port
port
P23 / RD
P22 / DS
P21 / R/W
P20 / AS
(WR, RD, DS, R/W, AS)
Port 3 8-Bit input/output P37 - P30 / Data bus (D7 – D0)
port D7 – D0
Port 4 8-Bit input/output P47 – P40 / Low address bus (A7 – A0)
Input/output
port
Input/output
port
port
A7 – A0
Can drive a LED
Port 5 8-Bit input/output P57 – P50 / High
High
address address address address
bus bus if bus bus if
(A15 – DDR is (A15 – DDR is
High
High
Input/output
port
port
A15 – A8
Built-in input
pull-up (MOS)
A8)
Port 6 4-Bit input/output P63 / PW3 / Output for PWM Page
set to 1 A8)
set to 1
Page
Input/output
port
port
IRQ5 / A19 timers 1, 2, and address address
P62 / PW2 / 3, input for IRQ2 bus bus if DDR
IRQ4 / A18 to IRQ5, and (A19 – is set to 1,
Built-in input
pull-up (MOS)
P61 / PW1 / input/output port. A16)
input port
and IRQ2
to IRQ5
IRQ3 / A17
P60 / IRQ2 /
A16
input pins if
DDR is set
to 0
142
Table 9-1 Input/Output Port Summary (cont)
Expanded Modes
Mode 1 Mode 2 Mode 3 Mode 4 (Mode 7)
Port 7 8-Bit input/output P77 / FTOA1 Input/output for free-running timers 1,
port P76 / FTOB3 / 2 and 3 (FTI1 to FTI3, FTCI1 to FTCI3,
(Schmitt inputs) FTCI3 FTOB1 to FTOB3, FTOA1),input for
P75 / FTOB2 / 8-bit timer input (TMCI, TMRI), and 8-bit
FTCI2 input/output port
Single-Chip Mode
Port Description
Pins
P74 / FTOB1 / (P77 to P70)
FTCI1 /
P73 / FTI3
TMRI
P72 / FTI2
P71 / FTI1
P70 / TMCI
Port 8 8-Bit input port
P80 – P87
AN7 – AN0
Analog input pins for A/D converter, and
8-bit input port
Port 9 8-Bit input/output P97 / SCK1
Output for free-running timers 2 and 3
(FTOA2, FTOA3), PWM timer output
(PW1, PW2, PW3), serial communication
port
P96 / RXD1
P95 / TXD1
P94 / SCK2 / interface (SCI1 and SCI2) input/output
PW3 (SCK1, RXD1, TXD1, SCK2, RXD2, TXD2),
P93 / RXD2 / and 8-bit input/output port
PW2
P92 / TXD2 /
PW1
P91 / FTOA3
P90 / FTOA2
143
9.2 Port 1
9.2.1 Overview
Port 1 is an 8-bit input/output port with the pin configuration shown in figure 9-1. All pins have
dual functions, except that in the single-chip mode pins 4, 3, and 2 do not have the WAIT, BREQ,
and BACK functions (because the CPU does not access an external bus).
Outputs from port 1 can drive one TTL load and a 90 pF capacitive load. They can also drive a
Darlington transistor pair.
Pin
Expanded Modes
Single-Chip Mode
P17 / TMO P17 (input/output) / TMO (output) P17 (input/output) / TMO (output)
P16 / IRQ1 / P16 (input/output) / IRQ1 (input) /
ADTRG ADTRG (input)
P16 (input/output) / IRQ1 (input) /
ADTRG (input)
P15 / IRQ0 P15 (input/output) / IRQ0 (input)
P14 / WAIT P14 (input/output) / WAIT (input)
P15 (input/output) / IRQ0 (input)
P14 (input/output)
Port
1
P13 / BREQ P13 (input/output) / BREQ (input) P13 (input/output)
P12 / BACK P12 (input/output) / BACK (output) P12 (input/output)
P11 / E
P10 / ø
P11 (input) / E (output)
P10 (input) / ø (output)
P11 (input) / E (output)
P10 (input) / ø (output)
Figure 9-1 Pin Functions of Port 1
9.2.2 Port 1 Registers
Register Configuration: Table 9-2 lists the registers of port 1.
Table 9-2 Port 1 Registers
Name
Abbreviation
P1DDR
Read/Write
W
R/W*1
Initial Value
H'03
Undetermined*2
Address
H'FE80
H'FE82
H'FEFC
Port 1 data direction register
Port 1 data register
System control register 1
P1DR
SYSCR1
R/W
H'87
*1 Bits 1 and 0 are read-only.
*2 Bits 1 and 0 are undetermined. Other bits are initialized to 0.
144
1. Port 1 Data Direction Register (P1DDR)—H'FE80
Bit
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
0
P17DDR P16DDR P15DDR P14DDR P13DDR P12DDR P11DDR P10DDR
Initial value
Read/Write
0
0
0
0
0
0
1
1
W
W
W
W
W
W
W
W
P1DDR is an 8-bit register that selects the direction of each pin in port 1. A pin functions as an
output pin if the corresponding bit in P1DDR is set to 1, and as an input pin if the bit is cleared to
0.
P1DDR can be written but not read. An attempt to read this register does not cause an error, but
all bits are read as 1, regardless of their true values.
A reset initializes P1DDR to H'03, so that pins P11 and P10 carry clock outputs and the other pins
are set for input. In the hardware standby mode, P1DDR is cleared to H'00, stopping the clock
outputs. P1DDR is not initialized in the software standby mode, so if a P1DDR bit is set to 1
when the chip enters the software standby mode, the corresponding pin continues to output the
value in the port 1 data register (or the ø or E clock).
2. Port 1 Data Register (P1DR)—H'FE82
Bit
7
P17
0
6
P16
0
5
P15
0
4
P14
0
3
P13
0
2
P12
0
1
P11
—
0
P10
—
Initial value
Read/Write
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
R
R
P1DR is an 8-bit register containing the data for pins P17 to P10. When the CPU reads P1DR, for
output pins it reads the value in the P1DR latch, but for input pins, it obtains the pin status
directly.
Note that when pins P11 and P10 are used for output, they output the clock signals (ø and E), not
the contents of P1DR. If the CPU reads Pl1 and Pl0 (when Pl1DDR = Pl0DDR = 1), it obtains the
clock values at the current instant.
3. System Control Register 1 (SYSCR1)—H'FEFC
Bit
7
—
1
6
IRQ1E
0
5
4
3
2
—
1
1
—
1
0
—
1
IRQ0E NMIEG BRLE
Initial value
Read/Write
0
0
0
—
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
—
—
—
145
SYSCR1 selects the functions of four of the port 1 pins. It also selects the input edge of the NMI
pin.
At a reset and in the hardware standby mode, SYSCR1 is initialized to H'87. It is not initialized in
the software standby mode.
Bit 7—Reserved: This bit cannot be modified and is always read as 1.
Bit 6—Interrupt Request 1 Enable (IRQ1E): This bit selects the function of pin P16.
Bit 6
IRQ1E
Description
0
1
P16 functions as an input/output pin.
(Initial value)
P16 functions as the IRQ1 input pin, regardless of the value set in P16DDR. (However,
the CPU can still read the pin status by reading P1DR.)
Bit 5—Interrupt Request 0 Enable (IRQ0E): This bit selects the function of pin P15.
Bit 5
IRQ0E
Description
0
1
P15 functions as an input/output pin.
(Initial value)
P15 functions as the IRQ0 input pin, regardless of the value set in P15DDR. (However,
the CPU can still read the pin status by reading P1DR.)
Bit 4—Nonmaskable Interrupt Edge (NMIEG): This bit selects the input edge of the NMI pin.
It is not related to port 0.
Bit 4
NMIEG
Description
0
A nonmaskable interrupt is generated on the falling edge
of the input at the NMI pin.
(Initial value)
1
A nonmaskable interrupt is generated on the rising edge
of the input at the NMI pin.
Bit 3—Bus Release Enable (BRLE): This bit selects the functions of pins P12 and P13. It is
valid only in the expanded modes (modes 1, 2, 3, and 4). In the single-chip mode, pins P12 and
P13 function as input/output pins regardless of the value of the BRLE bit.
146
Bit 3
BRLE
0
Description
P13 and P12 function as input/output pins.
(Initial value)
1
P13 functions as the BREQ input pin. P12 functions as the BACK output pin.
Bits 2 to 0—Reserved: These bits cannot be modified and are always read as 1.
9.2.3 Pin Functions in Each Mode
Port 1 operates differently in the expanded modes (modes 1, 2, 3, and 4) and the single-chip mode
(mode 7). Table 9-3 explains how the pin functions are selected in the expanded mode. Table 9-4
explains how the pin functions are selected in the single-chip mode.
Table 9-3 Port 1 Pin Functions in Expanded Modes
Pin
Selection of Pin Functions
P17 / TMO The function depends on output select bits 3 to 0 (OS3 to OS0) of the 8-bit timer
control/status register (TCSR) and on the P17DDR bit as follows:
OS3 to OS0
P17DDR
All four bits are 0
At least one bit is 1
0
1
0
1
Pin function
P17 input
P17 output
TMO output
P16 / IRQ1 / The function depends on the IRQ1E bit and the trigger enable bit (TRGE)
ADTRG in the A/D control register (ADCR) as follows:
IRQ1E
TRGE
0
1
0
1
0
1
Pin function P16 input/
output
ADTRG
input
IRQ1 input
IRQ1 and
ADTRG
input
When used for P16 input/output, the input or output function is selected by P16DDR.
P15 / IRQ0 The function depends on the IRQ0E bit and the P15DDR bit as follows:
IRQ0E
0
1
P15DDR
Pin function
0
1
0
1
P15 input
P15 output
IRQ0 input
147
Table 9-3 Port 1 Pin Functions in Expanded Modes (cont)
Pin
Selection of Pin Functions
P14 / WAIT
The function depends on the wait mode select 1 bit (WMS1) of the wait-state control
register (WCR) and the P14DDR bit as follows:
WMS1
0
1
P14DDR
Pin function
0
1
0
1
P14 input
P14 output
WAIT input
P13 / BREQ The function depends on the BRLE bit and the P13DDR bit as follows:
BRLE
0
1
P13DDR
Pin function
0
1
0
1
P13 input
P13 output
BREQ input
P12 / BACK The function depends on the BRLE bit and the P12DDR bit as follows:
BRLE
0
1
P12DDR
Pin function
0
1
0
1
P12 input
P12 output
BACK output
P11 / E
P10 / ø
P11DDR
0
1
Pin function
Input
E clock output
P10DDR
0
1
Pin function
Input
ø clock output
148
Table 9-4 Port 1 Pin Functions in Single-Chip Modes
Pin
Selection of Pin Functions
P17 / TMO
The function depends on output select bits 3 to 0 (OS3 to OS0) of the 8-bit timer
control/status register (TCSR) and on the P17DDR bit as follows:
OS3 to OS0
P17DDR
All four bits are 0
At least one bit is 1
0
1
0
1
Pin function
P17 input
P17 output
TMO output
P16 / IRQ1
/ ADTRG
The function depends on the IRQ1E bit and the trigger enable bit (TRGE)
in the A/D control register (ADCR) as follows:
IRQ1E
TRGE
0
1
0
1
0
1
Pin function P16 input/
output
ADTRG
input
IRQ1 input
IRQ1 and
ADTRG
input
When used for P16 input/output, the input or output function is selected by P16DDR.
P15 / IRQ0
The function depends on the IRQ0E bit and the P15DDR bit as follows:
IRQ0E
0
1
P15DDR
Pin function
0
1
0
1
P15 input
P15 output
IRQ0 input
P14
P13
P14DDR
0
1
Pin function
Input
Output
P13DDR
0
1
Pin function
Input
Output
149
Table 9-4 Port 1 Pin Functions in Single-Chip Modes (cont)
Pin
Selection of Pin Functions
P12
P12DDR
0
1
Pin function
Input
Output
P11 / E
P10 / ø
P11DDR
0
1
Pin function
Input
E clock output
P10DDR
0
1
Pin function
Input
ø clock output
9.3 Port 2
9.3.1 Overview
Port 2 is a five-bit input/output port with the pin configuration shown in figure 9-2. It functions as
an input/output port only in the single-chip mode. In the expanded modes it is used for output of
bus control signals.
Outputs from port 2 can drive one TTL load and a 90 pF capacitive load. They can also drive a
Darlington transistor pair.
Pin
Expanded Modes
WR (output)
RD (output)
Single-Chip Mode
P24 (input/output)
P23 (input/output)
P22 (input/output)
P21 (input/output)
P20 (input/output)
P24 / WR
P23 / RD
P22 / DS
P21 / R/W
P20 / AS
Port
2
DS (output)
R/W (output)
AS (output)
Figure 9-2 Pin Functions of Port 2
150
9.3.2 Port 2 Registers
Register Configuration: Table 9-5 lists the registers of port 2.
Table 9-5 Port 2 Registers
Name
Abbreviation
P2DDR
Read/Write
Initial Value
H'E0
Address
H'FE81
H'FE83
Port 2 data direction register
Port 2 data register
W
P2DR
R/W
H'E0
1. Port 2 Data Direction Register (P2DDR)—H'FE81
Bit
7
—
1
6
—
1
5
—
1
4
3
2
1
0
P24DDR P23DDR P22DDR P21DDR P20DDR
Initial value
Read/Write
0
0
0
0
0
—
—
—
W
W
W
W
W
P2DDR is an 8-bit register that selects the direction of each pin in port 2.
Single-Chip Mode: A pin functions as an output pin if the corresponding bit in P2DDR is set to
1, and as an input pin if the bit is cleared to 0.
Bits 4 to 0 can be written but not read. An attempt to read this register does not cause an error, but
all bits are read as 1, regardless of their true values.
Bits 7 to 5 are reserved. They cannot be modified and are always read as 1.
At a reset and in the hardware standby mode, P2DDR is initialized to H'E0, making all five pins
input pins. P2DDR is not initialized in the software standby mode, so if a P2DDR bit is set to 1
when the chip enters the software standby mode, the corresponding pin continues to output the
value in the port 2 data register.
Expanded Modes: All bits of P2DDR are fixed at 1 and cannot be modified.
151
2. Port 2 Data Register (P2DR)—H'FE83
Bit
7
—
1
6
—
1
5
—
1
4
P24
0
3
P23
0
2
P22
0
1
P21
0
0
P20
0
Initial value
Read/Write
—
—
—
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
P2DR is an 8-bit register containing the data for pins P24 to P20.
Bits 7 to 5 are reserved. They cannot be modified and are always read as 1.
When the CPU reads P2DR, for output pins it reads the value in the P2DR latch, but for input
pins, it obtains the pin status directly.
9.3.3 Pin Functions in Each Mode
Port 2 has different functions in the expanded modes (modes 1, 2, 3, 4) and the single-chip mode
(mode 7). Separate descriptions are given below.
Pin Functions in Expanded Modes: In the expanded modes (modes 1, 2, 3, and 4), all pins of
P2DDR is automatically set to 1 for output. Port 2 outputs the bus control signals (AS, R/W, DS,
RD, WR).
Figure 9-3 shows the pin functions in the expanded modes.
WR (output)
Port
2
RD (output)
DS (output)
R/W (output)
AS (output)
Figure 9-3 Port 2 Pin Functions in Expanded Modes
152
Pin Functions in Single-Chip Mode: In the single-chip mode (mode 7), each of the port 2 pins
can be designated as an input pin or an output pin, as indicated in figure 9-4, by setting the
corresponding bit in P2DDR to 1 for output or clearing it to 0 for input.
P24 (input/output)
Port
2
P23 (input/output)
P22 (input/output)
P21 (input/output)
P20 (input/output)
Figure 9-4 Port 2 Pin Functions in Single-Chip Mode
9.4 Port 3
9.4.1 Overview
Port 3 is an 8-bit input/output port with the pin configuration shown in figure 9-5. In the
expanded modes it operates as the external data bus (D7 – D0). In the single-chip mode it operates
as a general-purpose input/output port.
Outputs from port 3 can drive one TTL load and a 90pF capacitive load. They can also drive a
Darlington transistor pair.
Pin
Expanded Modes
D7 (input/output)
D6 (input/output)
D5 (input/output)
D4 (input/output)
D3 (input/output)
D2 (input/output)
D1 (input/output)
D0 (input/output)
Single-Chip Mode
P37 (input/output)
P36 (input/output)
P35 (input/output)
P34 (input/output)
P33 (input/output)
P32 (input/output)
P31 (input/output)
P30 (input/output)
P37 / D7
P36 / D6
P35 / D5
P34 / D4
P33 / D3
P32 / D2
P31 / D1
P30 / D0
Port
3
Figure 9-5 Pin Functions of Port 3
153
9.4.2 Port 3 Registers
Register Configuration: Table 9-6 lists the registers of port 3.
Table 9-6 Port 3 Registers
Name
Abbreviation
P3DDR
Read/Write
Initial Value
H'00
Address
H'FE84
H'FE86
Port 3 data direction register
Port 3 data register
W
P3DR
R/W
H'00
1. Port 3 Data Direction Register (P3DDR)—H'FE84
Bit
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
0
P37DDR P36DDR P35DDR P34DDR P33DDR P32DDR P31DDR P30DDR
Initial value
Read/Write
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
W
W
W
W
W
W
W
W
P3DDR is an 8-bit register that selects the direction of each pin in port 3.
Single-Chip Mode: A pin functions as an output pin if the corresponding bit in P3DDR is set to
1, and as an input pin if the bit is cleared to 0.
P3DDR can be written but not read. An attempt to read this register does not cause an error, but
all bits are read as 1, regardless of their true values.
At a reset and in the hardware standby mode, P3DDR is initialized to H'00, making all eight pins
input pins. P3DDR is not initialized in the software standby mode, so if a P3DDR bit is set to 1
when the chip enters the software standby mode, the corresponding pin continues to output the
value in the port 3 data register.
Expanded Modes: P3DDR is not used.
154
2. Port 3 Data Register (P3DR)—H'FE86
Bit
7
P37
0
6
P36
0
5
P35
0
4
P34
0
3
P33
0
2
P32
0
1
P31
0
0
P30
0
Initial value
Read/Write
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
P3DR is an 8-bit register containing the data for pins P37 to P30.
At a reset and in the hardware standby mode, P3DR is initialized to H'00.
When the CPU reads P3DR, for output pins it reads the value in the P3DR latch, but for input
pins, it obtains the pin status directly.
9.4.3 Pin Functions in Each Mode
Port 3 has different functions in the expanded modes (modes 1, 2, 3, 4) and the single-chip mode
(mode 7). Separate descriptions are given below.
Pin Functions in Expanded Modes: In the expanded modes (modes 1, 2, 3, and 4), port 3 is
automatically used as the data bus and P3DDR is ignored. Figure 9-6 shows the pin functions for
the expanded modes.
D7 (input/output)
D6 (input/output)
D5 (input/output)
Port
3
D4 (input/output)
D3 (input/output)
D2 (input/output)
D1 (input/output)
D0 (input/output)
Figure 9-6 Port 3 Pin Functions in Expanded Modes
155
Pin Functions in Single-Chip Mode: In the single-chip mode (mode 7), each of the port 3 pins
can be designated as an input pin or an output pin, as indicated in figure 9-7, by setting the
corresponding bit in P3DDR to 1 for output or clearing it to 0 for input.
P37 (input/output)
P36 (input/output)
P35 (input/output)
Port
3
P34 (input/output)
P33 (input/output)
P32 (input/output)
P31 (input/output)
P30 (input/output)
Figure 9-7 Port 3 Pin Functions in Single-Chip Mode
9.5 Port 4
9.5.1 Overview
Port 4 is an 8-bit input/output port with the pin configuration shown in figure 9-8. In the
expanded modes it provides the low bits (A7 – A0) of the address bus. In the single-chip mode it
operates as a general-purpose input/output port.
Outputs from port 4 can drive one TTL load and a 90 pF capacitive load. They can also drive a
Darlington transistor pair or LED (with 10 mA current sink).
Pin
Expanded Modes
A7 (output)
A6 (output)
A5 (output)
A4 (output)
A3 (output)
A2 (output)
A1 (output)
A0 (output)
Single-Chip Mode
P47 (input/output)
P46 (input/output)
P45 (input/output)
P44 (input/output)
P43 (input/output)
P42 (input/output)
P41 (input/output)
P40 (input/output)
P47 / A7
P46 / A6
P45 / A5
P44 / A4
P43 / A3
P42 / A2
P41 / A1
P40 / A0
Port
4
Figure 9-8 Pin Functions of Port 4
156
9.5.2 Port 4 Registers
Register Configuration: Table 9-7 lists the registers of port 4.
Table 9-7 Port 4 Registers
Name
Abbreviation
P4DDR
Read/Write
Initial Value
H'00
Address
H'FE85
H'FE87
Port 4 data direction register
Port 4 data register
W
P4DR
R/W
H'00
1. Port 4 Data Direction Register (P4DDR)—H'FE85
Bit
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
0
P47DDR P46DDR P45DDR P44DDR P43DDR P42DDR P41DDR P40DDR
Initial value
Read/Write
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
W
W
W
W
W
W
W
W
P4DDR is an 8-bit register that selects the direction of each pin in port 4.
Single-Chip Mode: A pin functions as an output pin if the corresponding bit in P4DDR is set to
1, and as in input pin if the bit is cleared to 0.
P4DDR can be written but not read. An attempt to read this register does not cause an error, but
all bits are read as 1, regardless of their true values.
At a reset and in the hardware standby mode, P4DDR is initialized to H'00, making all eight pins
input pins. P4DDR is not initialized in the software standby mode, so if a P4DDR bit is set to 1
when the chip enters the software standby mode, the corresponding pin continues to output the
value in the port 4 data register.
Expanded Modes: All bits of P4DDR are fixed at 1 and cannot be modified.
157
2. Port 4 Data Register (P4DR)—H'FE87
Bit
7
P47
0
6
P46
0
5
P45
0
4
P44
0
3
P43
0
2
P42
0
1
P41
0
0
P40
0
Initial value
Read/Write
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
P4DR is an 8-bit register containing the data for pins P47 to P40.
At a reset and in the hardware standby mode, P4DR is initialized to H'00.
When the CPU reads P4DR, for output pins it reads the value in the P4DR latch, but for input
pins, it obtains the pin status directly.
9.5.3 Pin Functions in Each Mode
Port 4 has different functions in the expanded modes (modes 1, 2, 3, 4) and the single-chip mode
(mode 7). Separate descriptions are given below.
Pin Functions in Expanded Modes: In the expanded modes (modes 1, 2, 3, and 4), port 4 is
used for output of the low bits (A7 – A0) of the address bus. P4DDR is automatically set for
output. Figure 9-9 shows the pin functions for the expanded modes.
A7 (output)
A6 (output)
A5 (output)
Port
4
A4 (output)
A3 (output)
A2 (output)
A1 (output)
A0 (output)
Figure 9-9 Port 4 Pin Functions in Expanded Modes
Pin Functions in Single-Chip Mode: In the single-chip mode (mode 7), each of the port 4 pins
can be designated as an input pin or an output pin, as indicated in figure 9-10, by setting the
corresponding bit in P4DDR to 1 for output or clearing it to 0 for input.
158
P47 (input/output)
P46 (input/output)
P45 (input/output)
P44 (input/output)
P43 (input/output)
P42 (input/output)
P41 (input/output)
P40 (input/output)
Port
4
Figure 9-10 Port 4 Pin Functions in Single-Chip Mode
9.6 Port 5
9.6.1 Overview
Port 5 is an 8-bit input/output port with the pin configuration shown in figure 9-11. In the
expanded modes that use the on-chip ROM (modes 2 and 4), the pins of port 5 function either as
general-purpose input pins or as bits A15 – A8 of the address bus, depending on the port 5 data
direction register (P5DDR).
Port 5 has built-in MOS pull-ups that can be turned on or off under program control.
Outputs from port 5 can drive one TTL load and a 90 pF capacitive load. They can also drive a
Darlington transistor pair.
Pin
Modes 1 and 3
A15 (output)
A14 (output)
A13 (output)
A12 (output)
A11 (output)
A10 (output)
A9 (output)
A8 (output)
Modes 2 and 4
Single-Chip Mode
P57 (input/output)
P56 (input/output)
P55 (input/output)
P54 (input/output)
P53 (input/output)
P52 (input/output)
P51 (input/output)
P50 (input/output)
P57 / A15
P56 / A14
P55 / A13
P54 / A12
P53 / A11
P52 / A10
P51 / A9
P50 / A8
P57 (input) / A15 (output)
P56 (input) / A14 (output)
P55 (input) / A13 (output)
P54 (input) / A12 (output)
P53 (input) / A11 (output)
P52 (input) / A10 (output)
P51 (input) / A9 (output)
P50 (input) / A8 (output)
Port
5
Figure 9-11 Pin Functions of Port 5
159
9.6.2 Port 5 Registers
Register Configuration: Table 9-8 lists the registers of port 5.
Table 9-8 Port 5 Registers
Name
Abbreviation
P5DDR
Read/Write
Initial Value
H'00
Address
H'FE88
H'FE8A
Port 5 data direction register
Port 5 data register
W
P5DR
R/W
H'00
1. Port 5 Data Direction Register (P5DDR)—H'FE88
Bit
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
0
P57DDR P56DDR P55DDR P54DDR P53DDR P52DDR P51DDR P50DDR
Initial value
Read/Write
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
W
W
W
W
W
W
W
W
P5DDR is an 8-bit register that selects the direction of each pin in port 5.
Single-Chip Mode: A pin functions as an output pin if the corresponding bit in P5DDR is set to
1, and as an input pin if the bit is cleared to 0.
P5DDR can be written but not read. An attempt to read this register does not cause an error, but
all bits are read as 1, regardless of their true values.
At a reset and in the hardware standby mode, P5DDR is initialized to H'00, making all eight pins
input pins. P5DDR is not initialized in the software standby mode, so if a P5DDR bit is set to 1
when the chip enters the software standby mode, the corresponding pin continues to output the
value in the port 5 data register.
Expanded Modes Using On-Chip ROM (Modes 2 and 4): If a 1 is set in P5DDR, the
corresponding pin is used for address output. If a 0 is set in P5DDR, the pin is used for general-
purpose input. P5DDR is initialized to H'00 at a reset and in the hardware standby mode.
Expanded Modes Not Using On-Chip ROM (Modes 1 and 3): All bits of P5DDR are fixed at
1 and cannot be modified. Port 5 is used for address output.
160
Port 5 Data Register (P5DR)—H'FE8A
Bit
7
P57
0
6
P56
0
5
P55
0
4
P54
0
3
P53
0
2
P52
0
1
P51
0
0
P50
0
Initial value
Read/Write
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
P5DR is an 8-bit register containing the data for pins P57 to P50.
At a reset and in the hardware standby mode, P5DR is initialized to H'00.
When the CPU reads P5DR, for output pins it reads the value in the P5DR latch, but for input
pins, it obtains the pin status directly.
9.6.3 Pin Functions in Each Mode
Port 5 operates in one way in modes 1 and 3, in another way in modes 2 and 4, and in a third way
in mode 7. Separate descriptions are given below.
Pin Functions in Modes 1 and 3: In modes 1 and 3 (expanded modes in which the on-chip ROM
is not used), all bits of P5DDR are automatically set to 1 for output, and the pins of port 5 carry
bits A15 – A8 of the address bus. Figure 9-12 shows the pin functions for modes 1 and 3.
A15 (output)
A14 (output)
A13 (output)
Port
5
A12 (output)
A11 (output)
A10 (output)
A9 (output)
A8 (output)
Figure 9-12 Port 5 Pin Functions in Modes 1 and 3
161
Pin Functions in Modes 2 and 4: In modes 2 and 4, (expanded modes in which the on-chip
ROM is used), software can select whether to use port 5 for general-purpose input, or for output
of bits A15 – A8 of the address bus.
If a bit in P5DDR is set to 1, the corresponding pin is used for address output. If the bit is cleared
to 0, the pin is used for input. A reset clears all P5DDR bits to 0, so before the address bus is
used, all necessary bits in P5DDR must be set to 1.
Figure 9-13 shows the pin functions in modes 2 and 4.
When P5DDR
Bit is Set to “1”
A15 (output)
A14 (output)
A13 (output)
A12 (output)
A11 (output)
A10 (output)
A9 (output)
A8 (output)
When P5DDR Bit
is Cleared to “0”
P57 (input)
P56 (input)
P55 (input)
Port
5
P54 (input)
P53 (input)
P52 (input)
P51 (input)
P50 (input)
Figure 9-13 Port 5 Pin Functions in Modes 2 and 4
Pin Functions in Single-Chip Mode: In the single-chip mode (mode 7), each of the port 5 pins
can be designated as an input pin or an output pin, as indicated in figure 9-14, by setting the
corresponding bit in P5DDR to 1 for output or clearing it to 0 for input.
P57 (input/output)
P56 (input/output)
P55 (input/output)
Port
5
P54 (input/output)
P53 (input/output)
P52 (input/output)
P51 (input/output)
P50 (input/output)
Figure 9-14 Port 5 Pin Functions in Single-Chip Mode
162
9.6.4 Built-In MOS Pull-Up
The MOS input pull-ups of port 5 are turned on by clearing the corresponding bit in P5DDR to 0
and writing a 1 in P5DR. These pull-ups are turned off at a reset and in the hardware standby
mode. Table 9-9 indicates the status of the MOS pull-ups in various modes.
Table 9-9 Status of MOS Pull-Ups for Port 5
Mode
Reset
Hardware Standby Mode
Other Operating States*
1
2
3
4
7
OFF
OFF
OFF
ON/OFF
OFF
ON/OFF
* Including the software standby mode.
Notation:
OFF:
ON/OFF:
The MOS pull-up is always off.
The MOS pull-up is on when P5DDR = 0 and P5DR = 1, and off otherwise.
Note on Usage of MOS Pull-Ups
If the bit manipulation instructions listed below are executed on input/output ports 5 and 6 which
have selectable MOS pull-ups, the logic levels at input pins will be transferred to the DR latches,
causing the MOS pull-ups to be unintentionally switched on or off.
This can occur with the following bit manipulation instructions: BSET, BCLR, BNOT
(1) Specific Example (BSET Instruction): An example will be shown in which the BSET
instruction is executed for port 5 under the following conditions:
P57:
P56:
Input pin, low, MOS pull-up transistor on
Input pin, high, MOS pull-up transistor off
P55 – P50: Output pins, low
The intended purpose of this BSET instruction is to switch the output level at P50 from low
to high.
163
A: Before Execution of BSET Instruction
P57
Input
Low
0
P56
Input
High
0
P55
P54
P53
Output
Low
1
P52
Output
Low
1
P51
Output
Low
1
P50
Output
Low
1
Input/output
Pin state
DDR
Output Output
Low
1
Low
1
DR
1
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
Pull-up
On
Off
Off
Off
Off
Off
Off
Off
B: Execution of BSET Instruction
BSET.B #0 @PORT5
C: After Execution of BSET Instruction
;set bit 0 in data register
P57
Input
Low
0
P56
Input
High
0
P55
P54
P53
Output
Low
1
P52
Output
Low
1
P51
Output
Low
1
P50
Output
High
1
Input/output
Pin state
DDR
Output Output
Low
1
Low
1
DR
0
1
0
0
0
0
0
1
Pull-up
Off
On
Off
Off
Off
Off
Off
Off
Explanation: To execute the BSET instruction, the CPU begins by reading port 5. Since P57 and
P56 are input pins, the CPU reads the level of these pins directly, not the value in the data register.
It reads P57 as low (0) and P56 as high (1).
Since P55 to P50 are output pins, for these pins the CPU reads the value in the data register (0).
The CPU therefore reads the value of port 5 as H'40, although the actual value in P5DR is H'80.
Next the CPU sets bit 0 of the read data to 1, changing the value to H'41.
Finally, the CPU writes this value (H'41) back to P5DR to complete the BSET instruction.
As a result, bit P50 is set to 1, switching pin P50 to high output. In addition, bits P57 and P56 are
both modified, changing the on/off settings of the MOS pull-up transistors of pins P57 and P56.
Programming Solution: The switching of the pull-ups for P57 and P56 in the preceding example
can be avoided by using a byte in RAM as a work area for P5DR, performing bit manipulations on
the work area, then writing the result to P5DR.
164
A: Before Execution of BSET Instruction
MOV.B #80, R0
;write data (H'80) for data register
MOV.B R0, @RAM0
MOV.B R0, @PORT5
;write to work area (RAM0)
;write to P5DR
P57
Input
Low
0
P56
P55
P54
P53
Output
Low
1
P52
Output
Low
1
P51
Output
Low
1
P50
Output
Low
1
Input/output
Pin state
DDR
Input
High
0
Output Output
Low
1
Low
1
DR
1
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
Pull-up
RAM0
On
1
Off
0
Off
0
Off
0
Off
0
Off
0
Off
0
Off
0
B: Execution of BSET Instruction
BSET.B #0, @RAM0
;set bit 0 in work area (RAM0)
C: After Execution of BSET Instruction
MOV.B @RAM0, R0
MOV.B R0, @PORT5
;get value in work area (RAM0)
;write value to P5DR
P57
Input
Low
0
P56
P55
P54
P53
Output
Low
1
P52
Output
Low
1
P51
Output
Low
1
P50
Output
High
1
Input/output
Pin state
DDR
Input
High
0
Output Output
Low
1
Low
1
DR
1
0
0
0
0
0
0
1
Pull-up
RAM0
On
1
Off
0
Off
0
Off
0
Off
0
Off
0
Off
0
Off
0
9.7 Port 6
9.7.1 Overview
Port 6 is a 4-bit input/output port with the pin configuration shown in figure 9-15. In modes 7, 2,
and 1, port 6 is used for IRQ2 to IRQ5 input and PWM timer output. In mode 4, port 6 is used for
IRQ2 to IRQ5 input and page address output. In mode 3, port 6 is used for page address output.
Port 6 has built-in MOS pull-ups that can be turned on or off under program control.
Outputs from port 6 can drive one TTL load and a 90 pF capacitive load. They can also drive a
Darlington transistor pair.
165
Pin
Mode 3
Mode 4
Mode 1 and 2 and
Single-Chip Mode
P63 (input/output) /
IRQ5 (input) /
P63 / PW3 / A19 (output)
IRQ5 / A19
P63 (input) / IRQ5 (input) /
A19 (output)
PW3 (output)
P62 / PW2 / A18 (output)
IRQ4 / A18
P62 (input) / IRQ4 (input) /
A18 (output)
P62 (input/output) /
IRQ4 (input) /
Port
6
PW2 (output)
P61 / PW1 / A17 (output)
IRQ3 / A17
P61 (input) / IRQ3 (input) /
A17 (output)
P61 (input/output) /
IRQ3 (input) /
PW1 (output)
P60 / IRQ2 / A16 (output)
A16
P60 (input) / IRQ2 (input) /
A16 (output)
P60 (input/output) /
IRQ2 (input)
Figure 9-15 Pin Functions of Port 6
9.7.2 Port 6 Registers
Register Configuration: Table 9-10 lists the registers of port 6.
Table 9-10 Port 6 Registers
Name
Abbreviation
P6DDR
Read/Write
W
Initial Value
Address
H'FE89
H'FE8B
H'FEFD
Port 6 data direction register
Port 6 data register
System control register 2
H'F0
H'F0
H'80
P6DR
R/W
SYSCR2
R/W
1. Port 6 Data Direction Register (P6DDR)—H'FE89
Bit
7
—
1
6
—
1
5
—
1
4
—
1
3
2
1
0
P63DDR P62DDR P61DDR P60DDR
Initial value
Read/Write
0
0
0
0
—
—
—
—
W
W
W
W
P6DDR is an 8-bit register that selects the direction of each pin in port 6.
Single-Chip Mode and Expanded Minimum Modes: A pin functions as an output pin if the
corresponding bit in P6DDR is set to 1, and as in input pin if the bit is cleared to 0.
Bits 7 to 4 are reserved. They cannot be modified and are always read as 1.
166
Bits 3 to 0 can be written but not read. An attempt to read these bits does not cause an error, but
all bits are read as 1, regardless of their true values.
At a reset and in the hardware standby mode, P6DDR is initialized to H'F0, making all four pins
input pins. P6DDR is not initialized in the software standby mode. In the single-chip mode, if a
P6DDR bit is set to 1 when the chip enters the software standby mode, the corresponding pin
continues to output the value in the port 6 data register.
Expanded Maximum Mode Using On-Chip ROM (Mode 4): If a 1 is set in P6DDR, the
corresponding pin is used for address output. If a 0 is set in P6DDR, the pin is used for input.
P6DDR is initialized to H'F0 at a reset and in the hardware standby mode.
Expanded Maximum Mode Not Using On-Chip ROM (Mode 3): All bits of P6DDR are fixed
at 1 and cannot be modified.
2. Port 6 Data Register (P6DR)—H'FE8B
Bit
7
—
1
6
—
1
5
—
1
4
—
1
3
P63
0
2
P62
0
1
P61
0
0
P60
0
Initial value
Read/Write
—
—
—
—
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
P6DR is an 8-bit register containing data for pins P63 to P60.
Bits 7 to 4 are reserved. They cannot be modified and are always read as 1.
At a reset and in the hardware standby mode, P6DR is initialized to H'F0.
When the CPU reads P6DR, for output pins it reads the value in the P6DR latch, but for input
pins, it obtains the pin status directly.
3. System Control Register 2 (SYSCR2)—H'FEFD
Bit
7
—
1
6
IRQ5E
0
5
IRQ4E
0
4
IRQ3E
0
3
2
1
0
IRQ2E P6PWME P9PWME P9SCI2E
Initial value
Read/Write
0
0
0
0
—
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
167
SYSCR2 controls the functions of port 6 and the functions of some pins in port 9.
SYSCR2 is initialized to H'80 by a reset and in the hardware standby mode. It is not initialized in
the software standby mode.
Bit 7—Reserved: This bit cannot be modified and is always read as 1.
Bit 6—Interrupt Request 5 Enable (IRQ5E): Selects the function of pin P63.
Bit 6
IRQ5E
Description
0
P63 functions as an input/output pin (but as the PW3 output pin
if P6PWME and the OE bit of PWM timer 3 are both set to 1).
(Initial value)
1
P63 is the IRQ5 input pin regardless of the value of P63DDR (although the logic level
of the pin can still be read).
Bit 5—Interrupt Request 4 Enable (IRQ4E): Selects the function of pin P62.
Bit 5
IRQ4E
Description
0
P62 functions as an input/output pin (but as the PW2 output
pin if P6PWME and the OE bit of PWM timer 2 are both set to 1).
(Initial value)
1
P62 is the IRQ4 input pin regardless of the value of P62DDR (although the logic level
of the pin can still be read).
Bit 4—Interrupt Request 3 Enable (IRQ3E): Selects the function of pin P61.
Bit 4
IRQ3E
Description
0
P61 functions as an input/output pin (but as the PW1 output
pin if P6PWME and the OE bit of PWM timer 1 are both set to 1).
(Initial value)
1
P61 is the IRQ3 input pin regardless of the value of P61DDR (although the logic level
of the pin can still be read).
Bit 3—Interrupt Request 2 Enable (IRQ2E): Selects the function of pin P60.
Bit 3
IRQ2E
Description
0
1
P60 functions as an input/output pin.
(Initial value)
P60 is the IRQ2 input pin regardless of the value of P60DDR (although the logic level
of the pin can still be read).
168
Bit 2—Port 6 PWM Enable (P6PWME): Controls pin functions of port 6.
Bit 2
P6PWME Description
0
P63 to P61 function as input/output pins
(Initial value)
(or as IRQ input pins when bits IRQ5E to IRQ3E are set to 1).
1
P63 to P61 function as PWM output pins if the corresponding OE bit of PWM3 to PWM1
is set to 1. If the OE bit is cleared to 0 or the IRQE bit is set to 1, the pin functions as an
input/output pin.
Bit 1—Port 9 PWM Enable (P9PWME): Controls pin functions of port 9.
Bit 1
P9PWME Description
0
The PWM functions of P94 to P92 are disabled.
(See section 9.10.3, “Pin Functions.”)
(Initial value)
1
The PWM functions of P94 to P92 are enabled. (See section 9.10.3, “Pin Functions.”)
Bit 0—Port 9 SCI2 Enable (P9PWME): Controls pin functions of port 9.
Bit 1
P9SCI2E Description
0
The serial communication interface functions of P94 to P92
are disabled. (See section 9.10.3, “Pin Functions.”)
(Initial value)
1
The serial communication interface functions of P94 to P92 are enabled. (See section
9.10.3, “Pin Functions.”)
169
9.7.3 Pin Functions in Each Mode
The usage of port 6 depends on the MCU operating mode. Separate descriptions are given below.
Pin Functions in Mode 3: In mode 3 (the expanded maximum mode in which the on-chip ROM
is not used), P6DDR is automatically set for output, and the pins of port 6 carry the page address
bits (A19 – A16) of the address bus. Figure 9-16 shows the pin functions for mode 3.
A19 (output)
Port
6
A18 (output)
A17 (output)
A16 (output)
Figure 9-16 Port 6 Pin Functions in Mode 3
Pin Functions in Mode 4: In mode 4, (the expanded maximum mode in which the on-chip ROM
is used), software can select whether to use port 6 for general-purpose input, IRQ2 to IRQ5 input,
or output of page address bits.
If a bit in P6DDR is set to 1, the corresponding pin is used for page address output. If the P6DDR
bit is cleared to 0 and the corresponding IRQnE bit is cleared to 0, the pin is used for general-
purpose input. If the P6DDR bit is cleared to 0 and the corresponding IRQnE bit is set to 1, the
pin is used for IRQ2 to IRQ5 input. A reset initializes these pins to the general-purpose input
function, so when the address bus is used, all necessary bits in P6DDR must first be set to 1.
Figure 9-17 shows the pin functions in mode 4.
When P6DDR Bit
is Set to 1
When P6DDR Bit is Cleared to 0
IRQnE = 0
P63 (input)
P62 (input)
P61 (input)
P60 (input)
IRQnE = 1
IRQ5
A19 (output)
A18 (output)
A17 (output)
A16 (output)
Port
6
IRQ4
IRQ3
IRQ2
Figure 9-17 Port 6 Pin Functions in Mode 4
Pin Functions in Single-Chip Mode and Expanded Minimum Modes: In the single-chip mode
(mode 7) and expanded minimum modes (modes 1 and 2), the port 6 pins can be designated
individually as input or output pins.
Port 6 can be used for general-purpose input/output, IRQ input, or PWM output, depending on the
combination of settings of the IRQE and P6PWME bits in system control register 2 and the OE
170
bits of the three PWM timers.
Figure 9-18 shows the pin functions in modes 7, 2, and 1.
P63 (input/output) / IRQ5 / PW3
Port
6
P62 (input/output) / IRQ4 / PW2
P61 (input/output) / IRQ3 / PW1
P60 (input/output) / IRQ2
Figure 9-18 Port 6 Pin Functions in Modes 7, 2, and 1
Table 9-11 Port 6 Pin Functions in Modes 7, 2, and 1
Pin
Selection of Pin Functions
P63 / IRQ5 / The function depends on the interrupt request 5 enable bit (IRQ5E) and port 6 PWM
PW3
enable bit (P6PWME) in system control register 2 (SYSCR2), and the output enable
bit (OE) of PWM timer 3.
IRQ5E
P6PWME
OE
0
0
1
0
1
0
1
0
1
1
0
1
0
1
Pin function P63 input/output PW3 output IRQ5 input IRQ5 input
When used for P63 input/output, the input or output function is selected by P63DDR.
P62 / IRQ4 / The function depends on the interrupt request 4 enable bit (IRQ4E) and P6PWME
PW2 bit in SYSCR2, and the OE bit of PWM timer 2.
IRQ4E
P6PWME
OE
0
0
1
0
1
0
1
0
1
1
0
1
0
1
Pin function P62 input/output PW2 output IRQ4 input IRQ4 input
When used for P62 input/output, the input or output function is selected by P62DDR.
171
Table 9-11 Port 6 Pin Functions in Modes 7, 2, and 1 (cont)
Pin
Selection of Pin Functions
P61 / IRQ3 / The function depends on the interrupt request 3 enable bit (IRQ3E) and P6PWME
PW1
bit in SYSCR2, and the OE bit of PWM timer 1.
IRQ3E
P6PWME
OE
0
0
1
0
1
0
1
0
1
1
0
1
0
1
Pin function P61 input/output PW1 output IRQ3 input IRQ3 input
When used for P61 input/output, the input or output function is selected by P61DDR.
The function depends on the interrupt request 2 enable bit (IRQ2E) in SYSCR2.
P60 / IRQ2
IRQ2E
0
1
Pin function
P60 input/output
IRQ2 input
When used for P60 input/output, the input or output function is selected by P60DDR.
9.7.4 Built-In MOS Pull-Up
Port 6 has programmable MOS input pull-ups which are turned on by clearing the corresponding
bit in P6DDR to 0 and writing a 1 in P6DR. These pull-ups are turned off at a reset and in the
hardware standby mode. Table 9-12 indicates the status of the MOS pull-ups in various modes.
Table 9-12 Status of MOS Pull-Ups for Port 5
Mode
Reset
Hardware Standby Mode
Other Operating States*
1
2
3
4
7
OFF
OFF
ON/OFF
OFF
ON/OFF
* Including software standby mode.
Notation:
OFF:
The MOS pull-up is always off.
ON/OFF:
The MOS pull-up is on when P6DDR = 0 and P6DR = 1, and off otherwise.
Note: When P61, P62, and P63 are used for PWM timer output, their MOS pull-ups are switched
off regardless of the values in P6DDR and P6DR.
172
9.8 Port 7
9.8.1 Overview
Port 7 is an 8-bit input/output port with the pin configuration shown in figure 9-19. Its pins also
carry input and output signals for the on-chip free-running timers (FRT1, FRT2, and FRT3), and
two input signals for the on-chip 8-bit timer.
Port 7 has Schmitt inputs. Outputs from port 7 can drive one TTL load and a 30 pF capacitive
load. They can also drive a Darlington transistor pair.
P77 (input/output) / FTOA1 (output)
P76 (input/output) / FTOB3 (output) / FTCI3 (input)
P75 (input/output) / FTOB2 (output) / FTCI2 (input)
Port
7
P74 (input/output) / FTOB1 (output) / FTCI1 (input)
P73 (input/output) / FTI3 (input) /TMRI (input)
P72 (input/output) / FTI2 (input)
P71 (input/output) / FTI1 (input)
P70 (input/output) / TMCI (input)
Figure 9-19 Pin Functions of Port 7
9.8.2 Port 7 Registers
Register Configuration: Table 9-13 lists the registers of port 7.
Table 9-13 Port 7 Registers
Name
Abbreviation
P7DDR
Read/Write
Initial Value
H'00
Address
H'FE8C
H'FE8E
Port 7 data direction register
Port 7 data register
W
P7DR
R/W
H'00
1. Port 7 Data Direction Register (P7DDR)—H'FE8C
Bit
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
0
P77DDR P76DDR P75DDR P74DDR P73DDR P72DDR P71DDR P70DDR
Initial value
Read/Write
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
W
W
W
W
W
W
W
W
P7DDR is an 8-bit register that selects the direction of each pin in port 7. A pin functions as an
output pin if the corresponding bit in P7DDR is set to 1, and as an input pin if the bit is cleared to 0.
173
P7DDR can be written but not read. An attempt to read this register does not cause an error, but
all bits are read as 1, regardless of their true values.
At a reset and in the hardware standby mode, P7DDR is initialized to H'00, setting all pins for
input. P7DDR is not initialized in the software standby mode, so if a P7DDR bit is set to 1 when
the chip enters the software standby mode, the corresponding pin continues to output the value in
the port 7 data register.
A transition to the software standby mode initializes the on-chip supporting modules, so any pins
of port 7 that were being used by an on-chip timer when the transition occurs revert to general-
purpose input or output, controlled by P7DDR and P7DR.
2. Port 7 Data Register (P7DR)—H'FE8E
Bit
7
P77
0
6
P76
0
5
P75
0
4
P74
0
3
P73
0
2
P72
0
1
P71
0
0
P70
0
Initial value
Read/Write
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
P7DR is an 8-bit register containing the data for pins P77 to P70. When the CPU reads P7DR, for
output pins it reads the value in the P7DR latch, but for input pins, it obtains the pin status
directly.
9.8.3 Pin Functions
The pin functions of port 7 are the same in all MCU operating modes. As figure 9-19 indicated,
these pins are used for input and output of on-chip timer signals as well as for general-purpose
input and output. For some pins, two or more functions can be enabled simultaneously.
174
Table 9-14 shows how the functions of the pins of port 7 are selected.
Table 9-14 Port 7 Pin Functions
Pin
Selection of Pin Functions
P77 /
FTOA1
The function depends on the output enable A bit (OEA) of the FRT1 timer control
register (TCR) and on the P77DDR bit as follows:
OEA
0
1
P77DDR
Pin function
0
1
0
1
P77 input
P77 output
FTOA1 output
P76 /
The function depends on the output compare B bit (OEB) of the FRT3 timer control
register (TCR) and on the P76DDR bit as follows:
FTOB3 /
FTCI3
OEB
0
1
P76DDR
Pin function
0
1
0
1
P76 input
P76 output
FTOB3 output
FTCI3 input
P75 /
The function depends on the output compare B bit (OEB) of the FRT2 timer control
register (TCR) and on the P75DDR bit as follows:
FTOB2 /
FTCI2
OEB
0
1
P75DDR
Pin function
0
1
0
1
P75 input
P75 output
FTOB2 output
FTCI2 input
P74 /
The function depends on the output compare B bit (OEB) of the FRT1 timer control
register (TCR) and on the P74DDR bit as follows:
FTOB1 /
FTCI1
OEB
0
1
P74DDR
Pin function
0
1
0
1
P74 input
P74 output
FTOB1 output
FTCI1 input
175
Table 9-14 Port 7 Pin Functions (cont)
Pin
Selection of Pin Functions
P73 / FTI3 /
TMRI
The function depends on the counter clear bits 1 and 0 (CCLR1 and CCLR0) in the
timer control register (TCR) of the 8-bit timer, and on the P73DDR bit as follows:
The TMRI function is operative when bits CCLR0 and CCLR1 in the timer control
register (TCR) of the 8-bit timer are both set to 1.
P73DDR
0
1
Pin function
P73 input
P73 output
FTI3 input and TMRI input
P72 / FTI2
P71 / FTI1
P70 / TMCI
P72DDR
0
1
Pin function
P72 input
P72 output
FTI2 input
P71DDR
0
1
Pin function
P71 input
P71 output
FTI1 input
This pin always has a general-purpose input/output function, and can simultaneously
be used for external clock input for the 8-bit timer, depending on clock select bits 2 to
0 (CKS2, CKS1, and CKS0) in the timer control register (TCR). See section 11,
“8-Bit Timer” for details.
P70DDR
0
1
Pin function
P70 input
P70 output
TMCI input
176
9.9 Port 8
9.9.1 Overview
Port 8 is an 8-bit input port that also receives inputs for the on-chip A/D converter. The pin
functions are the same in all MCU operating modes, as shown in figure 9-20.
P87 (input) / AN7 (input)
P86 (input) / AN6 (input)
P85 (input) / AN5 (input)
Port
8
P84 (input) / AN4 (input)
P83 (input) / AN3 (input)
P82 (input) / AN2 (input)
P81 (input) / AN1 (input)
P80 (input) / AN0 (input)
Figure 9-20 Pin Functions of Port 8
9.9.2 Port 8 Registers
Register Configuration: Port 8 has only the data register described in table 9-15. Since it is
exclusively an input port, there is no data direction register.
Table 9-15 Port 8 Registers
Name
Abbreviation
Read/Write
Address
Port 8 data register
P8DR
R
H'FE8F
1. Port 8 Data Register (P8DR)—H'FE8F
Bit
7
P87
0
6
P86
0
5
P85
0
4
3
P83
0
2
P82
0
1
P81
0
0
P80
0
P84
0
Initial value
Read/Write
R
R
R
R
R
R
R
R
When the CPU reads P8DR it always reads the current status of each pin, except that during A/D
conversion, the pin being used for analog input reads 1 regardless of the input voltage at that pin.
177
9.10 Port 9
9.10.1 Overview
Port 9 is an 8-bit input/output port with the pin configuration shown in figure 9-21. In addition to
general-purpose input and output, its pins are used for the output compare A signals from free-
running timers 2 and 3, for PWM timer output, and for input and output by the on-chip serial
communication interfaces (SCI1 and SCI2). The pin functions are the same in all MCU operating
modes.
Outputs from port 9 can drive one TTL load and a 30 pF capacitive load. They can also drive a
Darlington transistor pair.
P97 (input/output) / SCK1 (input/output)
P96 (input/output) / RXD1 (input)
P95 (input/output) / TXD1 (output)
Port
9
P94 (input/output) / SCK2 (input/output)* / PW3 (output)
P93 (input/output) / RXD2 (input)* / PW2 (output)
P92 (input/output) / TXD2 (output)* / PW1 (output)
P91 (input/output) / FTOA3 (output)
P90 (input/output) / FTOA2 (output)
* The SCI2 functions of P92, P93, and P94 cannot be combined with the PWM functions.
Figure 9-21 Pin Functions of Port 9
9.10.2 Port 9 Registers
Register Configuration: Table 9-16 lists the registers of port 9.
Table 9-16 Port 9 Registers
Name
Abbreviation
P9DDR
Read/Write
Initial Value
H'00
Address
H'FEFE
H'FEFF
Port 9 data direction register
Port 9 data register
W
P9DR
R/W
H'00
178
1. Port 9 Data Direction Register (P9DDR)—H'FEFE
Bit
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
0
P97DDR P96DDR P95DDR P94DDR P93DDR P92DDR P91DDR P90DDR
Initial value
Read/Write
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
W
W
W
W
W
W
W
W
P9DDR is an 8-bit register that selects the direction of each pin in port 9. A pin functions as an
output pin if the corresponding bit in P9DDR is set to 1, and as an input pin if the bit is cleared to
0.
P9DDR can be written but not read. An attempt to read this register does not cause an error, but
all bits are read as 1, regardless of their true values.
At a reset and in the hardware standby mode, P9DDR is initialized to H'00, setting all pins for
input. P9DDR is not initialized in the software standby mode, so if a P9DDR bit is set to 1 when
the chip enters the software standby mode, the corresponding pin continues to output the value in
the port 9 data register.
A transition to the software standby mode initializes the on-chip supporting modules, so any pins
of port 9 that were being used by an on-chip module (example: free-running timer output) when
the transition occurs revert to general-purpose input or output, controlled by P9DDR and P9DR.
2. Port 9 Data Register (P9DR)—H'FEFF
Bit
7
P97
0
6
P96
0
5
P95
0
4
P94
0
3
P93
0
2
P92
0
1
P91
0
0
P90
0
Initial value
Read/Write
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
P9DR is an 8-bit register containing the data for pins P97 to P90. When the CPU reads P9DR, for
output pins it reads the value in the P9DR latch, but for input pins, it obtains the pin status
directly.
9.10.3 Pin Functions
The pin functions of port 9 are the same in all MCU operating modes. As figure 9-21 indicated,
these pins are used for output of on-chip timer signals and for input and output of serial data and
clock signals as well as for general-purpose input and output. Specifically, they carry output
signals for free-running timers 2 and 3, pulse-width modulation (PWM) timer output signals, and
input and output signals for the serial communication interfaces.
179
Table 9-17 shows how the functions of the pins of port 9 are selected.
Table 9-17 Port 9 Pin Functions
Pin
Selection of Pin Functions
P97 /
SCK1
The function depends on the communication mode bit (C/A) in the SCI1 serial mode
register (SMR) and the clock enable 1 and 0 bits (CKE1 and CKE0) in the SCI1
serial control register (SCR).
C/A
0
1
CKE1
CKE0
0
1
0
1
0
1
0
1
0
1
0
1
Pin function P97
SCI1
SCI1 external SCI1 internal SCI1 external
input/ internal clock input
output clock
clock output
clock input
output
When used for P97 input/output, the input or output function is selected by P97DDR.
P96 / RXD1 The function depends on the receive enable bit (RE) in the SCI1 serial control
register (SCR) and on the P96DDR bit as follows.
RE
0
1
P96DDR
Pin function
0
1
0
1
P96 input
P96 output
RXD1 input
P95 / TXD1
The function depends on the transmit enable bit (TE) in SCI1’s SCR and on the
P96DDR bit as follows.
TE
0
1
P95DDR
Pin function
0
1
0
1
P95 input
P95 output
TXD1 output
180
Table 9-17 Port 9 Pin Functions (cont)
Pin
Selection of Pin Functions
P94 / SCK2 / The function depends on the output enable bit (OE) of PWM timer 3’s timer control
PW3
register (TCR), the C/A bit in SCI2’s SMR, the CKE1 and CKE0 bits in SCI2’s SCR,
and the port 9 PWM enable bit (P9PWME) and port 9 serial enable bit (P9SCI2E) in
system control register 2 (SYSCR2).
P9SCI2E
P9PWME
OE
1
0
0
1
1
1
0
0
0/1
0
1
0/1
C/A
0
1
0/1
0/1
0/1
P94
0/1
0/1
0/1
PW3
0/1
0/1
0/1
CKE1
0
1
0
1
CKE0
0
1
0
1
0
1
0
1
Pin function
P94
SCI2
SCI2
SCI2
SCI2
P94
input/ internal external internal external input/ output input/
output clock clock clock clock output output
output input output input
When used for P94 input/output, the input or output function is selected by P94DDR.
P93 / RXD2 / The function depends on the OE bit in PWM timer 2’s TCR, the RE bit in SCI2’s
PW2 SCR, and the P9PWME bit and P9SCI2E bit in SYSCR2.
P9SCI2E
P9PWME
OE
1
0
0
1
0
1
0
1
0
1
0
1
0
1
0/1
0/1
0/1
0/1
RE
0
1
0
1
0
1
Pin function
P93
input/ input input/ output
output output
When used for P93 input/output, the input or output function is selected by P93DDR.
RXD2
P93
PW2
P93
input/
output
181
Table 9-17 Port 9 Pin Functions (cont)
Pin
Selection of Pin Functions
P92 / TXD2 / The function depends on the OE bit in PWM timer 1’s TCR, the TE bit in SCI2’s
PW1
SCR, and the P9PWME bit and P9SCI2E bit in SYSCR2.
P9SCI2E
P9PWME
OE
1
0
0
1
0
1
0
1
0
1
0
1
0
1
0/1
0/1
0/1
0/1
TE
0
1
0
1
0
1
Pin function
P92
input/ output input/ output
output output
TXD2
P92
PW1
P92
input/
output
When used for P92 input/output, the input or output function is selected by P92DDR.
P91 /
The function depends on the output enable A bit (OEA) in FRT3’s TCR and on the
P91DDR bit as follows.
FTOA3
OEA
0
1
P91DDR
Pin function
0
1
0
1
P91 input
P91 output
FTOA3 output
P90 /
The function depends on the output enable A bit (OEA) in FRT2’s TCR and on the
P90DDR bit as follows.
FTOA2
OEA
0
1
P90DDR
Pin function
0
1
0
1
P90 input
P90 output
FTOA2 output
182
Section 10 16-Bit Free-Running Timers
10.1 Overview
The H8/534 and H8/536 have an on-chip 16-bit free-running timer (FRT) module with three
independent channels (FRT1, FRT2, and FRT3). All three channels are functionally identical.
Each channel has a 16-bit free-running counter that it uses as a time base. Applications of the
FRT module include rectangular-wave output (up to two independent waveforms per channel),
input pulse width measurement, and measurement of external clock periods.
10.1.1 Features
The features of the free-running timer module are listed below.
• Selection of four clock sources
The free-running counters can be driven by an internal clock source (ø/4, ø/8, or ø/32), or an
external clock input (enabling use as an external event counter).
• Two independent comparators
Each free-running timer channel can generate two independent waveforms.
• Input capture function
The current count can be captured on the rising or falling edge (selectable) of an input signal.
• Four types of interrupts
Compare-match A and B, input capture, and overflow interrupts can be requested
independently.
The compare-match and input capture interrupts can be served by the data transfer controller
(DTC), enabling interrupt-driven data transfer with minimal CPU programming.
• Counter can be cleared under program control
The free-running counters can be cleared on compare-match A.
183
10.1.2 Block Diagram
Figure 10-1 shows a block diagram of one free-running timer channel.
External clock
FTCI
Internal clock
ø/4
ø/8
ø/32
Clock
Clock select
OCRA
Compare-match A
Overflow
Comparator A
FTOA
FTOB
FTI
Internal
data bus
FRC
Comparator B
OCRB
Clear
Compare-match B
Module
data
bus
Control
logic
Capture
ICR
TCSR
TCR
ICI
OCIA
OCIB
FOVI
Interrupt signals
OCRA: Output Compare Register A
OCRB: Output Compare Register B
FRC: Free Running Counter
ICR:
Input Capture Register
TCSR: Timer Control/Status Register
TCR: Timer Control Register
Figure 10-1 Block Diagram of 16-Bit Free-Running Timer
184
10.1.3 Input and Output Pins
Table 10-1 lists the input and output pins of the free-running timer module.
Table 10-1 Input and Output Pins of Free-Running Timer Module
Channel Name
Abbreviation I/O
Function
1
2
3
Output compare A
FTOA1
Output Output controlled by comparator A of FRT1
Output / Output controlled by comparator B of FRT1,
Output compare B or FTOB1 /
counter clock input
Input capture
FTCI1
FTI1
Input
Input
or input of external clock source for FRT1
Trigger for capturing current count of FRT1
Output compare A
FTOA2
Output Output controlled by comparator A of FRT2
Output / Output controlled by comparator B of FRT2,
Output compare B or FTOB2 /
counter clock input
Input capture
FTCI2
FTI2
Input
Input
or input of external clock source for FRT2
Trigger for capturing current count of FRT2
Output compare A
FTOA3
Output Output controlled by comparator A of FRT3
Output / Output controlled by comparator B of FRT3,
Output compare B or FTOB3 /
counter clock input
Input capture
FTCI3
FTI3
Input
Input
or input of external clock source for FRT3
Trigger for capturing current count of FRT3
185
10.1.4 Register Configuration
Table 10-2 lists the registers of each free-running timer channel.
Table 10-2 Register Configuration
Initial
Value
H'00
Channel
Name
Abbreviation
TCR
R/W
Address
H'FE90
H'FE91
H'FE92
H'FE93
H'FE94
H'FE95
H'FE96
H'FE97
H'FE98
H'FE99
H'FEA0
H'FEA1
H'FEA2
H'FEA3
H'FEA4
H'FEA5
H'FEA6
H'FEA7
H'FEA8
H'FEA9
Timer control register
R/W
Timer control/status register
Free-running counter (High)
Free-running counter (Low)
Output compare register A (High)
Output compare register A (Low)
Output compare register B (High)
Output compare register B (Low)
Input capture register (High)
Input capture register (Low)
Timer control register
TCSR
R/(W)* H'00
FRC (H)
FRC (L)
OCRA (H)
OCRA (L)
OCRB (H)
OCRB (L)
ICR (H)
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
R
H'00
H'00
H'FF
H'FF
H'FF
H'FF
H'00
H'00
H'00
1
ICR (L)
R
TCR
R/W
Timer control/status register
Free-running counter (High)
Free-running counter (Low)
Output compare register A (High)
Output compare register A (Low)
Output compare register B (High)
Output compare register B (Low)
Input capture register (High)
Input capture register (Low)
TCSR
R/(W)* H'00
FRC (H)
FRC (L)
OCRA (H)
OCRA (L)
OCRB (H)
OCRB (L)
ICR (H)
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
R
H'00
H'00
H'FF
H'FF
H'FF
H'FF
H'00
H'00
2
ICR (L)
R
* Software can write a 0 to clear bits 7 to 4, but cannot write a 1 in these bits.
186
Table 10-2 Register Configuration (cont)
Initial
Value
H'00
Channel
Name
Abbreviation
TCR
R/W
Address
H'FEB0
H'FEB1
H'FEB2
H'FEB3
H'FEB4
H'FEB5
H'FEB6
H'FEB7
H'FEB8
H'FEB9
Timer control register
R/W
Timer control/status register
Free-running counter (High)
Free-running counter (Low)
Output compare register A (High)
Output compare register A (Low)
Output compare register B (High)
Output compare register B (Low)
Input capture register (High)
Input capture register (Low)
TCSR
R/(W)* H'00
FRC (H)
FRC (L)
OCRA (H)
OCRA (L)
OCRB (H)
OCRB (L)
ICR (H)
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
R
H'00
H'00
H'FF
H'FF
H'FF
H'FF
H'00
H'00
3
ICR (L)
R
* Software can write a 0 to clear bits 7 to 4, but cannot write a 1 in these bits.
10.2 Register Descriptions
10.2.1 Free-Running Counter (FRC)—H'FE92, H'FEA2, H'FEB2
Bit
15 14 13 12 11 10
9
8
7
6
5
4
0
3
0
2
0
1
0
0
0
Initial value 0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
Read/WriteR/W R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W
Each FRC is a 16-bit readable/writable up-counter that increments on an internal pulse generated
from a clock source. The clock source is selected by the clock select 1 and 0 bits (CKS1 and
CKS0) of the timer control register (TCR).
The FRC can be cleared by compare-match A.
When the FRC overflows from H'FFFF to H'0000, the overflow flag (OVF) in the timer
control/status register (TCSR) is set to 1.
Because the FRC is a 16-bit register, a temporary register (TEMP) is used when the FRC is
written or read. See section 10.3, “CPU Interface” for details.
The FRCs are initialized to H'0000 at a reset and in the standby modes.
187
10.2.2 Output Compare Registers A and B (OCRA and OCRB)—H'FE94 and H'FE96,
H'FEA4 and H'FEA6, H'FEB4 and H'FEB6
Bit
15 14 13 12 11 10
9
8
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
0
1
Initial value 1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
Read/WriteR/W R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W
OCRA and OCRB are 16-bit readable/writable registers, the contents of which are continually
compared with the value in the FRC. When a match is detected, the corresponding output
compare flag (OCFA or OCFB) is set in the timer control/status register (TCSR).
In addition, if the output enable bit (OEA or OEB) in the timer control register (TCR) is set to 1,
when the output compare register and FRC values match, the logic level selected by the output
level bit (OLVLA or OLVLB) in the timer control status register (TCSR) is output at the output
compare pin (FTOA or FTOB).
The FTOA and FTOB output are 0 before the first compare-match.
Because OCRA and OCRB are 16-bit registers, a temporary register (TEMP) is used when they
are written. See section 10.3, “CPU Interface” for details.
OCRA and OCRB are initialized to H'FFFF at a reset and in the standby modes.
10.2.3 Input Capture Register (ICR)—H'FE98, H'FEA8, H'FEB8
Bit
15 14 13 12 11 10
9
8
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
0
Initial value 0
Read/Write R
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
R
R
R
R
R
R
R
R
R
R
R
R
R
R
R
The ICR is a 16-bit read-only register.
When the rising or falling edge of the signal at the input capture input pin is detected, the current
value of the FRC is copied to the ICR. At the same time, the input capture flag (ICF) in the timer
control/status register (TCSR) is set to 1. The input capture edge is selected by the input edge
select bit (IEDG) in the TCSR.
Because the ICR is a 16-bit register, a temporary register (TEMP) is used when the ICR is written
or read. See section 10.3, “CPU Interface” for details.
188
To ensure input capture, the pulse width of the input capture signal should be at least 1.5 system
clock periods (1.5·ø).
ø
FTI
Minimum FTI Pulse Width
The ICR is initialized to H'0000 at a reset and in the standby modes.
Note: When input capture is detected, the FRC value is transferred to the ICR even if the input
capture flag (ICF) is already set.
10.2.4 Timer Control Register (TCR)
Bit
7
6
5
4
OVIE
0
3
2
1
CKS1
0
0
CKS0
0
ICIE
0
OCIEB OCIEA
OEB
0
OEA
0
Initial value
Read/Write
0
0
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
The TCR is an 8-bit readable/writable register that selects the FRC clock source, enables the
output compare signals, and enables interrupts.
The TCR is initialized to H'00 at a reset and in the standby modes.
Bit 7—Input Capture Interrupt Enable (ICIE): This bit selects whether to request an input
capture interrupt (ICI) when the input capture flag (ICF) in the timer status/control register
(TCSR) is set to 1.
Bit 7
ICIE
0
Description
The input capture interrupt request (ICI) is disabled.
The input capture interrupt request (ICI) is enabled.
(Initial value)
1
Bit 6—Output Compare Interrupt Enable B (OCIEB): This bit selects whether to request
output compare interrupt B (OCIB) when output compare flag B (OCFB) in the timer
status/control register (TCSR) is set to 1.
189
Bit 6
OCIEB Description
0
1
Output compare interrupt request B (OCIB) is disabled. (Initial value)
Output compare interrupt request B (OCIB) is enabled.
Bit 5—Output Compare Interrupt Enable A (OCIEA): This bit selects whether to request
output compare interrupt A (OCIA) when output compare flag A (OCFA) in the timer
status/control register (TCSR) is set to 1.
Bit 5
OCIEA Description
0
1
Output compare interrupt request A (OCIA) is disabled. (Initial value)
Output compare interrupt request A (OCIA) is enabled.
Bit 4—Timer Overflow Interrupt Enable (OVIE): This bit selects whether to request a free-
running timer overflow interrupt (FOVI) when the timer overflow flag (OVF) in the timer
status/control register (TCSR) is set to 1.
Bit 4
OVIE
Description
0
1
The free-running timer overflow interrupt request (FOVI) is disabled.
The free-running timer overflow interrupt request (FOVI) is enabled.
(Initial value)
Bit 3—Output Enable B (OEB): This bit selects whether to enable or disable output of the logic
level selected by the OLVLB bit in the timer status/control register (TCSR) at the output compare
B pin when the FRC and OCRB values match.
Bit 3
OEB
Description
0
1
Output compare B output is disabled.
Output compare B output is enabled.
(Initial value)
Bit 2—Output Enable A (OEA): This bit selects whether to enable or disable output of the logic
level selected by the OLVLA bit in the timer status/control register (TCSR) at the output compare
A pin when the FRC and OCRA values match.
190
Bit 2
OEA
0
Description
Output compare A output is disabled.
Output compare A output is enabled.
(Initial value)
1
Bits 1 and 0—Clock Select (CKS1 and CKS0): These bits select external clock input or one of
three internal clock sources for the FRC. External clock pulses are counted on the rising edge.
Bit 1
Bit 0
CKS1
CKS0
Description
0
0
1
1
0
1
0
1
Internal clock source (ø/4)
Internal clock source (ø/8)
Internal clock source (ø/32)
(Initial value)
External clock source (counted on the rising edge)
10.2.5 Timer Control/Status Register (TCSR)
Bit
7
ICF
0
6
OCFB
0
5
OCFA
0
4
OVF
0
3
2
1
IEDG
0
0
CCLRA
0
OLVLB OLVLA
Initial value
Read/Write
0
0
R/(W)* R/(W)* R/(W)* R/(W)*
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
The TCSR is an 8-bit readable and partially writable* register that selects the input capture edge
and output compare levels, and specifies whether to clear the counter on compare-match A. It
also contains four status flags.
The TCSR is initialized to H'00 at a reset and in the standby modes.
* Software can write a 0 in bits 7 to 4 to clear the flags, but cannot write a 1 in these bits.
Bit 7—Input Capture Flag (ICF): This status flag is set to 1 to indicate an input capture event.
It signifies that the FRC value has been copied to the ICR.
191
Bit 7
ICF
0
Description
This bit is cleared from 1 to 0 when: (Initial value)
1. The CPU reads the ICF bit after it has been set to 1, then writes a 0 in this bit.
2. The data transfer controller (DTC) serves an input capture interrupt .
This bit is set to 1 when an input capture signal causes the FRC value to be copied to the ICR.
1
Bit 6—Output Compare Flag B (OCFB): This status flag is set to 1 when the FRC value
matches the OCRB value.
Bit 6
OCFB
Description
0
This bit is cleared from 1 to 0 when: (Initial value)
1. The CPU reads the OCFB bit after it has been set to 1, then writes a 0 in this bit.
2. The data transfer controller (DTC) serves output compare interrupt B.
This bit is set to 1 when FRC = OCRB.
1
Bit 5—Output Compare Flag A (OCFA): This status flag is set to 1 when the FRC value
matches the OCRA value.
Bit 5
OCFA
Description
0
This bit is cleared from 1 to 0 when: (Initial value)
1. The CPU reads the OCFA bit after it has been set to 1, then writes a 0 in this bit.
2. The data transfer controller (DTC) serves output compare interrupt A.
This bit is set to 1 when FRC = OCRA.
1
Bit 4—Timer Overflow Flag (OVF): This status flag is set to 1 when the FRC overflows
(changes from H'FFFF to H'0000).
Bit 4
OVF
Description
0
This bit is cleared from 1 to 0 when the CPU reads (Initial value)
the OVF bit after it has been set to 1, then writes a 0 in this bit.
This bit is set to 1 when FRC changes from H'FFFF to H'0000.
1
Bit 3—Output Level B (OLVLB): This bit selects the logic level to be output at the FTOB pin
when the FRC and OCRB values match.
192
Bit 3
OLVLB Description
0
1
A 0 logic level (Low) is output for compare-match B.
A 1 logic level (High) is output for compare-match B.
(Initial value)
Bit 2—Output Level A (OLVLA): This bit selects the logic level to be output at the FTOA pin
when the FRC and OCRA values match.
Bit 2
OLVLA Description
0
1
A 0 logic level (Low) is output for compare-match A.
A 1 logic level (High) is output for compare-match A.
(Initial value)
Bit 1—Input Edge Select (IEDG): This bit selects whether to capture the count on the rising or
falling edge of the input capture signal.
Bit 1
IEDG
Description
0
The FRC value is copied to the ICR on the falling edge (Initial value)
of the input capture signal.
1
The FRC value is copied to the ICR on the rising edge
of the input capture signal.
Bit 0—Counter Clear A (CCLRA): This bit selects whether to clear the FRC at compare-match
A (when the FRC and OCRA values match).
Bit 0
CCLRA Description
0
1
The FRC is not cleared. (Initial value)
The FRC is cleared at compare-match A.
193
10.3 CPU Interface
The FRC, OCRA, OCRB, and ICR are 16-bit registers, but they are connected to an 8-bit data
bus. When the CPU accesses these four registers, to ensure that both bytes are written or read
simultaneously, the access is performed using an 8-bit temporary register (TEMP).
These registers are written and read as follows.
• Register Write
When the CPU writes to the upper byte, the upper byte of write data is placed in TEMP. Next,
when the CPU writes to the lower byte, this byte of data is combined with the byte in TEMP
and all 16 bits are written in the register simultaneously.
• Register Read
When the CPU reads the upper byte, the upper byte of data is sent to the CPU and the lower
byte is placed in TEMP. When the CPU reads the lower byte, it receives the value in TEMP.
Programs that access these four registers should normally use word access. Equivalently, they
may access first the upper byte, then the lower byte. Data will not be transferred correctly if the
bytes are accessed in reverse order, or if only one byte is accessed.
Coding Examples : Write the contents of R0 into OCRA in FRT1
MOV.W R0, @H'FE94
: Read ICR of FRT2
MOV.W, @H'FEA8, R0
The same considerations apply to access by the DTC.
Figure 10-2 shows the data flow when the FRC is accessed. The other registers are accessed in
the same way, except that when OCRA or OCRB is read, the upper and lower bytes are both
transferred directly to the CPU without using the temporary register.
194
< Upper byte write >
Module data bus
CPU writes
data H'AA
Bus interface
TEMP
[H'AA]
FRCH
FRCL
[
]
[
]
< Lower byte write >
Module data bus
CPU writes
data H'55
Bus interface
TEMP
[H'AA]
FRCH
[H'AA]
FRCL
[H'55]
Figure 10-2 (a) Write Access to FRC (When CPU Writes H'AA55)
195
< Upper byte read >
Module data bus
CPU writes
data H'AA
Bus interface
TEMP
[H'55]
FRCH
[H'AA]
FRCL
[H'55]
< Lower byte read >
Module data bus
CPU writes
data H'55
Bus interface
TEMP
[H'55]
FRCH
FRCL
[
]
[
]
Figure 10-2 (b) Read Access to FRC (When FRC Contains H'AA55)
10.4 Operation
10.4.1 FRC Incrementation Timing
The FRC increments on a pulse generated once for each period of the selected (internal or
external) clock source.
If external clock input is selected, the FRC increments on the rising edge of the clock signal.
Figure 10-3 shows the increment timing.
196
The pulse width of the external clock signal must be at least 1.5·ø clock periods. The counter will
not increment correctly if the pulse width is shorter than 1.5·ø clock periods.
ø
FTCI
Minimum FTCI Pulse Width
ø
External clock
source
FRC clock pulse
FRC
N
N + 1
Figure 10-3 Increment Timing for External Clock Input
10.4.2 Output Compare Timing
Setting of Output Compare Flags A and B (OCFA and OCFB): The output compare flags are
set to 1 by an internal compare-match signal generated when the FRC value matches the OCRA or
OCRB value. This compare-match signal is generated at the last state in which the two values
match, just before the FRC increments to a new value.
Accordingly, when the FRC and OCR values match, the compare-match signal is not generated
until the next period of the clock source. Figure 10-4 shows the timing of the setting of the output
compare flags.
197
ø
N
N
N + 1
FRC
OCR
Internal compare-
match signal
OCF
Figure 10-4 Setting of Output Compare Flags
Output Timing: When a compare-match occurs, the logic level selected by the output level bit
(OLVLA or OLVLB) in the TCSR is output at the output compare pin (FTOA or FTOB).
Figure 10-5 shows the timing of this operation for compare-match A.
ø
Internal compare-
match A signal
OLYLA
FTOA
Figure 10-5 Timing of Output Compare A
198
FRC Clear Timing: If the CCLRA bit is set to 1, the FRC is cleared when compare-match A
occurs. Figure 10-6 shows the timing of this operation.
ø
Internal compare-
match A signal
FRC
N
H'0000
Figure 10-6 Clearing of FRC by Compare-Match A
10.4.3 Input Capture Timing
1. Input Capture Timing: An internal input capture signal is generated from the rising or falling
edge of the input at the input capture pin (FTI), as selected by the IEDG bit in the TCSR.
Figure 10-7 shows the usual input capture timing when the rising edge is selected (IEDG = 1).
ø
Input at FTI pin
Internal input
capture signal
Figure 10-7 Input Capture Timing (Usual Case)
But if the upper byte of the ICR is being read when the input capture signal arrives, the internal
input capture signal is delayed by one state. Figure 10-8 shows the timing for this case.
199
Read cycle: CPU reads upper byte of ICR
T1 T2 T3
ø
Input at FTI pin
Internal input
capture signal
Figure 10-8 Input Capture Timing (1-State Delay)
Timing of Input Capture Flag (ICF) Setting: The input capture flag (ICF) is set to 1 by the
internal input capture signal. Figure 10-9 shows the timing of this operation.
ø
Internal input
capture signal
ICF
FRC
ICR
N – 1
N
N + 1
N
Figure 10-9 Setting of Input Capture Flag
200
10.4.4 Setting of FRC Overflow Flag (OVF)
The FRC overflow flag (OVF) is set to 1 when the FRC overflows (changes from H'FFFF to
H'0000). Figure 10-10 shows the timing of this operation.
ø
FRC
H'FFFF
H'0000
Internal overflow
signal
OVF
Figure 10-10 Setting of Overflow Flag (OVF)
10.5 CPU Interrupts and DTC Interrupts
Each free-running timer channel can request four types of interrupts: input capture (ICI), output
compare A and B (OCIA and OCIB), and overflow (FOVI). Each interrupt is requested when the
corresponding enable and flag bits are set. Independent signals are sent to the interrupt controller
for each type of interrupt. Table 10-3 lists information about these interrupts.
Table 10-3 Free-Running Timer Interrupts
Interrupt
ICI
Description
DTC Service Available?
Priority
Requested when ICF is set
Requested when OCFA is set
Requested when OCFB is set
Requested when OVF is set
Yes
Yes
Yes
No
High
OCIA
OCIB
FOVI
Low
The ICI, OCIA, and OCIB interrupts can be directed to the data transfer controller (DTC) to have
a data transfer performed in place of the usual interrupt-handling routine.
When the DTC serves one of these interrupts, it automatically clears the ICF, OCFA, or OCFB
flag to 0. See section 6, “Data Transfer Controller” for further information on the DTC.
201
10.6 Synchronization of Free-Running Timers 1 to 3
10.6.1 Synchronization after a Reset
The three free-running timer channels are synchronized at a reset and remained synchronized
until:
• the clock source is changed;
• FRC contents are rewritten; or
• an FRC is cleared.
After a reset, each free-running counter operates on the ø/4 internal clock source.
10.6.2 Synchronization by Writing to FRCs
When synchronization among free-running timers 1 to 3 is lost, it can be restored by writing to the
free-running counters.
Synchronization on Internal Clock Source: When an internal clock is selected, free-running
timers 1 to 3 can be synchronized by writing data to their free-running counters as indicated in
table 10-4.
Table 10-4 Synchronization by Writing to FRCs
Clock Source
Write Interval
4n (states)
Write Data
ø/4
m
(FRC1)
(FRC2)
ø/8
8n (states)
m + n
ø/32
32n (states)
m + 2n (FRC3)
m, n: Arbitrary integers
After writing these data, synchronization can be checked by reading the three free-running
counters at the same interval as the write interval. If the read data have the same relative
differences as the write data, the three free-running timers are synchronized.
Programs for synchronizing the timers are shown next. Examples a, b, and c can be used when the
program is stored in on-chip memory. Examples d, e, and f can be used when the program is
stored in external memory. These programs assume that no wait states (T ) are inserted and there
W
is no NMI input.
202
Example a: ø/4 clock source, 12-state write interval (n = 3), on-chip memory
LA: LDC.B #H'FE,BR
LDC.W #H'0700,SR
MOV.W #m,R1
; Initialize base register for short-format instruction (MOV:S)
; Raise interrupt mask level to 7
; Data for free-running timer 1
MOV.W #m+3,R2
MOV.W #m+6,R3
; Data for free-running timer 2 (m + n = m + 3)
; Data for free-running timer 3 (m + 2n = m + 2 × 3)
; Call write routine
BSR
SET4
.ALIGN 2
; Align write instructions (MOV:S) at even address
SET4:MOV:S.W R1,@H'92:8 ; Write to FRC 1 (address H'FE92) 9 states
BRN SET4:8 ; 2-Byte dummy instruction 3 states
MOV:S.W R2,@H'A2:8 ; Write to FRC 2 (address H'FEA2)
BRN SET4:8 ; 2-Byte dummy instruction
Total 12 states
MOV:S.W R3,@H'B2:8 ; Write to FRC 3 (address H'FEB2)
RTS
Example b: ø/8 clock source, 16-state write interval (n = 2), on-chip memory
LB: LDC.B #H'FE,BR
LDC.W #H'0700,SR
MOV.W #m,R1
MOV.W #m+2,R2
MOV.W #m+4,R3
BSR
SET8
.ALIGN 2
SET8:MOV:S.W R1,@H'92:8
BRN SET8:8
; 9 States
; 3 States
; 4 States
Total 16 states
XCH R1,R1
MOV:S.W R2,@H'A2:8
BRN SET8:8
XCH R2,R2
MOV:S.W R3,@H'B2:8
RTS
203
Example c: ø/32 clock source, 32-state write interval (n = 1), on-chip memory
LC:
LDC.B #H'FE,BR
LDC.W #H'0700,SR
MOV.W #m,R1
MOV.W #m+1,R2
MOV.W #m+2,R3
BSR
SET32
.ALIGN 2
SET32: MOV:S.W R1,@H'92:8
BSR WAIT:8
; Align on even address
; 2 Bytes, 9 states
; 2 Bytes, 9 states
MOV:S.W R2,@H'A2:8
BSR WAIT:8
Total 32 states
MOV:S.W R3,@H'B2:8
RTS
.ALIGN 2
WAIT: NOP
XCH R1,R1
RTS
; Align on even address
; 2 States
; 4 States
; 8 States
Note: The stack is assumed to be in on-chip RAM.
Example d: ø/4 clock source, 20-state write interval (n = 5), external memory
LD:
LDC.B #H'FE,BR
LDC.W #H'0700,SR
CLR.B H'FF10
; Set interrupt mask level to 7
; Disable wait states
MOV.W #m,R1
MOV.W #m+5,R2
MOV.W #m+10,R3
MOV:S.W R1,@H'92:8
; 13 States
; 2 Bytes, 7 states
Total 20 states
BRN
MOV:S.W R2,@H'A2:8
BRN LD:8
MOV:S.W R3,@H'B2:8
LD:8
204
Example e: ø/8 clock source, 24-state write interval (n = 3), external memory
LE: LDC.B #H'FF,BR
LDC.W #H'0700,SR
CLR.B @H'F8"8
MOV.W #m,R1
MOV.W #m+3,R2
MOV.W #m+6,R3
MOV:S.W R1,@H'92:8
; 13 States
; 2 Bytes,
; 1 Byte,
BRN
NOP
LE:8
7 states
4 states
Total 24 states
MOV:S.W R2,@H'A2:8
BRN
NOP
LE:8
MOV:S.W R3,@H'B2:8
Example f: ø/32 clock source, 32-state write interval (n = 1), external memory
LF: LDC.B #H'FF,BR
LDC.W #H'0700,SR
CLR.B @H'F8:8
MOV.W #m,R1
MOV.W #m+1,R2
MOV.W #m+2,R3
MOV:S.W R1,@H'92:8
; External memory, so 13 states
XCH
BRN
NOP
R0,R0
LF:8
;
8 states
7 states
4 states
Total 32 states
; 2 Bytes,
;
MOV:S.W R2,@H'A2:8
XCH
BRN
NOP
R0,R0
LF:8
MOV:S.W R3,@H'B2:8
205
Synchronization on External Clock Source: When the external clock source is selected, the
free-running timers can be synchronized by halting their external clock inputs, then writing
identical values in their free-running counters.
10.7 Sample Application
In the example below, one free-running timer channel is used to generate two square-wave outputs
with a 50% duty factor and arbitrary phase relationship. The programming is as follows:
1. The CCLRA bit in the TCSR is set to 1.
2. Each time a compare-match interrupt occurs, software inverts the corresponding output level
bit in the TCSR.
FRC
H'FFFF
Clear counter
OCRA
OCRB
H'0000
FTOA pin
FTOB pin
Figure 10-11 Square-Wave Output (Example)
10.8 Application Notes
Application programmers should note that the following types of contention can occur in the free-
running timers.
Contention between FRC Write and Clear: If an internal counter clear signal is generated
during the T3 state of a write cycle to the lower byte of a free-running counter, the clear signal
takes priority and the write is not performed.
206
Figure 10-12 shows this type of contention.
Write cycle: CPU writes to lower byte of FRC
T1
T2
T3
ø
Internal address bus
Internal write signal
FRC address
FRC clear signal
FRC
N
H'0000
Figure 10-12 FRC Write-Clear Contention
Contention between FRC Write and Increment: If an FRC increment pulse is generated during
the T3 state of a write cycle to the lower byte of a free-running counter, the write takes priority
and the FRC is not incremented.
207
Figure 10-13 shows this type of contention.
Write cycle: CPU writes to lower byte of FRC
T1
T2
T3
ø
Internal address bus
Internal write signal
FRC address
FRC clock pulse
FRC
N
M
Write data
Figure 10-13 FRC Write-Increment Contention
208
Contention between OCR Write and Compare-Match: If a compare-match occurs during the
T3 state of a write cycle to the lower byte of OCRA or OCRB, the write takes precedence and the
compare-match signal is inhibited.
Figure 10-14 shows this type of contention.
Write cycle: CPU writes to lower byte of OCRA or OCRB
T1
T2
T3
ø
Internal address bus
Internal write signal
OCR address
N
N
N + 1
M
FRC
OCRA or OCRB
Write data
Compare-match
A or B signal
Inhibited
Figure 10-14 Contention between OCR Write and Compare-Match
Incrementation Caused by Changing of Internal Clock Source: When an internal clock
source is changed, the changeover may cause the FRC to increment. This depends on the time at
which the clock select bits (CKS1 and CKS0) are rewritten, as shown in table 10-5.
The pulse that increments the FRC is generated at the falling edge of the internal clock source. If
clock sources are changed when the old source is High and the new source is Low, as in case
No. 3 in table 10-5, the changeover generates a falling edge that triggers the FRC increment pulse.
Switching between an internal and external clock source can also cause the FRC to increment.
209
Table 10-5 Effect of Changing Internal Clock Sources
No.
Description
Timing Chart
1
Low → Low:
Old clock
source
CKS1 and CKS0 are
rewritten while both
clock sources are Low.
New clock
source
FRC clock
pulse
FRC
N
N + 1
CKS rewrite
2
Low → High:
Old clock
source
CKS1 and CKS0 are
rewritten while old
clock source is Low and
new clock source is High.
New clock
source
FRC clock
pulse
FRC
N
N + 1
N + 2
CKS rewrite
3
High → Low:
Old clock
source
CKS1 and CKS0 are
rewritten while old
clock source is High and
new clock source is Low.
New clock
source
*
FRC clock
pulse
FRC
N
N + 1
CKS rewrite
N + 2
The switching of clock sources is regarded as a falling edge that increments the FRC.
210
Table 10-5 Effect of Changing Internal Clock Sources (cont)
No.
Description
Timing Chart
4
High → High:
Old clock
source
CKS1 and CKS0 are
rewritten while both
clock sources are High.
New clock
source
FRC clock
pulse
FRC
N
N + 1
N + 2
CKS rewrite
211
Section 11 8-Bit Timer
11.1 Overview
The H8/534 and H8/536 have a single 8-bit timer based on an 8-bit counter (TCNT). The timer
has two time constant registers (TCORA and TCORB) that are constantly compared with the
TCNT value to detect compare-match events. One application of the 8-bit timer is to generate a
rectangular-wave output with an arbitrary duty factor.
11.1.1 Features
The features of the 8-bit timer are listed below.
• Selection of four clock sources
The counter can be driven by an internal clock signal (ø/8, ø/64, or ø/1024) or an external clock
input (enabling use as an external event counter).
• Selection of three ways to clear the counter
The counter can be cleared on compare-match A or B, or by an external reset signal.
• Timer output controlled by two time constants
The single timer output (TMO) is controlled by two independent time constants, enabling the
timer to generate output waveforms with an arbitrary duty factor.
• Three types of interrupts
Compare-match A and B and overflow interrupts can be requested independently.
The compare match interrupts can be served by the data transfer controller (DTC), enabling
interrupt-driven data transfer with minimal CPU programming.
213
11.1.2 Block Diagram
Figure 11-1 shows a block diagram of 8-bit timer.
External clocks
TMCI
Internal clocks
ø/8
ø/64
ø/1024
Clock
Clock select
TCORA
Compare-match A
Comparator A
TCNT
TMO
TMRI
Internal
data bus
Overflow
Clear
Comparator B
TCORB
Control
logic
Compare-match B
Module
data
bus
TCSR
TCR
CMIA
CMIB
OVI
Interrupt signals
TCORA: Time Constant Register A
TCORB: Time Constant Register B
TCNT: Timer Counter
TCSR: Timer Control/Status Register
TCR:
Timer Control Register
Figure 11-1 Block Diagram of 8-Bit Timer
214
11.1.3 Input and Output Pins
Table 11-1 lists the input and output pins of the 8-bit timer.
Table 11-1 Input and Output Pins of 8-Bit Timer
Name
Abbreviation
TMO
I/O
Function
Timer output
Timer clock input
Timer reset input
Output
Input
Input
Output controlled by compare-match
External clock source for the counter
External reset signal for the counter
TMCI
TMRI
11.1.4 Register Configuration
Table 11-2 lists the registers of the 8-bit timer.
Table 11-2 8-Bit Timer Registers
Name
Abbreviation
TCR
R/W
R/W
R/(W)*
R/W
R/W
R/W
Initial Value
H'00
Address
H'FED0
H'FED1
H'FED2
H'FED3
H'FED4
Timer control register
Timer control/status register
Timer constant register A
Timer constant register B
Timer counter
TCSR
H'10
TCORA
TCORB
TCNT
H'FF
H'FF
H'00
* Software can write a 0 to clear bits 7 to 5, but cannot write a 1 in these bits.
11.2 Register Descriptions
11.2.1 Timer Counter (TCNT)—H'FED4
Bit
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
0
Initial value
Read/Write
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
The timer counter (TCNT) is an 8-bit up-counter that increments on a pulse generated from one of
four clock sources. The clock source is selected by clock select bits 2 to 0 (CKS2 to CKS0) of the
timer control register (TCR). The CPU can always read or write the timer counter.
215
The timer counter can be cleared by an external reset input or by an internal compare-match signal
generated at a compare-match event. Clock clear bits 1 and 0 (CCLR1 and CCLR0) of the timer
control register select the method of clearing.
When the timer counter overflows from H'FF to H'00, the overflow flag (OVF) in the timer
control/status register (TCSR) is set to 1.
The timer counter is initialized to H'00 at a reset and in the standby modes.
11.2.2 Time Constant Registers A and B (TCORA and TCORB)—H'FED2 and H'FED3
Bit
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
0
Initial value
Read/Write
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
TCORA and TCORB are 8-bit readable/writable registers. The timer count is continually
compared with the constants written in these registers. When a match is detected, the
corresponding compare-match flag (CMFA or CMFB) is set in the timer control/status register
(TCSR).
The timer output signal (TMO) is controlled by these compare-match signals as specified by
output select bits 1 to 0 (OS1 to OS0) in the timer status/control register (TCSR).
TCORA and TCORB are initialized to H'FF at a reset and in the standby modes.
11.2.3 Timer Control Register (TCR)—H'FED0
Bit
7
6
5
OVIE
0
4
3
2
1
CKS1
0
0
CKS0
0
CMIEB CMIEA
CCLR1 CCLR0 CKS2
Initial value
Read/Write
0
0
0
0
0
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
The TCR is an 8-bit readable/writable register that selects the clock source and the time at which
the timer counter is cleared, and enables interrupts.
The TCR is initialized to H'00 at a reset and in the standby modes.
216
Bit 7—Compare-Match Interrupt Enable B (CMIEB): This bit selects whether to request
compare-match interrupt B (CMIB) when compare-match flag B (CMFB) in the timer
status/control register (TCSR) is set to 1.
Bit 7
CMIEB Description
0
1
Compare-match interrupt request B (CMIB) is disabled. (Initial value)
Compare-match interrupt request B (CMIB) is enabled.
Bit 6—Compare-Match Interrupt Enable A (CMIEA): This bit selects whether to request
compare-match interrupt A (CMIA) when compare-match flag A (CMFA) in the timer
status/control register (TCSR) is set to 1.
Bit 6
CMIEA Description
0
1
Compare-match interrupt request A (CMIA) is disabled. (Initial value)
Compare-match interrupt request A (CMIA) is enabled.
Bit 5—Timer Overflow Interrupt Enable (OVIE): This bit selects whether to request a timer
overflow interrupt (OVI) when the overflow flag (OVF) in the timer status/control register
(TCSR) is set to 1.
Bit 5
OVIE
Description
0
1
The timer overflow interrupt request (OVI) is disabled.
The timer overflow interrupt request (OVI) is enabled.
(Initial value)
Bits 4 and 3—Counter Clear 1 and 0 (CCLR1 and CCLR0): These bits select how the timer
counter is cleared: by compare-match A or B or by an external reset input.
Bit 4
Bit 3
CCLR1 CCLR0
Description
0
0
1
1
0
1
0
1
Not cleared.
(Initial value)
Cleared on compare-match A.
Cleared on compare-match B.
Cleared on rising edge of external reset input signal.
217
Bits 2, 1, and 0—Clock Select (CKS2, CKS1, and CKS0): These bits select the internal or
external clock source for the timer counter. For the external clock source they select whether to
increment the count on the rising or falling edge of the clock input, or on both edges.
Bit 2
Bit 1
Bit 0
CKS2
CKS1
CKS0
Description
0
0
0
0
1
1
1
1
0
0
1
1
0
0
1
1
0
1
0
1
0
1
0
1
No clock source (timer stopped).
Internal clock source (ø/8).
Internal clock source (ø/64).
Internal clock source (ø/1024).
No clock source (timer stopped).
(Initial value)
External clock source, counted on the rising edge.
External clock source, counted on the falling edge.
External clock source, counted on both the rising
and falling edges.
11.2.4 Timer Control/Status Register (TCSR)—H'FED1
Bit
7
CMFB
0
6
CMFA
0
5
OVF
0
4
—
1
3
2
1
0
OS3
0
OS2
0
OS1
0
OS0
0
Initial value
Read/Write
R/(W)* R/(W)* R/(W)*
—
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
The TCSR is an 8-bit readable and partially writable* register that indicates compare-match and
overflow status and selects the effect of compare-match events on the timer output signal (TMO).
The TCSR is initialized to H'10 at a reset and in the standby modes.
* Software can write a 0 in bits 7 to 5 to clear the flags, but cannot write a 1 in these bits.
Bit 7—Compare-Match Flag B (CMFB): This status flag is set to 1 when the timer count
matches the time constant set in TCORB.
218
Bit 7
CMFB
0
Description
This bit is cleared from 1 to 0 when:
(Initial value)
1. The CPU reads the CMFB bit after it has been set to 1, then writes a 0 in this bit.
2. Compare-match interrupt B is served by the data transfer controller (DTC).
This bit is set to 1 when TCNT = TCORB.
1
Bit 6—Compare-Match Flag A (CMFA): This status flag is set to 1 when the timer count
matches the time constant set in TCORA.
Bit 6
CMFA
Description
0
This bit is cleared from 1 to 0 when:
(Initial value)
1. The CPU reads the CMFA bit after it has been set to 1, then writes a 0 in this bit.
2. Compare-match interrupt A is served by the data transfer controller (DTC).
This bit is set to 1 when TCNT = TCORA.
1
Bit 5—Timer Overflow Flag (OVF): This status flag is set to 1 when the timer count overflows
(changes from H'FF to H'00).
Bit 5
OVF
Description
0
This bit is cleared from 1 to 0 when the CPU reads (Initial value)
the OVF bit after it has been set to 1, then writes a 0 in this bit.
This bit is set to 1 when TCNT changes from H'FF to H'00.
1
Bit 4—Reserved: This bit cannot be modified and is always read as 1.
Bits 3 to 0—Output Select 3 to 0 (OS3 to OS0): These bits specify the effect of compare-match
events on the timer output signal (TMO). Bits OS3 and OS2 control the effect of compare-match B
on the output level. Bits OS1 and OS0 control the effect of compare-match A on the output level.
When all four output select bits are cleared to 0 the TMO signal is not output. The TMO output is
0 before the first compare-match.
Bit 3
Bit 2
OS3
OS2
Description
0
0
1
1
0
1
0
1
No change when compare-match B occurs.
(Initial value)
Output changes to 0 when compare-match B occurs.
Output changes to 1 when compare-match B occurs.
Output inverts (toggles) when compare-match B occurs.
219
Bit 1
Bit 0
OS1
OS0
Description
0
0
1
1
0
1
0
1
No change when compare-match A occurs. (Initial value)
Output changes to 0 when compare-match A occurs.
Output changes to 1 when compare-match A occurs.
Output inverts (toggles) when compare-match A occurs.
11.3 Operation
11.3.1 TCNT Incrementation Timing
The timer counter increments on a pulse generated once for each period of the selected (internal or
external) clock source.
If external clock input (TMCI) is selected, the timer counter can increment on the rising edge, the
falling edge, or both edges of the external clock signal.
The external clock pulse width must be at least 1.5·ø clock periods for incrementation on a single
edge, and at least 2.5·ø clock periods for incrementation on both edges. The counter will not
increment correctly if the pulse width is shorter than these values.
ø
TMCI
Minimum TMCI Pulse Width
(Single-Edge Incrementation)
ø
TMCI
Minimum TMCI Pulse Width
(Double-Edge Incrementation)
220
Figure 11-2 shows the count timing for incrementation on both edges.
ø
External clock
source
TCNT clock
pulse
TCNT
N – 1
N
N + 1
Figure 11-2 Count Timing for External Clock Input
11.3.2 Compare Match Timing
Setting of Compare-Match Flags A and B (CMFA and CMFB): The compare-match flags are
set to 1 by an internal compare-match signal generated when the timer count matches the time
constant in TCORA or TCORB. The compare-match signal is generated at the last state in which
the match is true, just before the timer counter increments to a new value.
Accordingly, when the timer count matches one of the time constants, the compare-match signal is
not generated until the next period of the clock source. Figure 11-3 shows the timing of the
setting of the compare-match flags.
221
ø
N
N
N + 1
TCNT
TCOR
Internal
compare-match
signal
CMF
Figure 11-3 Setting of Compare-Match Flags
Output Timing: When a compare-match event occurs, the timer output (TMO) changes as
specified by the output select bits (OS3 to OS0) in the TCSR. Depending on these bits, the output
can remain the same, change to 0, change to 1, or toggle.
Figure 11-4 shows the timing when the output is set to toggle on compare-match A.
ø
Internal
compare-match
A signal
Timer output
(TMO)
Figure 11-4 Timing of Timer Output
222
Timing of Compare-Match Clear: Depending on the CCLR1 and CCLR0 bits in the TCR, the
timer counter can be cleared when compare-match A or B occurs. Figure 11-5 shows the timing
of this operation.
ø
Internal
compare-match
signal
N
H'00
TCNT
Figure 11-5 Timing of Compare-Match Clear
11.3.3 External Reset of TCNT
When the CCLR1 and CCLR0 bits in the TCR are both set to 1, the timer counter is cleared on the
rising edge of an external reset input. Figure 11-6 shows the timing of this operation.
ø
External reset
input (TMRI)
Internal clear
pulse
TCNT
N – 1
N
H'00
Figure 11-6 Timing of External Reset
223
11.3.4 Setting of TCNT Overflow Flag
The overflow flag (OVF) is set to 1 when the timer count overflows (changes from H'FF to H'00).
Figure 11-7 shows the timing of this operation.
ø
H'FF
H'00
TCNT
Internal overflow
signal
OVF
Figure 11-7 Setting of Overflow Flag (OVF)
11.4 CPU Interrupts and DTC Interrupts
The 8-bit timer can generate three types of interrupts: compare-match A and B (CMIA and
CMIB), and overflow (OVI). Each interrupt is requested when the corresponding enable and flag
bits are set in the TCR and TCSR. Independent signals are sent to the interrupt controller for each
type of interrupt. Table 11-3 lists information about these interrupts.
Table 11-3 8-Bit Timer Interrupts
Interrupt
CMIA
CMIB
OVI
Description
DTC Service Available?
Priority
Requested when CMFA is set
Requested when CMFB is set
Requested when OVF is set
Yes
Yes
No
High
Low
The CMIA and CMIB interrupts can be served by the data transfer controller (DTC) to have a data
transfer performed.
When the DTC serves one of these interrupts, it automatically clears the CMFA or CMFB flag
to 0. See section 6, “Data Transfer Controller” for further information on the DTC.
224
11.5 Sample Application
In the example below, the 8-bit timer is used to generate a pulse output with a selected duty factor.
The control bits are set as follows:
1. In the TCR, CCLR1 is cleared to 0 and CCLR0 is set to 1 so that the timer counter is cleared
when its value matches the constant in TCORA.
2. In the TCSR, bits OS3 to OS0 are set to “0110,” causing the output to change to 1 on compare-
match A and to 0 on compare-match B.
With these settings, the 8-bit timer provides output of pulses at a rate determined by TCORA with
a pulse width determined by TCORB. No software intervention is required.
TCNT
H'FF
Clear counter
TCORA
TCORB
H'00
TMO pin
Figure 11-8 Example of Pulse Output
225
11.6 Application Notes
Application programmers should note that the following types of contention can occur in the 8-bit
timer.
Contention between TCNT Write and Clear: If an internal counter clear signal is generated
during the T3 state of a write cycle to the timer counter, the clear signal takes priority and the
write is not performed.
Figure 11-9 shows this type of contention.
Write cycle: CPU writes to TCNT
T1
T2
T3
ø
Internal Address
bus
TCNT address
Internal write
signal
Counter clear
signal
TCNT
N
H'00
Figure 11-9 TCNT Write-Clear Contention
226
Contention between TCNT Write and Increment: If a timer counter increment pulse is
generated during the T3 state of a write cycle to the timer counter, the write takes priority and the
timer counter is not incremented.
Figure 11-10 shows this type of contention.
Write cycle: CPU writes to TCNT
T1
T2
T3
ø
Internal Address
bus
TCNT address
Internal write
signal
TCNT clock
pulse
TCNT
N
M
Write data
Figure 11-10 TCNT Write-Increment Contention
227
Contention between TCOR Write and Compare-Match: If a compare-match occurs during the
T3 state of a write cycle to TCORA or TCORB, the write takes precedence and the compare-
match signal is inhibited.
Figure 11-11 shows this type of contention.
Write cycle: CPU writes to TCORA
or TCORB
T1
T2
T3
ø
Internal address
bus
TCNT address
Internal write
signal
TCNT
N
N + 1
TCORA or
TCORB
N
M
TCOR write
data
Compare-match
A or B signal
Inhibited
Figure 11-11 Contention between TCOR Write and Compare-Match
Contention between Compare-Match A and Compare-Match B: If identical time constants
are written in TCORA and TCORB, causing compare-match A and B to occur simultaneously,
any conflict between the output selections for compare-match A and B is resolved by following
the priority order in table 11-4.
228
Table 11-4 Priority Order of Timer Output
Output Selection
Toggle
Priority
High
1 Output
0 Output
No change
Low
Incrementation Caused by Changing of Internal Clock Source: When an internal clock
source is changed, the changeover may cause the timer counter to increment. This depends on the
time at which the clock select bits (CKS2 to CKS0) are rewritten, as shown in table 11-5.
The pulse that increments the timer counter is generated at the falling edge of the internal clock
source signal. If clock sources are changed when the old source is High and the new source is
Low, as in case No. 3 in table 11-5, the changeover generates a falling edge that triggers the
TCNT clock pulse and increments the timer counter.
Switching between an internal and external clock source can also cause the timer counter to
increment.
Table 11-5 Effect of Changing Internal Clock Sources
No. Description
Timing Chart
1
Low → Low*1:
Old clock
source
CKS1 and CKS0 are
rewritten while both
clock sources are Low.
New clock
source
TCNT clock
pulse
TCNT
N
N + 1
CKS rewrite
Note: *1 Including a transition from Low to the stopped state (CKS1 = 0, CKS0 = 0), or a
transition from the stopped state to Low.
229
Table 11-5 Effect of Changing Internal Clock Sources (cont)
No. Description
Timing Chart
2
Low → High*1:
Old clock
source
CKS1 and CKS0 are
rewritten while old
clock source is Low and
new clock source is High.
New clock
source
TCNT clock
pulse
TCNT
N
N + 1
N + 2
CKS rewrite
3
High → Low*2:
Old clock
source
CKS1 and CKS0 are
rewritten while old
clock source is High and
new clock source is Low.
New clock
source
*3
TCNT clock
pulse
TCNT
N
N + 1
CKS rewrite
N + 2
Note: *1 Including a transition from the stopped state to High.
*2 Including a transition from High to the stopped state.
*3 The switching of clock sources is regarded as a falling edge that increments the TCNT.
230
Table 11-5 Effect of Changing Internal Clock Sources (cont)
No. Description
Timing Chart
4
High → High:
Old clock
source
CKS1 and CKS0 are
rewritten while both
clock sources are High.
New clock
source
TCNT clock
pulse
TCNT
N
N + 1
N + 2
CKS rewrite
231
Section 12 PWM Timer
12.1 Overview
The H8/534 and H8/536 have an on-chip pulse-width modulation (PWM) timer module with three
independent channels (PWM1, PWM2, and PWM3). All three channels are functionally identical.
Using an 8-bit timer counter, each PWM channel generates a rectangular output pulse with a duty
factor of 0 to 100%. The duty factor is specified in an 8-bit duty register (DTR).
12.1.1 Features
The PWM timer module has the following features:
• Selection of eight clock sources
• Duty factors from 0 to 100% with 1/250 resolution
• Output with positive or negative logic
12.1.2 Block Diagram
Figure 12-1 shows a block diagram of one PWM timer channel.
233
DTR
Compare-
match
Output
control
Internal
data bus
Comparator
PW
TCNT
TCR
Module
data bus
Internal clock source
ø/2
ø/8
ø/32
ø/128
ø/256
ø/1024
ø/2048
ø/4096
Clock
Clock
select
DTR: Duty Register
TCNT: Timer Counter
TCR: Timer Control Register
Figure 12-1 Block Diagram of PWM Timer
12.1.3 Input and Output Pins
Table 12-1 lists the output pins of the PWM timer module. There are no input pins.
Table 12-1 Output Pins of PWM Timer Module
Name
Abbreviation
PW1
I/O
Function
PWM1 output
PWM2 output
PWM3 output
Output
Output
Output
Pulse output from PWM timer channel 1.
Pulse output from PWM timer channel 2.
Pulse output from PWM timer channel 3.
PW2
PW3
234
12.1.4 Register Configuration
The PWM timer module has three registers for each channel as listed in table12-2.
Table 12-2 PWM Timer Registers
Initial
Channel Name
Abbreviation
TCR
R/W
Value
H'38
H'FF
H'00
H'38
H'FF
H'00
H'38
H'FF
H'00
Address
H'FEC0
H'FEC1
H'FEC2
H'FEC4
H'FEC5
H'FEC6
H'FEC8
H'FEC9
H'FECA
1
2
3
Timer control register
R/W
Duty register
DTR
R/W
Timer counter
TCNT
TCR
R/(W)*
R/W
Timer control register
Duty register
DTR
R/W
Timer counter
TCNT
TCR
R/(W)*
R/W
Timer control register
Duty register
DTR
R/W
Timer counter
TCNT
R/(W)*
* The timer counters are read/write registers, but the write function is for test purposes only.
Application programs should never write to these registers.
12.2 Register Descriptions
12.2.1 Timer Counter (TCNT)—H'FEC2, H'FEC4, H'FECA
Bit
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
0
Initial value
Read/Write
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
The PWM timer counters (TCNT) are 8-bit up-counters. When the output enable bit (OE) in the
timer control register (TCR) is set to 1, the timer counter starts counting pulses of an internal
clock source selected by clock select bits 2 to 0 (CKS2 to CKS0). After counting from H'00 to
H'F9, the timer counter repeats from H'00.
The PWM timer counters can be read and written, but the write function is for test purposes only.
Application software should never write to a PW timer counter, because this may have
unpredictable effects.
235
The PWM timer counters are initialized to H'00 at a reset and in the standby modes, and when the
OE bit is cleared to 0.
12.2.2 Duty Register (DTR)—H'FEC1, H'FEC5, H'FEC9
Bit
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
0
Initial value
Read/Write
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
The duty registers (DTR) specify the duty factor of the output pulse. Any duty factor from 0 to
100% can be selected, with a resolution of 1/250. Writing 0 (H'00) in a DTR gives a 0% duty
factor; writing 125 (H'7D) gives a 50% duty factor; writing 250 (H'FA) gives a 100% duty factor.
The timer count is continually compared with the DTR contents. If the DTR value is not 0, when
the count increments from H'00 to H'01 the PWM output signal is set to 1. When the count
increments to the DTR value, the PWM output returns to 0. If the DTR value is 0 (duty factor
0%), the PWM output remains constant at 0.
The DTRs are double-buffered. A new value written in a DTR while the timer counter is running
does not become valid until after the count changes from H'F9 to H'00. When the timer counter is
stopped (while the OE bit is 0), new values become valid as soon as written. When a DTR is
read, the value read is the currently valid value.
The DTRs are initialized to H'FF at a reset and in the standby modes.
12.2.3 Timer Control Register (TCR)—H'FEC0, H'FEC4, H'FEC8
Bit
7
OE
0
6
OS
0
5
—
1
4
—
1
3
—
1
2
CKS2
0
1
CKS1
0
0
CKS0
0
Initial value
Read/Write
R/W
R/W
—
—
—
R/W
R/W
R/W
The TCRs are 8-bit readable/writable registers that select the clock source and control the PWM
outputs.
The TCRs are initialized to H'38 at a reset and in the standby modes.
236
Bit 7—Output Enable (OE): This bit enables the timer counter and the PWM output.
Bit 7
OE
0
Description
PWM output is disabled. TCNT is cleared to H'00 and stopped. (Initial value)
PWM output is enabled. TCNT runs.
1
Bit 6—Output Select (OS): This bit selects positive or negative logic for the PWM output.
Bit 6
OS
0
Description
Positive logic; positive-going PWM pulse, 1 = High
Negative logic; negative-going PWM pulse, 1 = Low
(Initial value)
1
Bits 5 to 3—Reserved: These bits cannot be modified and are always read as 1.
Bits 2, 1, and 0—Clock Select (CKS2, CKS1, and CKS0): These bits select one of eight clock
sources obtained by dividing the system clock (ø).
Bit 2
Bit 1
Bit 0
CKS2
CKS1
CKS0
Description
ø/2 (Initial value)
ø/8
0
0
0
0
1
1
1
1
0
0
1
1
0
0
1
1
0
1
0
1
0
1
0
1
ø/32
ø/128
ø/256
ø/1024
ø/2048
ø/4096
From the clock source frequency, the resolution, period, and frequency of the PWM output can be
calculated as follows.
Resolution
= 1/clock source frequency
PWM period
= resolution × 250
PWM frequency = 1/PWM period
If the ø clock frequency is 10 MHz, then the resolution, period, and frequency of the PWM output
for each clock source are given in table12-3.
237
Table 12-3 PWM Timer Parameters for 10 MHz System Clock
Internal Clock Frequency Resolution
PWM Period
50 µs
PWM Frequency
20 kHz
ø/2
200 ns
ø/8
800 ns
200 µs
5 kHz
ø/32
3.2 µs
800 µs
1.25 kHz
312.5 Hz
156.3 Hz
39.1 Hz
ø/128
ø/256
ø/1024
ø/2048
ø/4096
12.8 µs
25.6 µs
102.4 µs
204.8 µs
409.6 µs
3.2 ms
6.4 ms
25.6 ms
51.2 ms
102.4 ms
19.5 Hz
9.8 Hz
12.3 Operation
Figure 12-2 shows the timing of the PWM timer operation.
1. Positive Logic (OS = 0)
(1) When OE = 0—(a) in Figure 12-2: The timer count is held at H'00 and PWM output is
inhibited. (The pin is used for port 9 input/output, and its state depends on the corresponding
port 9 data register and data direction register.) Any value (such as N in figure 12-2) written
in the DTR becomes valid immediately.
(2) When OE = 1
i) The timer counter begins incrementing, and the PWM output goes High. [(b) in figure 12-2]
ii) When the count reaches the DTR value, the PWM output goes Low. [(c) in figure 12-2]
iii)If the DTR value is changed (by writing the data M in figure 12-2), the new value
becomes valid after the timer count changes from H'F9 to H'00. [(d) in figure 12-2]
2. Negative Logic (OS = 1): The operation is the same except that High and Low are reversed in
the PWM output. [(e) in figure 12-2]
238
Figure 12-2 PWM Timing
239
12.4 Application Notes
Notes on the use of the PWM timer module are given below.
To use port 9 for PWM output, first set the P9PWME bit to 1 and clear the P9SCI2E bit to 0 in
system control register 2 (SYSCR2).
Similarly, to use port 6 for PWM output, first set the P6PWME bit to 1 and clear the
corresponding interrupt enable bit or bits (IRQ3E, IRQ4E, IRQ5E) to 0 in SYSCR2.
1. Any necessary changes to the clock select bits (CKS2 to CKS0) and output select bit (OS)
should be made before the output enable bit (OE) is set to 1.
2. If the DTR value is H'00, the duty factor is 0% and PW output remains constant at 0. If the
DTR value is H'FA to H'FF, the duty factor is 100% and PW output remains constant at 1.
(For positive logic, 0 is Low and 1 is High. For negative logic, 0 is High and 1 is Low.)
3. PWM output and serial communication interface functions cannot be mixed among pins P94,
P93, and P92.
240
Section 13 Watchdog Timer
13.1 Overview
The H8/534 and H8/536 have an on-chip watchdog timer (WDT) module. This module can
monitor system operation by generating a signal that resets the entire chip if a system crash allows
the timer count to overflow.
When this watchdog function is not needed, the WDT module can be used as an interval timer. In
the interval timer mode, an interval timer interrupt is requested at each counter overflow.
The WDT module is also used in recovering from the software standby mode.
13.1.1 Features
The basic features of the watchdog timer module are summarized as follows:
• Selection of eight clock sources
• Selection of two modes: watchdog timer mode and interval timer mode
• Counter overflow generates a reset signal or interrupt request
Reset signal in watchdog timer mode; interval timer interrupt request in interval timer mode.
• External output of reset signal
The reset signal generated in watchdog timer mode resets the entire H8/534 or H8/536 chip.
Depending on a reset output enable bit, the reset signal can also be output from the RES pin to
reset devices controlled by the H8/534 or H8/536.
241
13.1.2 Block Diagram
Figure 13-1 is a block diagram of the watchdog timer.
Interrupt signal
Overflow
TCNT
TCSR
Internal data bus
Interval timer mode
Read/
write
control
Interrupt
control
Internal clock sources
ø/2
ø/32
RSTCSR
ø/64
Reset
Reset control
(internal, external)
ø/128
ø/256
ø/512
ø/2048
ø/4096
Clock
Clock
select
TCNT
TCSR
: Timer Counter
: Timer Control/Status Register
RSTCSR : Reset Control/Status Register
Figure 13-1 Block Diagram of Timer Counter
13.1.3 Register Configuration
Table 13-1 lists information on the watchdog timer registers.
Table 13-1 Register Configuration
Initial
Value
R/(W)* H'18
R/W H'00
R/(W)* H'3F
Addresses
Name
Abbreviation R/W
Write
Read
Timer control/status register
Timer counter
TCSR
TCNT
H'FEEC
H'FEEC
H'FF14
H'FEEC
H'FEED
H'FF15
Reset control/status register RSTCSR
* Software can write a 0 to clear the status flag bits, but cannot write 1.
242
13.2 Register Descriptions
13.2.1 Timer Counter TCNT—H'FEEC (Write), H'FEED (Read)
Bit
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
0
Initial value
Read/Write
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
The watchdog timer counter (TCNT) is a readable/writable* 8-bit up-counter. When the timer
enable bit (TME) in the timer control/status register (TCSR) is set to 1, the timer counter starts
counting pulses of an internal clock source selected by clock select bits 2 to 0 (CKS2 to CKS0) in
the TCSR. When the count overflows (changes from H'FF to H'00), an overflow flag (OVF) in
the TCSR is set to 1.
The watchdog timer counter is initialized to H'00 at a reset and when the TME bit is cleared to 0.
* TCNT is write-protected by a password. See section 13.2.4, “Notes on Register Access” for details.
13.2.2 Timer Control/Status Register (TCSR)—H'FEEC
Bit
7
OVF
0
6
WT/IT
0
5
4
—
1
3
—
1
2
CKS2
0
1
CKS1
0
0
CKS0
0
TME
0
Initial value
Read/Write
R/(W)*1
R/W
R/W
—
—
R/W
R/W
R/W
*2
The watchdog timer control/status register (TCSR) is an 8-bit readable/writable register that
selects the timer mode and clock source and performs other functions.
Bits 7 to 5 are initialized to 0 at a reset and in the standby modes. Bits 2 to 0 are initialized to 0 at
a reset, but retain their values in the standby modes.
*1 Software can write a 0 in bit 7 to clear the flag, but cannot set this bit to 1.
*2 The TCSR is write-protected by a password. See section 13.2.4, “Notes on Register Access”
for details.
243
Bit 7—Overflow Flag (OVF): This bit indicates that the watchdog timer count has overflowed.
Bit 7
OVF
Description
0
This bit is cleared to from 1 to 0 when the CPU reads (Initial value)
the OVF bit after it has been set to 1, then writes a 0 in this bit.
This bit is set to 1 when TCNT changes from H'FF to H'00.*
1
* OVF is not set in watchdog timer mode.
Bit 6—Timer Mode Select (WT/IT): This bit selects whether to operate in the watchdog timer
mode or interval timer mode.
Bit 6
WT/IT
Description
0
1
Interval timer mode (interval timer interrupt request)
Watchdog timer mode (reset)
(Initial value)
Bit 5—Timer Enable (TME): This bit enables or disables the timer.
Bit 5
TME
Description
0
1
TCNT is initialized to H'00 and stopped.
(Initial value)
TCNT runs. A reset or interrupt request is generated when the count overflows.
Bits 4 and 3—Reserved: These bits cannot be modified and are always read as 1.
Bits 2, 1, and 0—Clock Select (CKS2, CKS1, and CKS0): These bits select one of eight clock
sources obtained by dividing the system clock (ø).
The overflow interval listed in the table below is the time from when the watchdog timer counter
begins counting from H'00 until an overflow occurs.
244
Bit 2
Bit 1
Bit 0
Description
CKS2 CKS1 CKS0 Clock Source
Overflow Interval (ø = 10 MHz)
0
0
0
0
1
1
1
1
0
0
1
1
0
0
1
1
0
1
0
1
0
1
0
1
ø/2
51.2µs (Initial value)
819.2µs
ø/32
ø/64
1.6ms
ø/128
ø/256
ø/512
ø/2048
ø/4096
3.3ms
6.6ms
13.1ms
52.4ms
104.9ms
13.2.3 Reset Control/Status Register (RSTCSR)—H'FF14 (Write), H'FF15 (Read)
Bit
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
0
WRST RSTOE
Initial value
Read/Write
0
0
1
1
1
1
1
1
R/(W)*1
R/W
—
—
—
—
—
—
*2
The reset control/status register (RSTCSR) is an 8-bit readable/writable register that indicates
when a reset has been caused by a watchdog timer overflow, and controls external output of the
reset signal.
Bit 6 is not initialized by the reset caused by the watchdog timer overflow. It is initialized,
however, by a reset caused by input at the RES pin.
*1 Software can write a 0 in bit 7 to clear the flag, but cannot set this bit to 1.
*2 The RSTCSR is write-protected by a password. See section 13.2.4, “Notes on Register
Access” for details.
Bit 7—Watchdog Timer Reset (WRST): This bit indicates that a reset signal has been generated
by a watchdog timer overflow in the watchdog timer mode.
The reset signal generated by the overflow resets the entire H8/534 or H8/536 chip. In addition, if
the reset output enable (RSTOE) bit is set to 1, the reset signal (Low) is output at the RES pin to
reset devices connected to the H8/534 or H8/536.
The WRST bit can be cleared by software by writing a 0. It is also cleared when a reset signal
from an external device is received at the RES pin.
245
Bit 7
WRST
0
Description
This bit is cleared to 0 by a reset signal input from the RES pin,
(Initial state)
or when the CPU reads WRST after it has been set to 1, then writes a 0 in this bit.
This bit is set to 1 when the watchdog timer overflows in the watchdog timer mode and
an internal reset signal is generated.
1
Bit 6—Reset Output Enable (RSTOE): This bit selects whether the reset signal generated by a
watchdog timer overflow in the watchdog timer mode is output from the RES pin.
Bit 6
RSTOE Description
0
The reset signal generated by watchdog timer overflow is not
output to external devices.
(Initial state)
1
The reset signal generated by watchdog timer overflow is output to external devices.
Bits 5 to 0—Reserved: These bits cannot be modified and are always read as 1.
13.2.4 Notes on Register Access
The watchdog timer’s TCNT, TCSR, and RSTCSR registers differ from other registers in being
more difficult to write. The procedures for writing and reading these registers are given below.
Writing to TCNT and TCSR: These registers must be written by word access. Programs cannot
write to them by byte access. The word must contain the write data and a password.
The watchdog timer’s TCNT and TCSR registers both have the same write address. The write data
must be contained in the lower byte of the word written at this address. The upper byte must
contain H'5A (password for TCNT) or H'A5 (password for TCSR). See figure 13-2.
The result of the access depicted in figure 13-2 is to transfer the write data from the lower byte to
the TCNT or TCSR.
246
Write to TCNT
Address
15
15
8
8
7
7
0
0
H'FFEC
H'FFEC
H'5A
H'A5
Write data
Write data
Write to TCSR
Address
Figure 13-2 Writing to TCNT and TCSR
Writing to RSTCSR: The RSTCSR must be written by moving word data to address H'FF14. It
cannot be written by byte access.
The upper byte of the word must contain a password. Separate passwords are used for clearing the
WRST bit and for writing a 1 or 0 to the RSTOE bit.
To clear the WRST bit, the word written at address H'FF14 must contain the password H'A5 in the
upper byte and the data H'00 in the lower byte. This clears the WRST bit to 0.
To set or clear the RSTOE bit, the word written at address H'FF14 must contain the password
H'5A in the upper byte and the write data in the lower byte. The value of bit 6 in the lower byte is
written in the RSTOE bit.
These write operations are illustrated in figure 13-3.
To write 0 to the WRST bit
Address
15
15
8
8
7
7
0
0
H'FF14
H'A5
H'5A
H'00
To write to the RSTOE bit
Address
H'FF14
Write data
Figure 13-3 Writing to RSTCSR
247
Reading TCNT, TCSR, and RSTCSR: The read addresses are H'FEEC for TCSR, H'FEED for
TCNT, and H'FF15 for RSTCSR as indicated in table 13-2.
These three registers are read like other registers. Byte access instructions can be used.
Table 13-2 Read Addresses of TCNT and TCSR
Read Address
H'FFEC
Register
TCSR
H'FFED
TCNT
H'FF15
RSTCSR
13.3 Operation
13.3.1 Watchdog Timer Mode
The watchdog timer function begins operating when software sets the WT/IT and TME bits to 1 in
the TCSR.
Thereafter, software should periodically rewrite the contents of the timer counter (normally by
writing H'00) to prevent the count from overflowing. If a program crash allows the timer count to
overflow, the watchdog timer generates a reset as shown in figure 13-4.
The reset signal from the watchdog timer can also be output from the RES pin to reset external
devices. This reset output signal is a Low pulse with a duration of 132 ø clock periods. The reset
signal is output only if the RSTOE bit in the RSTCSR is set to 1.
The reset generated by the watchdog timer has the same vector as a reset generated by Low input at the
RES pin. Software should check the WRST bit in the RSTCSR to determine the source of the reset.
If a watchdog timer overflow occurs at the same time as a Low input at the RES pin, priority is
given to one type of reset or the other depending on the value of the RSTOE bit in the RSTCSR.
If the RSTOE bit is set to 1 when both types of reset occur simultaneously, the watchdog timer’s
reset signal takes precedence. The internal state of the H8/534 or H8/536 chip is reset and the RES
pin is held Low for 132 ø clock periods. If at the end of 520 ø clock periods there is still an
external Low input to the RES pin, the external reset takes effect, clearing the WRST and RSTOE
bits to 0. Note that if the external reset occurs before the watchdog timer overflows, it takes effect
immediately and clears the RSTOE bit.
If the RSTOE bit is cleared to 0 when both types of reset occur simultaneously, the reset signal
input from the RES pin takes precedence and the WRST bit is cleared to 0.
248
Watchdog timer overflow
H'FF
TCNT count
H'00
OVF = 1
Reset
Start
H'00 written
to TCNT
Start
H'00 written
to TCNT
Internal reset signal
*
External reset signal
(RES)
* The reset signals are output for 132 ø clock periods. The internal reset signal remains valid for 520 ø clock periods.
Figure 13-4 Operation in Watchdog Timer Mode
13.3.2 Interval Timer Mode
Interval timer operation begins when the WT/IT bit is cleared to 0 and the TME bit is set to 1.
In the interval timer mode, an interval timer interrupt request is generated each time the timer
count overflows. This function can be used to generate interrupts at regular intervals.
See figure 13-5.
H'FF
TCNT count
Time t
H'00
WT/IT = 0
TME = 1
*
*
*
*
*
* Interval timer interrupt request
Figure 13-5 Operation in Interval Timer Mode
249
13.3.3 Operation in Software Standby Mode
The watchdog timer has a special function in recovery from software standby mode. Specific
watchdog timer settings are required when the software standby mode is used.
Before Transition to the Software Standby Mode: The TME bit must be cleared to 0 to stop
the watchdog timer counter before a transition to the software standby mode. The chip cannot
enter the software standby mode while the TME bit is set to 1. Before entering the software
standby mode, software should also set the clock select bits (CKS2 to CKS0) to a value that
makes the timer overflow interval equal to or greater than the stabilization time of the clock
oscillator.
Recovery from the Software Standby Mode: Recovery from the software standby mode can be
triggered by an NMI request. In this case the recovery proceeds as follows:
When an NMI request signal is received, the clock oscillator starts running and the watchdog
timer starts counting at the rate selected by the clock select bits before the software standby mode
was entered. When the count overflows from H'FF to H'00, the ø clock is presumed to be stable
and usable, clock signals are supplied to all modules on the chip, the standby mode ends, and the
NMI interrupt-handling routine starts executing.
13.3.4 Setting of Overflow Flag
The OVF bit is set to 1 when the timer count overflows in the interval timer mode.
Simultaneously, the WDT module requests an interval timer interrupt. The timing is shown in
figure 13-6.
ø
TCNT
H'FF
H'00
Internal overflow
signal
OVF
Figure 13-6 Setting of OVF Bit
250
13.3.5 Setting of Watchdog Timer Reset (WRST) Bit
The WRST bit is valid when WT/IT = 1 and TME = 1.
The WRST bit is set to 1 when the timer count overflows. An internal reset signal is
simultaneously generated for the entire H8/534 or 536 chip. The timing is shown in figure 13-7.
ø
TCNT
H'FF
H'00
Overflow signal
WRST
Internal reset
signal
Figure 13-7 Setting of WRST Bit and Internal Reset Signal
251
13.4 Application Notes
Contention between TCNT Write and Increment: If a timer counter clock pulse is generated
during the T3 state of a write cycle to the timer counter, the write operation takes priority and the
timer counter is not incremented. See figure 13-8.
Write cycle: CPU writes to TCNT
T1
T2
T3
ø
Internal address bus
Internal write signal
TCNT clock pulse
TCNT address
TCNT
N
M
Counter write data
Figure 13-8 TCNT Write-Increment Contention
Changing the Clock Select Bits (CKS2 to CKS0): Software should stop the watchdog timer (by
clearing the TME bit to 0) before changing the value of the clock select bits. If the clock select
bits are modified while the watchdog timer is running, the timer count may be incremented
incorrectly.
Use of Reset Output: When the reset signal is output to external devices, special circuitry is
needed for input of the external reset signal.
The reset output is an NMOS open-drain output.
Figure 13-9 shows an example of a reset circuit.
252
4.7 kΩ
H8/534
H8/536
74LS05
External
reset
signal
RES
*
60 pF
2SC2618 or equivalent
100 kΩ
Reset switch
74HC14
1.0 kΩ
1.0 µF
* Maximum value of wiring capacitance
Figure 13-9 Reset Circuit (Example)
253
Section 14 Serial Communication Interface
14.1 Overview
The H8/534 and H8/536 have two serial communication interface channels (SCI1 and SCI2) for
transferring serial data to and from other chips. Each channel supports both synchronous and
asynchronous data transfer. Communication control functions are provided by eight internal
registers.
14.1.1 Features
The features of the on-chip serial communication interface are:
• Selection of asynchronous or synchronous mode
— Asynchronous mode
SCI1 and SCI2 can communicate with a UART (Universal Asynchronous
Receiver/Transmitter), ACIA (Asynchronous Communication Interface Adapter), or other
chip that employs standard asynchronous serial communication. Eight data formats are
available.
— Data length: 7 or 8 bits
— Stop bit length: 1 or 2 bits
— Parity: Even, odd, or none
— Error detection: Parity, overrun, and framing errors
— Synchronous mode
SCI1 and SCI2 can communicate with chips able to synchronize data transfers with clock
pulses.
— Data length: 8 bits
— Error detection: Overrun errors
• Full duplex communication
The transmitting and receiving sections are independent, so each channel can transmit and
receive simultaneously. Both the transmit and receive sections use double buffering, so
continuous data transfer is possible in either direction.
• Built-in baud rate generator
Any specified bit rate can be generated.
• Internal or external clock source
The baud rate generator can operate on an internal clock source, or an external clock signal
input at the SCK pin.
• Three interrupts
Transmit-end, receive-end, and receive-error interrupts are requested independently. The
transmit-end and receive-end interrupts can be served by the on-chip data transfer controller
(DTC), providing a convenient way to transfer data with minimal CPU programming.
255
14.1.2 Block Diagram
Figure 14-1 shows a block diagram of one serial communication interface channel.
Internal
data bus
Module data bus
Internal clock
source
ø
RDR
RSR
TDR
TSR
SSR
SCR
SMR
BRR
Baud-rate
generator
ø/4
RXD
TXD
ø/16
ø/64
Communication
control
Parity generator
Parity check
Clock
External clock
SCK
TXI
RXI
RDR: Receive Data Register
RSR: Receive Shift Register
TDR: Transmit Data Register
TSR: Transmit Shift Register
SSR: Serial Status Register
SCR: Serial Control Register
SMR: Serial Mode Register
BRR: Bit Rate Register
ERI
Interrupt signals
Figure 14-1 Block Diagram of Serial Communication Interface
256
14.1.3 Input and Output Pins
Table 14-1 lists the input and output pins used by the SCI module.
Table 14-1 SCI Input/Output Pins
Channel
Name
Abbreviation
SCK1
I/O
Function
1
Serial clock
Receive data
Transmit data
Serial clock
Receive data
Transmit data
Input/output
Input
Serial clock input and output.
Receive data input.
Transmit data output.
Serial clock input and output.
Receive data input.
Transmit data output.
RXD1
TXD1
Output
Input/output
Input
2
SCK2
RXD2
TXD2
Output
14.1.4 Register Configuration
Table 14-2 lists the SCI registers.
Table 14-2 SCI Registers
Channel Name
Abbreviation
RSR
R/W
—
Initial Value
—
Address
—
1
Receive shift register
Receive data register
Transmit shift register
Transmit data register
Serial mode register
Serial control register
Serial status register
Bit rate register
RDR
TSR
R
H'00
—
H'FEDD
—
—
TDR
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/(W)*
R/W
—
H'FF
H'04
H'0C
H'87
H'FF
—
H'FEDB
H'FED8
H'FEDA
H'FEDC
H'FED9
—
SMR
SCR
SSR
BRR
2
Receive shift register
Receive data register
Transmit shift register
Transmit data register
Serial mode register
Serial control register
Serial status register
Bit rate register
RSR
RDR
TSR
R
H'00
—
H'FEF5
—
—
TDR
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/(W)*
R/W
H'FF
H'04
H'0C
H'87
H'FF
H'FEF3
H'FEF0
H'FEF2
H'FEF4
H'FEF1
SMR
SCR
SSR
BRR
* Software can write a 0 to clear the status flag bits, but cannot write a 1.
257
14.2 Register Descriptions
14.2.1 Receive Shift Register (RSR)
Bit
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
0
Read/Write
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
The RSR receives incoming data bits. When one data character has been received, it is transferred
to the receive data register (RDR).
The CPU cannot read or write the RSR directly.
14.2.2 Receive Data Register (RDR)—H'FEDD, H'FEF5
Bit
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
0
Initial value
Read/Write
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
R
R
R
R
R
R
R
R
The RDR stores received data. As each character is received, it is transferred from the RSR to the
RDR, enabling the RSR to receive the next character. This double-buffering allows the SCI to
receive data continuously.
The CPU can read but not write the RDR. The RDR is initialized to H'00 at a reset and in the
standby modes.
14.2.3 Transmit Shift Register (TSR)
Bit
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
0
Read/Write
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
The TSR holds the character currently being transmitted. When transmission of this character is
completed, the next character is moved from the transmit data register (TDR) to the TSR and
transmission of that character begins. If the TDR does not contain valid data, the SCI stops
transmitting.
The CPU cannot read or write the TSR directly.
258
14.2.4 Transmit Data Register (TDR)—H'FEDB, H'FEF3
Bit
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
0
Initial value
Read/Write
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
The TDR is an 8-bit readable/writable register that holds the next character to be transmitted.
When the TSR becomes empty, the character written in the TDR is transferred to the TSR.
Continuous data transmission is possible by writing the next byte in the TDR while the current
byte is being transmitted from the TSR.
The TDR is initialized to H'FF at a reset and in the standby modes.
14.2.5 Serial Mode Register (SMR)—H'FED8, H'FEF0
Bit
7
C/A
0
6
5
PE
0
4
O/E
0
3
STOP
0
2
—
1
1
CKS1
0
0
CKS0
0
CHR
0
Initial value
Read/Write
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
—
R/W
R/W
The SMR is an 8-bit readable/writable register that controls the communication format and selects
the clock rate for the internal clock source. It is initialized to H'04 at a reset and in the standby
modes.
Bit 7—Communication Mode (C/A): This bit selects the asynchronous or synchronous
communication mode.
Bit 7
C/A
0
Description
Asynchronous communication.
(Initial value)
1
Communication is synchronized with the serial clock.
Bit 6—Character Length (CHR): This bit selects the character length in asynchronous mode. It
is ignored in synchronous mode.
Bit 6
CHR
Description
0
1
8 Bits per character.
7 Bits per character.
(Initial value)
259
Bit 5—Parity Enable (PE): This bit selects whether to add a parity bit in asynchronous mode. It
is ignored in synchronous mode.
Bit 5
PE
Description
0
Transmit: No parity bit is added.
Receive: Parity is not checked.
Transmit: A parity bit is added.
Receive: Parity is not checked.
(Initial value)
1
Bit 4—Parity Mode (O/E): In asynchronous mode, when parity is enabled (PE = 1), this bit
selects even or odd parity.
Even parity means that a parity bit is added to the data bits for each character to make the total
number of 1’s even. Odd parity means that the total number of 1’s is made odd.
This bit is ignored when PE = 0 and in the synchronous mode.
Bit 4
O/E
0
Description
Even parity.
Odd parity.
(Initial value)
1
Bit 3—Stop Bit Length (STOP): This bit selects the number of stop bits. It is ignored in the
synchronous mode.
Bit 3
STOP
Description
1 Stop bit.
0
1
(Initial value)
2 Stop bits.
Bit 2—Reserved: This bit cannot be modified and is always read as 1.
Bits 1 and 0—Clock Select 1 and 0 (CKS1 and CKS0): These bits select the internal clock
source when the baud rate generator is clocked from within the H8/534 or H8/536 chip.
Bit 1
Bit 0
CKS1
CKS0
Description
ø clock
0
0
1
1
0
1
0
1
(Initial value)
ø/4 clock
ø/16 clock
ø/64 clock
260
14.2.6 Serial Control Register (SCR)—H'FEDA, H'FEF2
Bit
7
TIE
0
6
RIE
0
5
TE
0
4
RE
0
3
—
1
2
—
1
1
CKE1
0
0
CKE0
0
Initial value
Read/Write
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
—
—
R/W
R/W
The SCR is an 8-bit readable/writable register that enables or disables various SCI functions. It is
initialized to H'0C at a reset and in the standby modes.
Bit 7—Transmit Interrupt Enable (TIE): This bit enables or disables the transmit-end interrupt
(TXI) requested when the transmit data register empty (TDRE) bit in the serial status register
(SSR) is set to 1.
Bit 7
TIE
0
Description
The transmit-end interrupt request (TXI) is disabled.
The transmit-end interrupt request (TXI) is enabled.
(Initial value)
1
Bit 6—Receive Interrupt Enable (RIE): This bit enables or disables the receive-end interrupt
(RXI) requested when the receive data register full (RDRF) bit in the serial status register (SSR) is
set to 1. It also enables and disables the receive-error interrupt (ERI) request.
Bit 6
RIE
Description
0
The receive-end interrupt (RXI) and receive-error interrupt (ERI)
requests are disabled.
(Initial value)
1
The receive-end interrupt (RXI) and receive-error interrupt (ERI) requests are enabled.
Bit 5—Transmit Enable (TE): This bit enables or disables the transmit function. When the
transmit function is enabled, the TXD pin is automatically used for output. When the transmit
function is disabled, the TXD pin can be used as a general-purpose I/O port.
Bit 5
TE
Description
0
The transmit function is disabled. The TXD pin can be
used as a general-purpose I/O port.
(Initial value)
1
The transmit function is enabled. The TXD pin is used for output.
261
Bit 4—Receive Enable (RE): This bit enables or disables the receive function. When the receive
function is enabled, the RXD pin is automatically used for input. When the receive function is
disabled, the RXD pin is available as a general-purpose I/O port.
Bit 4
RE
Description
0
The receive function is disabled. The RXD pin can be
used as a general-purpose I/O port.
(Initial value)
1
The receive function is enabled. The RXD pin is used for input.
Bits 3 and 2—Reserved: These bits cannot be modified and are always read as 1.
Bit 1—Clock Enable 1 (CKE1): This bit selects the internal or external clock source for the
baud rate generator. When the external clock source is selected, the SCK pin is automatically
used for input of the external clock signal.
Bit 1
CKE1
Description
0
1
Internal clock source.
(Initial value)
External clock source. (The SCK pin is used for input.)
Bit 0—Clock Enable 0 (CKE0): When an internal clock source is used in synchronous mode,
this bit enables or disables serial clock output at the SCK pin.
This bit is ignored when the external clock is selected, or when the asynchronous mode is
selected.
For further information on the communication format and clock source selection, see tables 14-5
and 14-6 in section 14.3, “Operation.”
Bit 0
CKE0
Description
0
The SCK pin is not used by the SCI (and is available as
a general-purpose I/O port).
(Initial value)
1
The SCK pin is used for serial clock output.
262
14.2.7 Serial Status Register (SSR)—H'FEDC, H'FEF4
Bit
7
TDRE
1
6
RDRF
0
5
ORER
0
4
FER
0
3
PER
0
2
—
1
1
—
1
0
—
1
Initial value
Read/Write
R/(W)* R/(W)* R/(W)* R/(W)* R/(W)*
—
—
—
* Software can write a 0 to clear the flags, but cannot write a 1 in these bits.
The SSR is an 8-bit register that indicates transmit and receive status. It is initialized to H'87 at a
reset and in the standby modes.
Bit 7—Transmit Data Register Empty (TDRE): This bit indicates when the TDR contents have
been transferred to the TSR and the next character can safely be written in the TDR.
Bit 7
TDRE
Description
0
This bit is cleared from 1 to 0 when:
1. The CPU reads the TDRE bit after it has been set to 1, then writes a 0 in this bit.
2. The data transfer controller (DTC) writes data in the TDR.
1
This bit is set to 1 at the following times:
(Initial value)
1. The chip is reset or enters a standby mode.
2. When TDR contents are transferred to the TSR.
3. When TDRE = 0 and the TE bit is cleared to 0.
Bit 6—Receive Data Register Full (RDRF): This bit indicates when one character has been
received and transferred to the RDR.
Bit 6
RDRF
Description
0
This bit is cleared from 1 to 0 when:
(Initial value)
1. The CPU reads the RDRF bit after it has been set to 1, then writes a 0 in this bit.
2. The data transfer controller (DTC) reads the RDR.
3. The chip is reset or enters a standby mode.
1
This bit is set to 1 when one character is received without error and transferred from the
RSR to the RDR.
263
Bit 5—Overrun Error (ORER): This bit indicates an overrun error during reception.
Bit 5
ORER
Description
0
This bit is cleared from 1 to 0 when:
(Initial value)
1. The CPU reads the ORER bit after it has been set to 1, then writes a 0 in this bit.
2. The chip is reset or enters a standby mode.
1
This bit is set to 1 if reception of the next character ends while the receive data register is
still full (RDRF = 1).
Bit 4—Framing Error (FER): This bit indicates a framing error during data reception in the
synchronous mode. It has no meaning in the asynchronous mode.
Bit 4
FER
Description
0
This bit is cleared to from 1 to 0 when:
(Initial value)
1. The CPU reads the FER bit after it has been set to 1, then writes a 0 in this bit.
2. The chip is reset or enters a standby mode.
1
This bit is set to 1 if a framing error occurs (stop bit = 0).
Bit 3—Parity Error (PER): This bit indicates a parity error during data reception in the
asynchronous mode, when a communication format with parity bits is used.
This bit has no meaning in the synchronous mode, or when a communication format without
parity bits is used.
Bit 3
PER
Description
0
This bit is cleared from 1 to 0 when:
(Initial value)
1. The CPU reads the PER bit after it has been set to 1, then writes a 0 in this bit.
2. The chip is reset or enters a standby mode.
1
This bit is set to 1 when a parity error occurs (the parity of the received data does not
match the parity selected by the bit in the SMR).
Bits 2 to 0—Reserved: These bits cannot be modified and are always read as 1.
264
14.2.8 Bit Rate Register (BRR)—H'FED9, H'FEF1
Bit
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
0
Initial value
Read/Write
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
The BRR is an 8-bit register that, together with the CKS1 and CKS0 bits in the SMR, determines
the bit rate output by the baud rate generator.
The BRR is initialized to H'FF (the slowest rate) at a reset and in the standby modes.
Tables 14-3 and 14-4 show examples of BRR (N) and CKS (n) settings for commonly used bit
rates.
Table 14-3 Examples of BRR Settings in Asynchronous Mode (1)
XTAL Frequency (MHz)
2
2.4576
4
4.194304
Error
Bit
Error
(%)
Error
Error
(%)
Rate
110
n
N
n
1
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
—
0
N
(%)
n
1
N
n
N
(%)
1
70
+0.03
86
255
127
63
31
15
7
+0.31
141 +0.03
103 +0.16
207 +0.16
103 +0.16
1
148
108
217
108
54
–0.04
+0.21
+0.21
+0.21
–0.70
+1.14
–2.48
—
150
0
207 +0.16
103 +0.16
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
—
0
1
1
300
0
0
0
600
0
51
25
12
—
—
—
—
—
+0.16
+0.16
+0.16
—
0
0
1200
2400
4800
9600
19200
31250
38400
0
0
51
25
12
—
—
1
+0.16
+0.16
+0.16
—
0
0
0
0
26
—
—
—
—
—
0
0
13
—
3
—
—
0
—
—
—
—
—
—
1
—
—
—
—
—
0
0
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
265
Table 14-3 Examples of BRR Settings in Asynchronous Mode (2)
XTAL Frequency (MHz)
4.9152
Error
(%)
174 –0.26
6
7.3728
Error
8
Bit
Error
(%)
Error
(%)
Rate
110
n
1
1
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
—
0
N
n
2
N
n
2
1
1
0
0
0
0
0
0
—
0
N
(%)
n
2
N
52
+0.50
+0.16
+0.16
+0.16
+0.16
+0.16
–2.34
—
64
191
95
191
95
47
23
11
5
+0.70
70
+0.03
+0.16
+0.16
+0.16
+0.16
+0.16
+0.16
+0.16
—
150
127
255
127
63
31
15
7
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
—
0
1
155
77
155
77
38
19
—
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
—
0
1
207
103
207
103
51
300
1
1
600
0
0
1200
2400
4800
9600
19200
31250
38400
0
0
0
0
0
0
25
—
—
0
0
12
3
—
—
—
0
—
—
2
0
—
2
3
0
1
—
—
—
—
—
—
Table 14-3 Examples of BRR Settings in Asynchronous Mode (3)
XTAL Frequency (MHz)
9.8304
Error
10
12
12.288
Error
Bit
Error
(%)
Error
(%)
Rate
110
n
2
1
1
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
N
(%)
n
2
2
1
1
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
N
n
2
N
n
2
2
1
1
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
N
(%)
86
255
127
255
127
63
31
15
7
+0.31
88
64
–0.25
+0.16
+0.16
+0.16
+0.16
+0.16
–1.36
+1.73
+1.73
0
106 –0.44
108
79
159
79
159
79
39
19
9
+0.08
150
0
2
77
0
0
0
0
300
0
129
64
129
64
32
15
7
1
155
77
0
600
0
1
0
1200
2400
4800
9600
19200
31250
38400
0
0
155 +0.16
0
0
0
77
38
19
—
5
+0.16
+0.16
–2.34
—
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
—
0
0
4
–1.70
0
4
0
5
+2.40
0
3
3
+1.73
—
—
—
4
266
Table 14-3 Examples of BRR Settings in Asynchronous Mode (4)
XTAL Frequency (MHz)
14.7456
Error
(%)
130 –0.07
16
19.6608
Error
(%)
174 –0.26
20
Bit
Error
(%)
Error
(%)
Rate
110
n
2
2
1
1
0
0
0
0
0
—
0
N
n
2
2
1
1
0
0
0
0
0
0
—
N
n
2
2
1
1
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
N
n
3
2
2
1
1
0
0
0
0
0
0
N
141
103
207
103
207
103
51
+0.03
+0.16
+0.16
+0.16
+0.16
+0.16
+0.16
+0.16
+0.16
0
43
+0.88
+0.16
+0.16
+0.16
+0.16
+0.16
+0.16
–1.36
+1.73
0
150
95
191
95
191
95
47
23
11
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
—
0
127
255
127
255
127
63
0
129
64
129
64
129
64
32
15
9
300
0
600
0
1200
2400
4800
9600
19200
31250
38400
0
0
0
25
31
0
12
15
0
—
7
9
–1.70
0
5
—
—
7
7
+1.73
XTAL Frequency (MHz)
24.576 28
24
29.4912
32
Bit
Error
(%)
Error
(%)
Error
(%)
Error
(%)
Error
Rate
110
n
2
2
2
1
1
0
0
0
0
0
0
N
n
2
2
2
1
1
0
0
0
0
0
0
N
n
2
2
2
1
1
0
0
0
0
0
0
N
n
3
2
2
1
1
0
0
0
0
0
0
N
n
3
2
2
1
1
0
0
0
0
0
0
N
(%)
212 0.03
155 0.16
217 0.08
159 0.00
248 –0.17
181 0.16
64
0.70
70
0.03
150
191 0.00
95 0.00
191 0.00
95 0.00
191 0.00
207 0.16
103 0.16
207 0.16
103 0.16
207 0.16
103 0.16
300
77
155 0.16
77 0.16
155 0.16
0.16
79
159 0.00
79 0.00
159 0.00
0.00
90
181 0.16
90 0.16
181 0.16
0.16
600
1200
2400
4800
9600
19200
31250
38400
77
38
19
11
9
0.16
79
39
19
11
9
0.00
0.00
0.00
2.40
0.00
90
45
22
13
10
0.16
95
47
23
14
11
0.00
0.00
0.00
–1.70
0.00
0.16
–0.93
–0.93
0.00
51
25
15
12
0.16
0.16
0.00
0.16
–2.34
0.00
–2.34
3.57
Note: If possible, select a setting such that the error is 1% or less.
6
2n
B = OSC× 10 /[64 × 2
× (N + 1)]
B : Bit rate
N : BRR value (0 ≤ N ≤ 255)
OSC : Crystal oscillator frequency in MHz
n : Internal clock source (0, 1, 2, or 3)
267
The meaning of n is given by the table below:
n
0
1
2
3
CKS1
CKS0
Clock
ø
0
0
1
1
0
1
0
1
ø/4
ø/16
ø/64
The error in asynchronous mode is calculated as follows:
6
OSC × 10
{
–1 × 100}
Error (%) =
2n
B × 64× 2 ×(N + 1)
268
Table 14-4 Examples of BRR Settings in Synchronous Mode
XTAL Frequency (MHz)
Bit
2
4
8
10
16
20
32
Rate
100
250
500
1k
n
—
1
N
n
—
2
1
1
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
N
n
—
2
2
1
1
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
N
n
N
n
—
3
2
2
1
1
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
N
n
N
n
—
3
N
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
1
—
—
—
—
—
—
1
—
—
—
—
249
124
249
99
49
24
9
—
249
124
249
99
49
24
9
124
249
124
199
99
49
19
9
249
124
249
99
199
99
39
19
9
—
124
249
124
199
99
199
79
39
19
7
249
124
249
99
199
99
159
79
39
15
7
1
—
3
0
—
2
2.5k
5k
0
124
249
124
49
24
—
2
0
0
1
1
10k
25k
50k
100k
250k
500k
1M
0
0
0
1
0
0
0
0
0
4
0
0
0
—
0
—
4
—
0
0
0
0*
1
3
4
0
0
0*
1
—
—
—
3
0
4
0
0*
—
1
—
0
—
0*
0
3
2.5M
—
—
Notes: Blank: No setting is available.
—:
A setting is available, but the bit rate is inaccurate.
Continuous transfer is not possible.
* :
2n
B = OSC/[8 × 2
× (N + 1)]
B : Bit rate
N : BRR value (0 ≤ N ≤ 255)
OSC : Crystal oscillator frequency in MHz
n : Internal clock source (0, 1, 2, or 3)
The meaning of n is given by the table below:
n
0
1
2
3
CKS1
CKS0
Clock
ø
0
0
1
1
0
1
0
1
ø/4
ø/16
ø/64
269
14.3 Operation
14.3.1 Overview
Each serial communication interface channel supports serial data transfer in both asynchronous
and synchronous modes.
The communication format depends on settings in the SMR as indicated in table 14-5. The clock
source and usage of the SCK pin depend on settings in the SMR and SCR as indicated in table 14-6.
Table 14-5 Communication Formats Used by SCI
SMR
CHR PE
Stop Bit
C/A
STOP Mode
Format
Parity
Length
0
0
0
0
1
0
1
0
1
0
1
—
Asynchronous 8-Bit data
None
1
2
1
2
1
2
1
2
—
1
Yes
None
Yes
—
1
0
7-Bit data
1
1
—
—
Synchronous
8-Bit data
Table 14-6 SCI Clock Source Selection
SMR
C/A
SCR
Clock
CKE1 CKE0
Source
Internal
SCK Pin
0
0
1
0
1
0
1
0
1
0
1
0
1
I/O port*
(Async
mode)
Clock output at same frequency as baud rate
Clock input at 16 times the baud rate frequency
External
Internal
External
1
Serial clock output
Serial clock input
(Sync
mode)
* Cannot be used by the SCI.
Transmitting and receiving operations in the two modes are described next.
270
14.3.2 Asynchronous Mode
In asynchronous mode, each character is individually synchronized by framing it with a start bit
and stop bit.
Full duplex data transfer is possible because the SCI has independent transmit and receive
sections. Double buffering in both sections enables the SCI to be programmed for continuous data
transfer.
Figure 14-2 shows the general format of one character sent or received in the asynchronous mode.
The communication channel is normally held in the mark state (High). Character transmission or
reception starts with a transition to the space state (Low).
The first bit transmitted or received is the start bit (Low). It is followed by the data bits, in which
the least significant bit (LSB) comes first. The data bits are followed by the parity bit, if present,
then the stop bit or bits (High) confirming the end of the frame.
In receiving, the SCI synchronizes on the falling edge of the start bit, and samples each bit at the
center of bit (at the 8th cycle of the internal serial clock, which runs at 16 times the bit rate).
Idle state
Start bit
1 bit
D0
D1
Dn
Parity bit
0 or 1 bit
Stop bit
7 or 8 bits
1 or 2 bits
One character
Figure 14-2 Data Format in Asynchronous Mode
1. Data Format: Table 14-7 lists the data formats that can be sent and received in asynchronous
mode. Eight formats can be selected by bits in the SMR.
271
Table 14-7 Data Formats in Asynchronous Mode
SMR Bits
CHR PE STOP
Data Format
START
START
START
START
START
START
START
START
0
0
0
0
1
1
1
1
0
0
1
1
0
0
1
1
0
1
0
1
0
1
0
1
8-Bit data
8-Bit data
8-Bit data
8-Bit data
7-Bit data
7-Bit data
7-Bit data
7-Bit data
STOP
STOP
P
STOP
STOP
STOP
P
STOP
STOP
STOP
P
STOP
STOP
STOP
P
STOP
Note:
START: Start bit
STOP: Stop bit
P: Parity bit
2. Clock: In the asynchronous mode it is possible to select either an internal clock created by the
on-chip baud rate generator, or an external clock input at the SCK pin. Refer to table 14-6.
If an external clock is input at the SCK pin, its frequency should be 16 times the desired baud
rate.
If the internal clock provided by the on-chip baud rate generator is selected and the SCK pin is
used for clock output, the output clock frequency is equal to the baud rate, and the clock pulse
rises at the center of the transmit data bits. Figure 14-3 shows the phase relationship between
the output clock and transmit data.
Output clock
Transmit data
Start bit
D0
D1
D2
Figure 14-3 Phase Relationship between Clock Output and Transmit Data
272
3. Data Transmission and Reception
• SCI Initialization: Before data can be transmitted or received, the SCI must be initialized
by software. To initialize the SCI, software must clear the TE and RE bits to 0, then execute
the following procedure.
(1) Set the desired communication format in the SMR.
(2) Write the value corresponding to the desired bit rate in the BRR. (This step is not
necessary if an external clock is used.)
(3) Select the clock and enable desired interrupts in the SCR.
(4) Set the TE and/or RE bit in the SCR to 1.
The TE and RE bits must both be cleared to 0 whenever the operating mode or data format is
changed.
After changing the operating mode or data format, before setting the TE and RE bits to 1
software must wait for at least the transfer time for 1 bit at the selected baud rate, to make sure
the SCI is initialized. If an external clock is used, the clock must not be stopped.
When clearing the TDRE bit during data transmission, to assure transfer of the correct data, do
not clear the TDRE bit until after writing data in the TDR. Similarly, in receiving data, do not
clear the RDRF bit until after reading data from the RDR.
• Data Transmission: The procedure for transmitting data is as follows.
(1) Set up the desired transmitting conditions in the SMR, SCR, and BRR.
(2) Set the TE bit in the SCR to 1.
The TXD pin will automatically be switched to output and one frame* of all 1’s will be
transmitted, after which the SCI is ready to transmit data.
(3) Check that the TDRE bit is set to 1, then write the first byte of transmit data in the TDR.
Next clear the TDRE bit to 0.
* A frame is the data for one character, including the start bit and stop bit(s).
273
(4) The first byte of transmit data is transferred from the TDR to the TSR and sent in the
designated format as follows.
i) Start bit (one 0 bit)
ii) Transmit data (seven or eight bits, starting from bit 0)
iii) Parity bit (odd or even parity bit, or no parity bit)
iv) Stop bit (one or two consecutive 1 bits)
(5) Transfer of the transmit data from the TDR to the TSR makes the TDR empty, so the
TDRE bit is set to 1.
If the TIE bit is set to 1, a transmit-end interrupt (TXI) is requested.
When the transmit function is enabled but the TDR is empty (TDRE = 1), the output at the
TXD pin is held at 1 until the TDRE bit is cleared to 0.
• Data Reception: The procedure for receiving data is as follows.
(1) Set up the desired receiving conditions in the SMR, SCR, and BRR.
(2) Set the RE bit in the SCR to 1.
The RXD pin will automatically be switched to input and the SCI is ready to receive data.
(3) The SCI synchronizes with the incoming data by detecting the start bit, and places the
received bits in the RSR. At the end of the data, the SCI checks that the stop bit is 1.
(4) When a complete frame has been received, the SCI transfers the received data to the RDR
so that it can be read. If the character length is 7 bits, the most significant bit of the RDR
is cleared to 0. At the same time, the SCI sets the RDRF bit in the SSR to 1. If the RIE bit
is set to 1, a receive-end interrupt (RXI) is requested.
(5) The RDRF bit is cleared to 0 when the CPU reads the SSR, then writes a 0 in the RDRF
bit, or when the RDR is read by the data transfer controller (DTC). The RDR is then ready
to receive the next character from the RSR.
When a frame is not received correctly, a receive error occurs. There are three types of receive
errors, listed in table 14-8.
If a receive error occurs, the RDRF bit in the SSR is not set to 1. The corresponding error flag
is set to 1 instead. If the RIE bit in the SCR is set to 1, a receive-error interrupt (ERI) is
requested.
274
When a framing or parity error occurs, the RSR contents are transferred to the RDR. If an
overrun error occurs, however, the RSR contents are not transferred to the RDR.
If multiple receive errors occur simultaneously, all the corresponding error flags are set to 1.
To clear a receive-error flag (ORER, FER, or PER), software must read the SSR, then write a 0
in the flag bit.
Table 14-8 Receive Errors
Name
Abbreviation Description
Overrun error ORER
Reception of the next frame ends while the RDRF bit is still
set to 1.
The RSR contents are not transferred to the RDR.
A stop bit is 0.
Framing error FER
The RSR contents are transferred to the RDR.
The parity of a frame does not match the value selected by the bit
in the SMR.
Parity error
PER
The RSR contents are transferred to the RDR.
14.3.3 Synchronous Mode
The synchronous mode is suited for high-speed, continuous data transfer. Each bit of data is
synchronized with a serial clock pulse.
Continuous data transfer is enabled by the double buffering employed in both the transmit and
receive sections of the SCI. Full duplex communication is possible because the transmit and
receive sections are independent.
1. Data Format: Figure 14-4 shows the communication format used in the synchronous mode.
The data length is 8 bits for both the transmit and receive directions. The least significant bit
(LSB) is sent and received first. Each bit of transmit data is output from the falling edge of the
serial clock pulse to the next falling edge. Received bits are latched on the rising edge of the
serial clock pulse.
275
Transmission direction
Serial clock
Data
Bit 0
Bit 1
Bit 2
Bit 3
Bit 4
Bit 5
Bit 6
Bit 7
Don’t-care
Don’t-care
Figure 14-4 Data Format in Synchronous Mode
2. Clock: Either the internal serial clock created by the on-chip baud rate generator or an external
clock input at the SCK pin can be selected in the synchronous mode. See table 14-6 for details.
3. Data Transmission and Reception
• SCI Initialization: Before data can be transmitted or received, the SCI must be initialized
by software. To initialize the SCI, software must clear the TE and RE bits to 0 to disable
both the transmit and receive functions, then execute the following procedure.
(1) Write the value corresponding to the desired bit rate in the BRR. (This step is not
necessary if an external clock is used.)
(2) Select the clock in the SCR.
(3) Select the synchronous mode in the SMR*.
(4) Set the TE and/or RE bit to 1, and enable desired interrupts in the SCR.
The TE and RE bits must both be cleared to 0 whenever the operating mode or data format is
changed. After changing the operating mode or data format, before setting the TE and RE bits
to 1 software must wait for at least 1 bit transfer time at the selected communication speed, to
make sure the SCI is initialized.
* The SCK pin is used for input or output according to the C/A bit in the serial mode register
(SMR) and the CKE0 and CKE1 bits in the serial control register (SCR). (See table 14-6.)
To prevent unwanted output at the SCK pin, pay attention to the order in which you set
SMR and SCR.
276
When clearing the TDRE bit during data transmission, to assure correct data transfer, do not
clear the TDRE bit until after writing data in the TDR. Similarly, in receiving data, do not
clear the RDRF bit until after reading data from the RDR.
• Data Transmission: The procedure for transmitting data is as follows.
(1) Set up the desired transmitting conditions in the SMR, BRR, and SCR.
(2) Set the TE bit in the SCR to 1.
The TXD pin will automatically be switched to output, after which the SCI is ready to
transmit data.
(3) Check that the TDRE bit is set to 1, then write the first byte of transmit data in the TDR.
Next clear the TDRE bit to 0.
(4) The first byte of transmit data is transferred from the TDR to the TSR and sent, each bit
synchronized with a clock pulse. Bit 0 is sent first.
Transfer of the transmit data from the TDR to the TSR makes the TDR empty, so the
TDRE bit is set to 1. If the TIE bit is set to 1, a transmit-end interrupt (TXI) is
requested.
The TDR and TSR function as a double buffer. Continuous data transmission can be achieved
by writing the next transmit data in the TDR and clearing the TDRE bit to 0 while the SCI is
transmitting the current data from the TSR.
If an internal clock source is selected, after transferring the transmit data from the TDR to the
TSR, while transmitting the data from the TSR the SCI also outputs a serial clock signal at the
SCK pin. When all data bits in the TSR have been transmitted, if the TDR is empty (TDRE =
1), serial clock output is suspended until the next data byte is written in the TDR and the TDRE
bit is cleared to 0. During this interval the TXD pin is held at the value of the last bit
transmitted.
If the external clock source is selected, data transmission is synchronized with the clock signal
input at the SCK pin. When all data bits in the TSR have been transmitted, if the TDR is
empty (TDRE = 1) but external clock pulses continue to arrive, the TXD output remains high.
• Data Reception: The procedure for receiving data is as follows.
(1) Set up the desired receiving conditions in the SMR, BRR, and SCR.
277
(2) Set the RE bit in the SCR to 1.
The RXD pin will automatically be switched to input and the SCI is ready to receive
data.
(3) Incoming data bits are latched in the RSR on eight clock pulses.
When 8 bits of data have been received, the SCI sets the RDRF bit in the SSR to 1. If
the RIE bit is set to 1, a receive-end interrupt (RXI) is requested.
(4) The SCI transfers the received data byte to the RDR so that it can be read.
The RDRF bit is cleared when the program reads the RDRF bit in the SSR, then writes a
0 in the RDRF bit, or when the data transfer controller (DTC) reads the RDR.
The RDR and RSR function as a double buffer. Data can be received continuously by reading
each byte of data from the RDR and clearing the RDRF bit to 0 before the last bit of the next
byte is received.
In general, an external clock source should be used for receiving data.
If an internal clock source is selected, the SCI starts receiving data as soon as the RE bit is set
to 1. The serial clock is also output at the SCK pin. The SCI continues receiving until the RE
bit is cleared to 0.
If the last bit of the next data byte is received while the RDRF bit is still set to 1, an overrun
error occurs and the ORER bit is set to 1. If the RIE bit is set to 1, a receive-error interrupt
(ERI) is requested. The data received in the RSR are not transferred to the RDR when an
overrun error occurs.
After an overrun error, reception of the next data is enabled when the ORER bit is cleared to 0.
• Simultaneous Transmit and Receive: The procedure for transmitting and receiving
simultaneously is as follows:
(1) Set up the desired communication conditions in the SMR, BRR, and SCR.
(2) Set the TE and RE bits in the SCR to 1.
The TXD and RXD pins are automatically switched to output and input, respectively,
and the SCI is ready to transmit and receive data.
(3) Data transmitting and receiving start when the TDRE bit in the SSR is cleared to 0.
(4) Data are sent and received in synchronization with eight clock pulses.
278
(5) First, the transmit data are transferred from the TDR to the TSR. This makes the TDR
empty, so the TDRE bit is set to 1. If the TIE bit is set to 1, a transmit-end interrupt
(TXI) is requested.
If continuous data transmission is desired, the CPU must read the TDRE bit in the SSR,
write the next transmit data in the TDR, then clear the TDRE bit to 0. Alternatively, the
DTC can write the next transmit data in the TDR, in which case the TDRE bit is cleared
automatically.
If the TDRE bit is not cleared to 0 by the time the SCI finishes sending the current byte
from the TSR, the TXD pin continues to output the last bit in the TSR.
(6) In the receiving section, when 8 bits of data have been received they are transferred
from the RSR to the RDR and the RDRF bit in the SSR is set to 1. If the RIE bit is set
to 1, a receive-end interrupt (RXI) is requested.
(7) To clear the RDRF bit software read the RDRF bit in the SSR, read the data in the RDR,
then write a 0 in the RDRF bit. Alternatively, the DTC can read the RDR, in which case
the RDRF bit is cleared automatically.
For continuous data reception, the RDRF bit must be cleared to 0 before the last bit of
the next byte of data is received.
If the last bit of the next byte is received while the RDRF bit is still set to 1, an overrun error
occurs. The error is handled as described under “Data Reception” above.
14.4 CPU Interrupts and DTC Interrupts
The SCI can request three types of interrupts: transmit-end (TXI), receive-end (RXI), and
receive-error (ERI). Interrupt requests are enabled or disabled by the TIE and RIE bits in the
SCR. Independent signals are sent to the interrupt controller for each type of interrupt. The
transmit-end and receive-end interrupt request signals are obtained from the TDRE and RDRF
flags. The receive-error interrupt request signal is the logical OR of the three error flags: overrun
error (ORER), framing error (FER), and parity error (PER). Table 14-9 lists information about
these interrupts.
279
Table 14-9 SCI Interrupts
DTC Service
Available?
No
Interrupt
Description
Priority
ERI
Receive-error interrupt, requested when
ORER, FER, or PER is set.
Receive-end interrupt, requested when
RDRF is set.
High
RXI
TXI
Yes
Yes
Transmit-end interrupt, requested when
TDRE is set.
Low
The TXI and RXI interrupts can be served by the data transfer controller (DTC) to have a data
transfer performed. When the DTC serves one of these interrupts, it clears the TDRE or RDRF bit
to 0 under the following conditions, which differ between the two bits.
When invoked by a TXI request, if the DTC writes to the TDR, it automatically clears the TDRE
bit to 0. When invoked by an RXI request, if the DTC reads from the RDR, it automatically
clears the RDRF bit to 0.
See section 6, “Data Transfer Controller” for further information on the DTC.
14.5 Application Notes
Application programmers should note the following features of the SCI.
1. TDR Write: The TDRE bit in the SSR is simply a flag that indicates that the TDR contents
have been transferred to the TSR. The TDR contents can be rewritten regardless of the TDRE
value. If a new byte is written in the TDR while the TDRE bit is 0, before the old TDR
contents have been moved into the TSR, the old byte will be lost. Normally, software should
check that the TDRE bit is set to 1 before writing to the TDR.
2. Multiple Receive Errors: Table 14-10 lists the values of flag bits in the SSR when multiple
receive errors occur, and indicates whether the RSR contents are transferred to the RDR.
280
Table 14-10 SSR Bit States and Data Transfer When Multiple Receive Errors Occur
SSR Bits
Receive Error
RDRF
1*1
0
ORER
FER
0
PER
RSR to RDR*2
Overrun error
1
0
0
1
1
0
1
0
0
1
0
1
1
1
No
Framing error
1
Yes
Yes
No
Parity error
0
0
Overrun + framing errors
Overrun + parity errors
Framing + parity errors
Overrun + framing + parity errors
1*1
1*1
0
1
0
No
1
Yes
No
1*1
1
Notes: *1 Set to 1 before the overrun error occurs.
*2 Yes: The RSR contents are transferred to the RDR.
No: The RSR contents are not transferred to the RDR.
3. Line Break Detection: When the RXD pin receives a continuous stream of 0’s in the
asynchronous mode (line-break state), a framing error occurs because the SCI detects a 0 stop
bit. The value H'00 is transferred from the RSR to the RDR. Software can detect the line-
break state as a framing error accompanied by H'00 data in the RDR.
The SCI continues to receive data, so if the FER bit is cleared to 0 another framing error will
occur.
4. Sampling Timing and Receive Margin in Asynchronous Mode: The serial clock used by
the SCI in asynchronous mode runs at 16 times the bit rate. The falling edge of the start bit is
detected by sampling the RXD input on the falling edge of this clock. After the start bit is
detected, each bit of receive data in the frame (including the start bit, parity bit, and stop bit or
bits) is sampled on the rising edge of the serial clock pulse at the center of the bit.
See figure 14-5.
It follows that the receive margin can be calculated as in equation (1).
When the absolute frequency deviation of the clock signal is 0 and the clock duty factor is 0.5,
data can theoretically be received with distortion up to the margin given by equation (2). This
is a theoretical limit, however. In practice, system designers should allow a margin of 20% to
30%.
281
0
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10 11 12 13 14 15 16
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10 11 12 13 14 15 16
1
2
3
4 5
Basic clock
–7.5 pulses
+7.5 pulses
Receive data
D0
D1
Start bit
Sync sampling
Data sampling
Figure 14-5 Sampling Timing (Asynchronous Mode)
M = {(0.5 – 1/2N) – (D – 0.5)/N – (L – 0.5)F} × 100 [%] (1)
M: Receive margin
N: Ratio of basic clock to bit rate (16)
D: Duty factor of clock—ratio of High pulse width to Low width (0.5 to 1.0)
L:
F:
Frame length (9 to 12)
Absolute clock frequency deviation
When D = 0.5 and F= 0
M = (0.5 –1/2 × 16) × 100 [%] = 46.875%
(2)
5. Note on Transmitting in Synchronous Mode: When setting up serial communication
interface 1 or 2 to transmit in synchronous mode, make sure the ORER bit is cleared to 0.
Transmit operation will fail to start if the ORER bit is set to 1. The same is true in
simultaneous transmitting and receiving.
282
Section 15 A/D Converter
15.1 Overview
The H8/534 and H8/536 have an analog-to-digital converter module which can be programmed
for input of analog signal on up to eight channels. A/D conversion is performed by the successive
approximations method with 10-bit resolution.
15.1.1 Features
The features of the on-chip A/D module are:
• Eight analog input channels
• Sample and hold circuit
• 10-Bit resolution
• Rapid conversion
Conversion time is 13.8 µs per channel (at ø = 10 MHz)
• Single and scan modes
— Single mode: A/D conversion is performed once.
— Scan mode: A/D conversion is performed in a repeated cycle on one to four channels.
• Four 16-bit data registers
These registers store A/D conversion results for up to four channels.
• A/D conversion can be started by external trigger input.
• A CPU interrupt (ADI) can be requested at the completion of each A/D conversion cycle.
This interrupt can also be served by the on-chip data transfer controller (DTC), providing a
convenient way to move results into memory.
283
15.1.2 Block Diagram
Figure 15-1 shows a block diagram of A/D converter.
Internal
data bus
Module data bus
AVCC
10-Bit D/A
AVSS
AN0
AN1
AN2
AN3
AN4
AN5
+
–
ø/8
Control circuit
ø/16
ADTRG
External
Sample & hold
circuit
trigger input
AN6
AN7
ADI
Interrupt signal
ADDRA: A/D Data Register A
ADDRB: A/D Data Register B
ADDRC: A/D Data Register C
ADDRD: A/D Data Register D
ADCSR: A/D Control/Status Register
ADCR: A/D Control Register
Figure 15-1 Block Diagram of A/D Converter
284
15.1.3 Input Pins
Table 15-1 lists the input pins used by the A/D converter module.
The eight analog input pins are divided into two groups, consisting of analog inputs 0 to 3 (AN0 to
AN3) and analog inputs 4 to 7 (AN4 to AN7), respectively.
Table 15-1 A/D Input Pins
Name
Abbreviation I/O
Function
Analog supply
voltage
AVCC
Input
Power supply and reference voltage for the
analog circuits.
Analog ground
Analog input 0
Analog input 1
Analog input 2
Analog input 3
Analog input 4
Analog input 5
Analog input 6
Analog input 7
A/D external
trigger input
AVSS
AN0
Input
Input
Input
Input
Input
Input
Input
Input
Input
Input
Ground and reference voltage for the analog circuits.
Analog input pins, group 0
AN1
AN2
AN3
AN4
Analog input pins, group 1
External trigger input
AN5
AN6
AN7
ADTRG
15.1.4 Register Configuration
Table 15-2 lists the registers of the A/D converter module.
Table 15-2 A/D Registers
Name
Abbreviation
ADDRA (H)
ADDRA (L)
ADDRB (H)
ADDRB (L)
ADDRC (H)
ADDRC (L)
ADDRD (H)
ADDRD (L)
ADCSR
R/W
R
Initial Value
H'00
Address
H'FEE0
H'FEE1
H'FEE2
H'FEE3
H'FEE4
H'FEE5
H'FEE6
H'FEE7
H'FEE8
H'FEE9
A/D data register A (High)
A/D data register A (Low)
A/D data register B (High)
A/D data register B (Low)
A/D data register C (High)
A/D data register C (Low)
A/D data register D (High)
A/D data register D (Low)
A/D control/status register
A/D control register
R
H'00
R
H'00
R
H'00
R
H'00
R
H'00
R
H'00
R
H'00
R/(W)* H'00
R/W H'7F
ADCR
* Software can write 0 to clear the status flag bits but cannot write 1.
285
15.2 Register Descriptions
15.2.1 A/D Data Registers (ADDR)—H'FEE0 to H'FEE7
Bit
7
AD9
0
6
AD8
0
5
AD7
0
4
AD6
0
3
AD5
0
2
AD4
0
1
0
AD2
0
ADDRn H
Initial value
Read/Write
AD3
0
R
R
R
R
R
R
R
R
(n = A to D)
Bit
7
AD1
0
6
AD0
0
5
—
0
4
—
0
3
—
0
2
—
0
1
0
—
0
ADDRn H
Initial value
Read/Write
—
0
R
R
R
R
R
R
R
R
(n = A to D)
The four A/D data registers (ADDRA to ADDRD) are 16-bit read-only registers that store the
results of A/D conversion.
Each result consist of 10 bits. The first 8 bits are stored in the upper byte of the data register
corresponding to the selected channel. The last two bits are stored in the lower data register byte.
Each data register is assigned to two analog input channels as indicated in table 15-3.
The A/D data registers are always readable by the CPU. The upper byte can be read directly. The
lower byte is read via a temporary register. See section 15-3, “CPU Interface” for details.
The unused bits (bits 5 to 0) of the lower data register byte are always read as 0.
The A/D data registers are initialized to H'0000 at a reset and in the standby modes.
Table 15-3 Assignment of Data Registers to Analog Input Channels
Analog Input Channel
Group 0
AN0
Group 1
AN4
A/D Data Register
ADDRA
AN1
AN5
ADDRB
AN2
AN6
ADDRC
AN3
AN7
ADDRD
286
15.2.2 A/D Control/Status Register (ADCSR)—H'FEE8
Bit
7
ADF
0
6
ADIE
0
5
ADST
0
4
SCAN
0
3
2
1
0
CKS
0
CH2
0
CH1
0
CH0
0
Initial value
Read/Write
R/(W)*
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
* Software can write a 0 in bit 7 to clear the flag, but cannot write a 1 in this bit.
The A/D control/status register (ADCSR) is an 8-bit readable/writable register that controls the
operation of the A/D converter module.
The ADCSR is initialized to H'00 at a reset and in the standby modes.
Bit 7—A/D End Flag (ADF): This status flag indicates the end of one cycle of A/D conversion.
Bit 7
ADF
Description
0
This bit is cleared from 1 to 0 when:
1. The chip is reset or placed in a standby mode.
(Initial value)
2. The CPU reads the ADF bit after it has been set to 1, then writes a 0 in this bit.
3. An A/D interrupt is served by the data transfer controller (DTC).
This bit is set to 1 at the following times:
1
1. Single mode: when one A/D conversion is completed.
2. Scan mode: when inputs on all selected channels have been converted.
Bit 6—A/D Interrupt Enable (ADIE): This bit selects whether to request an A/D interrupt
(ADI) when A/D conversion is completed.
Bit 6
ADIE
Description
0
1
The A/D interrupt request (ADI) is disabled.
The A/D interrupt request (ADI) is enabled.
(Initial value)
287
Bit 5—A/D Start (ADST): The A/D converter operates while this bit is set to 1. In the single
mode, this bit is automatically cleared to 0 at the end of each A/D conversion.
Bit 5
ADST
Description
0
1
A/D conversion is halted.
(Initial value)
1. Single mode: One A/D conversion is performed. The ADST bit is automatically
cleared to 0 at the end of the conversion.
2. Scan mode: A/D conversion starts and continues cyclically on the selected channels
until the ADST bit is cleared to 0.
Bit 4—Scan Mode (SCAN): This bit selects the scan mode or single mode of operation.
See section 15.4, “Operation” for descriptions of these modes.
The mode should be changed only when the ADST bit is cleared to 0.
Bit 4
SCAN
Description
Single mode
Scan mode
0
1
(Initial value)
Bit 3—Clock Select (CKS): This bit controls the A/D conversion time.
The conversion time should be changed only when the ADST bit is cleared to 0.
Bit 3
CKS
Description
0
1
Conversion time = 274 states (maximum)
Conversion time = 138 states (maximum)
(Initial value)
Bits 2 to 0—Channel Select 2 to 0 (CH2 to CH0): These bits and the SCAN bit combine to
select one or more analog input channels.
The channel selection should be changed only when the ADST bit is cleared to 0.
288
Group Select
Channel Select
Selected Channels
CH2
CH1
0
CH0
0
Single Mode Scan Mode
0
AN0
AN1
AN2
AN3
AN4
AN5
AN6
AN7
AN0
0
1
AN0 and AN1
AN0 to AN2
AN0 to AN3
AN4
1
0
1
1
1
0
0
0
1
AN4 and AN5
AN4 to AN6
AN4 to AN7
1
0
1
1
15.2.3 A/D Control Register (ADCR)—H'FEE9
Bit
7
TRGE
0
6
—
1
5
—
1
4
—
1
3
—
1
2
—
1
1
—
1
0
—
1
Initial value
Read/Write
R/W
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
The A/D control register (ADCR) is an 8-bit readable/writable register that enables or disables the
A/D external trigger signal.
The ADCR is initialized to H'7F at a reset and in the standby modes.
Bit 7—Trigger Enable (TRGE): This bit enables or disables the ADTRG (A/D external trigger)
signal.
Bit 7
TRGE
Description
0
1
External triggering of A/D conversion is disabled.
A High-to-Low transition of ADTRG starts A/D conversion.
(Initial value)
Bit 6 to 0—Reserved: These bits cannot be modified and are always read as 1.
289
15.3 CPU Interface
The A/D data registers (ADDRA to ADDRD) are 16-bit registers. The upper byte of each register
can be read directly, but the lower byte is accessed through an 8-bit temporary register (TEMP).
When the CPU or DTC reads the upper byte of an A/D data register, at the same time as the upper
byte is placed on the internal data bus, the lower byte is transferred to TEMP. When the lower
byte is accessed, the value in TEMP is placed on the internal data bus.
A program that requires all 10 bits of an A/D result should perform word access, or should read
first the upper byte, then the lower byte of the A/D data register. Either way, it is assured of
obtaining consistent data. Consistent data are not assured if the program reads the lower byte first.
A program that requires only 8-bit A/D accuracy should perform byte access to the upper byte of
the A/D data register. The value in TEMP can be left unread.
Figure 15-2 shows the data flow when the CPU (or DTC) reads an A/D data register.
< Upper byte read >
Module data bus
CPU
Bus interface
receives
data H'AA
TEMP
[H'40]
ADDRn H
[H'AA]
ADDRn L
[H'40]
(n = A to D)
< Lower byte read >
Module data bus
CPU
Bus interface
receives
data H'40
TEMP
[H'40]
ADDRn H
[H'AA]
ADDRn L
[H'40]
(n = A to D)
Figure 15-2 Read Access to A/D Data Register (When Register Contains H'AA40)
290
15.4 Operation
The A/D converter performs 10 successive approximations to obtain a result ranging from H'0000
(corresponding to AVSS) to H'FFC0 (corresponding to AVCC). Only the first 10 bits of the result
are significant.
The A/D converter module can be programmed to operate in single mode or scan mode as
explained below.
15.4.1 Single Mode (SCAN = 0)
The single mode is suitable for obtaining a single data value from a single channel. A/D
conversion starts when the ADST bit is set to 1. During the conversion process the ADST bit
remains set to 1. When conversion is completed, the ADST bit is automatically cleared to 0.
When the conversion is completed, the ADF bit is set to 1. If the interrupt enable bit (ADIE) is
also set to 1, an A/D conversion end interrupt (ADI) is requested, so that the converted data can be
processed by an interrupt-handling routine. Alternatively, the interrupt can be served by the data
transfer controller (DTC).
When an A/D interrupt is served by the DTC, the DTC automatically clears the ADF bit to 0.
When an A/D interrupt is served by the CPU, however, the ADF bit remains set until the CPU
reads the ADCSR, then writes a 0 in the ADF bit.
Before selecting the single mode, clock, and analog input channel, software should clear the
ADST bit to 0 to make sure the A/D converter is stopped. Changing the mode, clock, or channel
selection while A/D conversion is in progress can lead to conversion errors.
The following example explains the A/D conversion process in single mode when channel 1
(AN1) is selected. Figure 15-3 shows the corresponding timing chart.
1. Software clears the ADST bit to 0, then selects the single mode (SCAN = 0) and channel 1
(CH2 to CH0 = “001”), enables the A/D interrupt request (ADIE = 1), and sets the ADST bit to
1 to start A/D conversion. (Selection of mode, clock channel and setting the ADST bit can be
done at same time.)
Coding Example: (when using the slow clock, CKS = 0)
BCLR #5, @H'FEE8
MOV.B #H'61, @H'FEE8
2. The A/D converter samples the AN1 input and converts the voltage level to a digital value. At
the end of the conversion process the A/D converter transfers the result to register ADDRB,
sets the ADF bit is set to 1, clears the ADST bit to 0, and halts.
291
3. ADF = 1 and ADIE = 1, so an A/D interrupt is requested.
4. The user-coded A/D interrupt-handling routine is started.
5. The interrupt-handling routine reads the ADCSR value, then writes a 0 in the ADF bit to clear
this bit to 0.
6. The interrupt-handling routine reads and processes the A/D conversion result.
7. The routine ends.
Steps 2 to 7 can now be repeated by setting the ADST bit to 1 again.
If the data transfer enable (DTE) bit is set to 1, the interrupt is served by the data transfer
controller (DTC). Steps 4 to 7 then change as follows.
4’. The DTC is started.
5’. The DTC automatically clears the ADF bit to 0.
6’. The DTC transfers the A/D conversion result from ADDRB to a specified destination address.
7’. The DTC ends.
292
Figure 15-3 A/D Operation in Single Mode (When Channel 1 is Selected)
293
15.4.2 Scan Mode (SCAN = 1)
The scan mode can be used to monitor analog inputs on one or more channels. When the ADST
bit is set to 1, A/D conversion starts from the first channel selected by the CH bits. When
CH2 = 0 the first channel is AN0. When CH2 = 1 the first channel is AN4.
If the scan group includes more than one channel (i.e. if bit CH1 or CH0 is set), conversion of the
next channel begins as soon as conversion of the first channel ends.
Conversion of the selected channels continues cyclically until the ADST bit is cleared to 0. The
conversion results are placed in the data registers corresponding to the selected channels.
Before selecting the scan mode, clock, and analog input channels, software should clear the ADST
bit to 0 to make sure the A/D converter is stopped. Changing the mode, clock, or channel
selection while A/D conversion is in progress can lead to conversion errors.
The following example explains the A/D conversion process when three channels in group 0 are
selected (AN0, AN1, and AN2). Figure 15-4 shows the corresponding timing chart.
1. Software clears the ADST bit to 0, then selects the scan mode (SCAN = 1), scan group 0
(CH2 = 0), and analog input channels AN0 to AN2 (CH1 and CH0 = 0) and sets the ADST bit
to 1 to start A/D conversion.
Coding Example: (with slow clock and ADI interrupt enabled)
BCLR #5, @H'FEE8
MOV.B #H'72, @FEE8
2. The A/D converter samples the input at AN0, converts the voltage level to a digital value, and
transfers the result to register ADDRA.
3. Next the A/D converter samples and converts AN1 and transfers the result to ADDRB. Then it
samples and converts AN2 and transfers the result to ADDRC.
4. After all selected channels (AN0 to AN2) have been converted, the AD converter sets the ADF
bit to 1. If the ADIE bit is set to 1, an A/D interrupt (ADI) is requested. Then the A/D
converter begins converting AN0 again.
5. Steps 2 to 4 are repeated cyclically as long as the ADST bit remains set to 1.
To stop the A/D converter, software must clear the ADST bit to 0.
294
Figure 15-4 A/D Operation in Scan Mode (When Channels 0 to 2 are Selected)
295
15.4.3 Input Sampling Time and A/D Conversion Time
The A/D converter includes a built-in sample-and-hold circuit. Sampling of the input starts at a
time tD after the ADST bit is set to 1. The sampling process lasts for a time tSPL. The actual A/D
conversion begins after sampling is completed. Figure 15-5 shows the timing of these steps, and
table 15-4 lists the total conversion times (tCONV) for the single mode.
The total conversion time includes tD and tSPL. The purpose of tD is to synchronize the ADCSR
write time with the A/D conversion process, so the length of tD is variable. The total conversion
time therefore varies within the minimum to maximum ranges indicated in table 15-4.
In the scan mode, the ranges given in table 15-4 apply to the first conversion. The length of the
second and subsequent conversion processes is fixed at 256 states (when CKS = 0) or 128 states
(when CKS = 1).
(1)
ø
Internal address
bus
(2)
Write signal
Input sampling
timing
ADF
tD
tSPL
tCONV
(1)
(2)
tD
: ADCSR write cycle
: ADCSR address
: Synchronization delay
: Input sampling time
tSPL
tCONV : Total A/D conversion time
Figure 15-5 A/D Conversion Timing
296
Table 15-4 A/D Conversion Time (Single Mode)
CKS = 0
CKS = 1
Typ
—
Item
Symbol
tD
Min
18
Typ
—
Max
33
Min
10
Max
17
Synchronization delay
Input sampling time
Total A/D conversion time
tSPL
—
63
—
—
—
31
—
tCONV
259
274
131
—
138
Note: Values in the table are numbers of states.
15.4.4 External Triggering of A/D Conversion
A/D conversion can be started by an external trigger input.
External trigger input is enabled at the ADTRG pin when the TRGE bit in the ADCR is set to 1.
Between 1.5 and 2 ø clock cycles after the ADTRG input goes Low, the ADST bit in the ADCSR
is set to 1 and A/D conversion commences.
The timing of external triggering is shown in figure 15-6.
ø
ADTRG
1.0 to 2.0 cycles
ADST
A/D conversion
Figure 15-6 Timing of Setting of ADST Bit
297
15.5 Interrupts and the Data Transfer Controller
The ADI interrupt request is enabled or disabled by the ADIE bit in the ADCSR.
When the ADI bit in data transfer enable register DTEF (bit 4 at address H'FF0D) is set to 1, the
ADI interrupt is served by the data transfer controller. The DTC can be used to transfer A/D
results to a buffer in memory, or to an I/O port. The DTC automatically clears the ADF bit to 0.
Note: In scan mode, the DTC can transfer data for only one channel per interrupt, even if two or
more channels are selected.
298
Section 16 RAM
16.1 Overview
The H8/534 and H8/536 include 2 kbytes of on-chip static RAM, connected to the CPU by a
16-bit data bus. Both byte and word access to the on-chip RAM are performed in two states,
enabling rapid data transfer and instruction execution.
The on-chip RAM is assigned to addresses H'F680 to H'FE7F in the chip’s address space. A
RAM control register (RAMCR) can enable or disable the on-chip RAM, permitting these
addresses to be allocated to external memory instead, if so desired.
16.1.1 Block Diagram
Figure 16-1 shows the block diagram of the on-chip RAM.
Internal data bus (upper 8 bits)
Internal data bus (lower 8 bits)
Address
H'F680
H'F682
RAMCR
On-chip RAM
H'FE7E
Even addresses
Odd addresses
RAMCR: RAM Control Register
Figure 16-1 Block Diagram of On-Chip RAM
299
16.1.2 Register Configuration
The on-chip RAM is controlled by the register described in table 16-1.
Table 16-1 RAM Control Register
Name
Abbreviation
R/W
Initial Value
Address
RAM control register
RAMCR
R/W
H'FF
H'FF11
16.2 RAM Control Register (RAMCR)
Bit
7
RAME
1
6
—
1
5
—
1
4
—
1
3
—
1
2
—
1
1
—
1
0
—
1
Initial value
Read/Write
R/W
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
The RAM control register (RAMCR) is an 8-bit register that enables or disable the on-chip RAM.
Bit 7—RAM Enable (RAME): This bit enables or disables the on-chip RAM.
The RAME bit is initialized on the rising edge of the reset signal. It is not initialized in the
software standby mode.
Bit 7
RAME Description
0
1
On-chip RAM is disabled.
On-chip RAM is enabled.
(Initial value)
Bits 6 to 0—Reserved: These bits cannot be modified and are always read as 1.
16.3 Operation
16.3.1 Expanded Modes (Modes 1, 2, 3, and 4)
If the RAME bit is set to 1, accesses to addresses H'F680 to H'FE7F are directed to the on-chip
RAM. If the RAME bit is cleared to 0, accesses to addresses H'F680 to H'FE7F are directed to the
external data bus.
300
16.3.2 Single-Chip Mode (Mode 7)
If the RAME bit is set to 1, accesses to addresses H'F680 to H'FE7F are directed to the on-chip
RAM. If the RAME bit is cleared to 0, access of any type (instruction fetch or data read or write)
to addresses H'F680 to H'FE7F causes an address error and initiates the CPU’s exception-handling
sequence.
301
Section 17 ROM
17.1 Overview
The H8/534 includes 32 kbytes of high-speed, on-chip ROM. The H8/536 has 62 kbytes of on-
chip ROM. The on-chip ROM is connected to the CPU via a 16-bit data bus and is accessed in
two states.
Users wishing to program the chip themselves can request electrically programmable ROM
(PROM). The PROM version has a PROM mode in which the chip can be programmed with a
standard, external PROM writer. The chip is also available with masked ROM.
The on-chip ROM is enabled or disabled depending on the MCU operating mode, which is
determined by the inputs at the mode pins when the chip comes out of the reset state.
See table 17-1.
Table 17-1 ROM Usage in Each MCU Mode
Mode Pins
Mode
MD2 MD1 MD0 ROM
Mode 1 (expanded minimum mode)
Mode 2 (expanded minimum mode)
Mode 3 (expanded maximum mode)
Mode 4 (expanded maximum mode)
Mode 7 (single-chip mode)
0
0
0
1
1
0
1
1
0
1
1
0
1
0
1
Disabled (external addresses)
Enabled
Disabled (external addresses)
Enabled
Enabled
17.1.1 Block Diagram
Figure 17-1 shows the block diagram of the on-chip ROM.
303
Internal data bus (upper 8 bits)
Internal data bus (lower 8 bits)
Addresses
H8/534 H8/536
H'0000 H'0000
H'0002 H'0002
On-chip ROM
H'7FFE H'F67E
Even addresses
Odd addresses
Figure 17-1 Block Diagram of On-Chip ROM
17.2 PROM Mode
17.2.1 PROM Mode Setup
The PROM version has a PROM mode in which the usual microcomputer functions of the H8/534
or H8/536 are halted to allow the on-chip PROM to be programmed.
To select the PROM mode, apply the signal inputs listed in table 17-2.
Table 17-2 Selection of PROM Mode
Pin
Input
Mode pins (MD2, MD1, and MD0) Low
STBY pin
Low
P61 and P60
High
304
17.2.2 Socket Adapter Pin Arrangements and Memory Map
The H8/534 or H8/536 can be programmed with a general-purpose PROM writer by attaching a
socket adapter as listed in table 17-3. The socket adapter depends on the type of package. Figure
17-2(a) and (b) show the socket adapter pin arrangements. Figure 17-3 is a memory map.
Table 17-3 Socket Adapter
Chip
H8/534 84-Pin PLCC (CP-84)
84-Pin windowed LCC (CG-84)
Package
Socket Adapter
HS538ESC01H
HS538ESG01H
HS538ESH01H
HS5348ESN01H*
HS538ESC02H
HS538ESG02H
HS538ESH02H
HS5368ESN01H*
80-Pin QFP (FP-80A)
80-Pin TQFP (TFP-80C)
H8/536 84-Pin PLCC (CP-84)
84-Pin windowed LCC (CG-84)
80-Pin QFP (FP-80A)
80-Pin TQFP (TFP-80C)
Note: * Under development.
305
H8/534
EPROM socket
Pin
HN27C256 (28 pins)
FP-80A CG-84, CP-84
Pin
RES
NMI
P30
P31
P32
P33
P34
P35
P36
P37
P40
P41
P42
P43
P44
P45
P46
P47
P50
P51
P52
P53
P54
P55
P56
P57
P60
P61
AVCC
VCC
VCC
MD0
MD1
MD2
STBY
AVss
Vss
VPP
EA9
EO0
EO1
EO2
EO3
EO4
EO5
EO6
EO7
EA0
EA1
EA2
EA3
EA4
EA5
EA6
EA7
EA8
OE
1
24
11
12
13
15
16
17
18
19
10
9
10
11
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
22
23
24
25
26
27
28
30
31
32
33
34
35
36
37
38
39
60
5
21
22
25
26
27
28
29
30
31
32
33
34
35
36
37
38
39
40
43
44
45
46
47
48
49
50
51
52
74
16
55
17
18
19
20
65
2
8
7
6
5
4
3
25
22
21
23
2
EA10
EA11
EA12
EA13
EA14
CE
26
27
20
28
VCC
•
•
•
•
42
6
Vss
14
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
7
8
9
VPP:
E7 to E0:
Programming power (12.5 V)
Data input/output
51
12
29
71
—
—
—
EA14 to EA0: Address input
24
41
42
64
83
Vss
OE:
CE:
Output enable
Chip enable
Vss
Vss
Vss
Vss
Note: All pins not shown in this figure should be left open.
Figure 17-2(a) Socket Adapter Pin Arrangements (H8/534)
306
H8/536
EPROM socket
Pin
VPP
HN27C101 (32 pins)
FP-80A CG-84, CP-84
Pin
RES
NMI
P14
P15
P16
P30
P31
P32
P33
P34
P35
P36
P37
P40
P41
P42
P43
P44
P45
P46
P47
P50
P51
P52
P53
P54
P55
P56
P57
P60
P61
AVCC
VCC
VCC
MD0
MD1
MD2
STBY
AVSS
VSS
VSS
VSS
VSS
VSS
VSS
1
26
3
10
11
76
77
78
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
22
23
24
25
26
27
28
30
31
32
33
34
35
36
37
38
39
60
5
21
22
7
8
9
EA9
EA15
EA16
PGM
EO0
EO1
EO2
EO3
EO4
EO5
EO6
EO7
EA0
EA1
EA2
EA3
EA4
EA5
EA6
EA7
EA8
OE
2
31
13
14
15
17
18
19
20
21
12
11
10
9
8
7
6
5
27
24
23
25
4
28
29
22
32
25
26
27
28
29
30
31
32
33
34
35
36
37
38
39
40
43
44
45
46
47
48
49
50
51
52
74
16
55
17
18
19
20
65
2
EA10
EA11
EA12
EA13
EA14
CE
VCC
•
•
•
•
42
6
7
8
9
51
12
29
71
—
—
—
VSS
16
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
VPP:
E7 to E0:
Programming power (12.5 V)
Data input/output
EA16 to EA0: Address input
24
41
42
64
83
OE:
Output enable
Chip enable
Program
CE:
PGM:
Note: All pins not shown in this figure should be left open.
Figure 17-2(b) Socket Adapter Pin Arrangements (H8/536)
307
Address in
MCU mode
Address in
PROM mode
Address in
MCU mode
Address in
PROM mode
H'0000
H'0000
H'0000
H'0000
H8/534
H8/536
On-chip ROM
On-chip ROM
H'EE80*
H'7FFF
H'7FFF
H'F67F
H'F67F
* In mode 2, H'EE80 to H'F67F are external addresses. Do not attempt to program these
addresses if the H8/536 will be used in mode 2.
Figure 17-3 Memory Map in PROM Mode
17.3 H8/534 Programming
The write, verify, and inhibited sub-modes of the PROM mode are selected as shown in
table 17-4.
Table 17-4 Selection of Sub-Modes in PROM Mode (H8/534)
Pins
Mode
CE
OE
VPP
VPP
VPP
VPP
VCC
VCC
VCC
VCC
07 to 00
A14 to A0
Write
Low
High
Data input
Address input
Address input
Address input
Verify
High Low
High High
Data output
High-impedance
Programming inhibited
Note: The VPP and VCC pins must be held at the VPP and VCC voltage levels.
The H8/534 PROM uses the same, standard read/write specifications as the HN27C256 and
HN27256.
17.3.1 Writing and Verifying
An efficient, high-speed programming procedure can be used to write and verify PROM data.
This procedure writes data quickly without subjecting the chip to voltage stress and without
sacrificing data reliability. It leaves the data H'FF written in unused addresses.
308
Figure 17-4 shows the basic high-speed programming flowchart.
Tables 17-5 and 17-6 list the electrical characteristics of the chip in the PROM mode. Figure 17-5
shows a write/verify timing chart.
START
SET PROG./VERIFY MODE
VCC = 6.0 V ±0.25 V, VPP = 12.5 V ±0.5 V
Address = 0
n = 0
→
n + 1
n
Y
Program tpw = 1 ms ±5%
N
n < S
S = 25
N
Verify
→
Address + 1 Address
GO
Program topw = 3n ms
N
Last address?
Y
SET READ MODE
VCC = 5.0 V, VPP = VCC
NOGO
FAIL
Read all addresses
GO
END
Figure 17-4 High-Speed Programming Flowchart (H8/534)
309
Table 17-5 DC Characteristics (H8/534)
(When VCC = 6.0 V ±0.25 V, VPP = 12.5 V ±0.3 V, VSS = 0 V, Ta = 25˚C ±5˚C)
Sym-
Measurement
Item
bol Min Typ Max
Unit Conditions
Input High voltage O7 to O0, A14 to A0, OE, CE VIH 2.4
—
VCC + 0.3
V
V
Input Low voltage O7 to O0, A14 to A0, OE, CE VIL –0.3 — 0.8
Input High voltage O7 to O0
Input Low voltage O7 to O0
VOH 2.4
—
—
V
IOH =
–200 µA
IOL = 1.6 mA
Vin =
VOL
—
—
—
—
0.45
2
V
Input leakage
current
O7 to O0, A14 to A0, OE, CE |ILI|
µA
5.25 V/0.5 V
VCC current
VPP current
ICC
IPP
—
—
—
—
40
40
mA
mA
Table 17-6 AC Characteristics (H8/534)
(When VCC = 6.0 V ±0.25 V, VPP = 12.5 V ±0.3 V, Ta = 25˚C ±5˚C)
Sym-
Measurement
Item
bol Min Typ Max
Unit Conditions
Address setup time
OE setup time
tAS
2
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
130
—
µs
µs
µs
µs
µs
ns
µs
ms
ms
See figure
tOES
tDS
2
17-5*
Data setup time
2
Address hold time
Data hold time
tAH
0
tDH
tDF
2
Data output disable time
VPP setup time
—
2
tVPS
Program pulse width
OE pulse width for
overwrite-programming
VCC setup time
tPW 0.95 1.0 1.05
tOPW 2.85 — 78.75
tVCS
2
0
—
—
—
µs
ns
Data output delay time
* Input pulse level: 0.8 V to 2.2 V
Input rise/fall time ≤ 20 ns
tOE
500
Timing reference levels: input—1.0 V, 2.0 V; output—0.8 V, 2.0 V
310
Write
Verify
Address
Data
tAS
tAH
tDF
Input data
Output data
tDS
tDH
VPP
VPP
tVPS
VCC
+1
VCC
VCC
tVCS
VCC
CE
OE
tPW
tOES
tOE
Figure 17-5 PROM Write/Verify Timing (H8/534)
17.3.2 Notes on Writing
1. Write with the specified voltages and timing. The programming voltage (VPP) in the
PROM mode is 12.5 V.
Caution: Applied voltages in excess of the specified values can permanently destroy to the chip.
Be particularly careful about the PROM writer’s overshoot characteristics.
If the PROM writer is set to Intel specifications or Hitachi HN27256 or HN27C256 specifications,
Vpp will be 12.5 V.
2. Before writing data, check that the socket adapter and chip are correctly mounted in the
PROM writer. Overcurrent damage to the chip can result if the index marks on the PROM
writer, socket adapter, and chip are not correctly aligned.
311
3. Don’t touch the socket adapter or chip while writing. Touching either of these can cause
contact faults and write errors.
17.4 H8/536 Programming
The write, verify, and other sub-modes of PROM mode are selected as shown in table 17-7.
Table 17-7 Selection of Sub-Modes in PROM Mode (H8/536)
Pins
Mode
CE
OE
PGM VPP
VCC
VCC
VCC
VCC
07 to 00
A16 to A0
Write
Low High Low
Low Low High
Low Low Low
Low High High
High Low Low
High High High
VPP
VPP
VPP
Data input
Data output
Address input
Address input
Verify
Programming inhibited
High-impedance Address input
Note: The VPP and VCC pins must be held at the VPP and VCC voltage levels.
Standard EPROM read/write specifications are used, the same as for the HN27C101. The
HN27C101 has two programming modes: page programming and byte programming.
The H8/536 does not support page programming, so select byte programming.
17.4.1 Writing and Verifying
An efficient, high-speed programming procedure can be used to write and verify PROM data. This
procedure writes data quickly without subjecting the chip to voltage stress and without sacrificing
data reliability. It leaves the data H'FF written in unused addresses.
Figure 17-6 shows the basic high-speed programming flowchart.
Tables 17-8 and 17-9 list the electrical characteristics of the chip during programming.
Figure 17-7 shows a timing diagram.
312
START
SET PROG./VERIFY MODE
VCC = 6.0 V ±0.25 V, VPP = 12.5 V ±0.3 V
Address = 0
n = 0
→
n + 1
n
Y
Program tpw = 0.2 ms ±5%
N
n < S
S = 25
N
Verify
→
Address + 1 Address
GO
Program topw = 0.2n ms
N
Last address?
Y
SET READ MODE
VCC = 5.0 V, VPP = VCC
NOGO
FAIL
Read all addresses
GO
END
Figure 17-6 High-Speed Programming Flowchart (H8/536)
313
Table 17-8 DC Characteristics (H8/536)
(When VCC = 6.0 V ±0.25 V, VPP = 12.5 V ±0.3 V, VSS = 0 V, Ta = 25˚C ±5˚C)
Sym-
Test
Item
bol Min Typ Max
Unit Conditions
Input high voltage
O7 to O0, A16 to A0, OE, VIH 2.4
CE, PGM
—
VCC + 0.3
V
Input low voltage
O7 to O0, A16 to A0, OE, VIL –0.3 — 0.8
CE, PGM
V
Output high voltage
Output low voltage
Input leakage
current
O7 to O0
O7 to O0
VOH 2.4
—
—
—
—
V
V
IOH = –200 µA
IOL = 1.6 mA
VOL
—
—
0.45
2
O7 to O0, A16 to A0, OE, |ILI|
µA Vin = 5.25 V/
CE, PGM
0.5 V
VCC current
ICC
—
—
—
—
40
40
mA
mA
VPP current
IPP
Table 17-9 AC Characteristics (H8/536)
(When VCC = 6.0 V ±0.25 V, VPP = 12.5 V ±0.3 V, Ta = 25˚C ±5˚C)
Sym-
Test
Unit Conditions
Item
bol Min Typ Max
Address setup time
OE setup time
tAS
2
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
130
—
µs
µs
µs
µs
µs
ns
µs
ms
ms
See figure
tOES
tDS
2
17-7*
Data setup time
2
Address hold time
Data hold time
tAH
0
tDH
tDF
2
Data output disable time
VPP setup time
—
2
tVPS
Program pulse width
OE pulse width for
overwrite-programming
VCC setup time
tPW 0.19 0.20 0.21
tOPW 0.19 — 5.25
tVCS
tCES
tOE
2
2
0
—
—
—
—
µs
µs
ns
OE setup time
—
Data output delay time
* Input pulse level: 0.8 V to 2.2 V
Input rise/fall time ≤ 20 ns
150
Timing reference levels: input—1.0 V, 2.0 V; output—0.8 V, 2.0 V
314
Write
Verify
Address
Data
tAS
tAH
tDF
Input data
Output data
tDS
tDH
VPP
VPP
tVPS
VCC
+1
VCC
VCC
tVCS
VCC
CE
tCES
PGM
OE
tPW
tOES
tOE
Figure 17-7 PROM Write/Verify Timing (H8/536)
17.4.2 Notes on Programming
1. Program with the specified voltages and timing.
The programming voltage (VPP) in PROM mode is 12.5 V.
Caution: Applied voltages in excess of the specified values can permanently destroy the chip. Be
particularly careful about the PROM writer’s overshoot characteristics.
If the PROM writer is set to Hitachi HN27C101 specifications, VPP will be 12.5 V.
2. Before programming, check that the socket adapter and chip are correctly mounted in
the PROM writer. Overcurrent damage to the chip can result if the index marks on the PROM
writer, socket adapter, and chip are not correctly aligned.
315
3. Don’t touch the socket adapter or chip while programming. Touching either of these can
cause contact faults and write errors.
4. The H8/536 uses the HN27C101’s byte programming mode. Note that some PROM writers
do not support the HN27C101’s byte programming mode. Table 17-10 lists the PROM writers
recommended for use with the HD6475368R.
Table 17-10 PROM Writers
Recommended PROM Writers
Vendor
Model
Data I/O
29B + Unipak 2B V21.0*
212
V2.0*
V4.1*
V15.0*
V3.0*
V1.0*
288A
SI000
UNISITE 40
2900
Aval Data
PKW-3100
PKW-1100
Model 1892
Minato Electronics
80-pin QFP type: GA91-15
84-pin PLCC type: GA91-16
Model 1891
80-pin QFP type: GA91-15
84-pin PLCC type: GA91-16
Note: * Use PROM writers with the indicated or higher
version numbers.
5. The H8/536 PROM size is 62 kbytes. When programming, leave data H'FF in addresses
H'F680 to H'1FFFF.
316
17.5 Reliability of Written Data
An effective way to assure the data holding characteristics of the programmed chips is to bake
them at 150˚C, then screen them for data errors. This procedure quickly eliminates chips with
PROM memory cells prone to early failure.
Figure 17-8 shows the recommended screening procedure.
Write program
Bake with power off
150°C 48 Hr
Read and check program
VCC = 5.0 V
Install
Figure 17-8 Recommended Screening Procedure
If a series of write errors occur while the same PROM writer is in use, stop programming and
check the PROM writer and socket adapter for defects, using a microcomputer with a windowed
package and on-chip EPROM.
Please inform Hitachi of any abnormal conditions noted during programming or in screening of
program data after high-temperature baking.
317
17.6 Erasing of Data
The windowed package enables data to be erased by illuminating the window with ultraviolet
light. Table 17-11 lists the erasing conditions.
Table 17-11 Erasing Conditions
Item
Value
Ultraviolet wavelength
Minimum illumination
253.7 nm
15 W·s/cm2
2
The conditions in table 17-11 can be satisfied by placing a 12000-µW/cm ultraviolet lamp 2 or 3
centimeters directly above the chip and leaving it on for about 20 minutes.
318
17.7 Handling of Windowed Packages
1. Glass Erasing Window: Rubbing the glass erasing window of a windowed package with a
plastic material or touching it with an electrically charged object can create a static charge on
the window surface which may cause the chip to malfunction.
If the erasing window becomes charged, the charge can be neutralized by a short exposure to
ultraviolet light. This returns the chip to its normal condition, but it also reduces the charge
stored in the floating gates of the PROM, so it is recommended that the chip be reprogrammed
afterward.
Accumulation of static charge on the window surface can be prevented by the following
precautions:
(1) When handling the package, ground yourself. Don’t wear gloves. Avoid other possible
sources of static charge.
(2) Avoid friction between the glass window and plastic or other materials that tend to
accumulate static charge.
(3) Be careful when using cooling sprays, since they may have a slight ion content.
(4) Cover the window with an ultraviolet-shield label, preferably a label including a
conductive material. Besides protecting the PROM contents from ultraviolet light, the
label protects the chip by distributing static charge uniformly.
2. Handling after Programming: Fluorescent light and sunlight contain small amounts of
ultraviolet, so prolonged exposure to these types of light can cause programmed data to invert.
In addition, exposure to any type of intense light can induce photoelectric effects that may lead
to chip malfunction. It is recommended that after programming the chip, you cover the erasing
window with a light-proof label (such as an ultraviolet-shield label).
3. 84-Pin LCC Package Mounting: When mounted on a printed circuit board, the 84-pin LCC
package must be mounted in a socket. The recommended socket is listed in table 17-12.
Table 17-12 Socket for 84-Pin LCC Package
Manufacturer
Product Code
Sumitomo 3-M
284-1273-00-1102J
319
Section 18 Power-Down State
18.1 Overview
The H8/534 and H8/536 have a power-down state that greatly reduces power consumption by
stopping the CPU functions. The power-down state includes three modes:
1. Sleep mode—
a software-triggered mode in which the CPU halts but the rest of
the chip remains active
2. Software standby mode— a software-triggered mode in which the entire chip is inactive
3. Hardware standby mode— a hardware-triggered mode in which the entire chip is inactive
The sleep mode and software standby mode are entered from the program execution state by
executing the SLEEP instruction under the conditions given in table 18-1. The hardware standby
mode is entered from any other state by a Low input at the STBY pin.
Table 18-1 lists the conditions for entering and leaving the power-down modes. It also indicates
the status of the CPU, on-chip supporting modules, etc., in each power-down mode.
Table 18-1 Power-Down State
Entering
CPU
Sup.
I/O
Exiting
Mode
Sleep
mode
Procedure
Execute
Clock CPU
Reg’s. Mod’s.
RAM
Ports
Held
Methods
• Interrupt
• RES Low
• STBY Low
• NMI
Run
Halt
Held
Held
Run
Held
SLEEP
instruction
Set SSBY bit
in SBYCR to
Soft-
ware
Halt
Halt
Halt
Held
Held
Held
and
• RES Low
• STBY Low
standby 1, then
initialized
mode
execute SLEEP
instruction*
Set STBY
pin to Low
Hard-
ware
Halt
Halt
Not
Halt
High
• STBY High,
then RES
held
and
impe-
dance
state
standby level
mode
initialized
Low → High
* The watchdog timer must also be stopped.
Notes: SBYCR Software standby control register
SSBY Software standby bit
321
18.2 Sleep Mode
18.2.1 Transition to Sleep Mode
Execution of the SLEEP instruction causes a transition from the program execution state to the
sleep mode. After executing the SLEEP instruction, the CPU halts, but the contents of its internal
registers remain unchanged. The functions of the on-chip supporting modules do not stop in the
sleep mode.
18.2.2 Exit from Sleep Mode
The chip wakes up from the sleep mode when it receives an internal or external interrupt request,
or a Low input at the RES or STBY pin.
1. Wake-Up by Interrupt: An interrupt releases the sleep mode and starts either the CPU’s
interrupt-handling sequence or the data transfer controller (DTC).
If the interrupt is served by the DTC, after the data transfer is completed the CPU executes the
instruction following the SLEEP instruction, unless the count in the data transfer count register
(DTCR) is 0.
If an interrupt on a level equal to or less than the mask level in the CPU’s status register (SR) is
requested, the interrupt is left pending and the sleep mode continues. Also, if an interrupt from
an on-chip supporting module is disabled by the corresponding enable/disable bit in the
module’s control register, the interrupt cannot be requested, so it cannot wake the chip up.
2. Wake-Up by RES pin: When the RES pin goes Low, the chip exits from the sleep mode to
the reset state.
3. Wake-Up by STBY pin: When the STBY pin goes Low, the chip exits from the sleep mode to
the hardware standby mode.
18.3 Software Standby Mode
18.3.1 Transition to Software Standby Mode
A program enters the software standby mode by setting the standby bit (SSBY) in the software
standby control register (SBYCR) to 1, then executing the SLEEP instruction. Table 18-2 lists the
attributes of the software standby control register.
322
Table 18-2 Software Standby Control Register
Name
Abbreviation R/W
SBYCR R/W
Initial Value Address
H'7F H'FF13
Software standby control register
In the software standby mode, the CPU, clock, and the on-chip supporting module functions all
stop, reducing power consumption to an extremely low level. The on-chip supporting modules
and their registers are reset to their initial state, but as long as a minimum necessary voltage
supply is maintained (at least 2 V), the contents of the CPU registers and on-chip RAM remain
unchanged. The I/O ports also remain in their current states.
18.3.2 Software Standby Control Register (SBYCR)
Bit
7
SSBY
0
6
—
1
5
—
1
4
—
1
3
—
1
2
—
1
1
—
1
0
—
1
Initial value
Read/Write
R/W
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
The software standby control register (SBYCR) is an 8-bit register that controls the action of the
SLEEP instruction.
Bit 7—Software Standby (SSBY): This bit enables or disables the transition to the software
standby mode.
Bit 7
SSBY
Description
0
1
The SLEEP instruction causes a transition to the sleep mode. (Initial value)
The SLEEP instruction causes a transition to the software standby mode.
The watchdog timer must be stopped before the chip can enter the software standby mode. To
stop the watchdog timer, clear the timer enable bit (TME) in the watchdog timer’s timer
control/status register (TCSR) to 0. The SSBY bit cannot be set to 1 while the TME bit is set to 1.
When the chip is recovered from the software standby mode by a nonmaskable interrupt (NMI),
the SSBY bit is automatically cleared to 0. It is also cleared to 0 by a reset or transition to the
hardware standby mode.
Bits 6 to 0—Reserved: These bits cannot be modified and are always read as 1.
323
18.3.3 Exit from Software Standby Mode
The chip can be brought out of the software standby mode by an input at one of three pins: the
NMI pin, RES pin, or STBY pin.
1. Recovery by NMI Pin: When an NMI request signal is received, the clock oscillator begins
operating but clock pulses are supplied only to the watchdog timer (WDT). The watchdog
timer begins counting from H'00 at the rate determined by the clock select bits (CKS2 to
CKS0) in its timer status/control register (TCSR). This rate should be set slow enough to allow
the clock oscillator to stabilize before the count reaches H'FF. When the count overflows from
H'FF to H'00, clock pulses are supplied to the whole chip, the software standby mode ends, and
execution of the NMI interrupt-handling sequence begins.
The clock select bits (CKS2 to CKS0) should be set as follows.
(1) Crystal oscillator: Set CKS2 to CKS0 to a value that makes the watchdog timer interval
equal to or greater than 10ms, which is the clock stabilization time.
(2) External clock input: CKS2 to CKS0 can be set to any value. The minimum value
(CKS2 = CKS1 = CKS0 = 0) is recommended.
2. Recovery by RES Pin: When the RES pin goes Low, the clock oscillator starts. Next, when
the RES pin goes High, the CPU begins executing the reset sequence.
When the chip recovers from the software standby mode by a reset, clock pulses are supplied to
the entire chip at once. Be sure to hold the RES pin Low long enough for the clock to stabilize.
3. Recovery by STBY Pin: When STBY the pin goes Low, the chip exits from the software
standby mode to the hardware standby mode.
18.3.4 Sample Application of Software Standby Mode
In this example the chip enters the software standby mode on the falling edge of the NMI input
and recovers from the software standby mode on the rising edge of NMI. Figure 18-1 shows a
timing chart of the transitions.
The nonmaskable interrupt edge bit (NMIEG) in the port 1 control register (P1CR) is originally
cleared to 0, selecting the falling edge as the NMI trigger. After accepting an NMI interrupt in
this condition, software changes the NMIEG bit to 1, sets the SSBY bit to 1, and executes the
SLEEP instruction to enter the software standby mode. The chip recovers from the software
standby mode on the next rising edge at the NMI pin.
324
Oscillator
ø
NMI
NMEG
SSBY
Clock settling time
NMI interrupt handling Software standby mode
NMI interrupt handling
WDT interval (tOSC2 )
NMIEG = 1
(Power-down state)
SSBY = 1
SLEEP instruction
Clock start-up
time
WDT overflow
Figure 18-1 NMI Timing of Software Standby Mode (Application Example)
18.3.5 Application Notes
The I/O ports remain in their current states in the software standby mode. If a port is in the High
output state, the output current is not reduced in the software standby mode.
18.4 Hardware Standby Mode
18.4.1 Transition to Hardware Standby Mode
Regardless of its current state, the chip enters the hardware standby mode whenever the STBY pin
goes Low.
The hardware standby mode reduces power consumption drastically by halting the CPU, stopping
all the functions of the on-chip supporting modules, and placing I/O ports in the high-impedance
state. The registers of the on-chip supporting modules are reset to their initial values. Only the
on-chip RAM is held unchanged, provided the minimum necessary voltage supply is maintained
(see note 1).
325
Notes: 1. The RAME bit in the RAM control register should be cleared to 0 before the STBY
pin goes Low, to disable the on-chip RAM during the hardware standby mode.
2. Do not change the inputs at the mode pins (MD2, MD1, MD0) during hardware
standby mode. Be particularly careful not to let all three mode inputs go low, since
that would place the chip in PROM mode, causing increased current dissipation.
18.4.2 Recovery from Hardware Standby Mode
Recovery from the hardware standby mode requires inputs at both the STBY and RES pins.
When the STBY pin goes High, the clock oscillator begins running. The RES pin should be Low
at this time and should be held Low long enough for the clock to stabilize. When the RES pin
changes from Low to High, the reset sequence is executed and the chip returns to the program
execution state.
Note: During standby mode, power must still be supplied to AVCC, and the mode pins must be
held at the selected mode.
18.4.3 Timing Sequence of Hardware Standby Mode
Figure 18-2 shows the usual sequence for entering and leaving the hardware standby mode.
First the RES pin goes Low, placing the chip in the reset state. Then the STBY pin goes Low,
placing the chip in the hardware standby mode and stopping the clock. In the recovery sequence
first the STBY pin goes High; then after the clock stabilizes, the RES pin is returned to the High
level.
Oscillator
RES
STBY
Clock settling time
Restart
Figure 18-2 Hardware Standby Sequence
326
Section 19 E Clock Interface
19.1 Overview
For interfacing to E clock based peripheral devices, the H8/534 and H8/536 can generate an E
clock output. Special instructions (MOVTPE, MOVFPE) perform data transfers synchronized
with the E clock.
The E clock is created by dividing the system clock (ø) by 8. The E clock is output at the P11 pin
when the P11DDR bit in the port 1 data direction register (P1DDR) is set to 1.
When the CPU executes an instruction that synchronizes with the E clock, the address is output on
the address bus as usual, but the data bus and the R/W, DS, RD, and WR signal lines do not
become active until the falling edge of the E clock is detected. The length of the access cycle for
an instruction synchronized with the E clock is accordingly variable. Figures 19-1 and 19-2 show
the timing in the cases of maximum and minimum synchronization delay.
The wait state controller (WSC) does not insert any wait states (Tw) during the execution of an
instruction synchronized with the E clock.
327
Figure 19-1 Execution Cycle of Instruction Synchronized with E Clock in
Expanded Modes (Maximum Synchronization Delay)
328
T1
T2
TE
TE
TE
TE
TE
TE
TE
T3
Last state
ø
E
A19 to A0
R/W
AS,
DS (Read access),
RD
DS (Write access),
WR
D7 to D0
(Read access)
D7 to D0
(Write access)
Figure 19-2 Execution Cycle of Instruction Synchronized with E Clock in Expanded Modes
(Minimum Synchronization Delay)
329
–Preliminary–
Section 20 Electrical Specifications
20.1 Absolute Maximum Ratings
Table 20-1 lists the absolute maximum ratings.
Table 20-1 Absolute Maximum Ratings
Item
Symbol
VCC
Rating
Unit
V
Supply voltage
–0.3 to +7.0
Programming
voltage
R-mask
S-mask
VPP
–0.3 to +13.5
V
–0.3 to +13.0
V
Input voltage (except Port 8) Vin
–0.3 to VCC + 0.3
–0.3 to AVCC + 0.3
–0.3 to +7.0
V
(Port 8)
Analog supply voltage
Analog input voltage
Operating temperature
Vin
V
AVCC
VAN
Topr
V
–0.3 to AVCC + 0.3
Regular specifications: –20 to +75
Wide-range specifications: –40 to +85
–55 to +125
V
˚C
˚C
˚C
Storage temperature
Tstg
Note: Permanent LSI damage may occur if maximum ratings are exceeded. Normal operation
should be under recommended operating conditions.
20.2 Electrical Characteristics
20.2.1 DC Characteristics
Table 20-2 lists the DC characteristics.
331
Table 20-2 DC Characteristics
(5-V Versions)
– Preliminary for S-Mask Versions–
Conditions: VCC = 5.0 V ±10%, AVCC = 5.0 V ±10%*1, VSS = AVSS = 0 V,
Ta = –20 to +75˚C (Regular Specifications)
Ta = –40 to +85˚C (Wide-Range Specifications)
Test
Item
Symbol Min
VCC – 0.7
Typ Max
Unit Conditions
Input High
voltage
RES, STBY,
MD2, MD1, MD0
EXTAL
VIH
–
VCC + 0.3 V
VCC × 0.7
2.2
–
–
–
VCC + 0.3 V
Port 8
AVCC + 0.3V
VCC + 0.3 V
Other input pins
(except port 7)
RES, STBY,
MD2, MD1, MD0
Other input pins
(except port 7)
Port 7
2.2
Input Low
voltage
VIL
–0.3
–0.3
–
–
0.5
0.8
V
V
–
Schmitt
trigger input
voltage
Input
VT
VT
1.0
2.0
–
–
–
–
–
2.5
3.5
–
V
+
+
V
–
VT – VT 0.4
V
RES
| Iin |
–
–
10.0
1.0
µA Vin = 0.5 to
µA VCC – 0.5 V
leakage
current
STBY, NMI,
MD2, MD1, MD0
Port 8
–
–
–
–
1.0
1.0
µA Vin = 0.5 to
AVCC – 0.5 V
Leakage cur- Port 9,
rent in 3-state ports 7 to 1
(off state)
| ITSI |
µA Vin = 0.5 to
VCC – 0.5 V
Input pull-up
MOS current
Output High
voltage
Ports 6
and 5
R-mask –IP
S-mask
50
–
–
–
–
–
200
300
–
µA Vin = 0 V
µA
50
All output pins
VOH
VCC – 0.5
V
V
V
IOH = –200 µA
IOH = –1 mA
IOL = 1.6 mA
3.5
–
–
Output Low
voltage
All output pins
(except RES)
VOL
0.4
Port 4
R-mask
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
1.0
1.2
1.0
0.4
V
V
V
V
IOL = 8 mA
IOL = 10 mA
IOL = 10 mA
IOL = 2.6 mA
S-mask
RES
Note: *1 AVcc must be connected to a power supply line, even when the A/D converter is not
used and even in standby mode.
332
Table 20-2 DC Characteristics
(5-V Versions) (cont)
– Preliminary for S-Mask Versions–
Test
Item
Symbol
Min
–
Typ
–
Max Unit Conditions
Input
RES
H8/534
H8/536
R-mask
S-mask
Cin
60
pF
Vin = 0 V
f = 1 MHz
Ta = 25°C
capacitance
–
–
100 pF
NMI
–
–
30
50
15
pF
pF
pF
–
–
All input pins
–
–
except RES, NMI
Normal R-mask
dissipation*2 operation
Current
ICC
–
25
30
35
40
12
16
20
23
40
50
60
60
25
30
35
35
mA
mA
mA
mA
mA
mA
mA
mA
µA
f = 6 MHz
f = 8 MHz
f = 10 MHz
f = 16 MHz
f = 6 MHz
f = 8 MHz
f = 10 MHz
f = 16 MHz
Ta ≤ 50°C
Ta > 50°C
–
–
S-mask
R-mask
–
Sleep
mode
–
–
–
S-mask
–
Standby
–
0.01 5.0
–
–
20.0 µA
Analog supply During A/D R-mask
AICC
–
1.2
1.5
2.0
3.0
mA
mA
µA
V
current
conversion S-mask
While waiting
–
–
0.01 5.0
RAM standby voltage
VRAM
2.0
–
–
Note: *2 Current dissipation values assume that VIH min = VCC – 0.5 V, VIL max = 0.5 V,
all output pins are in the no-load state, and all MOS input pull-ups are off.
333
Table 20-3 DC Characteristics (3-V S-Mask Versions)
–Preliminary–
Conditions: VCC = 3.0 to 5.5 V, VSS = AVSS = 0 V, Ta = –20 to +75˚C (Regular Specifications),
*1
AVCC = 3.0 to 5.5 V
Test
Item
Symbol
Min
Typ Max
Unit Conditions
Input High
voltage
RES, STBY,
MD2 to MD0
VIH
VCC × 0.85 –
VCC + 0.3 V
EXTAL
Port 8
VCC × 0.7
2.2
–
–
–
VCC + 0.3 V
AVCC + 0.3V
VCC + 0.3 V
Other input pins
(except port 7)
2.2
Input Low
voltage
RES, STBY,
MD2 to MD0,
EXTAL
VIL
–0.3
–
0.4
V
Other input pins
(except port 7)
–0.3
–
–
–
–
0.8
V
VCC ≥ 4.0 V
–0.3
VCC × 0.2 V
VCC × 0.5 V
VCC × 0.7 V
VCC < 4.0 V
–
Schmitt
Port 7
VT
VCC × 0.2
VCC × 0.4
trigger input
voltages
+
VT
+
–
VT – VT
VCC × 0.07 –
–
V
Input
leakage
current
RES
|Iin|
–
–
–
–
10.0
1.0
µA Vin = 0.5 to
VCC – 0.5 V
STBY, NMI,
MD2, MD1, MD0
µA
Port 8
–
–
–
–
1.0
1.0
µA Vin = 0.5 to
AVCC – 0.5 V
Leakage
current in
3-state
Port 9, ports 7 to 1
|ITSI|
µA Vin = 0.5 to
VCC – 0.5 V
(off-state)
Input pull-up Ports 6 and 5
MOS current
–IP
15
–
300
µA Vin = 0 V
Output High All output pins
voltage
VOH
VCC – 0.4
VCC – 1.0
–
–
–
–
V
V
IOH = –200 µA
IOH = –1 mA
Note: *1 AVCC must be connected to a power supply line, even when the A/D converter is not
used, and even in standby mode.
334
Table 20-3 DC Characteristics (3-V S-Mask Versions) (cont)
–Preliminary–
Test
Item
Symbol
Min
Typ Max
Unit Conditions
Output Low
voltage
All output pins
(except RES)
VOL
–
–
0.4
V
IOL = 1.6 mA
Port 4
RES
–
–
–
–
–
–
1.0
0.4
60
V
V
IOL = 5 mA
IOL = 1.6 mA
Input
capacitance
RES
H8/534 Cin
H8/536
pF Vin = 0 V
f = 1 MHz
100
50
Ta = 25°C
NMI
–
–
–
–
pF
All input pins except
RES and NMI
15
pF
Current
Normal
ICC
–
–
–
–
27
17
15
10
40
25
25
15
mA f = 10 MHz,
VCC = 5 V
dissipation*2 operation
mA f = 10 MHz,
VCC = 3 V
Sleep mode
mA f = 10 MHz,
VCC = 5 V
mA f = 10 MHz,
VCC = 3 V
Standby
–
0.01 5.0
µA Ta ≤ 50°C
µA 50°C < Ta
mA AVCC = 5 V
mA AVCC = 3 V
µA
–
–
20.0
Analog
supply
current
During A/D
conversion
AICC
–
1.5 3.0
0.5 1.0
0.01 5.0
–
While waiting
–
RAM standby voltage
VRAM
2.0
–
–
V
Note: *2 Current dissipation values assume that VIH min = VCC – 0.5 V and VIL max = 0.5 V,
all output pins are in the no-load state, and all MOS input pull-ups are off.
335
Table 20-4 DC Characteristics (2.7-V S-Mask Versions)
–Preliminary–
Conditions: VCC = 2.7 to 5.5 V, VSS = AVSS = 0 V, Ta = –20 to +75˚C (Regular Specifications),
*1
AVCC = 2.7 to 5.5 V
Test
Item
Symbol
Min
Typ Max
Unit Conditions
Input High
voltage
RES, STBY,
MD2 to MD0
VIH
VCC × 0.85 –
VCC + 0.3 V
EXTAL
Port 8
VCC × 0.7
2.2
–
–
–
VCC + 0.3 V
AVCC + 0.3V
VCC + 0.3 V
Other input pins
(except port 7)
2.2
Input Low
voltage
RES, STBY,
MD2 to MD0,
EXTAL
VIL
–0.3
–
0.4
V
Other input pins
(except port 7)
–0.3
–
–
–
–
0.8
V
VCC ≥ 4.0 V
–0.3
VCC × 0.2 V
VCC × 0.5 V
VCC × 0.7 V
VCC < 4.0 V
–
Schmitt
Port 7
VT
VCC × 0.2
VCC × 0.4
trigger input
voltages
+
VT
+
–
VT – VT
VCC × 0.07 –
–
V
Input
leakage
current
RES
|Iin|
–
–
–
–
10.0
1.0
µA Vin = 0.5 to
VCC – 0.5 V
STBY, NMI,
MD2, MD1, MD0
µA
Port 8
–
–
–
–
1.0
1.0
µA Vin = 0.5 to
AVCC – 0.5 V
Leakage
current in
3-state
Port 9, ports 7 to 1 |ITSI|
µA Vin = 0.5 to
VCC – 0.5 V
(off-state)
Input pull-up Ports 6 and 5
MOS current
–IP
15
–
300
µA Vin = 0 V
Output High All output pins
voltage
VOH
VCC – 0.4
VCC – 1.0
–
–
–
–
V
V
IOH = –200 µA
IOH = –1 mA
Note: *1 AVCC must be connected to a power supply line, even when the A/D converter is not
used, and even in standby mode.
336
Table 20-4 DC Characteristics (2.7-V S-Mask Versions) (cont)
–Preliminary–
Test
Item
Symbol
Min
Typ
Max
Unit Conditions
Output Low
voltage
All output pins
(except RES)
VOL
–
–
0.4
V
IOL = 1.6 mA
Port 4
RES
–
–
–
–
–
–
1.0
0.4
60
V
V
IOL = 5 mA
IOL = 1.6 mA
Input
capacitance
RES
H8/534 Cin
H8/536
pF Vin = 0 V
f = 1 MHz
pF Ta = 25°C
pF
100
50
NMI
–
–
–
–
All input pins except
RES and NMI
15
Current
Normal operation
Sleep mode
Standby
ICC
–
–
–
–
23
14
12
8
35
22
22
14
mA f = 8 MHz,
VCC = 5 V
dissipation*2
mA f = 8 MHz,
VCC = 3 V
mA f = 8 MHz,
VCC = 5 V
mA f = 8 MHz,
VCC = 3 V
–
0.01
–
5.0
20.0
3.0
1.0
5.0
–
µA Ta ≤ 50°C
µA 50°C < Ta
mA AVCC = 5 V
mA AVCC = 3 V
µA
–
Analog
supply
current
During A/D
conversion
AICC
–
1.5
0.5
0.01
–
–
While waiting
–
RAM standby voltage
VRAM
2.0
V
Note: *2 Current dissipation values assume that VIH min = VCC – 0.5 V and VIL max = 0.5 V,
all output pins are in the no-load state, and all MOS input pull-ups are off.
337
Table 20-5 Allowable Output Current Values
(5-V Versions)
– Preliminary for S-Mask Versions–
Conditions: VCC = 5.0 V ±10%, AVCC = 5.0 V ±10%, VSS = AVSS = 0 V,
Ta = –20 to +75˚C (Regular Specifications)
Ta = –40 to +85˚C (Wide-Range Specifications)
Item
Symbol
Min
–
Typ
–
Max
10
Unit
mA
mA
mA
mA
mA
mA
Allowable output
Low current (per pin)
Port 4
IOL
RES
–
–
3.0
2.0
40
Other output pins
Port 4, total of 8 pins
Total of all output pins
All output pins
–
–
Allowable output
Low current (total)
Σ IOL
–
–
–
–
80
Allowable output
–IOH
–
–
2.0
High current (per pin)
Allowable output
High current (total)
Total of all output
pins
Σ –IOH
–
–
25
mA
Table 20-6 Allowable Output Current Values (3-V S-Mask Versions)
–Preliminary–
Conditions: VCC = 3.0 to 5.5 V, VSS = AVSS = 0 V, Ta = –20 to +75˚C (Regular Specifications),
*1
AVCC = 3.0 to 5.5 V
Item
Symbol
Min
–
Typ
–
Max
10
Unit
mA
mA
mA
mA
mA
mA
Allowable output
Low current (per pin)
Port 4
IOL
RES
–
–
3.0
2.0
40
Other output pins
Port 4, total of 8 pins
Total of all output pins
All output pins
–
–
Allowable output
Low current (total)
Σ IOL
–
–
–
–
80
Allowable output
–IOH
–
–
2.0
High current (per pin)
Allowable output
Total of all output pins
Σ –IOH
–
–
25
mA
High current (total)
Note: *1 To avoid degrading the reliability of the chip, be careful not to exceed the output current
sink values in table 20-5. In particular, when driving a Darlington transistor pair or LED
directly, be sure to insert a current-limiting resistor in the output path. See figures 20-1
and 20-2.
338
Table 20-7 Allowable Output Current Values (2.7-V S-Mask Versions)
–Preliminary–
Conditions: VCC = 2.7 to 5.5 V, VSS = AVSS = 0 V, Ta = –20 to +75˚C (Regular Specifications),
*1
AVCC = 2.7 to 5.5 V
Item
Symbol
Min
–
Typ
–
Max
10
Unit
mA
mA
mA
mA
mA
mA
Allowable output
Low current (per pin)
Port 4
IOL
RES
–
–
3.0
2.0
40
Other output pins
Port 4, total of 8 pins
Total of all output pins
All output pins
–
–
Allowable output
Low current (total)
Σ IOL
–
–
–
–
80
Allowable output
–IOH
–
–
2.0
High current (per pin)
Allowable output
Total of all output pins
Σ –IOH
–
–
25
mA
High current (total)
Note: *1 To avoid degrading the reliability of the chip, be careful not to exceed the output current
sink values in table 20-5. In particular, when driving a Darlington transistor pair or LED
directly, be sure to insert a current-limiting resistor in the output path. See figures 20-1
and 20-2.
The S-mask versions (high-speed and low-voltage versions) are identical to the existing R-mask
versions functionally and in their pin arrangement. Due to the higher-speed design, however, there
are differences in the fabrication process, which lead to some differences in electrical
specifications, operating margin, noise margin, and other characteristics. These differences should
be noted during board design, and when switching from an R-mask to an S-mask version.
–Preliminary–
H8/534
H8/536
H8/534
H8/536
VCC
2 kΩ
600Ω
Port
Darlington pair
Port 4
LED
Figure 20-1 Example of Circuit for Driving a Figure 20-2 Example of Circuit for Driving
Darlington Transistor Pair an LED
339
20.2.2 AC Characteristics
The AC characteristics of the H8/534 and H8/536 are listed in three tables. Bus timing parameters
are given in table 20-8, control signal timing parameters in table 20-9, and timing parameters of
the on-chip supporting modules in table 20-10.
Table 20-8 (1) Bus Timing (R-Mask Versions)
Condition A (R-mask): VCC = 5.0 V ±10%, ø = 0.5 to 10 MHz, VSS = 0 V
Ta = –20 to +75˚C (Regular Specifications)
Ta = –40 to +85˚C (Wide-Range Specifications)
Condition A
6 MHz
8 MHz
10 MHz
Test
Conditions
Item
Symbol Min Max Min Max Min Max Unit
Clock cycle time
tcyc
166.7 2000 125 2000 100 2000 ns
See figure 20-4
Clock pulse width Low
Clock pulse width High
Clock rise time
tCL
65
65
–
–
45
45
–
–
35
35
–
–
ns
ns
ns
ns
ns
ns
ns
ns
ns
ns
ns
ns
ns
ns
tCH
–
–
–
tCr
15
15
70
–
15
15
60
–
15
15
55
–
Clock fall time
tCf
–
–
–
Address delay time
Address hold time
Data strobe delay time 1
Data strobe delay time 2
Data strobe delay time 3
tAD
–
–
–
tAH
30
–
25
–
20
–
tDSD1
tDSD2
tDSD3
70
70
70
–
60
60
60
–
40
50
50
–
–
–
–
–
–
Write data strobe pulse width tDSWW
200
25
105
60
0
150
20
80
50
0
120 –
Address setup time 1
Address setup time 2
Read data setup time
Read data hold time
Read data access time
Write data delay time
Write data setup time
Write data hold time
tAS1
–
–
15
65
40
0
–
–
–
–
tAS2
–
–
tRDS
tRDH
tACC
tWDD
tWDS
tWDH
–
–
–
–
–
280
70
–
–
190
65
–
–
160 ns
–
–
–
65
–
ns
ns
ns
30
30
15
25
10
20
–
–
–
340
Table 20-8 (1) Bus Timing (R-Mask Versions) (cont)
Condition A
10 MHz
Symbol Min Max Min Max Min Max Unit Conditions
8 MHz
16 MHz
Test
Item
Wait setup time
Wait hold time
Bus request setup time
tWTS
tWTH
tBRQS
40
10
40
–
–
40
10
40
–
–
40
10
40
–
–
ns See figure 20-5
–
–
–
ns
–
–
–
ns See figure 20-10
Bus acknowledge delay time 1 tBACD1
Bus acknowledge delay time 2 tBACD2
70
70
60
60
55
55
ns
ns
–
–
–
Bus floating delay time
E clock delay time
E clock rise time
tBZD
tED
–
tBACD1 –
tBACD1 –
tBACD1 ns
–
20
15
15
–
–
–
–
0
15
15
15
–
–
–
–
0
15
15
15
–
ns See figure 20-11
tEr
–
ns
E clock fall time
tEf
–
ns
Read data hold time
(E clock sync)
tRDHE
0
ns See figure 20-6
Write data hold time
(E clock sync)
tWDHE
50
–
40
–
30
–
ns
341
Table 20-8 (2) Bus Timing (S-Mask Versions)
–Preliminary–
Condition B (5-V S-mask): VCC = 5.0 V ±10%, ø = 2.0 to 16 MHz, VSS = 0 V,
Ta = –20 to +75˚C (Regular Specifications),
Ta = –40 to +85˚C (Wide-Range Specifications)
Condition C (3-V S-mask): VCC = 3.0 to 5.5 V, ø = 2.0 to 10 MHz, VSS = 0 V,
Ta = –20 to +75˚C (Regular Specifications)
Condition D (2.7-V S-mask): VCC = 2.7 to 5.5 V, ø = 2.0 to 8 MHz, VSS = 0 V,
Ta = –20 to +75˚C (Regular Specifications)
Condition D Condition C Condition B
8 MHz
10 MHz
16 MHz
Test
Item
Symbol
tcyc
tCL
Min Max
125 500
Min Max
100 500
Min Max Unit Conditions
Clock cycle time
Clock pulse width Low
Clock pulse width High
Clock rise time
62.5 500
ns
ns
ns
ns
ns
ns
ns
ns
ns
ns
ns
See figure
20-4
35
35
–
–
30
30
–
–
20
20
–
–
tCH
–
–
–
tCr
20
20
60
–
20
20
55
–
10
10
30
–
Clock fall time
tCf
–
–
–
Address delay time
Address hold time
tAD
–
–
–
tAH
20
–
10
–
5
Data strobe delay time 1 tDSD1
Data strobe delay time 2 tDSD2
Data strobe delay time 3 tDSD3
60
60
60
–
40
50
50
–
–
30
30
30
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
Write data strobe
pulse width
tDSWW
150
120
70
Address setup time 1
Address setup time 2
Read data setup time
Read data hold time
Read data access time
Write data delay time
Write data setup time
Write data hold time
Wait setup time
tAS1
20
80
50
0
–
15
65
40
0
–
10
30
20
0
–
ns
ns
ns
ns
ns
ns
ns
ns
ns
ns
ns
ns
tAS2
–
–
–
tRDS
tRDH
tACC
tWDD
tWDS
tWDH
tWTS
tWTH
tBRQS
tBACD1
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
190
75
–
–
160
70
–
–
100
50
–
–
–
–
15
25
40
10
40
–
10
20
40
10
40
–
10
10
30
10
30
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
See figure
20-5
Wait hold time
–
–
–
Bus request setup time
–
–
–
See figure
20-10
Bus acknowledge
delay time 1
60
55
30
342
Table 20-8 (2) Bus Timing (S-Mask Versions) (cont)
–Preliminary–
Conditions D Conditions C Conditions B
8 MHz
10 MHz
16 MHz
Test
Condition
Item
Symbol
Min Max
Min Max
Min Max Unit
Bus acknowledge
delay time 2
tBACD2
–
60
–
55
–
30
ns
See figure
20-10
Bus floating delay time
E clock delay time
E clock rise time
tBZD
tED
–
–
–
–
0
tBACD1
20
–
–
–
–
0
tBACD1
20
–
–
–
–
0
tBACD1 ns
See figure
20-11
10
10
10
–
ns
ns
ns
ns
tEr
20
20
E clock fall time
tEf
20
20
Read data hold time
(E clock sync)
tRDHE
–
–
See figure
20-6
Write data hold time
(E clock sync)
tWDHE
40
–
30
–
10
–
ns
343
Table 20-9 (1) Control Signal Timing (R-Mask Versions)
Condition A (R-mask): VCC = 5.0 V ±10%, ø = 0.5 to 10 MHz, VSS = 0 V,
Ta = –20 to +75˚C (Regular Specifications),
Ta = –40 to +85˚C (Wide-Range Specifications)
Condition A
6 MHz
8 MHz
10 MHz
Min Max Unit Condition
Test
Item
Symbol Min Max
Min Max
RES setup time
RES pulse width 1*
RES pulse width 2*
RES output delay time
RES output pulse width
NMI setup time
tRESS
200
6.0
520
–
–
200
6.0
520
–
–
200
6.0
520
–
–
ns
tcyc
tcyc
ns
tcyc
ns
ns
ns
ns
ns
ns
ns
ns
See figure
20-7
tRESW1
tRESW2
tRESD
–
–
–
–
–
–
100
–
100
–
100
–
See figure
20-8
tRESOW 132
132
150
10
132
150
10
tNMIS
150
10
–
–
–
See figure
20-9
NMI hold time
tNMIH
tIRQ0S
tIRQ1S
tIRQ1H
tTRGS
tTRGH
tNMIW
–
–
–
IRQ0 setup time
IRQ1 setup time
IRQ1 hold time
50
–
50
–
50
–
50
–
50
–
50
–
10
–
10
–
10
–
A/D trigger setup time
A/D trigger hold time
50
–
50
–
50
–
See figure
20-22
10
–
10
–
10
–
NMI pulse width (for
recovery from software
standby mode)
200
–
200
–
200
–
Crystal oscillator settling
time (reset)
tOSC1
tOSC2
20
10
–
–
20
10
–
–
20
10
–
–
ms See figure
20-12
Crystal oscillator settling
time (software standby)
ms See figure
18-1
Note: * tRESW2 applies at power-on and when the RSTOE bit in the reset control/status register
(RSTCSR) is set to 1. tRESW1 applies when RSTOE is cleared to 0.
344
Table 20-9 (2) Control Signal Timing (S-Mask Versions)
–Preliminary–
Condition B (5-V S-mask): VCC = 5.0 V ±10%, ø = 2.0 to 16 MHz, VSS = 0 V,
Ta = –20 to +75˚C (Regular Specifications),
Ta = –40 to +85˚C (Wide-Range Specifications)
Condition C (3-V S-mask): VCC = 3.0 to 5.5 V, ø = 2.0 to 10 MHz, VSS = 0 V,
Ta = –20 to +75˚C (Regular Specifications)
Condition D (2.7-V S-mask): VCC = 2.7 to 5.5 V, ø = 2.0 to 8 MHz, VSS = 0 V,
Ta = –20 to +75˚C (Regular Specifications)
Condition D Condition C
Condition B
16 MHz
8 MHz
10 MHz
Test
Conditions
Item
Symbol Min Max
Min Max
Min Max Unit
See figure
20-7
RES setup time
RES pulse width 1*
RES pulse width 2*
tRESS
200
6.0
520
–
–
–
200
6.0
520
–
–
–
200
6.0
520
–
–
–
–
ns
tRESW1
tRESW2
tcyc
tcyc
–
–
See figure
20-8
RES output delay time tRESD
RES output pulse width tRESOW
100
–
100
–
100 ns
132
200
10
132
200
10
132
150
10
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
tcyc
ns
ns
ns
ns
ns
ns
ns
ns
See figure
20-9
NMI setup time
NMI hold time
IRQ0 setup time
IRQ1 setup time
IRQ1 hold time
tNMIS
tNMIH
tIRQ0S
tIRQ1S
tIRQ1H
–
–
–
–
50
–
50
–
50
50
–
50
–
50
10
–
10
–
10
See figure
20-22
A/D trigger setup time tTRGS
50
–
50
–
50
A/D trigger hold time
tTRGH
tNMIW
10
–
10
–
10
NMI pulse width
(for recovery from
software standby
mode)
200
–
200
–
200
Crystal oscillator
settling time (reset)
tOSC1
tOSC2
20
10
–
–
20
10
–
–
20
10
–
–
ms
ms
See figure
20-12
Crystal oscillator
settling time
See figure
18-1
(software standby)
Note: * tRESW2 applies at power-on and when the RSTOE bit in the reset contol/status register
(RSTCSR) is set to 1. tRESW1 applies when RSTOE is cleared to 0.
345
Table 20-10 Timing Conditions of On-Chip
Supporting Modules
– Preliminary for S-Mask Versions–
Condition A (R-mask):
VCC = 5.0 V ±10%, ø = 0.5 to 10 MHz, VSS = 0 V,
Ta = –20 to +75˚C(Regular Specifications),
Ta = –40 to +85˚C (Wide-Range Specifications)
Condition B (5-V S-mask): VCC = 5.0 V ±10%, ø = 2.0 to 16 MHz, VSS = 0 V,
Ta = –20 to +75˚C (Regular Specifications),
Ta = –40 to +85˚C (Wide-Range Specifications)
Condition C (3-V S-mask): VCC = 3.0 to 5.5 V, ø = 2.0 to 10 MHz, VSS = 0 V,
Ta = –20 to +75˚C (Regular Specifications)
Condition D (2.7-V S-mask): VCC = 2.7 to 5.5 V, ø = 2.0 to 8 MHz, VSS = 0 V,
Ta = –20 to +75˚C (Regular Specifications)
Condition A
Condition D Condition C Condition B
6 MHz
8 MHz
10 MHz
16 MHz
Min Max Unit Conditions
Test
Item
Symbol Min Max
Min Max
Min Max
FRT
Timer output
delay time
tFTOD
–
100
–
100
–
100
–
100 ns
See figure
20-14
Timer input
setup time
tFTIS
50
50
–
50
50
1.5
–
–
50
50
1.5
–
–
50
50
1.5
–
–
–
–
ns
Timer clock
tFTCS
–
–
–
ns
See figure
20-15
input setup time
Timer clock
pulse width
tFTCWL, 1.5
tFTCWH
–
–
–
tcyc
TMR
Timer output
delay time
tTMOD
–
100
–
100
–
100
–
100 ns
See figure
20-16
Timer clock
tTMCS
50
50
1.5
50
–
50
1.5
50
–
50
1.5
50
–
–
–
–
ns
See figure
20-17
input setup time
Timer clock
pulse width
tTMCWL, 1.5
tTMCWH
–
–
–
tcyc
ns
Timer reset
tTMRS
50
–
–
–
See figure
20-18
input setup time
PWM
Timer output
delay time
tPWOD
–
100
100
100
100 ns
See figure
20-19
346
Table 20-10 Timing Conditions of On-Chip
Supporting Modules (cont)
– Preliminary for S-Mask Versions–
Condition A
Condition D Condition C Condition B
6 MHz
8 MHz
Min Max
10 MHz
16 MHz
Min Max Unit Conditions
Test
Item
Symbol Min Max
Min Max
SCI Input
(Async) tScyc
(Sync)
2
–
2
4
–
–
2
4
–
–
2
4
–
–
tcyc See figure
clock cycle
20-20
4
–
tcyc
Input
tSCKW
0.4
0.6
0.4 0.6
0.4 0.6
0.4 0.6
tScyc
pulse width
Transmit (Sync) tTXD
data delay
–
100
–
–
100
–
–
100
–
–
100 ns
See figure
20-21
Receive
data setup
time
(Sync) tRXS
(Sync) tRXH
tPWD
100
100
100
100
–
–
ns
ns
Receive
data hold
time
100
–
–
100
–
–
100
–
–
100
–
Port Output data
delay time
100
100
100
100 ns
See figure
20-13
Input data setup time tPRS
Input data hold time tPRH
50
50
–
–
50
50
–
–
50
50
–
–
50
50
–
–
ns
ns
• Measurement Conditions for AC Characteristics
5 V
RL
H8/534
(H8/536)
output pin
C = 90 pF: P1, P2, P3, P4, P5, P6
= 30 pF: P7, P9
RL = 2.4 kΩ
RH = 12 kΩ
Input/output timing reference levels
Low: 0.8 V
RH
C
High: 2.0 V
Figure 20-3 Output Load Circuit
347
tAH, tDSWW, tAS1, tAS2, and tACC depend on tcyc as shown below.
(1) VCC = 5.0 V ±10% (S-mask)
–Preliminary–
tAH
tDSWW = 1.5 × tcyc – 24 (ns)
tAS1 = 0.5 × tcyc – 21 (ns)
= 0.5 × tcyc – 26 (ns)
tAS2 = tcyc – 32 (ns)
tACC = 2.5 × tcyc – 56 (ns)
(2) VCC = 3.0 V (S-mask)
tAH
= 0.5 × tcyc – 40 (ns)
tAS2 = tcyc – 35 (ns)
tDSWW = 1.5 × tcyc – 30 (ns)
tACC = 2.5 × tcyc – 90 (ns)
tAS1
= 0.5 × tcyc – 35 (ns)
(3) VCC = 2.7 V (S-mask)
tAH
= 0.5 × tcyc – 42 (ns)
tAS2 = tcyc – 45 (ns)
tDSWW = 1.5 × tcyc – 37 (ns)
tACC = 2.5 × tcyc – 122 (ns)
tAS1
= 0.5 × tcyc – 42 (ns)
348
20.2.3 A/D Converter Characteristics
Tables 20-11 and 20-12 list the characteristics of the on-chip A/D converter.
Tables 20-11 A/D Converter Characteristics
(5-V Versions)
– Preliminary for S-Mask Versions–
Conditions: VCC = 5.0V ±10%, AVCC = 5.0V ±10%, VSS = AVSS = 0V,
Ta = –20 to +75˚C (Regular Specifications)
Ta = –40 to +85˚C (Wide-Range Specifications)
R-Mask
S-Mask
16 MHz
6 MHz
8 MHz
10 MHz
Item
Min Typ Max Min Typ Max Min Typ Max Min Typ Max Unit
Resolution
Conversion time
10
—
—
10
—
—
10
10
10
—
—
10
10
10
—
—
10
10
10
—
—
10
Bits
23.0 —
17.25—
13.8 —
8.625 µs
Analog input
capacitance
20
10
—
—
20
10
—
—
20
10
—
—
20
5
pF
Allowable signal-
source impedance
—
—
—
—
—
kΩ
Nonlinearity error
Offset error
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
±2.0 —
±2.0 —
±2.0 —
±0.5 —
±2.5 —
—
—
—
—
—
±2.0 —
±2.0 —
±2.0 —
±0.5 —
±2.5 —
—
—
—
—
—
±2.0 —
±2.0 —
±2.0 —
±0.5 —
±2.5 —
—
—
—
—
—
±2.0 LSB
±2.0 LSB
±2.0 LSB
±0.5 LSB
±2.5 LSB
Full-scale error
Quantizing error
Absolute accuracy
349
Table 20-12 A/D Converter Characteristics
–Preliminary–
Condition C (3-V S-mask): VCC = 3.0 to 5.5 V, VSS = AVSS = 0 V, Ta = –20 to +75˚C
(Regular Specifications), AVCC = 3.0 to 5.5 V
Condition D (2.7-V S-mask): VCC = 2.7 to 5.5 V, VSS = AVSS = 0 V, Ta = –20 to +75˚C
(Regular Specifications), AVCC = 2.7 to 5.5 V
Condition D*1
8 MHz
Condition C*2
10 MHz
Item
Min
Typ
10
–
Max
Min
Typ
10
–
Max Unit
10 Bits
13.8 µs
Resolution
10
–
10
10
–
Conversion time
Analog input capacitance
Allowable signal-source impedance
Nonlinearity error
Offset error
17.25
20
–
–
–
–
20
5
pF
–
–
5
–
–
kΩ
–
–
±3.5
±3.5
±3.5
±0.5
±4.0
–
–
±3.5 LSB
±3.5 LSB
±3.5 LSB
±0.5 LSB
±4.0 LSB
–
–
–
–
Full-scale error
–
–
–
–
Quantizing error
Absolute accuracy
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
Notes: Maximum operating frequency of A/D converter:
*1 AVCC = 2.7 to 3.0 V: 8 MHz (conversion time: 17.25 µs)
*2 AVCC = 3.0 to 4.5 V: 10 MHz (conversion time: 13.8 µs)
20.3 MCU Operational Timing
This section provides the following timing charts:
20.3.1 Bus timing
Figures 20-4 to 20-6
20.3.2 Control Signal Timing
20.3.3 Clock Timing
20.3.4 I/O Port Timing
Figures 20-7 to 20-10
Figures 20-11 and 20-12
Figure 20-13
20.3.5 16-Bit Free-Running Timer Timing
20.3.6 8-Bit Timer Timing
20.3.7 Pulse Width Modulation Timer Timing
20.3.8 Serial Communication InterfaceTiming
Figures 20-14 and 20-15
Figures 20-16 to 20-18
Figure 20-19
Figure 20-20 and 20-21
350
20.3.1 Bus Timing
1. Basic Bus Cycle (without Wait States) in Expanded Modes
T1
T2
T3
tcyc
tCH
tCL
tCf
ø
tCr
tAD
A19 to A0
R/W
tDSD1
tDSD3
tAH
tAS1
AS,
DS (Read),
RD
tRDS
tRDH
tACC
D7 to D0
(Read)
tDSD2
tDSD3
tAS2
tDSWW
tAH
DS (Write),
WR
tWDD
tWDH
tWDS
D7 to D0
(Write)
Figure 20-4 Basic Bus Cycle (without Wait States) in Expanded Modes
351
2. Basic Bus Cycle (with 1 Wait State) in Expanded Modes
T1
T2
TW
T3
ø
A19 to A0
R/W
DS (Read),
RD
D7 to D0
(Read)
DS (Write),
RD
D7 to D0
(Write)
tWTS tWTH
tWTS tWTH
WAIT
Figure 20-5 Basic Bus Cycle (with 1 Wait State) in Expanded Modes
352
3. Bus Cycle Synchronized with E Clock
ø
E
tED
A19 to A0
R/W
tDSD3
tAH
AS,
DS (Read),
RD
tRDS
tRDHE
D7 to D0 (Read)
tDSD3
tAH
DS (Write),
WR
tWDHE
D7 to D0 (Write)
Figure 20-6 Bus Cycle Synchronized with E Clock
353
20.3.2 Control Signal Timing
1. Reset Input Timing
ø
tRESS
tRESS
RES
tRESW1, tRESW2
Figure 20-7 Reset Input Timing
2. Reset Output Timing
ø
tRESD
tRESD
RES
tRESOW
Figure 20-8 Reset Output Timing
3. NMI Pulse Width
ø
tNMIS
tNMIH
NMI
tIRQ1S
tIRQ1H
IRQ1to IRQ5
tIRQ0S
IRQ0
Figure 20-9 Interrupt Input Timing
354
4. Bus Release State Timing
ø
t
BRQS
t
BRQS
BREQ
(Input)
t
t
BACD1
t
BACD2
BACK
(Output)
BZD
t
AD
A19 to A0,
R/W, DS,
RD, WR,
AS
Figure 20-10 Bus Release State Timing
20.3.3 Clock Timing
1. E Clock Timing
ø
E
tED
tED
tEf
tEr
Figure 20-11 E Clock Timing
355
2. Clock Oscillator Stabilization Timing
Figure 20-12 Clock Oscillator Stabilization Timing
356
20.3.4 I/O Port Timing
Port read/write cycle
T2
T1
T3
ø
t
PRS
t
PRH
Port 1
to
(Input)
port 9
t
PWD
*
Port 1
to
(Output)
port 9
* Except P11, P10, and P87 to P80
Figure 20-13 I/O Port Input/Output Timing
357
20.3.5 16-Bit Free-Running Timer Timing
1. Free-Running Timer Input/Output Timing
ø
Free-running
Compare-match
timer counter
t
FTOD
FTOA1, FTOB1,
FTOA2, FTOB2,
FTOA3, FTOB3
t
FTIS
FTI1, FTI2, FTI3
Figure 20-14 Free-Running Timer Input/Output Timing
2. External Clock Input Timing for Free-Running Timers
ø
tFTCS
FTCI1,
FTCI2,
FTCI3
tFTCWL
tFTCWH
Figure 20-15 External Clock Input Timing for Free-Running Timers
358
20.3.6 8-Bit Timer Timing
1. 8-Bit Timer Output Timing
ø
Timer
Compare-match
counter
t
TMOD
TMO
Figure 20-16 8-Bit Timer Output Timing
2. 8-Bit Timer Clock Input Timing
ø
t
TMCS
t
TMCS
TMCI
t
TMCWL
t
TMCWH
Figure 20-17 8-Bit Timer Clock Input Timing
3. 8-Bit Timer Reset Input Timing
ø
t
TMRS
TMRI
Timer
counter
n
H'00
Figure 20-18 8-Bit Timer Reset Input Timing
359
20.3.7 Pulse Width Modulation Timer Timing
ø
Timer
Compare-match
counter
tPWOD
PW1 , PW2 ,
PW3
Figure 20-19 PWM Timer Output Timing
20.3.8 Serial Communication Interface Timing
tSCKW
tScyc
Figure 20-20 SCI Input Clock Timing
tScyc
Serial clock
trXD
Transmit
data
tRXS
tRXH
Receive
data
Figure 20-21 SCI Input/Output Timing (Synchronous Mode)
360
20.3.9 A/D Trigger Signal Input Timing
ø
tTRGS
tTRGH
ADTRG
Figure 20-22 A/D Trigger Signal Input Timing
361
Appendix A Instructions
A.1 Instruction Set
Operation Notation
Rd
General register (destination operand)
FP
Frame pointer
Rs
Rn
General register (source operand)
General register
#IMM Immediate data
disp
+
Displacement
Add
(EAd) Destination operand
(EAs) Source operand
–
Subtract
CCR
N
Z
V
C
CR
PC
CP
SP
Condition code register
N (Negative) flag in CCR
Z (Zero) flag in CCR
V (Overflow) flag in CCR
C (Carry) flag in CCR
Control register
Program counter
Code page register
Stack pointer
×
÷
Multiply
Divide
Logical AND
Logical OR
Logical exclusive OR
Move
→
↔
¬
Swap
Logical NOT
Condition Code Notation
↕
0
Changed after instruction execution
Cleared to 0
1
Set to 1
—
∆
Value before operation is retained
Changed depending on condition
363
Size
B/W
B/W
CCR Bit
Mnemonic
MOV: G (EAs)
Rs
#IMM
MOV: E #IMM
Operation
→ Rd
→ (EAd)
→ (EAd)
→ Rd
N
↕
Z
V
C
—
Data
transfer
↕
0
(short format)
B
B/W
↕
↕
↕
↕
0
0
—
—
MOV: F
@ (d: 8, FP)
→ Rd
Rs
→ @ (d: 8, FP)(short format)
MOV: I
MOV: L
MOV: S Rs
LDM
STM
XCH
SWAP
MOVTPE Rs
MOVFPE (EAs)
ADD: G
ADD: Q
#IMM
(@aa: 8)
→ Rd
→ Rd
(short format)
(short format)
W
B/W
B/W
W
W
W
↕
↕
↕
—
—
—
↕
—
—
↕
↕
↕
↕
↕
— —
— —
— —
↕
— —
— —
0
0
0
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
↕
→ (@aa: 8) (short format)
@ SP + → Rn (register list)
Rn (register list)
Rs ← → Rd
→ @ – SP
Rd (upper byte) ← → Rd (lower byte)
B
0
→ (EAd) Synchronized with E clock B
→ Rd Synchronized with E clock B
Rd + (EAs)
(EAd) + #IMM → (EAd)
(#IMM = ±1, ±2)
Arith-
metic
opera-
tions
→ Rd
B/W
↕
↕
↕
↕
B/W
B/W
↕
(short format)
ADDS
Rd + (EAs)
→ Rd
—
— —
—
(Rd is always word size)
ADDX
DADD
SUB
SUBS
SUBX
DSUB
MULXU
Rd + (EAs) + C
(Rd)10 + (Rs)10 + C
→ Rd
→ (Rd)10
B/W
B
B/W
B/W
B/W
B
↕
—
↕
—
↕
—
↕
↕
↕
↕
↕
—
↕
↕
↕
↕
—
↕
↕
0
Rd – (EAs)
Rd – (EAs)
→ Rd
→ Rd
— —
Rd – (EAs) – C
(Rd)10 – (Rs)10 – C
→ Rd
↕
↕
↕
↕
—
0
→ (Rd)10
Rd × (EAs)
(Unsigned)
Rd ÷ (EAs)
(Unsigned)
→ Rd 8 × 8
B/W
16 × 16
→ Rd 16 ÷ 8
32 ÷ 16
DIVXU
B/W
B/W
↕
↕
↕
↕
↕
↕
0
CMP: G
Rd – (EAs), Set CCR
↕
(EAd) – #IMM, Set CCR
CMP: E
CMP: I
Rd – #IMM, Set CCR (short format)
Rd – #IMM, Set CCR (short format)
B
W
↕
↕
↕
↕
↕
↕
↕
↕
364
Size
B/W
B
CCR Bit
Mnemonic
EXTS
Operation
(< Bit 7 > of < Rd >)
N
↕
Z
V
C
0
Arith-
metic
↕
0
→ (< Bit 15 to 8 > of < Rd >)
→ (<Bit 15 to 8 > of < Rd >)
opera- EXTU
0
B
0
↕
↕
↕
1
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
↕
0
0
tions
TST
NEG
CLR
TAS
(EAd) – 0, Set CCR
0 – (EAd) → (EAd)
B/W
B/W
B/W
B
↕
↕
0
0
→ (EAd)
(EAd) – 0, Set CCR
(1) → (< Bit 7 > of < EAd >)
↕
↕
2
MSB
MSB
MSB
MSB
LSB
LSB
LSB
LSB
Shift
opera-
tions
SHAL
SHAR
SHLL
B/W
B/W
B/W
B/W
B/W
B/W
B/W
B/W
↕
↕
↕
0
↕
↕
↕
↕
↕
↕
↕
↕
↕
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
↕
↕
↕
↕
↕
↕
↕
↕
C
0
C
0
C
0
SHLR
ROTL
ROTR
ROTXL
ROTXR
AND
C
↕
↕
↕
↕
MSB
MSB
MSB
LSB
LSB
LSB
C
C
C
C
MSB
LSB
Logic
opera- OR
tions
Rd (EAs)
Rd (EAs)
→ Rd
→ Rd
→ Rd
B/W
B/W
B/W
B/W
B/W
↕
↕
↕
↕
—
↕
↕
↕
↕
↕
0
0
0
0
—
—
—
—
—
XOR
NOT
BSET
Rd
(EAs)
¬ (EAd)
→ (EAd)
Bit
manipu-
lations BCLR
¬ (< Bit number > of < EAd >) → Z
→ (< Bit number > of < EAd >)
¬ (< Bit number > of < EAd >) → Z
→ (< Bit number > of < EAd >)
—
1
B/W
—
↕
—
—
0
BTST
BNOT
¬ (< Bit number > of < EAd >) → Z
¬ (< Bit number > of < EAd >) → Z
→ (< Bit number > of < EAd >)
B/W
B/W
—
—
↕
↕
—
—
—
—
365
Size
B/W
—
CCR Bit
Mnemonic
Branch- Bcc
ing
instruc-
tions
Operation
If condition is true then
PC + disp → PC
else next;
N
—
Z
V
C
—
—
—
Mnemonic
BRA
BRN
BHI
Description
Condition
True
(BT)
(BF)
Always (True)
Never (False)
HIgh
False
C
C
Z = 0
Z = 1
BLS
Low or Same
Carry Clear (High or Same)
Carry Set (LOw)
Not Equal
BCC
BCS
BNE
BEQ
BVC
BVS
BPL
(BHS)
(BLO)
C = 0
C = 1
Z = 0
Z = 1
V = 0
V = 1
N = 0
N = 1
EQual
oVerflow Clear
oVerflow Set
PLus
BMI
MInus
BGE
BLT
Greater or Equal
Less Than
N
N
V = 0
V = 1
BGT
BLE
Greater Than
Less or Equal
Z
Z
(N V) = 0
(N V) = 1
JMP
PJMP
BSR
Effective address → PC
Effective address → CP, PC
PC → @ – SP
—
—
—
—
—
—
— —
— —
— —
—
—
—
PC + disp → PC
PC → @ – SP
Effective address → PC
PC → @ – SP
JSR
—
—
—
—
— —
— —
—
—
PJSR
CP → @ – SP
Effective address → CP, PC
@ SP + → PC
@ SP + → CP
RTS
PRTS
—
—
—
—
— —
— —
—
—
@ SP + → PC
RTD
@ SP + → PC
SP + #IMM → SP
@ SP + → CP
—
—
—
—
— —
— —
—
—
PRTD
@ SP + → PC
SP + #IMM → SP
If condition is true then next;
else Rn – 1 → Rn;
SCB
SCB/F
—
—
— —
—
SCB/NE If Rn = –1 then next;
SCB/EQ else PC + disp → PC;
Mnemonic
Description
Condition
SCB/F
False
SCB/NE
SCB/EQ
Not Equal
Equal
Z = 0
Z = 1
366
Size
B/W
—
CCR Bit
Mnemonic
System TRAPA
control
Operation
PC → @ – SP
(If MAX MODE CP → @ – SP)
SR → @ – SP
N
—
Z
V
C
—
—
—
(If MAX MODE < vector > → CP)
< vector > → PC
TRAP/VS If V bit = “1” then TRAP
—
—
—
—
—
—
else next;
RTE
@ SP + → SR
↕
↕
↕
↕
(If MAX MODE @ SP + → CP)
@ SP + → PC
LINK
UNLK
FP (R6) → @ – SP
SP → FP (R6)
SP + #IMM → SP
FP (R6) → SP
@SP + → FP
Normal running mode
(EAs) → CR
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
SLEEP
LDC
STC
ANDC
ORC
XORC
NOP
→
power-down state
—
B/W*
B/W*
B/W*
B/W*
B/W*
—
CR → (EAd)
CR #IMM → CR
CR #IMM → CR
CR #IMM → CR
PC + 1 → PC
—
—
—
—
* Depends on the CR.
367
A.2 Instruction Codes
Table A-1(a) to (d) shows the machine-language coding of each instruction.
• How to read table A-1 (a) to (d)
The general operand format consists of an effective address (EA) field and operation-code (OP)
field specified in the following order.
EA field
2
Op field
5
1
3
4
6
Bytes 2, 3, 5, 6 are not present in all instructions.
368
Operation code (OP)
5
Instruction
4
6
MOV:G.B <EAs >, Rd
MOV:G.W <EAs >, Rd
MOV:G.B Rs , <EAd>
MOV:G.W Rs , <EAd>
2
2
2
2
2
2
3
3
3
3
4
4
4
4
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
3
3
3
3
4
4
4
4
3
3
1 0 0 0 0 rd rd rd
1 0 0 0 0 rd rd rd
1 0 0 1 0 rs rs rs
1 0 0 1 0 rs rs rs
4
4
Byte length of instruction
Shading indicates addressing
modes not available for this
instruction.
Some instructions have a special format in which the operation code comes first.
The following notation is used in the tables.
•
Sz: Operand size (byte or word)
Byte: Sz = 0
Word:Sz = 1
369
• rrr : General register number field
rrr
Sz = 0 (Byte)
Sz = 1 (Word)
15
8 7
0
15
0
000
001
010
011
100
101
110
111
Not used
R0
R1
R2
R3
R4
R5
R6
R7
R0
R1
R2
R3
R4
R5
R6
R7
Not used
Not used
Not used
Not used
Not used
Not used
Not used
• ccc : Control register number field
ccc
Sz = 0 (Byte)
Sz = 1 (Word)
15
0
000
(Not allowed*)
SR
7
0
CCR
001
010
011
100
101
110
111
(Not allowed)
(Not allowed)
(Not allowed)
(Not allowed)
(Not allowed)
(Not allowed)
(Not allowed)
(Not allowed)
BR
EP
DP
(Not allowed)
TP
* “Not allowed” means that this combination of bits must not be specified. Specifying a disallowed
combination may cause abnormal results.
370
• register list: A byte in which bits indicate general registers as follows
Bit
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
0
R7
R6
R5
R4
R3
R2
R1
R0
• #VEC: Four bits designating a vector number from 0 to 15. The vector numbers correspond to
addresses of entries in the exception vector table as follows:
Vector Address
#VEC Minimum Mode Maximum Mode
Vector Address
#VEC Minimum Mode Maximum Mode
0
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
H'0020 – H'0021
H'0022 – H'0023
H'0024 – H'0025
H'0026 – H'0027
H'0028 – H'0029
H'0040 – H'0043
H'0044 – H'0047
H'0048 – H'004B
H'004C – H'004F
H'0050 – H'0053
8
H'0030 – H'0031
H'0032 – H'0033
H'0034 – H'0035
H'0036 – H'0037
H'0038 – H'0039
H'0060 – H'0063
H'0064 – H'0067
H'0068 – H'006B
H'006C – H'006F
H'0070 – H'0073
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
H'002A – H'002B H'0054 – H'0057
H'002C – H'002D H'0058 – H'005B
H'002E – H'002F H'005C – H'005F
H'003A – H'003B H'0074 – H'0077
H'003C – H'003D H'0078 – H'007B
H'003E – H'003F H'007C – H'007F
• Examples of machine-language coding
Example 1: ADD:G.B @R0, R1
EA Field
1101Szrrr
11010000
OP Field
Notes
Table A-1 (a)
Machine code
00100rdrdrd
Machine code for ADD:G.B @Rs, Rd
00100 0 0 1 Sz = 0 (byte)
H'D021 Rs = R0, Rd = R1
Example 2: ADD:G.W @H'11:8, R1
EA Field
OP Field
Notes
Table A-1 (a)
Machine code 0000 1 101 00010001 00100 0 0 1 Sz = 1 (word)
H'0D1121 aa = H'11, Rd = R1
0000Sz101 00010001 00100rdrdrd Machine code for ADD:G.W @aa:8, Rd
371
Table A-1 (a) Machine Language Coding [General Format]
Operation code (OP)
Instruction
4
5
6
MOV:G.B <EAs >, Rd
MOV:G.W <EAs >, Rd
MOV:G.B Rs , <EAd>
MOV:G.W Rs , <EAd>
MOV:G.B #xx:8, <EAd>
MOV:G.W #xx:8, <EAd>
MOV:G.W #xx:16, <EAd>
LDM.W @SP+, <register list>
STM.W<register list>,@–SP
XCH.W Rs ,Rd
2
2
2
2
2
2
3
3
4
3
3
3
3
4
4
5
4
4
4
4
5
5
6
2
2
2
2
3
3
4
2
2
2
2
3
3
4
2
3
3
3
3
4
4
5
4
4
4
4
5
5
6
3
1 0 0 0 0rd rd rd
4
4
1 0 0 0 0rd rd rd
1 0 0 1 0rs rs rs
1 0 0 1 0rs rs rs
0 0 0 0 0 1 1 0 data
0 0 0 0 0 1 1 0 data
0 0 0 0 0 1 1 1 data (H)
0 0 0 0 0 0 1 0 register list
0 0 0 0 0 0 1 0 register list
1 0 0 1 0rd rd rd
data (L)
2
2
2
SWAP.B Rd
0 0 0 1 0 0 0 0
MOVTPE.B Rs , <EAd>
MOVTPE.B <EAs>, Rd
ADD:G.B <EAs>, Rd
ADD:G.W <EAs>, Rd
ADD:Q.B #1, <EAd>*
ADD:Q.W #1, <EAd>*
ADD:Q.B #2, <EAd>*
ADD:Q.W #2, <EAd>*
ADD:Q.B #-1, <EAd>*
ADD:Q.W #-1, <EAd>*
ADD:Q.B #-2, <EAd>*
ADD:Q.W #-2, <EAd>*
ADDS.B <EAs >, Rd
ADDS.W <EAs>, Rd
ADDX.B <EAs >, Rd
ADDX.W <EAs>, Rd
3
3
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
4
4
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
5
5
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
3
3
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
3
3
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
4
4
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
5
5
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 1 0 0 1 0rs rs rs
0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 1 0 0 1 0rd rd rd
0 0 1 0 0rd rd rd
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
3
4
0 0 1 0 0rd rd rd
0 0 0 0 1 0 0 0
0 0 0 0 1 0 0 0
0 0 0 0 1 0 0 1
0 0 0 0 1 0 0 1
0 0 0 0 1 1 0 0
0 0 0 0 1 1 0 0
0 0 0 0 1 1 0 1
0 0 0 0 1 1 0 1
3
3
0 0 1 0 1rd rd rd
4
4
0 0 1 0 1rd rd rd
1 0 1 0 0rd rd rd
1 0 1 0 0rd rd rd
Note: *Short format instruction
372
Table A-1 (a) Machine Language Coding [General Format] (cont)
Operation code (OP)
Instruction
4
5
6
DADD.B Rs ,Rd
0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 1 0 1 0 0rd rd rd
0 0 1 1 0rd rd rd
SUB.B <EAs>, Rd
SUB.W <EAs>, R d
SUBS.B <EAs>, Rd
SUBS.W <EAs>,Rd
SUBX.B <EA s>, Rd
SUBX.W <EAs>, Rd
DSUB.B Rs, Rd
2
2
2
2
2
2
3
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
3
3
3
3
3
3
4
4
4
4
4
4
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
3
3
3
3
3
3
4
4
4
4
4
4
3
3
3
4
4
4
0 0 1 1 0rd rd rd
0 0 1 1 1rd rd rd
0 0 1 1 1rd rd rd
1 0 1 1 0rd rd rd
1 0 1 1 0rd rd rd
0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 1 0 1 1 0rd rd rd
1 0 1 0 1rd rd rd
MULXU.B <EAs>, Rd
MULXU.X <EAs>, Rd
DIVXU.B <EAs>, Rd
DIVXU.W <EAs>, Rd
CMP:G.B <EAs>, Rd
CMP:G.W <EAs >, Rd
CMP:G.B #xx, <EAd >
CMP:G.W #xx, <EAd>
EXTS.B Rd
2
2
2
2
3
2
3
4
3
3
3
3
4
3
4
5
4
4
4
4
5
4
5
6
2
2
2
2
3
2
3
4
2
2
2
2
3
2
3
4
3
3
3
3
4
3
4
5
4
4
4
4
5
4
5
6
3
3
3
4
4
4
1 0 1 0 1rd rd rd
1 0 1 1 1rd rd rd
1 0 1 1 1rd rd rd
0 1 1 1 0rd rd rd
0 1 1 1 0rd rd rd
0 0 0 0 0 1 0 0 data
0 0 0 0 0 1 0 1 data (H)
0 0 0 1 0 0 0 1
data (L)
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
EXTU.B Rd
0 0 0 1 0 0 1 0
TST.B <EAd >
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
0 0 0 1 0 1 1 0
TST.W <EAd>
0 0 0 1 0 1 1 0
NEG.B <EAd>
0 0 0 1 0 1 0 0
NEG.W <EAd>
0 0 0 1 0 1 0 0
CLR.B <EAd >
0 0 0 1 0 0 1 1
CLR.W <EAd>
0 0 0 1 0 0 1 1
TAS.B <EAd>
0 0 0 1 0 1 1 1
373
Table A-1 (a) Machine Language Coding [General Format] (cont)
Operation code (OP)
Instruction
4
5
6
SHAL.B <EAd>
SHAL.W <EAd>
SHAR.B <EAd>
SHAR.W <EAd>
SHLL.B <EAd>
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
0 0 0 1 1 0 0 0
0 0 0 1 1 0 0 0
0 0 0 1 1 0 0 1
0 0 0 1 1 0 0 1
0 0 0 1 1 0 1 0
0 0 0 1 1 0 1 0
0 0 0 1 1 0 1 1
0 0 0 1 1 0 1 1
0 0 0 1 1 1 0 0
0 0 0 1 1 1 0 0
0 0 0 1 1 1 0 1
0 0 0 1 1 1 0 1
0 0 0 1 1 1 1 0
0 0 0 1 1 1 1 0
0 0 0 1 1 1 1 1
0 0 0 1 1 1 1 1
0 1 0 1 0rd rd rd
0 1 0 1 0rd rd rd
0 1 0 0 0rd rd rd
0 1 0 0 0rd rd rd
0 1 1 0 0rd rd rd
0 1 1 0 0rd rd rd
0 0 0 1 0 1 0 1
0 0 0 1 0 1 0 1
SHLL.W <EAd>
SHLR.B <EAd>
SHLR.W <EAd>
ROTL.B <EAd>
ROTL.W <EAd>
ROTR.B <EAd>
ROTR.W <EAd>
ROTXL.B <EAd>
ROTXL.W <EAd>
ROTXR.B <EAd>
ROTXR.W <EAd >
AND.B <EAs>, Rd
AND.W <EAs>, Rd
OR.B.B <EAs>, Rd
OR.B.W <EAs>, Rd
XOR.B <EAs>, Rd
XOR.W <EAs >, Rd
NOT.B <EAd >
3
3
3
4
4
4
NOT.W <EAd>
374
Table A-1 (a) Machine Language Coding [General Format] (cont)
Operation code (OP)
Instruction
4
5
6
BSET.B #xx, <EAd>
BSET.W #xx, <EAd>
BSET.B Rs, <EAd>
BSET.W Rs , <EAd>
BCLR.B #xx, <EAd>
BCLR.W #xx, <EAd>
BCLR.B Rs, <EAd>
BCLR.W Rs , <EAd >
BTST.B #xx, <EAd>
BTST.W #xx, <EAd>
BTST.B Rs , <EAd>
BTST.W Rs , <EAd>
BNOT.B #xx, <EAd >
BNOT.W #xx, <EAd>
BNOT.B Rs, <EAd>
BNOT.W Rs , <EAd>
LDC.B <EAs >, CR
LDC.W <EAs>, CR
STC.B CR, <EAd>
STC.W CR, <EAd>
ANDC.B #xx:8, CR
ANDC.W #xx:16, CR
ORC.B #xx:8, CR
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
1 1 0 0 (data)
1 1 0 0 (data)
0 1 0 0 1rs rs rs
0 1 0 0 1rs rs rs
1 1 0 1 (data)
1 1 0 1 (data)
0 1 0 1 1rs rs rs
0 1 0 1 1rs rs rs
1 1 1 1 (data)
1 1 1 1 (data)
0 1 1 1 1rs rs rs
0 1 1 1 1rs rs rs
1 1 1 0 (data)
1 1 1 0 (data)
0 1 1 0 1rs rs rs
0 1 1 0 1rs rs rs
1 0 0 0 1 c c c
1 0 0 0 1 c c c
1 0 0 1 1 c c c
1 0 0 1 1 c c c
0 1 0 1 1 c c c
0 1 0 1 1 c c c
0 1 0 0 1 c c c
0 1 0 0 1 c c c
0 1 1 0 1 c c c
0 1 1 0 1 c c c
3
4
3
3
3
4
4
4
ORC.W #xx:16, CR
XORC.B #xx:8, CR
XORC.W #xx:16, CR
375
Table A-1 (b) Machine Language Coding [Special Format: Short Format]
Operation code
Instruction
Bytes
1
2
3
4
MOV:E,B #xx:8,Rd
MOV:I.W #xx:16,Rd
MOV:L.B @aa:8,Rd
MOV:L.W @aa:8,Rd
MOV:S.B Rs,@aa:8
MOV:S.W Rs,@aa:8
MOV:F.B @(d:8,R6),Rd
MOV:F.W @(d:8,R6),Rd
MOV:F.B Rs @(d:8,R6)
MOV:F.W Rs,@(d:8,R6)
CMP:E #xx:8,Rd
2
3
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
3
01010rdrdrd
01011rdrdrd
01100rdrdrd
01101rdrdrd
01110rsrsrs
01111rsrsrs
10000rdrdrd
10001rdrdrd
10010rsrsrs
10011rsrsrs
01000rdrdrd
01001rdrdrd
data
data (H)
address (L)
address (L)
address (L)
address (L)
disp
data (L)
disp
disp
disp
data
CMP:I #xx:16,Rd
data (H)
data (L)
376
Table A-1 (c) Machine Language Coding [Special Format: Branch Instruction]
Operation code
Instruction
BRA (BT)
Bytes
2
1
2
3
4
Bcc d:8
00100000
00100001
00100010
00100011
00100100
00100101
00100110
00100111
00101000
00101001
00101010
00101011
00101100
00101101
00101110
00101111
00110000
00110001
00110010
00110011
00110100
00110101
00110110
00110111
00111000
00111001
00111010
00111011
00111100
00111101
00111110
00111111
00010001
00010000
disp
disp
disp
disp
disp
disp
disp
disp
disp
disp
disp
disp
disp
disp
disp
disp
BRN (BF)
BHI
BLS
BCC (BHS)
BCS (BLO)
BNE
BEQ
BVC
BVS
BPL
BMI
BGE
BLT
BGT
BLE
Bcc d:16
BRA (BT)
BRN (BF)
BHI
3
disp (H)
disp (H)
disp (H)
disp (H)
disp (H)
disp (H)
disp (H)
disp (H)
disp (H)
disp (H)
disp (H)
disp (H)
disp (H)
disp (H)
disp (H)
disp (H)
11010rrr
address (H)
disp (L)
disp (L)
disp (L)
disp (L)
disp (L)
disp (L)
disp (L)
disp (L)
disp (L)
disp (L)
disp (L)
disp (L)
disp (L)
disp (L)
disp (L)
disp (L)
BLS
BCC (BHS)
BCS (BLO)
BNE
BEQ
BVC
BVS
BPL
BMI
BGE
BLT
BGT
BLE
JMP @Rn
2
3
JMP @aa:16
address (L)
377
Table A-1 (c) Machine Language Coding [Special Format: Branch Instruction] (cont)
Operation code
Instruction
JMP @(d:8,Rn)
Bytes
1
2
3
4
3
4
2
3
2
3
3
4
1
2
3
3
00010001
00010001
00001110
00011110
00010001
00011000
00010001
00010001
00011001
00010100
00011100
00000001
00000110
00000111
00010011
00010001
00000011
00010001
00010001
00010001
00010001
11100rrr
11110rrr
disp
disp
JMP @(d:16,Rn)
BSR d:8
disp (H)
disp (L)
BSR d:16
disp (H)
11011rrr
address (H)
11101rrr
11111rrr
disp (L)
JSR @Rn
JSR @aa:16
JSR @(d:8,Rn)
JSR @(d:16,Rn)
RTS
address (L)
disp
disp (H)
disp (L)
RTD #xx:8
data
RTD #xx:16
SCB/cc Rn,disp SCB/F
SCB/NE
data (H)
10111rrr
10111rrr
10111rrr
page
data (L)
disp
disp
SCB/EQ
disp
PJMP @aa:24
PJMP @Rn
PJSR @aa:24
PJSR @Rn
PRTS
4
2
4
2
2
3
4
address (H)
address (L)
address (L)
11000rrr
page
address (H)
11001rrr
00011001
00010100
00011100
PRTD #xx:8
PRTD #xx:16
data
data (H)
data (L)
Table A-1 (d) Machine Language Coding [Special Format: System Control Instructions]
Operation code
Instruction
TRAPA #xx
Bytes
1
2
3
4
2
1
1
2
3
1
1
1
00001000
00001001
00001010
00010111
00011111
00001111
00011010
00000000
0001 #VEC
TRAP/VS
RTE
LINK FP,#xx:8
LINK FP,#xx:16
UNLK FP
SLEEP
data
data (H)
data (L)
NOP
378
A.3 Operation Code Map
Tables A-2 through A-6 are maps of the operation codes. Table A-2 shows the meaning of the first byte of the instruction code, indicating
both operation codes and addressing modes. Tables A-2 through A-6 indicate the meanings of operation codes in the second and third bytes.
Table A-2 Operation Codes in Byte 1
LO
0
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
A
B
C
D
@aa:8.W
See
Tbl.
A-4
E
BSR
d:8
F
HI
NOP
SCB/F LDM
PJSR
@aa:24 See
#xx:8 #aa:8.B SCB/NE SCB/EQ TRAPA TRAP/VS RTE
#xx:16
See
Tbl.
UNLK
0
1
See
Tbl.
A-6
See
See
Tbl.
A-6
See
Tbl.
A-6
Tbl.
A-5
Tbl.
A-4
A-5
@aa:16.W
See
Tbl.
JMP
See
Tbl.
A-6
*
STM
PJMP
RTD
@aa:16.B
LINK
#xx:8
JSR
RTS
SLEEP
RTD
#xx:16
BSR
d:16
LINK
#xx:16
@aa:24 #xx:8 See
Tbl.
A-4
A-4
BLT
2
3
BRA
d:8
BRA
d:16
BRN
BHI
BHI
BLS
BLS
Bcc
Bcc
BCS
BNE
BNE
BEQ
BEQ
BVC
BVC
BVS
BVS
BPL
BPL
BMI
BMI
BGE
BGE
BGT
BGT
BLE
BLE
BLT
BRN
R1
BCS
CMP:I #xx:16, Rn
R3 R4
CMP:E #xx:8, Rn
R3 R4
4
R0
R2
R5
R6
R7
R0
R1
R2
R5
R6
R7
5
6
7
8
MOV:E #xx:8, Rn
MOV:L.B @aa:8, Rn
MOV:S.B Rn, @aa:8
MOV:F.B @ (d:8, R6), Rn
MOV:F.B Rn, @ (d:8, R6)
Rn
MOV:I #xx:16, Rn
MOV:L.W @aa:8, Rn
MOV:S.W Rn, @aa:8
MOV:F.W @ (:8, R6), Rn
MOV:F.W Rn, @ (d:8,R6)
9
(Byte)
(Byte)
(Byte)
(Byte)
(Byte)
(Byte)
(Word)
(Word)
(Word)
(Word)
(Word)
(Word)
A
B
C
D
E
F
See Table A-3
See Table A-4
See Table A-4
See Table A-4
See Table A-4
See Table A-4
Rn
@–Rn
@Rn+
@Rn
@(d:8,Rn)
@(d:16,Rn)
See Table A-3
See Table A-4
See Table A-4
See Table A-4
See Table A-4
See Table A-4
@–Rn
@Rn+
@Rn
@(d:8,Rn)
@(d:16,Rn)
Notes:
References to tables A-3 through A-6 indicate that the instruction code has one or more additional bytes, described in those tables.
* H'11 is the first operation code byte of the following instructions:
JMP, JSR, PJSR (register indirect addressing mode)
JMP, JSR (register indirect addressing mode with displacement)
PRTS, PRTD (all addressing modes)
Table A-3 Operation Codes in Byte 2 (Axxx)
LO
0
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
A
B
C
D
E
F
HI
See Tbl.
A-6*
ADD:Q ADD:Q
ADD:Q
#-1
ADD:Q
#-2
0
#1
#2
1
2
SWAP
R0
EXTS
R1
EXTU
R2
CLR
NEG
R4
NOT
R5
TST
R6
TAS
R7
SHAL
SHAR
SHLL
SHLR
R3
ROTL
ROTR
ROTXL ROTXR
ADD
R3
ADDS
R2
R0
R1
R4
R5
R6
R7
3
4
5
6
7
SUBS
SUB
OR
BSET (Register indirect specification of bit number)
BCLR (Register indirect specification of bit number)
BNOT (Register indirect specification of bit number)
AND
XOR
CMP
BTST (Register indirect specification of bit number)
LDC
MOV
XCH
8
9
A
STC
ADDX
SUBX
MULXU
DIVXU
B
C
D
E
F
BSET (Immediate specification of bit number)
b6 b7 b8 b9 b10
b0
b1
b2
b3
b4
b5
b11
b12
b13
b14
b15
BCLR (Immediate specification of bit number)
BNOT (Immediate specification of bit number)
BTST (Immediate specification of bit number)
o:
Note: * Prefix code for DADD, DSUB, MOVTPE, and MOVFPE. The operation code is in byte 3, given in table A-6.
Table A-4 Operation Codes in Byte 2 (05xx, 15xx, 0Dxx, 1Dxx, Bxxx, Cxxx, Dxxx, Exxx, Fxxx)
LO
0
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
A
B
C
D
E
F
HI
See Tbl.
A-6*
CMP
#xx:8
CMP
#xx:16
MOV
#xx:8
MOV
#xx:16
ADD:Q ADD:Q
ADD:Q
#-1
ADD:Q
#-2
0
#1
#2
1
2
CLR
NEG
NOT
TST
TAS
SHAL
SHAR
SHLL
SHLR
ROTL
ROTR
ROTXL ROTXR
ADD
SUB
OR
ADDS
SUBS
3
4
BSET (Register indirect specification of bit number)
BCLR (Register indirect specification of bit number)
5
6
7
8
AND
XOR
CMP
BNOT (Register indirect specification of bit number)
BTST (Register indirect specification of bit number)
(load)
MOV
LDC
STC
9
MOV (store)
A
ADDX
SUBX
MULXU
DIVXU
B
C
D
E
F
BSET (Immediate specification of bit number)
BCLR (Immediate specification of bit number)
BNOT (Immediate specification of bit number)
BTST (Immediate specification of bit number)
Note: * Prefix code for DADD, DSUB, MOVTPE, and MOVFPE. The operation code is in byte 3, given in table A-6.
Table A-5 Operation Codes in Byte 2 (04xx, 0Cxx)
LO
0
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
A
B
C
D
E
F
HI
0
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
A
B
ADD
SUB
OR
ADDS
SUBS
ORC
AND
XOR
CMP
MOV
ANDC
XORC
LDC
ADDX
SUBX
MULXU
DIVXU
C
D
E
F
Table A-6 Operation Codes in Bytes 2 and 3 (11xx, 01xx, 06xx, 07xx, xx00xx)
LO
0
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
A
B
C
D
E
F
HI
0
PRTD
#xx:8
PRTS
PRTD
#xx:16
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
MOVFPE
R3
8
9
A
R0
R1
R2
R4
R5
R6
R7
MOVTPE
DADD
SCB
R2
DSUB
B
C
D
E
F
R0
R1
R3
R4
R5
R6
R7
PJSR @Rn
PJMP @Rn
JSR @Rn
JMP @Rn
JMP @(d:8,Rn)
JSR @(d:8,Rn)
JSR @(d:16,Rn)
JMP @(d:16,Rn)
A.4 Instruction Execution Cycles
Tables A-7 (1) through (6) list the number of cycles required by the CPU to execute each
instruction in each addressing mode.
The meaning of the symbols in the tables is explained below. The values of I, J, and K are used to
calculate the number of execution cycles when off-chip memory is accessed for an instruction
fetch or operand read/write. The formulas for these calculations are given next.
A.4.1 Calculation of Instruction Execution States
One state is one system clock cycle (ø). When ø = 10 MHz, one state = 100 ns.
Instruction Fetch Operand Read/Write
On-chip memory*1 On-chip memory,
general register,
Number of States
(Value given in table A-7) +
(Value in table A-8)
or no operand
On-chip memory module
or off-chip memory*2
Byte
(Value in table A-7) +
(Value in table A-8) + I
(Value in table A-7) +
(Value in table A-8) + 2I
Word
Off-chip memory *2 On-chip memory,
general register,
(Value given in table A-7) + 2(J + K)
or no operand
On-chip supporting module Byte
or off-chip memory*2
(Value in table A-7) +
I + 2(J + K)
Word
(Value in table A-7) +
2(I + J + K)
Notes: *1 When the instruction is fetched from on-chip memory (ROM or RAM), the number of
execution states varies by 1 or 2 depending of whether the instruction is stored at an
even or odd address. This difference must be noted when software is used for timing,
and in other cases in which the exact number of states is important.
*2 If wait states are inserted in access to external memory, add the necessary number of
cycles.
384
A.4.2 Tables of Instruction Execution Cycles
Tables A-7 (1) through (6) should be read as shown below:
J + K = Instruction fetch cycles.
Addressing mode
I: Total number of bytes
written and read when
operand is in memory.
K
1
1
2
2
4
1
2
2
2
2
4
1
5
5
7
7
2
5
5
7
7
3
6
6
8
8
1
5
5
7
7
2
5
5
7
7
3
6
6
8
8
2
3
3
4
1
6
6
8
8
Instruction
J
ADD.B
ADD.W
1
1
1
1
2
ADD:Q.B
ADD:Q.W
DADD
Shading in the I column means
the operand cannot be in memory.
Shading indicates addressing modes
that cannot be used with this instruction.
385
• Examples of Calculation of Number of States Required for Execution
(Example 1) Instruction fetch from on-chip memory: ADD:G.W @R0, R1
Operand
Start
Assembler Notation
Mnemonic
Table A-7 + Number
Read/Write
Addr. Address Code
Table A-8
of States
On-chip memory
or general register
Even H'0100
Odd H'0101
H'D821 ADD:G.W @R0, R1 5 + 1
H'D821 ADD:G.W @R0, R1 5 + 0
6
5
(Example 2) Instruction fetch from on-chip memory: JSR @R0
Branch
Addr.
Even
Assembler Notation
Table A-7 +
Table A-8 + 2I
9 + 0 + 2 × 2
9 + 1 + 2 × 2
Number
of States
13
Address
Code
Mnemonic
JSR @R0
JSR @R0
H'FC00
H'FC01
H'11D8
H'11D8
Odd
14
(Example 3) Instruction fetch from external memory
Operand
Assembler Notation
Address Code Mnemonic
Table A-7 +
2(J + K)
Number
of States
9
Read/Write
On-chip memory or H'9002
general register
H'D821
ADD:G.W @R0, R1 5 + 2 × (1 + 1)
On-chip module
or external
memory
H'9002
H'D821
ADD:G.W @R0, R1 5 + 2 × (2 + 1 + 1) 13
386
Table A-7 Instruction Execution Cycles (1)
Addressing mode
K
1
1
2
2
4
1
2
1
2
1
2
1
2
2
2
2
3
3
2
2
2
2
1
5
5
7
7
5
5
5
5
5
5
2
5
5
7
7
5
5
5
5
5
5
3
6
6
8
8
6
6
6
6
6
6
1
5
5
7
7
5
5
5
5
5
5
1
6
6
8
8
6
6
6
6
6
6
2
5
5
7
7
5
5
5
5
5
5
3
6
6
8
8
6
6
6
6
6
6
2
3
3
4
Instruction
ADD:G.B <EAs>, Rd
ADD:G.W <EAs>, Rd
ADD:Q.B #xx, <EAd>
ADD:Q.W #xx, <EAd>
ADDS.B <EAs>, Rd
ADDS.W <EAs>, Rd
ADDX.B <EAs>, Rd
ADDX.W <EAs>, Rd
AND.B <EAs>, Rd
J
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
2
3
3
3
3
5
4
4
AND.W <EAs>, Rd
ANDC #xx, CR
4
9
BCLR.B #xx, <EAd>
BCLR.W #xx, <EAd>
BNOT.B #xx, <EAd>
BNOT.W #xx, <EAd>
BSET.B #xx, <EAd>
BSET.W #xx, <EAd>
BTST.B #xx, <EAd>
BTST.W #xx, <EAd>
CLR.B <EAd>
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
2
4
2
4
2
4
1
2
1
2
1
2
1
2
4
4
4
4
4
4
3
3
2
2
2
2
7
7
7
7
7
7
5
5
5
5
5
5
6
7
7
7
7
7
7
7
5
5
5
5
5
5
6
7
8
8
8
8
8
8
6
6
6
6
6
6
7
8
7
7
7
7
7
7
5
5
5
5
5
5
6
7
8
8
8
8
8
8
6
6
6
6
6
6
7
8
7
7
7
7
7
7
5
5
5
5
5
5
6
7
8
8
8
8
8
8
6
6
6
6
6
6
7
8
CLR.W <EAd>
CMP:G.B <EAs>, Rd
CMP:G.W <EAs >, Rd
CMP:G.B #XX:8, <EA>
CMP:G.B #XX:16, <EA>
3
4
* Rs can also be specified as the source operand.
387
Table A-7 Instruction Execution Cycles (2)
Addressing mode
K
1
1
1
2
3
1
1
2
3
2
3
Instruction
J
CMP:E #xx:8, Rd
0
2
CMP:I #xx:16, Rd
0
3
DADD Rs , Rd
2
4
DIVXU.B <EAs>, Rd
1
1
20 23 23 24 23 24 23 24 21
DIVXU.W <EAs >, Rd
2
1
26 29 29 30 29 30 29 30
28
DSUB Rs , Rd
2
4
EXTS Rd
1
1
3
EXTU Rd
3
LDC.B <EAs>, CR
1
1
3
6
6
7
6
7
6
7
4
LDC.W <EAs >, CR
2
1
4
7
7
8
7
8
7
8
6
MOV:G.B
1
1
2
5
5
6
5
6
5
6
3
MOV:G.W
2
1
2
5
5
6
5
5
6
4
6
MOV.G.B #xx:8, <EAd>
1
2
7
7
8
7
8
7
8
MOV.G.B #xx:16, <EAd>
2
3
8
8
9
8
9
8
9
MOV:E #xx:8, Rd
0
2
MOV:I #xx:16, Rd
0
3
MOV:L.B @aa:8, Rd
1
0
5
MOV:L.W @aa:8, Rd
2
0
5
MOV:S.B Rs,@aa:8
1
0
5
MOV:S.W Rs ,@aa:8
2
0
5
MOV:F.B @(d:8, R6), Rd
1
0
0
0
5
MOV:F.W@(d:8,R6),Rd
2
5
MOV:F.B Rs , @(d:8, R6)
1
5
MOV:F.W Rs , @(d:8, R6)
2
0
5
388
Table A-7 Instruction Execution Cycles (3)
Addressing mode
K
1
0
1
1
2
3
1
1
2
3
2
3
Instruction
J
MOVFPE <EAs>, Rd
2
2
13 13 14 13 14 13 14
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
20 20 21 20 21 20 21
MOVTPE Rs, <EAd>
0
13 13 14 13
13 14
|
14
|
|
|
|
|
|
20 20 21 20 21 20 21
MULXU.B <EAs>, Rd
MULXU.W <EAs>, Rd
NEG.B <EAd>
1
2
2
4
2
4
1
2
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
16 19 19 20 19
23 25 25 26 25
19 20 18
25 26
20
26
8
25
2
2
2
2
2
2
7
7
7
7
5
5
7
7
7
7
5
5
8
8
8
8
6
6
7
7
7
7
5
5
7
7
7
7
5
5
8
8
8
8
6
6
NEG.W <EAd>
NOT.B <EAd>
8
8
NOT.W <EAd>
8
OR.B <EAs>, Rd
OR.W <EAs>, Rd
ORC #xx, CR
6
3
5
4
9
6
ROTL.B <EAd>
ROTL.W <EAd>
ROTR.B <EAd>
ROTR.W <EAd>
ROTXL.B <EAd>
ROTXL.W <EAd>
ROTXR.B <EAd>
ROTXR.W <EAd>
SHAL.B <EAd>
SHAL.W <EAd>
SHAR.B <EAd>
SHAR.W <EAd>
SHLL.B <EAd>
SHLL.W <EAd>
2
4
2
4
2
4
2
4
2
4
2
4
2
4
2
2
2
2
2
3
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
7
7
7
7
7
7
7
7
7
7
7
7
7
7
7
7
7
7
7
7
7
7
7
7
7
7
7
7
8
8
8
8
8
8
8
8
8
8
8
8
8
8
7
7
7
7
7
7
7
7
7
7
7
7
7
7
7
7
7
7
7
7
7
7
7
7
7
7
7
7
8
8
8
8
8
8
8
8
8
8
8
8
8
8
8
8
8
8
8
8
8
8
8
8
8
8
8
8
389
Table A-7 Instruction Execution Cycles (4)
Addressing mode
K
1
2
4
1
2
1
2
1
2
1
2
1
2
2
2
2
2
2
3
3
2
2
3
4
2
2
4
2
4
1
7
7
7
7
5
5
5
5
5
5
2
7
7
7
7
5
5
5
5
5
5
3
8
8
8
8
6
6
6
6
6
6
1
7
7
7
7
5
5
5
5
5
5
1
8
8
8
8
6
6
6
6
6
6
2
7
7
7
7
5
5
5
5
5
5
3
8
8
8
8
6
6
6
6
6
6
2
3
Instruction
SHLR.B <EAd>
SHLR.W <EAd>
STC.B CR, <EAd>
STC.W CR, <EAd>
SUB.B <EAs >, Rd
SUB.W <EAs >, Rd
SUBS.B <EAs >, Rd
SUBS.W <EAs >, Rd
SUBX.B <EAs>, Rd
SUBX.W <EAs>, Rd
SWAP Rd
J
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
3
3
3
4
4
4
TAS <EAd>
2
1
2
7
5
5
7
5
5
8
6
6
7
5
5
8
6
6
7
5
5
8
6
6
TST.B <EAd>
TST.W <EAd>
XCH Rs , Rd
XOR.B <EAs>, Rd
XOR.W <EAs >, Rd
XORC #xx, CR
1
4
5
5
5
5
6
6
5
5
6
6
5
5
6
6
3
5
4
9
*
6
DIVXU.B
DIVXU.B
DIVXU.W
DIVXU.W
DIVXU.B
DIVXU.W
Zero divide, minimum mode
Zero divide, maximum mode
Zero divide, minimum mode
Zero divide, maximum mode
Overflow
1
1
1
1
1
1
20 23 23 24 23 24 23 24 21
25 28 28 29 28 29 28 29 21
20 23 23 24 23 24 23 24
25 28 28 29 28 29 28 29
7
10
11
6
27
27
8
10
12
1
8
8
11 11 12 11 12 11 12
11 11 12 11 12 11 12
9
Overflow
2
10
*
For register and immediate
operands
For memory operand
390
Table A-7 Instruction Execution Cycles (5)
Instruction
(Condition)
Execution Cycles
I
J + K
2
Bcc d:8
Condition false, branch not taken
3
Condition true, branch taken
7
5
Bcc d:16
BSR
Condition false, branch not taken
3
3
Condition true, branch taken
7
6
d:8
9
2
2
4
d:16
9
5
JMP
@aa:16
@Rn
7
5
6
5
@(d:8, Rn)
@(d:16, Rn)
@aa:16
@Rn
7
5
8
6
JSR
9
2
5
9
2
5
@(d:8, Rn)
@(d:16, Rn)
9
2
5
10
2
6
LDM
LINK
6 + 4n*
2n
2
2
#xx:8
6
2
#xx:16
7
2
3
NOP
RTD
2
1
#xx:8
9
2
2
4
6
2
4
#xx:16
9
5
RTE
Minimum mode
Maximum mode
13
15
8
4
4
RTS
SCB
4
Condition false, branch not taken
Count = –1, branch not taken
Other than the above, branch taken
Cycles preceding transition to power-
down mode
3
3
4
3
8
6
SLEEP
STM
2
0
6 + 3n*
2n
2
*
n is the number of registers specified in the register list.
391
Table A-7 Instruction Execution Cycles (6)
Instruction
(Condition)
Execution Cycles
I
J + K
TRAPA
Minimum mode
17
22
3
6
4
4
1
4
4
1
6
5
6
5
5
5
6
Maximum mode
10
TRAP/VS
V = 0, trap not taken
V = 1, trap taken, minimum mode
V = 1, trap taken, maximum mode
18
23
5
6
10
2
UNLK
PJMP
@aa:24
@Rn
9
8
PJSR
@aa:24
@Rn
15
13
12
13
13
4
4
4
4
4
PRTS
PRTD
#xx:8
#xx:16
Table A-8 (a) Adjusted Value (Branch Instruction)
Instruction
Address
even
odd
Adjusted Value
BSR, JMP, JSR, RTS, RTD, RTE
TRAPA, PJMP, PJSR, PRTS, PRTD
Bcc, SCB, TRAP/VS (When branch
is taken)
0
1
0
1
even
odd
Table A-8 (b) Adjusted Value (Other Instructions by Addressing Modes)
Instruction
Start
address
MOV.B #xx:8, <EA>
even
odd
1
1
2
0
1
0
1
1
0
2
0
1
1
1
2
0
1
0
1
1
2
0
1
0
1
1
2
0
1
0
1
1
0
2
0
1
1
1
2
0
1
0
even
odd
MOV.W #xx:16, <EA>
Instruction other than above
even
odd
0
0
0
0
0
0
392
Appendix B Register Field
B.1 Register Addresses and Bit Names
Addr. Addr.
(upper (lower Register
byte) byte) Name
Bit Names
Bit 3
Bit 7
Bit 6
Bit 5
Bit 4
Bit 2
Bit 1
Bit 0
Module
H'80 P1DDR P17DDR P16DDR P15DDR P14DDR P13DDR P12DDR P11DDR P10DDR Port 1
H'81 P2DDR
H'82 P1DR
H'83 P1DR
—
—
—
P24DDR P23DDR P22DDR P21DDR P20DDR Port 2
P17
—
P16
—
P15
—
P14
P24
P13
P23
P12
P22
P11
P21
P10
P20
Port 1
Port 2
H'84 P3DDR P37DDR P36DDR P35DDR P34DDR P33DDR P32DDR P31DDR P30DDR Port 3
H'85 P4DDR P47DDR P46DDR P45DDR P44DDR P43DDR P42DDR P41DDR P40DDR Port 4
H'86 P3DR
P37
P47
P36
P46
P35
P45
P34
P44
P33
P43
P32
P42
P31
P41
P30
P40
Port 3
Port 4
H'FE H'87 P4DR
H'88 P5DDR P57DDR P56DDR P55DDR P54DDR P53DDR P52DDR P51DDR P50DDR Port 5
H'89 P6DDR
H'8A P5DR
H'8B P6DR
—
—
—
—
P63DDR P62DDR P61DDR P60DDR Port 6
P57
—
P56
—
P55
—
P54
—
P53
P63
P52
P62
P51
P61
P50
P60
Port 5
Port 6
H'8C P7DDR P77DDR P76DDR P75DDR P74DDR P73DDR P72DDR P71DDR P70DDR Port 7
H'8D
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
H'8E P7DR
H'8F P8DR
P77
P87
ICIE
ICF
P76
P86
P75
P85
P74
P84
P73
P83
OEB
P72
P82
OEA
P71
P81
CKS1
P70
Port 7
Port 8
P80
H'90 TCR
OCIEB OCIEA OVIE
CKS0
CCLRA
H'91 TCSR
OCFB OCFA
OVF
OLVLB OLVLA IEDG
H'92 FRC(H)
H'93 FRC(L)
H'94 OCRA(H)
H'95 OCRA(L)
H'96 OCRB(H)
H'FE H'97 OCRB(L)
H'98 ICR(H)
FRT 1
H'99 ICR(L)
H'9A
H'9B
H'9C
H'9D
H'9E
H'9F
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
Note:
FRT1: Free-Running Timer channel 1
(Continued on next page)
393
(Continued from preceding page)
Addr. Addr.
(upper (lower Register
Bit Names
Bit 3
byte) byte) Name
H'A0 TCR
Bit 7
ICIE
ICF
Bit 6
Bit 5
Bit 4
Bit 2
Bit 1
Bit 0
Module
OCIEB OCIEA OVIE
OEB
OEA
CKS1
CKS0
CCLRA
H'A1 TCSR
OCFB OCFA
OVF
OLVLB OLVLA IEDG
H'A2 FRC(H)
H'A3 FRC(L)
H'A4 OCRA(H)
H'A5 OCRA(L)
H'A6 OCRB(H)
H'FE H'A7 OCRB(L)
H'A8 ICR(H)
FRT2
H'A9 ICR(L)
H'AA
H'AB
H'AC
H'AD
H'AE
H'AF
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
H'B0 TCR
H'B1 TCSR
ICIE
ICF
OCIEB OCIEA OVIE
OEB
OEA
CKS1
CKS0
CCLRA
OCFB OCFA
OVF
OLVLB OLVLA IEDG
H'B2 FRC(H)
H'B3 FRC(L)
H'B4 OCRA(H)
H'B5 OCRA(L)
H'B6 OCRB(H)
H'FE H'B7 OCRB(L)
H'B8 ICR(H)
FRT 3
H'B9 ICR(L)
H'BA
H'BB
H'BC
H'BD
H'BE
H'BF
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
Notes:
(Continued on next page)
FRT2: Free-Running Timer channel 2
FRT3: Free-Running Timer channel 3
394
(Continued from preceding page)
Addr. Addr.
(upper (lower Register
Bit Names
Bit 3
byte) byte) Name
H'C0 TCR
Bit 7
Bit 6
Bit 5
Bit 4
Bit 2
Bit 1
Bit 0
Module
OE
OS
—
—
—
CKS2
CKS1
CKS0
H'C1 DTR
PWM1
H'C2 TCNT
H'C3
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
H'C4 TCR
H'C5 DTR
H'C6 TCNT
OE
OS
CKS2
CKS1
CKS0
PWM2
PWM3
—
H'FE H'C7
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
H'C8 TCR
H'C9 DTR
H'CA TCNT
OE
OS
CKS2
CKS1
CKS0
H'CB
H'CC
H'CD
H'CE
H'CF
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
H'D0 TCR
CMIEB CMIEA OVIE
CMFB CMFA OVF
CCLR1 CCLR0 CKS2
CKS1
OS1
CKS0
OS0
H'D1 TCSR
H'D2 TCORA
H'D3 TCORB
H'D4 TCNT
—
OS3
OS2
TMR
H'D5
H'D6
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
PE
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
H'FE H'D7
—
—
—
—
—
—
H'D8 SMR
H'D9 BRR
H'DA SCR
H'DB TDR
H'DC SSR
H'DD RDR
C/A
CHR
O/E
STOP
CKS1
CKS0
TIE
RIE
TE
RE
—
—
—
CKE1
—
CKE0
—
SCI1
TDRE
RDRF ORER FER
PER
H'DE
H'DF
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
Notes:
(Continued on next page)
PWM1: Pulse-Width Modulation timer channel 1
PWM2: Pulse-Width Modulation timer channel 2
PWM3: Pulse-Width Modulation timer channel 3
TMR: 8-Bit Timer
SCI1: Serial Communication Interface 1
395
(Continued from preceding page)
Addr. Addr.
(upper (lower Register
Bit Names
Bit 3
AD5
—
byte) byte) Name
Bit 7
Bit 6
AD8
AD0
AD8
AD0
AD8
AD0
AD8
AD0
ADIE
—
Bit 5
AD7
—
Bit 4
AD6
—
Bit 2
AD4
—
Bit 1
AD3
—
Bit 0
AD2
—
Module
H'E0 ADDRA(H) AD9
H'E1 ADDRA(L) AD1
H'E2 ADDRB(H) AD9
H'E3 ADDRB(L) AD1
H'E4 ADDRC(H) AD9
H'E5 ADDRC(L) AD1
H'E6 ADDRD(H) AD9
H'FE H'E7 ADDRD(L) AD1
H'E8 ADCSR ADF
AD7
—
AD6
—
AD5
—
AD4
—
AD3
—
AD2
—
AD7
—
AD6
—
AD5
—
AD4
—
AD3
—
AD2
—
A/D
AD7
—
AD6
—
AD5
—
AD4
—
AD3
—
AD2
—
ADST
—
SCAN CKS
CH2
—
CH1
—
CH0
—
H'E9
H'EA
H'EB
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
O/E
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
H'EC TCSR* OVF
WT/IT
—
TME
—
—
CKS2
—
CKS1
—
CKS0
—
WDT
—
H'ED TCNT*
—
—
H'EE
H'EF
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
H'F0 SMR
H'F1 BRR
H'F2 SCR
H'F3 TDR
H'F4 SSR
H'F5 RDR
C/A
CHR
PE
STOP
—
CKS2
CKS0
TIE
RIE
TE
RE
—
—
—
—
OKE1
—
OKE2
—
SCI2
TDRE
RDRF ORER FER
H'F6
H'FE H'F7
H'F8
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
H'F9
—
H'FA
H'FB
H'FC SYSCR1 —
H'FD SYSCR2 —
IRQ1E IRQ0E NMIEG BRLE
Port 1
IRQ5E IRQ4E IRQ3E IRQ2E P6PWME P9PWME P9SCI2E Port 6,9
H'FE P9DDR P97DDR P96DDR P95DDR P94DDR P93DDR P92DDR P91DDR P90DDR Port 9
H'FF P9DR P97 P96 P95 P94 P93 P92 P91 P90
Notes:
(Continued on next page)
A/D:
Analog-to-Digital converter
WDT: Watchdog Timer
SCI2: Serial Communication Interface 2
* Read addresses are shown. Write addresses of both TCSR and TCNT are H'FEED. See section 13.2.4,
“Notes on Register Access” for details.
396
(Continued from preceding page)
Addr. Addr.
(upper (lower Register
Bit Names
byte) byte) Name
H'00 IPRA
H'01 IPRB
H'02 IPRC
H'03 IPRD
H'04 IPRE
H'05 IPRF
Bit 7
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
Bit 6
Bit 5
Bit 4
Bit 3
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
Bit 2
Bit 1
Bit 0
Module
IRQ0
IRQ1
IRQ2/IRQ3
FRT1
FRT3
SCI1
IRQ4/IRQ5
FRT2
8 Bit Timer
SCI2
A/D
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
H'06
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
H'FF H'07
—
—
—
—
INTC
H'08 DTEA
H'09 DTEB
H'0A DTEC
H'0B DTED
H'0C DTEE
H'0D DTEF
—
IRQ0
IRQ2
—
IRQ1
IRQ4
IRQ3
IRQ5
OCIB1 OCIA1 ICI1
OCIB3 OCIA3 ICI3
OCIB2 OCIA2 ICI2
—
CMIB
RXI2
—
CMIA
—
TXI1
—
RXI1
—
—
ADI
—
—
—
—
—
—
TXI2
—
—
H'0E
H'0F
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
H'10 WCR
H'11 RAMCR RAME
H'12 MDCR
—
—
WMS1 WMS0 WC1
WC0
—
WSC
RAM
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
MDS2 MDS1 MDS0
H'13 SBYCR SSBY
H'14 WCR
—
—
—
—
—
WDT
H'15 RSTCSR WRST RSTOE
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
H'16
H'FF H'17
H'18
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
H'19
H'1A
—
H'1B
H'1C
H'1D
H'1E
H'1F
Notes:
INTC: Interrupt Controller
WSC: Wait State Controller
WDT: Watchdog Timer
397
B.2 Register Descriptions
Register name
Address to which the
register is mapped
Name of the on-chip
supporting module
Acronym of the register
SYSCR1—System Control Register 1
H'FEFC
Port 1
Bit
numbers
Bit
7
—
1
6
IRQ1E
0
5
4
3
2
—
1
1
—
1
0
Names of the
IRQ0E NMIEG BRLE
—
bits.
Initial bit
values
Initial value
Read/Write
0
0
0
1
Dashes (—)
indicate
—
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
—
—
—
reserved bits.
Type of access permitted
R
W
Read only
Write only
Bus Release Enable
0
1
P12 and P13 are I/O ports.
P12 is the BACK output pin. P13 is the BREQ input pin.
R/W Both read and write
Full name of the bit
Nonmaskable Interrupt Edge
0
1
An NMI request is generated on the falling edge of the NMI pin input.
An NMI request is generated on the rising edge of the NMI pin input.
Functions of the bit settings
Interrupt Request 0 Enable
0
1
P15 is an I/O port; IRQ0 input is disabled.
P15 is the IRQ0 input pin.
Interrupt Request 1 Enable
0
1
P16 is an I/O port; IRQ1 input is disabled.
P16 is the IRQ1 input pin.
398
P1DDR—Port 1 Data Direction Register
H'FE80
Port 1
Bit
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
0
P17DDR P16DDR P15DDR P14DDR P13DDR P12DDR P11DDR P10DDR
Initial value
Read/Write
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
W
W
W
W
W
W
W
W
Port 1 Input/Output Selection
0
1
Input port
Output port
P2DDR—Port 2 Data Direction Register
H'FE81
Port 2
Bit
7
—
1
6
—
1
5
—
1
4
3
2
1
0
P24DDR P23DDR P22DDR P21DDR P20DDR
Initial value
Read/Write
0
0
0
0
0
—
—
—
W
W
W
W
W
Port 2 Input/Output Selection
0
1
Input port
Output port
P1DR—Port 1 Data Register
H'FE82
Port 1
Bit
7
P17
0
6
P16
0
5
P15
0
4
P14
0
3
P13
0
2
P12
0
1
P11
—
0
P10
—
Initial value
Read/Write
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
R
R
399
P2DR—Port 2 Data Register
H'FE83
Port 2
Bit
7
—
1
6
—
1
5
—
1
4
P24
0
3
P23
0
2
P22
0
1
P21
0
0
P20
0
Initial value
Read/Write
—
—
—
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
P3DDR—Port 3 Data Direction Register
H'FE84
Port 3
Bit
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
0
P37DDR P36DDR P35DDR P34DDR P33DDR P32DDR P31DDR P30DDR
Initial value
Read/Write
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
W
W
W
W
W
W
W
W
Port 3 Input/Output Selection
0
1
Input port
Output port
P4DDR—Port 4 Data Direction Register
H'FE85
Port 4
Bit
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
0
P47DDR P46DDR P45DDR P44DDR P43DDR P42DDR P41DDR P40DDR
Initial value
Read/Write
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
W
W
W
W
W
W
W
W
Port 4 Input/Output Selection
0
1
Input port
Output port
P3DR—Port 3 Data Register
H'FE86
Port 3
Bit
7
P37
0
6
P36
0
5
P35
0
4
P34
0
3
P33
0
2
1
0
P30
0
P32
0
P31
0
Initial value
Read/Write
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
400
P4DR—Port 4 Data Register
H'FE87
Port 4
Bit
7
P47
0
6
P46
0
5
P45
0
4
P44
0
3
P43
0
2
P42
0
1
P41
0
0
P40
0
Initial value
Read/Write
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
P5DDR—Port 5 Data Direction Register
H'FE88
Port 5
Bit
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
0
P57DDR P56DDR P55DDR P54DDR P53DDR P52DDR P51DDR P50DDR
Initial value
Read/Write
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
W
W
W
W
W
W
W
W
Port 5 Input/Output Selection
0
1
Input port
Output port
P6DDR—Port 6 Data Direction Register
H'FE89
Port 6
Bit
7
—
1
6
—
1
5
—
1
4
—
1
3
2
1
0
P63DDR P62DDR P61DDR P60DDR
Initial value
Read/Write
0
0
0
0
—
—
—
—
W
W
W
W
Port 6 Input/Output Selection
0
1
Input port
Output port
P5DR—Port 5 Data Register
H'FE8A
Port 5
Bit
7
P57
0
6
P56
0
5
P55
0
4
P54
0
3
P53
0
2
1
0
P50
0
P52
0
P51
0
Initial value
Read/Write
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
401
P6DR—Port 6 Data Register
H'FE8B
Port 6
Bit
7
—
1
6
—
1
5
—
1
4
—
1
3
P63
0
2
P62
0
1
P61
0
0
P60
0
Initial value
Read/Write
—
—
—
—
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
P7DDR—Port 7 Data Direction Register
H'FE8C
Port 7
Bit
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
0
P77DDR P76DDR P75DDR P74DDR P73DDR P72DDR P71DDR P70DDR
Initial value
Read/Write
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
W
W
W
W
W
W
W
W
Port 7 Input/Output Selection
0
1
Input port
Output port
P7DR—Port 7 Data Register
H'FE8E
Port 7
Bit
7
P77
0
6
P76
0
5
P75
0
4
P74
0
3
P73
0
2
1
0
P70
0
P72
0
P71
0
Initial value
Read/Write
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
P8DR—Port 8 Data Register
H'FE8F
Port 8
Bit
7
P87
R
6
P86
R
5
P85
R
4
P84
R
3
P83
R
2
P82
R
1
P81
R
0
P80
R
Read/Write
402
TCR—Timer Control Register
H'FE90
FRT1
Bit
7
6
5
4
OVIE
0
3
2
1
CKS1
0
0
CKS0
0
ICIE
0
OCIEB OCIEA
OEB
0
OEA
0
Initial value
Read/Write
0
0
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
Clock Select
00 Internal clock
source: ø4
01 Internal clock
source: ø8
10 Internal clock
source: ø32
11 External clock source:
counted on rising edge
Output Enable A
0
1
Compare-A output is disabled.
Compare-A output is enabled.
Output Enable B
0
1
Compare-B output is disabled.
Compare-B output is enabled.
Timer Overflow Interrupt Enable
0
1
Overflow interrupt request is disabled.
Overflow interrupt request is enabled.
Output Compare Interrupt Enable A
0
1
Compare-match A interrupt request is disabled.
Compare-match A interrupt request is enabled.
Output Compare Interrupt Enable B
0
1
Compare-match B interrupt request is disabled.
Compare-match B interrupt request is enabled.
Input Capture Interrupt Enable
0
1
Input capture interrupt is disabled.
Input capture interrupt is enabled.
403
TCSR—Timer Control/Status Register
H'FE91
FRT1
Bit
7
ICF
0
6
OCFB
0
5
OCFA
0
4
OVF
0
3
2
1
IEDG
0
0
CCLRA
0
OLVLB OLVLA
Initial value
Read/Write
0
0
R/(W)* R/(W)* R/(W)* R/(W)*
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
Counter Clear A
0
FRC count
is not cleared.
FRC count is
cleared by
compare-
1
match A.
Input Edge Select
0
Count is captured on
falling edge of input
capture signal (FTI).
Count is captured on
rising edge of input
capture signal.
1
Output Level A
0
1
Compare-match A causes 0 output.
Compare-match A causes 1 output.
Output Level B
0
1
Compare-match B causes 0 output.
Compare-match B causes 1 output.
Timer Overflow
0
1
Cleared from 1 to 0 when CPU reads OVF =
1, then writes 0 in OVF.
Set to 1 when FRC changes from H'FFFF to H'0000.
Output Compare Flag A
Cleared from 1 to 0 when:
1. CPU reads OCFA = 1, then writes 0 in OCFA.
2. OCIA interrupt is served by DTC.
Set to 1 when FRC = OCRA.
0
1
Output Compare Flag B
0
1
Cleared from 1 to 0 when:
1. CPU reads OCFB = 1, then writes 0 in OCFB.
2. OCIB interrupt is served by DTC.
Set to 1 when FRC = OCRB.
Input Capture Flag
0
Cleared from 1 to 0 when:
1. CPU reads ICF = 1, then writes 0 in ICF.
2. ICI interrupt is served by DTC.
Set to 1 when input capture signal is received and FRC count is copied to ICR.
* Only writing of a 0 to
clear the flag is enabled.
1
404
FRC (H and L)—Free-Running Counter
H'FE92, H'FE93
FRT 1
Bit
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
0
Initial value
Read/Write
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
Count value
OCRA (H and L)—Output Compare Register A
H'FE94, H'FE95
FRT 1
Bit
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
0
Initial value
Read/Write
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
Continually compared with FRC. OCFA is set to 1 when OCRA = FRC.
OCRB (H and L)—Output Compare Register B
H'FE96, H'FE97
FRT 1
Bit
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
0
Initial value
Read/Write
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
Continually compared with FRC. OCFB is set to 1 when OCRB = FRC.
ICR (H and L)—Input Capture Register
H'FE98, H'FE99
FRT 1
Bit
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
0
Initial value
Read/Write
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
R
R
R
R
R
R
R
R
Contains FRC count captured when external input capture signal changes.
405
TCR—Timer Control Register
H'FEA0
FRT 2
Bit
7
6
5
4
OVIE
0
3
2
1
CKS1
0
0
CKS0
0
ICIE
0
OCIEB OCIEA
OEB
0
OEA
0
Initial value
Read/Write
0
0
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
Note: Bit functions are the same as for FRT1.
TCSR—Timer Control/Status Register
H'FEA1
FRT 2
Bit
7
ICF
0
6
OCFB
0
5
OCFA
0
4
OVF
0
3
2
1
IEDG
0
0
CCLRA
0
OLVLB OLVLA
Initial value
Read/Write
0
0
R/(W)* R/(W)* R/(W)* R/(W)*
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
Note: Bit functions are the same as for FRT1.
* Only writing of a 0 to clear the flag is enabled.
FRC (H and L)—Free-Running Counter
H'FEA2, H'FEA3
FRT 2
Bit
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
0
Initial value
Read/Write
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
Note: Bit functions are the same as for FRT1.
406
OCRA (H and L)—Output Compare Register A
H'FEA4, H'FEA5
FRT 2
Bit
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
0
Initial value
Read/Write
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
Note: Bit functions are the same as for FRT1.
OCRB (H and L)—Output Compare Register B
H'FEA6, H'FEA7
FRT 2
Bit
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
0
Initial value
Read/Write
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
Note: Bit functions are the same as for FRT1.
ICR (H and L)—Input Capture Register
H'FEA8, H'FEA9
FRT 2
Bit
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
0
Initial value
Read/Write
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
R
R
R
R
R
R
R
R
Note: Bit functions are the same as for FRT1.
TCR—Timer Control Register
H'FEB0
FRT 3
Bit
7
6
5
4
OVIE
0
3
2
1
CKS1
0
0
CKS0
0
ICIE
0
OCIEB OCIEA
OEB
0
OEA
0
Initial value
Read/Write
0
0
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
Note: Bit functions are the same as for FRT1.
407
TCSR—Timer Control/Status Register
H'FEB1
FRT 3
Bit
7
ICF
0
6
OCFB
0
5
OCFA
0
4
OVF
0
3
2
1
IEDG
0
0
CCLRA
0
OLVLB OLVLA
Initial value
Read/Write
0
0
R/(W)* R/(W)* R/(W)* R/(W)*
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
Note: Bit functions are the same as for FRT1.
* Only writing of 0 to clear the flag is enabled.
FRC (H and L)—Free-Running Counter
H'FEB2, H'FEB3
FRT 3
Bit
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
0
Initial value
Read/Write
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
Note: Bit functions are the same as for FRT1.
OCRA (H and L)—Output Compare Register A
H'FEB4, H'FEB5
FRT 3
Bit
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
0
Initial value
Read/Write
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
Note: Bit functions are the same as for FRT1.
408
OCRB (H and L)—Output Compare Register B
H'FEB6, H'FEB7
FRT 3
Bit
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
0
Initial value
Read/Write
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
Note: Bit functions are the same as for FRT1.
ICR (H and L)—Input Capture Register
H'FEB8, H'FEB9
FRT 3
Bit
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
0
Initial value
Read/Write
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
R
R
R
R
R
R
R
R
Note: Bit functions are the same as for FRT1.
409
TCR—Timer Control Register
H'FEC0
PWM1
Bit
7
OE
0
6
OS
0
5
—
1
4
—
1
3
—
1
2
CKS2
0
1
CKS1
0
0
CKS0
0
Initial value
Read/Write
R/W
R/W
—
—
—
R/W
R/W
R/W
Clock Select (Values When ø = 10MHz)
Internal Reso- PWM PWM
Clock Freq. lution Period Frequency
50 µs 20 kHz
000 ø/2
001 ø/8
010 ø/32
200 ns
800 ns
3.2 µs
200 µs 5 kHz
800 µs 1.25 kHz
011 ø/128
100 ø/256
101 ø/1024
110 ø/2048
111 ø/4096
12.8 µs 3.2 ms
25.6 µs 6.4 ms
102.4 µs 25.6 ms 39.1 Hz
204.8 µs 51.2 ms 19.5 Hz
409.6 µs 102.4 ms 9.8 Hz
312.5 kHz
156.3 Hz
Output Select
0
1
Positive logic
Negative logic
Output Enable
0
1
PWM output disabled; TCNT cleared to H'00 and stops.
PWM output enabled; TCNT runs.
DTR—Duty Register
H'FEC1
PWM1
Bit
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
0
Initial value
Read/Write
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
Pulse duty factor
410
TCNT—Timer Counter
H'FEC2
PWM1
Bit
7
6
0
5
0
4
0
3
2
0
1
0
0
Initial value
Read/Write
0
0
0
R/(W)* R/(W)* R/(W)* R/(W)* R/(W)* R/(W)* R/(W)* R/(W)*
Count value (runs from H'00 to H'F9, then repeats from H'00)
* Write function is for test purposes only. Writing to this register during normal operation may have
unpredictable effects
TCR—Timer Control Register
H'FEC4
PWM2
Bit
7
OE
0
6
OS
0
5
—
1
4
—
1
3
—
1
2
CKS2
0
1
CKS1
0
0
CKS0
0
Initial value
Read/Write
R/W
R/W
—
—
—
R/W
R/W
R/W
Note: Bit functions are the same as for PWM1.
DTR—Duty Register
H'FEC5
PWM2
Bit
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
0
Initial value
Read/Write
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
Note: Bit functions are the same as for PWM1.
411
TCNT—Timer Counter
H'FEC6
PWM2
Bit
7
6
0
5
0
4
0
3
2
0
1
0
0
Initial value
Read/Write
0
0
0
R/(W)* R/(W)* R/(W)* R/(W)* R/(W)* R/(W)* R/(W)* R/(W)*
Note: Bit functions are the same as for PWM1.
* Write function is for test purposes only. Writing to this register during normal operation may have
unpredictable effects
TCR—Timer Control Register
H'FEC8
PWM3
Bit
7
OE
0
6
OS
0
5
—
1
4
—
1
3
—
1
2
CKS2
0
1
CKS1
0
0
CKS0
0
Initial value
Read/Write
R/W
R/W
—
—
—
R/W
R/W
R/W
Note: Bit functions are the same as for PWM1.
DTR—Duty Register
H'FEC9
PWM3
Bit
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
0
Initial value
Read/Write
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
Note: Bit functions are the same as for PWM1.
412
TCNT—Timer Counter
H'FECA
PWM3
Bit
7
6
0
5
0
4
0
3
2
0
1
0
0
Initial value
Read/Write
0
0
0
R/(W)* R/(W)* R/(W)* R/(W)* R/(W)* R/(W)* R/(W)* R/(W)*
Note: Bit functions are the same as for PWM1.
* Write function is for test purposes only. Writing to this register during normal operation may have
unpredictable effects.
413
TCR—Timer Control Register
H'FED0
TMR
Bit
7
6
5
OVIE
0
4
3
2
1
CKS1
0
0
CKS0
0
CMIEB CMIEA
CCLR1 CCLR0 CKS2
Initial value
Read/Write
0
0
0
0
0
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
Clock Select
0 0 0 No clock source; timer stops.
0 0 1 Internal clock source: ø/8,
counted on falling edge.
0 1 0 Internal clock source: ø/64,
counted on falling edge.
0 1 1 Internal clock source: ø/1024,
counted on falling edge.
1 0 0 No clock source; timer stops.
1 0 1 External clock source, counted
on rising edge.
1 1 0 External clock source, counted
on falling edge.
1 1 1 External clock source, counted
on both rising and falling edges.
Counter Clear
0 0 Counter is not cleared.
0 1 Cleared by compare-match A.
1 0 Cleared by compare-match B.
1 1 Cleared on rising edge of external reset input.
Timer Overflow Interrupt Enable
0
1
Overflow interrupt request is disabled.
Overflow interrupt request is enabled.
Compare-Match Interrupt Enable A
0
1
Compare-match A interrupt request is disabled.
Compare-match A interrupt request is enabled.
Compare-Match Interrupt Enable B
0
1
Compare-match B interrupt request is disabled.
Compare-match B interrupt request is enabled.
414
TCSR—Timer Control/Status Register
H'FED1
TMR
Bit
7
CMFB
0
6
CMFA
0
5
OVF
0
4
—
1
3
OS3*2
0
2
OS2*2
0
1
OS1*2
0
0
OS0*2
0
Initial value
Read/Write
R/(W)*1 R/(W)*1 R/(W)*1
—
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
Output Select
0 0 No change on compare-match A.
0 1 Output 0 on compare-match A.
1 0 Output 1 on compare-match A.
1 1 Invert (toggle) output on compare-match A.
Output Select
0 0 No change on compare-match B.
0 1 Output 0 on compare-match B.
1 0 Output 1 on compare-match B.
1 1 Invert (toggle) output on compare-match B.
Timer Overflow Flag
0
Cleared from 1 to 0 when CPU reads OVF = 1,
then writes 0 in OVF.
1
Set to 1 when TCNT changes from H'FF to H'00.
Compare-Match Flag A
0
Cleared from 1 to 0 when:
1. CPU reads CMFA = 1, then writes 0 in CMFA.
2. CMA interrupt is served by the DTC.
Set to 1 when TCNT = TCORA.
1
Compare-Match Flag B
0
Cleared from 1 to 0 when:
1. CPU reads CMFB = 1, then writes 0 in CMFB.
2. CMB interrupt is served by the DTC.
Set to 1 when TCNT = TCORB.
1
*1 Only writing of 0 to clear the flag is enabled.
*2 When all four bits (OS3 to OS0) are cleared to 0, output is disabled.
415
TCORA—Time Constant Register A
H'FED2
TMR
Bit
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
0
Initial value
Read/Write
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
The CMFA bit is set to 1 when TCORA = TCNT.
TCORB—Time Constant Register B
H'FED3
TMR
Bit
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
0
Initial value
Read/Write
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
The CMFB bit is set to 1 when TCORB = TCNT.
TCNT—Timer Counter
H'FED4
TMR
Bit
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
0
Initial value
Read/Write
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
Count value
416
SMR—Serial Mode Register
H'FED8
SCI1
Bit
7
C/A
0
6
5
PE
0
4
O/E
0
3
STOP
0
2
—
1
1
CKS1
0
0
CKS0
0
CHR
0
Initial value
Read/Write
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
—
R/W
R/W
Clock Select
0 0 ø clock
0 1 ø/4 clock
1 0 ø/16 clock
1 1 ø/64 clock
Stop Bit Length
0
1
One stop bit
Two stop bits
Parity Mode
0
1
Even parity
Odd parity
Parity Enable
0
Transmit: No parity bit added.
Receive: Parity bit not checked.
Transmit: Parity bit added.
Receive: Parity bit checked.
1
Character Length
0
1
8-Bit data length
7-Bit data length
Communication Mode
0
1
Asynchronous
Synchronous
417
BRR—Bit Rate Register
H'FED9
SCI1
Bit
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
0
Initial value
Read/Write
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
Constant that determines the baud rate
SCR—Serial Control Register
H'FEDA
SCI1
Bit
7
TIE
0
6
RIE
0
5
TE
0
4
RE
0
3
—
1
2
—
1
1
CKE1
0
0
CKE0
0
Initial value
Read/Write
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
—
—
R/W
R/W
Clock Enable 0
0
1
SCK pin is NOT USED.
SCK pin is used for output.
Clock Enable 1
0
1
Internal clock
External clock, input at SCK pin
Receive Enable
0
1
Receive disabled
Receive enabled
Transmit Enable
0
1
Transmit disabled
Transmit enabled
Receive Interrupt Enable
0
1
Receive interrupt request (RXI) is disabled.
Receive interrupt request (RXI) is enabled.
Transmit Interrupt Enable
0
1
Transmit interrupt request (TXI) is disabled.
Transmit interrupt request (TXI) is enabled.
418
TDR—Transmit Data Register
H'FEDB
SCI1
Bit
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
0
Initial value
Read/Write
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
Transmit data
419
SSR—Serial Status Register
H'FEDC
SCI1
Bit
7
TDRE
1
6
RDRF
0
5
ORER
0
4
FER
0
3
PER
0
2
—
1
1
—
1
0
—
1
Initial value
Read/Write
R/(W)* R/(W)* R/(W)* R/(W)* R/(W)*
—
—
—
Parity Error
0
1
Cleared from 1 to 0 when:
1. CPU reads PER = 1, then writes 0 in PER.
2. The chip is reset or enters a standby mode.
Set to 1 when a parity error occurs (parity of
receive data does not match parity selected by bit).
Framing Error
0
1
Cleared from 1 to 0 when:
1. CPU reads FER = 1, then writes 0 in FER.
2. The chip is reset or enters a standby mode.
Set to 1 when a framing error occurs (stop bit is 0).
Overrun Error
0
Cleared from 1 to 0 when:
1. CPU reads ORER = 1, then writes 0 in ORER.
2. The chip is reset or enters a standby mode.
Set to 1 when an overrun error occurs (next data is
completely received while RDRF bit is set to 1).
1
Receive Data Register Full
0
Cleared from 1 to 0 when:
1. CPU reads RDRF = 1, then writes 0 in RDRF.
2. RDR is read by the DTC.
3. The chip is reset or enters a standby mode.
Set to 1 when one character is received normally and
transferred from RSR to RDR.
1
Transmit Data Register Empty
0
Cleared from 1 to 0 when:
1. CPU reads TDRE = 1, then writes 0 in TDRE.
2. The DTC writes data in TDR.
1
Set to 1 when:
1. The chip is reset or enters a standby mode.
2. Data is transferred from TDR to TSR.
3. CPU reads TDRE = 0, then clears 0 in TE.
* Only writing of 0 to clear the flag is enabled.
420
RDR—Receive Data Register
H'FEDD
SCI1
Bit
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
0
Initial value
Read/Write
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
R
R
R
R
R
R
R
R
Receive data
ADDRn (H)—A/D Data Register n (High)
H'FEE0, H'FEE2, H'FEE4, H'FEE6
(n = A, B, C, D)
A/D
Bit
7
AD9
0
6
AD8
0
5
AD7
0
4
AD6
0
3
AD5
0
2
AD4
0
1
AD3
0
0
AD2
0
Initial value
Read/Write
R
R
R
R
R
R
R
R
Upper 8 bits of 10-bit A/D conversion result
ADDRn (L)—A/D Data Register n (Low)
H'FEE1, H'FEE3, H'FEE5, H'FEE7
(n = A, B, C, D)
A/D
Bit
7
AD1
0
6
AD0
0
5
—
0
4
—
0
3
—
0
2
—
0
1
—
0
0
—
0
Initial value
Read/Write
R
R
R
R
R
R
R
R
Lower 2 bits of 10-bit A/D conversion result
421
ADCSR—A/D Control/Status Register
H'FEE8
A/D
Bit
7
ADF
0
6
ADIE
0
5
ADST
0
4
SCAN
0
3
2
1
0
CKS
0
CH2
0
CH1
0
CH0
0
Initial value
Read/Write
R/(W)*
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
Channel Select
CH2 CH1 CH0 Single Mode Scan Mode
0
0
1
1
0
0
1
1
0
1
0
1
0
1
0
1
AN0
AN1
AN2
AN3
AN4
AN5
AN6
AN7
AN0
AN0, AN1
AN0 to AN2
AN0 to AN3
AN4
AN4, AN5
AN4 to AN6
AN4 to AN7
0
1
Clock Select
0
1
Conversion time = 274 states
Conversion time = 138 states
Scan Mode
0
1
Single mode
Scan mode
A/D Start
0
1
A/D conversion is halted.
1. Single mode: One A/D conversion is performed,
then this bit is automatically cleared to 0.
2. Scan mode: A/D conversion starts and continues
cyclically on all selected channels until 0 is
written in this bit.
A/D Interrupt Enable
0
1
The A/D interrupt request (ADI) is disabled.
The A/D interrupt request (ADI) is enabled.
A/D End Flag
0
Cleared from 1 to 0 when:
1. The chip is reset or enters a standby mode.
2. CPU reads ADF = 1, then writes 0 in ADF.
3. DTC is served by ADI.
1
Set to 1 at the following times:
1. Single mode: at the completion of A/D conversion.
2. Scan mode: when all selected channels have been converted.
* Only writing of 0 to clear the flag is enabled.
422
ADCR—A/D Control Register
H'FEE9
A/D
Bit
7
TRGE
0
6
—
1
5
—
1
4
—
1
3
—
1
2
—
1
1
—
1
0
—
1
Initial value
Read/Write
R/W
Trigger Enable
0
1
The A/D external trigger is disabled.
The A/D external trigger is enabled. A/D conversion
starts on the falling edge of ADTRG.
423
*1
*2
TCSR—Timer Status/Control Register
H'FEEC , H'FEED
WDT
Bit
7
OVF
0
6
WT/IT
0
5
4
—
1
3
—
1
2
CKS2
0
1
0
CKS0
0
TME
0
CKS1
0
Initial value
Read/Write
R/(W)*3
R/W
R/W
—
—
R/W
R/W
R/W
Clock Select
*4
0 0 0 ø/2
(51.2 µs)
0 0 1 ø/32
0 1 0 ø/64
0 1 1 ø/128
1 0 0 ø/256
1 0 1 ø/512
(819.2 µs)
(1.6 ms)
(3.3 ms)
(6.6 ms)
(13.1 ms)
1 1 0 ø/2048 (52.4 ms)
1 1 1 ø/4096 (104.9 ms)
Timer Enable
0 Timer is disabled.
• TCNT is initialized to H'00 and stopped.
1 Timer is enabled.
• TCNT starts incrementing.
• CPU interrupt request is enabled.
Timer Mode Select
0 Interval timer mode (IRQ0 interrupt request)
1 Watchdog timer mode (NMI interrupt request)
Overflow Flag
0 Cleared from 1 to 0 when CPU reads OVF = 1, then wtites 0
in OVF.
1 Set to 1 when TCNT changes from H'FF to H'00.
*1 Read address
*2 Write address
*3 Only writing of 0 to clear the flag is enabled.
*4 Times in parentheses are the times for TCNT to increment from H'00 to H'FF and change to
H'00 again when ø = 10 MHz.
424
TCNT—Timer Counter
H'FEED
WDT
Bit
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
0
Initial value
Read/Write
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
Count value
SMR—Serial Mode Register
H'FEF0
SCI2
Bit
7
C/A
0
6
5
PE
0
4
O/E
0
3
STOP
0
2
—
1
1
CKS1
0
0
CKS0
0
CHR
0
Initial value
Read/Write
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
—
R/W
R/W
Note: Bit functions are the same as for SCI1.
BRR—Bit Rate Register
H'FEF1
SCI2
Bit
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
0
Initial value
Read/Write
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
Note: Bit functions are the same as for SCI1.
SCR—Serial Control Register
H'FEF2
SCI2
Bit
7
TIE
0
6
RIE
0
5
TE
0
4
RE
0
3
—
1
2
—
1
1
CKE1
0
0
CKE0
0
Initial value
Read/Write
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
—
—
R/W
R/W
Note: Bit functions are the same as for SCI1.
425
TDR—Transmit Data Register
H'FEF3
SCI2
Bit
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
0
Initial value
Read/Write
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
Note: Bit functions are the same as for SCI1.
SSR—Serial Status Register
H'FEF4
SCI2
Bit
7
TDRE
0
6
RDRF
0
5
ORER
0
4
FER
0
3
PER
0
2
1
0
Initial value
Read/Write
1
1
1
R/(W)* R/(W)* R/(W)* R/(W)* R/(W)*
—
—
—
Note: Bit functions are the same as for SCI1.
* Only writing of 0 to clear the flag is enabled.
RDR—Receive Data Register
H'FEF5
SCI2
Bit
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
0
Initial value
Read/Write
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
Note: Bit functions are the same as for SCI1.
426
SYSCR1—System Control Register 1
H'FEFC
Port 1
Bit
7
—
1
6
IRQ1E
0
5
4
3
BRLE
0
2
—
1
1
—
1
0
—
1
IRQ0E NMIEG
Initial value
Read/Write
0
0
—
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
—
—
—
Bus Release Enable
0
1
P12 and P13 are I/O ports.
P12 is the BACK output pin and
P13 is the BREQ input pin.
Nonmaskable Interrupt Edge
0
An NMI request is generated on the
falling edge of the NMI pin input.
An NMI request is generated on the
rising edge of the NMI pin input.
1
Interrupt Request 0 Enable
0
1
P15 is an I/O port; IRQ0 input is disabled.
P15 is the IRQ0 input pin.
Interrupt Request 1 Enable
0
1
P16 is an I/O port; IRQ1 input is disabled.
P16 is the IRQ1 input pin.
427
SYSCR2—System Control Register 2
H'FEFD
Port6, Port9
Bit
7
—
1
6
IRQ5E
0
5
IRQ5E
0
4
IRQ5E
0
3
2
1
0
IRQ5E P6PWMEP9PWME P9SCI2E
Initial value
Read/Write
0
0
0
0
—
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
Port 9 SCI2 Enable
0
P92, P93, and P94
cannot be used for
serial communication.
P92, P93, and P94
can be used for
1
serial communication
(see port 9 pin
functions).
Port 9 PWM Enable
0
P92, P93, and P94
cannot be used for
PWM output.
1
P92, P93, and P94
can be used for
PWM output (see port
9 pin functions).
Port 6 PWM Enable
0
P61, P62, and P63
cannot be used for
PWM output.
1
P61, P62, and P63
can be used for
PWM output (see port
6 pin functions).
Interrupt Request 2 Enable
0
1
P60 is not used for IRQ2 signal input.
P60 is used for IRQ2 signal input.
Interrupt Request 3 Enable
0
1
P61 is not used for IRQ3 signal input.
P61 is used for IRQ3 signal input.
Interrupt Request 4 Enable
0
1
P62 is not used for IRQ4 signal input.
P62 is used for IRQ4 signal input.
Interrupt Request 5 Enable
0
1
P63 is not used for IRQ5 signal input.
P63 is used for IRQ5 signal input.
428
P9DDR—Port 9 Data Direction Register
H'FEFE
Port 9
Bit
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
0
P97DDR P96DDR P95DDR P94DDR P93DDR P92DDR P91DDR P90DDR
Initial value
Read/Write
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
W
W
W
W
W
W
W
W
Port 9 Input/Output Selection
0
1
Input port
Output port
P9DR—Port 9 Data Register
H'FEFF
Port 9
Bit
7
P97
0
6
P96
0
5
P95
0
4
P94
0
3
P93
0
2
P92
0
1
P91
0
0
P90
0
Initial value
Read/Write
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
IPRA—Interrupt Priority Register A
H'FF00
INTC
Bit
7
—
0
6
5
4
3
—
0
2
0
1
0
0
Initial value
Read/Write
0
0
0
0
R
R/W
R/W
R/W
R
R/W
R/W
R/W
IRQ0 interrupt priority level (0 to 7)
IRQ1 interrupt priority level (0 to 7)
IPRB—Interrupt Priority Register B H'FF01
INTC
Bit
7
—
0
6
5
4
3
—
0
2
1
0
Initial value
Read/Write
0
0
0
0
0
0
R
R/W
R/W
R/W
R
R/W
R/W
R/W
IRQ2 and IRQ3 interrupt
priority level (0 to 7)
IRQ4 and IRQ5 interrupt
priority level (0 to 7)
429
IPRC—Interrupt Priority Register C
H'FF02
INTC
Bit
7
—
0
6
5
4
3
—
0
2
1
0
Initial value
Read/Write
0
0
0
0
0
0
R
R/W
R/W
R/W
R
R/W
R/W
R/W
16-Bit FRT1 interrupt
priority level (0 to 7)
16-Bit FRT2 interrupt
priority level (0 to 7)
IPRD—Interrupt Priority Register D
H'FF03
INTC
Bit
7
—
0
6
5
4
3
—
0
2
1
0
Initial value
Read/Write
0
0
0
0
0
0
R
R/W
R/W
R/W
R
R/W
R/W
R/W
16-Bit FRT3 interrupt
priority level (0 to 7)
8-Bit timer interrupt
priority level (0 to 7)
IPRE—Interrupt Priority Register E
H'FF04
INTC
Bit
7
—
0
6
5
4
3
—
0
2
1
0
Initial value
Read/Write
0
0
0
0
0
0
R
R/W
R/W
R/W
R
R/W
R/W
R/W
SCI1 interrupt
priority level (0 to 7)
SCI2 interrupt
priority level (0 to 7)
430
IPRF—Interrupt Priority Register F
H'FF05
INTC
Bit
7
—
0
6
5
4
3
—
0
2
1
0
Initial value
Read/Write
0
0
0
0
0
0
R
R/W
R/W
R/W
R
R/W
R/W
R/W
A/D interrupt
priority level (0 to 7)
Unused
DTEA—Data Transfer Enable Register A
H'FF08
INTC
Bit
7
—
0
6
—
5
—
4
3
—
0
2
—
1
—
0
Initial value
Read/Write
0
0
0
0
0
0
R
R/W
R/W
R/W
R
R/W
R/W
R/W
IRQ0
IRQ1
0 Served by CPU
1 Served by DTC
0 Served by CPU
1 Served by DTC
DTEB—Data Transfer Enable Register B
H'FF09
INTC
Bit
7
—
0
6
—
5
4
3
—
0
2
—
1
0
Initial value
Read/Write
0
0
0
0
0
0
R
R/W
R/W
R/W
R
R/W
R/W
R/W
IRQ2
IRQ4
0 Served by CPU
1 Served by DTC
0 Served by CPU
1 Served by DTC
IRQ3
IRQ5
0 Served by CPU
1 Served by DTC
0 Served by CPU
1 Served by DTC
431
DTEC—Data Transfer Enable Register C
H'FF0A
INTC
Bit
7
—
0
6
5
0
4
3
—
0
2
1
0
0
Initial value
Read/Write
0
0
0
0
R
R/W
R/W
R/W
R
R/W
R/W
R/W
(FRT1)
(FRT2)
ICI2
0 Served by CPU
1 Served by DTC
OCIA2
0 Served by CPU
1 Served by DTC
OCIB2
0 Served by CPU
1 Served by DTC
ICI1
0 Served by CPU
1 Served by DTC
OCIA1
0 Served by CPU
1 Served by DTC
OCIB1
0 Served by CPU
1 Served by DTC
432
DTED—Data Transfer Enable Register D
H'FF0B
INTC
Bit
7
—
0
6
5
0
4
3
—
0
2
—
1
0
Initial value
Read/Write
0
0
0
0
0
R
R/W
R/W
R/W
R
R/W
R/W
R/W
(FRT3)
(8-Bit timer)
CMIA
ICI3
0 Served by CPU
1 Served by DTC
0 Served by CPU
1 Served by DTC
CMIB
0 Served by CPU
1 Served by DTC
OCIA3
0 Served by CPU
1 Served by DTC
OCIB3
0 Served by CPU
1 Served by DTC
433
DTEE—Data Transfer Enable Register E
H'FF0C
INTC
Bit
7
—
0
6
5
4
—
3
—
0
2
1
0
Initial value
Read/Write
0
0
0
0
0
0
R
R/W
R/W
R/W
R
R/W
R/W
R/W
(SCI1)
(SCI2)
RXI1
RXI2
0 Served by CPU
1 Served by DTC
0 Served by CPU
1 Served by DTC
TXI1
TXI2
0 Served by CPU
1 Served by DTC
0 Served by CPU
1 Served by DTC
DTEF—Data Transfer Enable Register F
H'FF0D
INTC
Bit
7
—
0
6
—
5
—
4
3
—
0
2
1
—
0
—
—
0
Initial value
Read/Write
0
0
0
0
0
R
R/W
R/W
R/W
R
R/W
R/W
R/W
(A/D converter)
ADI
0 Served by CPU
1 Served by DTC
434
WCR—Wait-State Control Register
H'FF10
WSC
Bit
7
—
1
6
—
1
5
—
1
4
—
1
3
2
1
WC1
1
0
WC0
1
WMS1 WMS0
Initial value
Read/Write
0
0
—
—
—
—
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
Wait Count 1 and 0
0 0 No wait states (TW)
are inserted.
0 1 1 Wait states are inserted.
1 0 2 Wait states are inserted.
1 1 3 Wait state is inserted.
Wait Mode Select 1 and 0
0 0 Programmable wait mode
0 1 No wait states are inserted,
regardless of the wait count.
1 0 Pin wait mode
1 1 Pin auto-wait mode
RAMCR—RAM Control Register
H'FF11
RAM
Bit
7
RAME
1
6
—
1
5
—
1
4
—
1
3
—
1
2
—
1
1
—
1
0
—
1
Initial value
Read/Write
R/W
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
RAM Enable
0 On-chip RAM is disabled.
1 On-chip RAM is enabled.
435
MDCR—Mode Control Register
H'FF12
Bit
7
—
1
6
—
1
5
—
0
4
—
0
3
—
0
2
MDS2
—*
1
MDS1
—*
0
MDS0
—*
Initial value
Read/Write
—
—
—
—
—
R
R
R
Mode Select
Value input at mode pins
* Initialized according to the inputs at pins MD2, MD1, and MD0.
SBYCR—Software Standby Control Register
H'FF13
Bit
7
SSBY
0
6
—
1
5
—
1
4
—
1
3
—
1
2
—
1
1
—
1
0
—
1
Initial value
Read/Write
R/W
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
Software Standby
0 SLEEP instruction causes transition to sleep mode.
1 SLEEP instruction causes transition to software standby mode.
RSTCSR—Reset Status/Control Register
H'FF15
WDT
Bit
7
6
5
—
1
4
—
1
3
—
1
2
—
1
1
—
1
0
—
1
WRST RSTOE
Initial value
Read/Write
0
0
R/(W)*
R/W
—
—
—
—
—
—
Reset Output Enable
0 The reset signal is not output externally.
1 The reset signal is output externally.
Watchdog Timer Reset
0 Cleared from 1 to 0 by software, or by a Low input at the RES pin.
1 Set to 1 when TCNT overflows and a reset signal is generated.
* Software can write a 0 in bit 7 to clear the flag but cannot write a 1.
436
Appendix C I/O Port Schematic Diagrams
C.1 Schematic Diagram of Port 1
Figure C-1 (a) to (g) gives a schematic view of the port 1 input/output circuits.
Reset
WP1D: Write to P1DDR
RP1: Read Port 1
R
Q
D
P10 DDR
C
WP1D
ø
P10
RP1
Figure C-1 (a) Schematic Diagram of Port 1, Pin P10
Table C-1 (a) Port 1 Port Read (Pin P10)
Setting
DDR = 0
DDR = 1
Port Read Data
Pin value
ø
Reset
WP1D: Write to P1DDR
RP1: Read Port 1
R
D
Q
P11 DDR
C
WP1D
E
P11
RP1
Figure C-1 (b) Schematic Diagram of Port 1, Pin P11
437
Table C-1 (b) Port 1 Port Read (Pin P11)
Setting
DDR = 0
DDR = 1
Port Read Data
Pin value
E
WP1D: Write to P1DDR
WP1: Write to Port 1
RP1: Read Port 1
Reset
R
D
Q
P12 DDR
C
WP1D
Reset
R
Q
D
P12
P12 DR
System control
register 1, bit 3
C
WP1
Mode 1, 2, 3,
or 4
BRLE
Q
BACK
RP1
Figure C-1 (c) Schematic Diagram of Port 1, Pin P12
Table C-1 (c) Port 1 Port Read (Pin P12)
Mode
Setting
Port Read Data
DR value
1, 2, 3, 4
BRLE = 1
BRLE = 0
DDR = 0
DDR = 1
Pin value
DR value
7
DDR = 0
DDR = 1
Pin value
DR value
438
WP1D: Write to P1DDR
WP1: Write to Port 1
RP1: Read Port 1
Reset
R
D
Q
P13 DDR
C
WP1D
Reset
R
P13
Q
D
P13 DR
System control
register 1, bit 3
C
WP1
Mode 1, 2, 3,
or 4
BRLE
Q
RP1
BREQ to CPU
Figure C-1 (d) Schematic Diagram of Port 1, Pin P13
Table C-1 (d) Port 1 Port Read (Pin P13)
Mode
Setting
Port Read Data
Pin value
1, 2, 3, 4
BRLE = 1
BRLE = 0
DDR = 0
DDR = 1
Pin value
DR value
7
DDR = 0
DDR = 1
Pin value
DR value
439
WP1D: Write to P1DDR
WP1: Write to Port 1
RP1: Read Port 1
Reset
R
D
Q
P14 DDR
C
WP1D
Reset
R
P14
Q
D
P14 DR
Wait-state control
register, bit 3
C
WP1
Mode 1, 2, 3,
or 4
WMS1
Q
RP1
WAIT to CPU
Figure C-1 (e) Schematic Diagram of Port 1, Pin P14
Table C-1 (e) Port 1 Port Read (Pin P14)
Mode
Setting
Port Read Data
Pin value
1, 2, 3, 4
WMS 1 = 1
WMS 1 = 0
DDR = 0
DDR = 1
Pin value
DR value
7
DDR = 0
DDR = 1
Pin value
DR value
440
Reset
WP1D: Write to P1DDR
WP1: Write to Port 1
RP1: Read Port 1
R
D
Q
P15DDR
C
WP1D
Reset
R
System control
register 1, bit 5
P15
Q
D
P15 DR
IRQ0E
C
WP1
Q
RP1
IRQ0 to CPU
Figure C-1 (f) Schematic Diagram of Port 1, Pin P15
Table C-1 (f) Port 1 Port Read (Pin P15)
Setting
Port Read Data
IRQ0E = 1
IRQ0E = 0
Pin value
DDR = 0
DDR = 1
Pin value
DR value
441
Reset
WP1D: Write to P1DDR
WP1: Write to Port 1
RP1: Read Port 1
R
D
Q
P16DDR
C
WP1D
Reset
R
P16
Q
D
System control
register 1, bit 6
P16 DR
C
IRQ0E
WP1
Q
A/D control
register, bit 7
TRGE
RP1
Q
IRQ1 to CPU
Falling edge
detector
ADTRG to A/D converter
Figure C-1 (g) Schematic Diagram of Port 1, Pin P16
Table C-1 (g) Port 1 Port Read (Pin P16)
Setting
Port Read Data
TRGE or IRQ1E = 1
TRGE and IRQ1E = 0 DDR = 0
DDR = 1
Pin value
Pin value
DR value
442
WP1D: Write to P1DDR
WP1: Write to Port 1
RP1: Read Port 1
Reset
R
D
Q
P17 DDR
C
WP1D
Reset
R
Q
D
P17
P17 DR
C
8-Bit timer module
WP1
Output enable
8-Bit timer output
RP1
Figure C-1 (h) Schematic Diagram of Port 1, Pin P17
Table C-1 (h) Port 1 Port Read (Pin P17)
Setting
Port Read Data
8-bit timer output value
Pin value
8-bit timer output enable
8-bit timer
DDR = 0
DDR = 1
output disable
DR value
443
C.2 Schematic Diagram of Port 2
Figure C-2 gives a schematic view of the port 2 input/output circuits.
Mode 1, 2, 3, or 4
Software standby
WP2D: Write to P2DDR
WP2: Write to Port 2
RP2: Read Port 2
Bus release
Reset
n:
0, 1, 2, 3, or 4
S
R
Q
D
P2nDDR
C
WP2D
Reset
Mode 7
R
Q
D
P2n
P2nDR
C
WP2
Mode 1, 2, 3, or 4
RP2
Bus control signals
Figure C-2 Schematic Diagram of Port 2
Table C-2 Port 2 Port Read
Mode
1, 2, 3, 4
7
Port Read Data
DR value
Pin value
DR value
DDR = 0
DDR = 1
444
C.3 Schematic Diagram of Port 3
Figure C-3 gives a schematic view of the port 3 input/output circuits.
Data write
WP3D: Write to P3DDR
WP3: Write to Port 3
RP3: Read Port 3
Mode 1, 2, 3, or 4
Reset
n:
0 to 7
R
Q
D
P3nDDR
C
Mode 7
WP3
Reset
R
Mode 1, 2, 3,
or 4
P3n
Q
D
Mode 7
P3nDR
C
WP3D
Mode 1, 2, 3, or 4
RP3
External address read
Figure C-3 Schematic Diagram of Port 3
Table C-3 Port 3 Port Read
Mode
1, 2, 3, 4
7
Port Read Data
Always reads 1
Pin value
DDR = 0
DDR = 1
DR value
445
C.4 Schematic Diagram of Port 4
Figure C-4 gives a schematic view of the port 4 input/output circuits.
Mode 1, 2, 3, or 4
Software standby
WP4D: Write to P4DDR
WP4: Write to Port 4
RP4: Read Port 4
Bus release
Reset
n:
0 to 7
S
R
Q
D
P4nDDR
C
WP4D
Reset
Mode 7
R
Q
D
P4n
P4nDR
C
WP4
Mode 1, 2, 3, or 4
RP4
Figure C-4 Schematic Diagram of Port 4
Table C-4 Port 4 Port Read
Mode
1, 2, 3, 4
7
Port Read Data
DR value
Pin value
DR value
DDR = 0
DDR = 1
446
C.5 Schematic Diagram of Port 5
Figure C-5 gives a schematic view of the port 5 input/output circuits.
Mode 1, 2, 3, or 4
Software standby
WP5D: Write to P5DDR
WP5: Write to Port 5
RP5: Read Port 5
Mode 1 or 3
Bus release
Reset
MOS
pull-up
n:
0 to 7
S
R
Q
D
P5nDDR
C
WP5D
Reset
Mode 7
R
Q
D
P5n
P5nDR
C
WP5
Mode 1, 2, 3, or 4
RP5
Figure C-5 Schematic Diagram of Port 5
Table C-5 Port 5 Port Read
Mode
Port Read Data
DR value
1, 3
2, 4, 7 DDR = 0Pin value
DDR = 1 DR value
447
C.6 Schematic Diagram of Port 6
Figure C-6 gives a schematic view of the port 6 input/output circuits.
Mode 3 or 4
WP6D: Write to P6DDR
WP6: Write to Port 6
RP6: Read Port 6
Mode 3
Reset
Bus release
Software
standby
MOS
pull-up
S
R
Q
D
P60DDR
C
WP6D
Reset
Mode 1, 2, or 7
R
Q
D
P60
Mode 4
Mode 3
P60DR
C
System control
register 2, Bit 3
WP6
Mode 3 or 4
IRQ2E
Q
RP6
IRQ2 to CPU
Falling edge
detector
Figure C-6 (a) Schematic Diagram of Port 6, Pin P60
Table C-6 (a) Port 6 Port Read (Pin P60)
Mode
Port Read Data
3
DR value
Pin value
DR value
Pin value
1, 2, 4, 7 IRQ2E = 0 DDR = 0
DDR = 1
IRQ2E = 1
448
Mode 3 or 4
WP6D: Write to P6DDR
WP6: Write to Port 6
RP6: Read Port 6
Mode 3
Reset
Bus release
Software
standby
MOS
pull-up
n:
1, 2, or 3
S
R
Q
D
P6nDDR
C
WP6D
Reset
Mode 3, 4
R
Q
D
P6n
P6nDR
PWM timer module
C
PWM1, PWM2,
or PWM3
output enable
WP6
PWM1, PWM2,
or PWM3 output
System control
register 2
Mode 4
P6PWME Bit 2
Q
RP6
IRQ3E to
IRQ5E
Q
Bit 6, 5, or 4
Mode 3
IRQ3 , IRQ4, IRQ5 to CPU
Falling edge
detector
Figure C-6 (b) Schematic Diagram of Port 6, Pin P61 to P63
Table C-6 (b) Port 6 Port Read (Pin P61 to P63)
Mode and Setting
Port Read Data
DR value
3
4
DDR = 0
DDR = 1
IRQnE = 1
Pin value
DR value
1, 2, 7
Pin value
IRQnE = 0 P6PWME = 1 PWM output enable PWM output value
Other than the DDR = 0
above settings DDR = 1
Pin value
DR value
449
C.7 Schematic Diagram of Port 7
Figure C-7 (a) to (e) gives a schematic view of the port 7 input/output circuits.
WP7D: Write to P7DDR
WP7: Write to Port 7
RP7: Read Port 7
Reset
R1
Q
D
P70 DDR
C
WP7D
Reset
R
Q
D
P70
P70 DR
C
WP7
8-Bit timer module
RP7
Input clock
Figure C-7 (a) Schematic Diagram of Port 7, Pin P70
Table C-7 (a) Port 7 Port Read (Pin P70)
Setting
DDR = 0
DDR = 1
Port Read Data
Pin value
DR value
450
Reset
R1
WP7D: Write to P7DDR
WP7: Write to Port 7
RP7: Read Port 7
Q
D
P7n DDR
C
n:
1 or 2
WP7D
Reset
R
Q
D
P7n
P7n DR
C
Free-running timer module
WP7
Output enable
Output Compare signal
RP7
Counter clock output
Figure C-7 (b) Schematic Diagram of Port 7, Pins P71 and P72
Table C-7 (b) Port 7 Port Read (Pins P71, P72)
Setting
DDR = 0
DDR = 1
Port Read Data
Pin value
DR value
451
WP7D: Write to P7DDR
WP7: Write to Port 7
RP7: Read Port 7
Reset
R1
Q
D
P73 DDR
C
WP7D
Reset
R
Q
D
P73
P73 DR
C
WP7
RP7
8-Bit timer module
Counter reset input
Free-running timer module
Input capture signal
Figure C-7 (c) Schematic Diagram of Port 7, Pin P73
Table C-7 (c) Port 7 Port Read (Pin P73)
Setting
DDR = 0
DDR = 1
Port Read Data
Pin value
DR value
452
Reset
WP7D: Write to P7DDR
WP7: Write to Port 7
RP7: Read Port 7
R
D
Q
n:
4, 5 or 6
P7n DDR
C
WP7D
Reset
R
Q
D
P7n
P7n DR
C
Free-running timer module
WP7
RP7
Input capture signal
Figure C-7 (d) Schematic Diagram of Port 7, Pins P74, P75 and P76
Table C-7 (d) Port 7 Port Read (Pins P74 to P76)
Setting
Port Read Data
Output enable
Output disable
Output compare output value
Pin value
DDR = 0
DDR = 1
DR value
453
WP7D: Write to P7DDR
WP7: Write to Port 7
RP7: Read Port 7
Reset
R1
D
Q
P77 DDR
C
WP7D
Reset
R
Q
D
P77
P77 DR
C
Free-running timer module
WP7
Output enable
Output compare output
RP7
Figure C-7 (e) Schematic Diagram of Port 7, Pin P77
Table C-7 (e) Port 7 Port Read (Pin P77)
Setting
Port Read Data
Output enable
Output disable
Output compare output value
Pin value
DDR = 0
DDR = 1
DR value
454
C.8 Schematic Diagram of Port 8
Figure C-8 gives a schematic view of the port 8 input circuits.
RP8: Read Port 8
n: 0 to 7
RP8
P8n
A/D converter module
Input multiplexer
Figure C-8 Schematic Diagram of Port 8
455
C.9 Schematic Diagram of Port 9
Figure C-9 (a) to (g) gives a schematic view of the port 9 input/output circuits.
Reset
WP9D: Write to P9DDR
WP9: Write to Port 9
RP9: Read Port 9
R
Q
D
n:
0 or 1
P9nDDR
C
WP9D
Reset
R
Q
D
P9n
P9nDR
C
Free-running timer module
WP9
Output enable
Output compare output
RP9
Figure C-9 (a) Schematic Diagram of Port 9, Pins P90 and P91
Table C-9 (a) Port 9 Port Read (Pins P90, P91)
Setting
Port Read Data
Output compare output value
Pin value
Output enable
Output disable
DDR = 0
DDR = 1
DR value
456
Reset
WP9D: Write to P9DDR
WP9: Write to Port 9
RP9: Read Port 9
R
D
Q
P92DDR
C
WP9D
Reset
R
Q
D
P92
P92DR
C
WP9
PWM timer module
PWM output enable
PWM1 output
Bit 1 System control register 2
P9PWME
Q
Bit 0 System control register 2
P9SCI2E
Q
RP9
SCI2 output enable
Serial transmit data
SCI2 module
Figure C-9 (b) Schematic Diagram of Port 9, Pin P92
Table C-9 (b) Port 9 Port Read (Pin P92)
Setting
Port Read Data (Pin P92)
Serial transmit data value
Pin value
Port 9
SCI2
Port 9
PWM
SCI2 output enable
SCI2 output disable DDR = 0
DDR = 1
enable
Port 9
SCI2
disable
Port 9
PWM
DR value
PWM output enable
PWM output disable DDR = 0
DDR = 1
PWM1 output value
Pin value
disable
Port 9
SCI2
enalbe
Port 9
PWM
DR value
PWM and SCI2
DDR = 0
Pin value
output either enabled DDR = 1
or disabled
DR value
disable
Port 9
SCI2
disable
Port 9
PWM
DDR = 0
Pin value
DR value
DDR = 1
enable
enable
457
Reset
WP9D: Write to P9DDR
WP9: Write to Port 9
RP9: Read Port 9
R
D
Q
P93DDR
C
WP9D
Reset
R
Q
D
P93
P93DR
C
WP9
PWM timer module
PWM output enable
PWM2 output
Bit 1 System control register 2
P9PWME
Q
Bit 0 System control register 2
P9SCI2E
Q
RP9
SCI2 input enable
Serial receive data
SCI2 module
Figure C-9 (c) Schematic Diagram of Port 9, Pin P93
Table C-9 (c) Port 9 Port Read (Pin P93)
Setting
Port Read Data (Pin P93)
Serial receive data value
Pin value
Port 9
SCI2
Port 9
PWM
SCI2 input enable
SCI2 input disable
DDR = 0
DDR = 1
enable
Port 9
SCI2
disable
Port 9
PWM
DR value
PWM output enable
PWM2 output value
Pin value
PWM output disable DDR = 0
DDR = 1
disable
Port 9
SCI2
enalbe
Port 9
PWM
DR value
PWM and SCI2
DDR = 0
Pin value
input either enabled DDR = 1
or disabled
DR value
disable
Port 9
SCI2
disable
Port 9
PWM
DDR = 0
Pin value
DR value
DDR = 1
enable
enable
458
Reset
WP9D: Write to P9DDR
WP9: Write to Port 9
RP9: Read Port 9
R
D
Q
P94DDR
C
WP9D
Reset
R
Q
D
P94
P94DR
C
WP9
PWM timer module
PWM output enable
PWM3 output
Bit 1 System control register 2
P9PWME
Q
Bit 0 System control register 2
P9SCI2E
Q
RP9
Clock output enable
Clock output
Clock input enable
Clock input
SCI2 module
Figure C-9 (d) Schematic Diagram of Port 9, Pin P94
Table C-9 (d) Port 9 Port Read (Pin P94)
Setting
Port Read Data (Pin P94)
Input clock value
Port 9
SCI2
Port 9
PWM
Clock input enable
Clock output enable
Output clock value
enable
disable
Clock input and output disable
DDR = 0 Pin value
DDR = 1 DR value
Clock input, clock output, and PWM DDR = 0 Pin value
Port 9
SCI2
Port 9
PWM
output enabled or disabled
DDR = 1 DR value
enable
Port 9
SCI2
enalbe
PWM output enable
PWM output disable
PWM3 output value
DDR = 0 Pin value
DDR = 1 DR value
disable
Port 9
SCI2
Port 9
PWM
Clock input, clock output, and PWM DDR = 0 Pin value
output either enabled or disabled DDR = 1 DR value
disable
disable
459
Reset
WP9D: Write to P9DDR
WP9: Write to Port 9
RP9: Read Port 9
R
D
Q
P95DDR
C
WP9D
Reset
R
Q
D
P95
P95DR
C
SCI1 module
WP9
Output enable
Serial transfer data
RP9
Figure C-9 (e) Schematic Diagram of Port 9, Pin P95
Table C-9 (e) Port 9 Port Read (Pin P95)
Setting
Port Read Data
Output enable
Output disable
Serial transfer data
Pin value
DDR = 0
DDR = 1
DR value
460
Reset
WP9D: Write to P9DDR
WP9: Write to Port 9
RP9: Read Port 9
R
D
Q
P96DDR
C
WP9D
P96
Reset
R
Q
D
P96DR
C
WP9
SCI1 module
RP9
Input enable
Serial receive data
Figure C-9 (f) Schematic Diagram of Port 9, Pin P96
Table C-9 (f) Port 9 Port Read (Pin P96)
Setting
Port Read Data
Output enable
Output disable
Serial transfer data
Pin value
DDR = 0
DDR = 1
DR value
461
Reset
WP9D: Write to P9DDR
WP9: Write to Port 9
RP9: Read Port 9
R
D
Q
P97DDR
C
WP9D
Reset
R
Q
D
P97
SCI1 module
P97DR
C
Clock input enable
WP9
Clock output enable
Clock output
RP9
Clock input
Figure C-9 (g) Schematic Diagram of Port 9, Pin P97
Table C-9 (g) Port 9 Port Read (Pin P97)
Setting
Port Read Data
Input clock value
Output clock value
Pin value
Clock input enable
Clock output enable
Clock input/output
enable
DDR = 0
DDR = 1
DR value
462
Appendix D Memory Maps
Table D-1 H8/534 Memory Map
Expanded Minimum Mode
Expanded Maximum Mode
Single-Chip Mode
Mode 7
Mode 1
Mode 2
Mode 3
Mode 4
H'0000
H'0000
H'00000
H'00000
H'0000
Vector tables
Vector tables
Vector tables
Vector tables
Vector tables
H'00FF
H'0100
H'00FF
H'0100
H'001FF
H'00200
H'001FF
H'00200
H'00FF
H'0100
External
memory
On-chip ROM
32 kbytes
External
memory
On-chip ROM
32 kbytes
On-chip ROM
32 kbytes
H'7FFF
H'8000
H'07FFF
H'08000
H'7FFF
H'F680
External
memory
External
memory
Page 0
Page 0
Page 0
Page 0
Page 0
H'F67F
H'F680
H'F67F
H'F680
H'0F67F
H'0F680
H'0F67F
H'0F680
On-chip RAM
2 kbytes
On-chip RAM
2 kbytes
On-chip RAM
2 kbytes
On-chip RAM
2 kbytes
On-chip RAM
2 kbytes
H'FE7F
H'FE80
H'FE7F
H'FE80
H'0FE7F
H'0FE80
H'0FE7F
H'0FE80
H'FE7F
H'FE80
Register field
384 bytes
Register field
384 bytes
Register field
384 bytes
Register field
384 bytes
Register field
384 bytes
H'FFFF
H'FFFF
H'0FFFF
H'10000
H'0FFFF
H'10000
H'FFFF
Page 1
Page 1
H'1FFFF
H'1FFFF
External
memory
External
memory
H'F0000
H'FFFFF
H'F0000
H'FFFFF
Page 15
Page 15
Table D-2 H8/536 Memory Map
Expanded Minimum Mode
Expanded Maximum Mode
Mode 3 Mode 4
Single-Chip Mode
Mode 7
Mode 1
Mode 2 (Preliminary)
H'0000
H'0000
H'00000
H'00000
H'0000
Vector tables
Vector tables
Vector tables
Vector tables
Vector tables
H'00FF
H'0100
H'00FF
H'0100
H'001FF
H'00200
H'001FF
H'00200
H'00FF
H'0100
External
memory
On-chip ROM
60 kbytes
External
memory
On-chip ROM
62 kbytes
On-chip ROM
62 kbytes
H'EE7F
Page 0 H'EE80
Page 0
Page 0
Page 0
Page 0
(Reserved)*
H'F67F
H'F680
H'F67F
H'F680
H'0F67F
H'0F680
H'0F67F
H'0F680
H'F67F
H'F680
On-chip RAM
2 kbytes
On-chip RAM
2 kbytes
On-chip RAM
2 kbytes
On-chip RAM
2 kbytes
On-chip RAM
2 kbytes
H'FE7F
H'FE80
H'FE7F
H'FE80
H'0FE7F
H'0FE80
H'0FE7F
H'0FE80
H'FE7F
H'FE80
Register field
384 bytes
Register field
384 bytes
Register field
384 bytes
Register field
384 bytes
Register field
384 bytes
H'FFFF
H'FFFF
H'0FFFF
H'10000
H'0FFFF
H'10000
H'FFFF
* : Reserved for future use as
external address space
Page 1
Page 1
H'1FFFF
H'1FFFF
External
memory
External
memory
H'F0000
H'FFFFF
H'F0000
H'FFFFF
Page 15
Page 15
Appendix E Pin States
E.1 Port State of Each Pin State
Table E-1 Port State
Hardware
Standby
Mode
Port
Software
Bus
Program Execution
Pin Name
Mode Reset
Standby Mode Sleep Mode
Release Mode State (Normal Operation)
Input/output port or
P17 to P12
1
TMO, IRQ1, IRQ0 2
control signal Input/
WAIT, BREQ,
BACK
3
4
7
1
2
3
4
7
1
2
3
4
7
1
2
3
4
7
1
2
3
4
7
1
2
3
4
7
T
T
T
keep*1
keep*3
keep*4
output
keep*2
(DDR = 1)
ø = H
keep
——
Input/output port
(DDR = 1)
P11/E
P10/ø
(DDR = 1)
(DDR = 1)
Clock
Clock output Clock output Clock output
output
E = L
(DDR = 0)
T
(DDR = 0)
(DDR = 0)
Input port
(DDR = 0)
T
T
——
P24 to P20
WR, RD, DS,
R/W, AS
WR, RD, DS,
R/W, AS
H
T
T
T
H
T
keep
T
keep
T
——
T
Input/output port
D7 to D0
P37 to P30
D7 to D0
T
T
T
keep
T
keep
L
——
T
Input/output port
A7 to A0
P47 to P40
A7 to A0
L
T
L
T
L
T
keep
T
keep
——
T
Input/output port
A15 to A8
P57 to P50
A15 to A8
L
T*6
T
T*6
T
Address bus or input port
A15 to A8
*5
L
T*6
keep
T*6
——
Address bus or input port
Input/output port
(Continued on next page)
*5
keep
465
Table E-1 Port State (cont)
Hardware
Standby
Mode
Port
Software
Bus
Program Execution
Pin Name
Mode Reset
1
Standby Mode Sleep Mode
Release Mode State (Normal Operation)
P63 to P60
A19 to A16
keep
keep
keep
Input/output port
2
3
4
7
1
2
3
4
7
1
2
3
4
7
1
2
3
4
7
T
L
T
T
T
T
T
T
L
T
A19 to A16
T*6
keep
T*6
——
Address bus or input port
Input/output port
*5
keep
P77 to P70
P87 to P80
P97 to P90
T
T
T
keep*2
keep
keep
Input/output port
T
T
T
Input port
keep*2
keep
keep
Input/output port
H:
L:
T:
High logic level
Low logic level
High-Impedance state
keep: Input ports are in the high-impedance state. Output ports hold their previous output values.
If DDR = 0 and DR = 1 in ports 5 and 6, the MOS pull-ups remain on.
*1 The on-chip supporting modules are reset, so P17 becomes an input or output port controlled by
DDR and DR. If P12 is programmed for BACK output, it goes to the high-impedance state.
*2 The on-chip supporting modules are reset, so these pins become input or output ports controlled
by DDR and DR.
*3 BREQ can be received. BACK is High.
*4 BACK is Low.
*5 Address outputs are Low. Input ports are in the high-impedance state, or the MOS pull-ups are
on.
*6 Pins used as input ports with the MOS pull-up on (DDR = 0, DR = 1) do not go to the high-
impedance state. The MOS pull-up remains on.
466
Table E-2 MOS Pull-Up State
Port
Mode
Reset
Hardware Standby Mode
Other Operating States*
P57 to P50
A15 to A8
1
2
3
4
7
1
2
3
4
7
OFF
OFF
OFF
ON/OFF
OFF
ON/OFF
P63 to P60
A19 to A16
OFF
OFF
ON/OFF
OFF
ON/OFF
Notes
OFF: The MOS pull-up is always OFF.
ON/OFF: The MOS pull-up is on when DDR = 0 and DR = 1, and is off at other times.
* Including software standby mode.
467
E.2 Pin States in Reset State
1. Mode 1
Figure E-1 shows how the pin states change when the RES pin goes Low during external memory
access in mode 1.
As soon as RES goes Low, all ports are initialized to the input (high-impedance) state. The AS,
DS, RD, and WR signals all go High. The data bus (D7 to D0) is placed in the high-impedance
state.
The address bus and the R/W signal are initialized 1.5 ø clock periods after the Low state of the
RES pin is sampled. All address bus signals are made Low. The R/W signal is made High.
The clock output pins P10/ø and P11/E are initialized 0.5 ø clock periods after the Low state of the
RES pin is sampled. Both pins are initialized to the output state.
468
External memory access
T1
T2
T3
P10 / ø*
RES
Internal reset signal
H’0000
A15 to A0
R/W
AS, RD and DS (read)
WR and DS (write)
High impedance
High impedance
D7 to D0 (write)
I/O ports
* The dotted line indicates that P1 /ø is an input port if the corresponding DDR bit is 0,
but a clock output pin if the DDR bit is 1.
Figure E-1 Reset during Memory Access (Mode 1)
2. Mode 2
Figure E-4 shows how the pin states change when the RES pin goes Low during external memory
access in mode 2.
As soon as RES goes Low, all ports are initialized to the input (high-impedance) state. The AS,
DS, RD, and WR signals all go High. The data bus (D7 to D0) is placed in the high-impedance
state. Pins P57/A15 to P50/A8 of the address bus are initialized as input ports.
469
Pins A7 to A0 of the address bus and the R/W signal are initialized 1.5 ø clock periods after the
Low state of the RES pin is sampled. Pins A7 to A0 are made Low. The R/W signal is made High.
The clock output pins P10/ø and P11/E are initialized 0.5 ø clock periods after the Low state of the
RES pin is sampled. Both pins are initialized to the output state.
External memory access
T1
T2
T3
P10 / ø*
RES
Internal reset signal
H’00
A7 to A0
High impedance
P57 /A15 to P50/A8
R/W
AS, RD and DS (read)
WR and DS (write)
High impedance
High impedance
D7 to D0 (write)
I/O ports
* The dotted line indicates that P10 /ø is an input port if the corresponding DDR bit is 0,
but a clock output pin if the DDR bit is 1.
Figure E-2 Reset during Memory Access (Mode 2)
470
3. Mode 3
Figure E-4 shows how the pin states change when the RES pin goes Low during external memory
access in mode 3.
As soon as RES goes Low, all ports are initialized to the input (high-impedance) state. The AS,
DS, RD, and WR signals all go High. The data bus (D7 to D0) is placed in the high-impedance
state.
The address bus and the R/W signal are initialized 1.5 ø clock periods after the Low state of the
RES pin is sampled. All address bus signals are made Low. The R/W signal is made High.
The clock output pins P10/ø and P11/E are initialized 0.5 ø clock periods after the Low state of the
RES pin is sampled. Both pins are initialized to the output state.
471
External memory
access
T1
T2
P10 / ø*
RES
Internal reset signal
A19 to A0
R/W
H’00000
AS, RD and DS (read)
WR and DS (write)
D7 to D0 (write)
High impedance
High impedance
I/O ports
* The dotted line indicates that P10 /ø is an input port if the corresponding DDR bit is 0,
but a clock output pin if the DDR bit is 1.
Figure E-3 Reset during Memory Access (Mode 3)
4. Mode 4
Figure E-4 shows how the pin states change when the RES pin goes Low during external memory
access in mode 4.
As soon as RES goes Low, all ports are initialized to the input (high-impedance) state. The AS,
DS, RD, and WR signals all go High. The data bus (D7 to D0) is placed in the high-impedance
state. Pins P57/A15 to P50/A8 of the address bus and pins P63/A19 to P60/A16 of the page address
bus are initialized as input ports.
472
Pins A7 to A0 of the address bus and the R/W signal are initialized 1.5 ø clock periods after the
Low state of the RES pin is sampled. Pins A7 to A0 are made Low. The R/W signal is made
High.
The clock output pins P10/ø and P11/E are initialized 0.5 ø clock periods after the Low state of the
RES pin is sampled. Both pins are initialized to the output state.
T1
T2
T3
T1
P10 / ø*
RES
Internal reset signal
H’00
A7 to A0
High impedance
P63 /A19 to P60/A16 and
P57 /A15 to P50/A8
R/W
AS, RD and DS (read)
WR and DS (write)
High impedance
High impedance
D7 to D0 (write)
I/O ports
* The dotted line indicates that P10 /ø is an input port if the corresponding DDR bit is 0,
but a clock output pin if the DDR bit is 1.
Figure E-4 Reset during Memory Access (Mode 4)
473
5. Mode 7
Figure E-5 shows how the pin states change when the RES pin goes Low in mode 7.
As soon as RES goes Low, all ports are initialized to the input (high-impedance) state.
The clock output pins P10/ø and P11/E are initialized 0.5 ø clock periods after the Low state of the
RES pin is sampled. Both pins are initialized to the output state.
P10 / ø*
P10 / E*
RES
Internal reset signal
High impedance
I/O ports
* The dotted line indicates that P10 /ø and P10 /E are input ports if the corresponding DDR
bit is 0, but clock output pins if the DDR bit is 1.
Figure E-5 Reset during Memory Access (Mode 7)
474
Appendix F Timing of Transition to and Recovery from
Hardware Standby Mode
Timing of Transition to Hardware Standby Mode
(1) To retain RAM contents when the RAME bit in RAMCR is set to 1, drive the RES signal line
low 10 system clock cycles before the STBY signal, at a time when RAM is not being
accessed.
STBY
t1 ≥ 10 tcyc
t2 ≥ 0 ns
RES
(2) When the RAME bit in RAMCR is cleared to 0, or when it is not necessary to retain RAM
contents, RES need not be driven low as in (1).
Timing of Exit from Hardware Standby Mode
Drive the RES signal line low approximately 100 ns before the rise of the STBY signal.
STBY
t ≤ 100 ns
t
OSC
RES
475
Appendix G Package Dimensions
Figure G-1 shows the dimensions of the CP-84 package. Figure G-2 shows the dimensions of the
CG-84 package. Figure G-3 shows the dimensions of the FP-80A package.
30.23 ± 0.12
29.28
74
54
75
53
84
1
11
33
32
12
0.75
0.42 ± 0.10
28.20 ± 0.50
1.27
28.20 ± 0.50
0.10
Figure G-1 Package Dimensions (CP-84)
29.21 ± 0.38
12
11
32
33
53
1
84
75
74
54
1.27
2.16
1.27
Figure G-2 Package Dimensions (CG-84)
476
17.2 ± 0.3
14.0
60
41
40
21
61
80
1
20
0.30 ±0.10
0.12
M
1.60
0 – 5 °
0.10
0.80 ± 0.30
Figure G-3 Package Dimensions (FP-80A)
14.0 ± 0.2
12.0
60
41
61
80
40
21
1
20
0.20 ± 0.05
M
0.10
1.00
0 – 5°
0.10
0.50 ± 0.10
Figure G-4 Package Dimensions (TFP-80C)
477
相关型号：
©2020 ICPDF网 联系我们和版权申明